JP2018196766A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that enhances an interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of kinds of images can execute: a first performance in which a first image is superimposed on a first decorative pattern, and displayed, a second image with the same content as the first image is superimposed on a second decorative pattern, and displayed, and a third image with the same content as the first image is superimposed on a third decorative pattern, and displayed; and a second performance in which, after the first performance, a fourth image with a different content from the first image is superimposed on the first image, and displayed, a fifth image with the same content as the fourth image is superimposed on the second image, and displayed, and a sixth image with the same content as the fourth image is superimposed on the third image, and displayed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 72

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that can execute a display effect using a display device when a game ball is won at a start opening (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In such a gaming machine, a display effect using a character image, a design, or the like can be performed.

JP, 2006-202930, A JP 2006-198339 A JP, 2006-182376, A

  However, even with the above-described gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to improve the interest of games.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and the invention can be implemented as the following application examples. Note that the reference numerals in parentheses and supplementary explanations in this column show the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to help understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention at all. .

[Application Example 1]
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first decorative design,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative design,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third decorative design,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image having the same content as the first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third image having the same content as the first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a fourth image having a different content from the first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a fifth image having the same content as the fourth image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a sixth image having the same content as the fourth image,
The first image is displayed so as to overlap the first decorative symbol, the second image is displayed superimposed on the second decorative symbol, and the third image is superimposed on the third decorative symbol. And the first effect displayed
After the first effect, the fourth image is displayed to overlap the first image, the fifth image is displayed to overlap the second image, and the third image is displayed to the third image. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing a second effect in which six images are displayed in an overlapping manner.

[Application Example 2]
A gaming machine described in application example 1,
In the first effect, after the second decorative symbol is displayed so as to overlap the third image, the second decorative symbol is shifted to a state where the second decorative symbol does not overlap the third image. To play.

[Application Example 3]
A gaming machine according to Application Example 1 or Application Example 2,
In the first effect, the second decorative symbol is displayed so as to overlap the first image.

[Application Example 4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Example 1 to Application Example 3,
In the second effect, the fifth image is displayed so as to overlap the fourth image, and the fifth image is displayed so as to overlap the sixth image.

[Application Example 5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Example 1 to Application Example 4,
In the second effect, the fourth image is displayed so as to be partly visible so that a part of the first image is visible, and the part of the second image is visible. 5. A gaming machine, wherein the fifth image is displayed in an overlapping manner, and the sixth image is displayed in an overlapping manner so that a part of the third image is visible.

[Application Example 6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Example 1 to Application Example 5,
In the second effect, the combination of the first decorative design, the second decorative design, and the third decorative design suggests a jackpot, the fourth image, and the fifth And the sixth image suggest a type of jackpot.

  According to the present invention, the interest of games can be improved.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is an enlarged view of display devices. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure by the side of the main control board of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure by the side of the sub control board of a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating main ROM and main RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating a sub ROM and a sub RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating the various random numbers used in a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating determination table T1-T4. It is explanatory drawing of the big hit classification determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a non-time-short state. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time-short state. It is explanatory drawing of the electric Chu open | release pattern determination table T7. It is explanatory drawing of the big winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. It is explanatory drawing of V opening-and-closing member opening pattern determination table T9. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of a main side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process. It is a flowchart of the special figure 1 pre-determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of jackpot determination processing. It is a 1st flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a 2nd flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol confirmation process. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of a game state reset process. It is a flowchart of a special electric accessory process. It is a flowchart of V opening-and-closing member operation processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of a V area sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the number of reserved balls. It is a flowchart which shows a sub control main process. It is a flowchart of a sub-side timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of prefetch effect determination processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of a prior determination information storage area. It is explanatory drawing of the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flowchart of a change production start process. It is explanatory drawing of basic production pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of the chance up effect pattern determination table T53. It is a flowchart of the process during fluctuation production. It is a flowchart of a display control process. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 1st movable combination. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 2nd movable accessory 15. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design fluctuation effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design fluctuation effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design fluctuation effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design fluctuation effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design target effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design target effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design target effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design target effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design superimposed effect A at the time of reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design superimposed effect B at the time of reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design superimposed effect C at the time of reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design superimposed effect D at the time of reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the character appearance effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the character appearance effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the character appearance effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the character appearance effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot symbol arrangement | sequence display effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot symbol arrangement | sequence display effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot symbol arrangement | sequence display effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot symbol arrangement | sequence display effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design jackpot suggestion effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design jackpot suggestion effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design jackpot suggestion effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design jackpot suggestion effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration symbol superimposition production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration symbol superimposition production B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration symbol superimposition production | presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration symbol superimposition production | presentation D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating jackpot background display effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating jackpot background display effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot background display effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot background display effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the multiple timer effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the multiple timer effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the multiple timer effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the multiple timer effect D. FIG. It is a figure for explaining timer production A. It is a figure for explaining timer production B. It is a diagram for explaining a timer effect C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a timer effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer speed effect A. FIG. It is a figure for explaining timer speed production B. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer speed effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer speed effect D. FIG. It is a figure for explaining timer count production A. It is a figure for explaining timer count production B. It is a figure for explaining timer count production C. It is a figure for explaining timer count production D. It is a figure for demonstrating movable accessory timer effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating movable accessory timer effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating movable accessory timer effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating movable accessory timer effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating icon selection production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating icon selection production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating icon selection production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating icon selection production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect A during a fluctuation | variation. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect B during a fluctuation | variation. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect C in fluctuation | variation. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation D during a fluctuation | variation. It is a figure for demonstrating the character display effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the character display effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the character display effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the character display effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating on-hold continuous chain suggestion production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating on-hold continuous chain suggestion production B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating on-hold continuous chain suggestion production C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating on-hold continuous chain suggestion production D. FIG. It is a figure for explaining error display production A. It is a figure for demonstrating the error display effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the error display effect C. FIG. It is a figure for explaining error display production D. It is a figure for demonstrating the predetermined information display effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the predetermined information display effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the predetermined information display effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the predetermined information display effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon movement effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon movement effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon movement effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon movement effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon superimposition effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the pending | holding icon superimposition effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the pending | holding icon superimposition effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon superimposition effect D. It is a 1st figure for demonstrating a hold special display effect. It is a 2nd figure for demonstrating a hold special display effect. It is a 3rd figure for demonstrating a holding | maintenance special display effect. It is a 4th figure for demonstrating a hold special display effect. It is a figure for demonstrating operation means image display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation means image display effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation means image display effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation means image display effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production A during probability change. It is a figure for demonstrating the production B during probability change. It is a figure for demonstrating the production C during probability change. It is a figure for demonstrating the production D during probability change. It is a figure for demonstrating the battle production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the battle production B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the battle production C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the battle production D. FIG.

<First Embodiment>
1. FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described in accordance with the left-right direction viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 1. The forward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the backward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

  The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that launches a game ball based on a player's launch operation and pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player when the game ball wins a specific winning device. is there. The gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, and the gaming board 2 is attached inside the gaming machine frame 50. In addition to the front frame (front frame portion) 53, the gaming machine frame 50 includes an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer portion of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertical rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 61, and a surplus ball tray (lower plate). ) 62, an effect button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a movable frame body 600. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the opening.

  The handle 60 is disposed at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and fires a game ball with a firing strength corresponding to the rotation angle. The hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is disposed below the hitting ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit arranged in the vicinity of the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of an effect executed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by a player during a performance performed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation portion provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64, that is, at the end portion of the sword handle, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of performance performed as the game progresses. The The sword member 64 is configured to be capable of executing two different operations: a first operation for pushing the entire sword member 64 downward and a second operation for pushing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is disposed around the opening of the front frame 53 and performs a light emission effect during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53, and perform sound effects during a game or the like. The movable frame body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper part of the front frame 53. The frame movable body 600 is configured to be displaceable from a stored state stored inside the front frame 53 to an exposed state protruding above the front frame 53.

  The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration body 10, a fixed prize device (hews) 19, and an ordinary variable prize device (electrical chew) 22. A gate (through chucker) 28, a first big prize device (first attacker) 31, a second big prize device (second attacker) 36, a general prize opening 27 (ordinary prize opening 27), and a general prize. A mouth 29 (ordinary winning opening 29), an out mouth 16, and display devices 40 are provided.

  The game area 3 is an area where game balls launched by the operation of the handle 60 flow down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game balls are provided. The rail member 4 is disposed at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is disposed on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3.

  The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and includes a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes an effect symbol display area in which effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a hold image display in which hold images 9A and 9B are displayed. And a reserved digest image display area in which the reserved digest image 9C is displayed. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing the hold and are also called hold icons 9A and 9B. The reserved digest image 9C is an image representing the hold, and is also referred to as the hold image 9C or the hold icon 9C.

  The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. In the left symbol display area, a left effect symbol (left decoration symbol) 8L is displayed. In the middle symbol display area, a middle effect symbol (medium decorative symbol) 8C is displayed. A right effect design (right decoration design) 8R is displayed in the right design display area. The production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are constituted by a plurality of symbols representing numbers from “1” to “9”, for example. The variation display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is synchronized with the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which will be described later. The image display device 7 includes a first special symbol displayed by a first special symbol display 41a and a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and a first special symbol and a special symbol display 41b which are displayed in the left, middle and right symbol display areas. The result of variable display of the second special symbol (the jackpot lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

  For example, when winning a jackpot, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a doublet such as “777”. If it is out of place, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a variation such as “637”. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Moreover, as an aspect of the variable display of effect symbols, an aspect of scrolling up and down may be used, or an aspect other than that. Depending on each lottery result, what combination of effect symbols is to be stopped and displayed is not limited to the above and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is also referred to as “effect symbol variation effect”, “decorative symbol variation effect”, or simply “variation effect”. In addition, this decorative design variation effect counts an effect in a period (also referred to as a special symbol variation period) from when the special symbol starts to change until it stops, as one variation effect (one cycle variation effect). Therefore, even if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the period from when the special symbol starts to fluctuate until it stops, the temporary stop effect is included in the decorative symbol variation effect.

  The image display device 7 can display, on the display screen 7a, a jackpot effect performed in parallel with a jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demonstration effect for waiting for a customer, and the like in addition to the effect symbol variation effect. In the effect symbol variation effect, effect images such as background images and character images may be displayed in addition to the effect symbols. Further, the image display device 7 can identify that the special symbol is changing in addition to the effect symbol, or can indicate the lottery result of the special symbol (fourth symbol, not shown). May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

  The hold image display area displays a first hold display area for displaying a hold image 9A in accordance with a stored number of first special figure hold described later, and a hold image 9B in accordance with a stored number of second special figure hold described later. And a second hold display area. The number of stored first special figure holds displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a (to be described later) and the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b by displaying the hold images 9A and 9B. Can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The reserved digest image display area includes a reserved digest display area for displaying the reserved digest image 9C. The reserved digested image 9C corresponds to the currently changing effect design (effects design 8L, 8C, 8R) on the display screen 7a. Depending on the display of the reserved digested image 9C, the first special diagram reserved or the second special diagram reserved. Can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Below the image display device 7, a movable first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14) that is a movable so-called gimmick is provided. The 1st movable accessory 14 is comprised so that a plate-shaped member can move up and down. The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at a retracted position below the display device 7 (FIG. 1), moves upward (moves forward) from the retracted position, and stops at the advanced position (FIG. 16). be able to. The first movable accessory 14 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

  The center decoration body 10 is arranged near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7. The center decorative body 10 is provided with a second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15) which is a movable so-called gimmick. A stage portion 11 is formed at the lower portion of the center decorative body 10. The stage unit 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage unit 11 to a first starting port 20 described later. A warp portion 12 is provided on the lower left side of the center decorative body 10. The warp unit 12 includes an inlet part through which game balls flow in and an outlet part through which game balls flow out, and causes the game balls that flow in from the inlet part to flow out from the outlet part to the stage unit 11.

  The fixed winning device (jaw) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and the first starting port (first starting winning port, first winning ball) in which the ease of entering the game ball does not always change. Mouth, fixed start port) 20. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for the first special symbol lottery (big hit lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for obtaining a jackpot random number and determining a jackpot.

  The normal variable winning device (electrical chew) 22 is disposed below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3 and includes a second starting port (second starting winning port, second winning port, variable starting port) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second start port 21 is an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (big hit lottery). The electric chew 22 includes a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). When the movable member 23 is in the open state, the second starting port 21 can enter a game ball. It should be noted that the electric chew 22 should be easier to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It may be possible to enter the ball.

  The gate (through chucker) 28 is disposed above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3 and is configured to allow a game ball to pass therethrough. The passing of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for obtaining a normal symbol random number (per random number) and determining a hit.

  Here, the “special symbol lottery” means that when a game ball wins the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, a random number for determining a special symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is determined in advance. In addition, it is a process of determining whether or not a big hit by comparing with a value corresponding to “big hit”. The result of the “hit” lottery is not immediately notified to the player, and a special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later. When the time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game is performed in which the effect symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. This symbol matching game more effectively notifies the player of the jackpot lottery result.

  The “ordinary symbol lottery” means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for determining a normal symbol is obtained, and the obtained random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined “hit”. This is a process for determining whether or not it is a hit. The lottery result of the normal symbol is not necessarily notified immediately after the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the normal symbol display unit 42, which will be described later, displays the variation of the normal symbol, and the predetermined variation When the time has elapsed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed (lit or extinguished), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

  The first grand prize winning device (first attacker, first special variable prize winning device) 31 is arranged on the upper right side of the first start opening 20 in the game area 3, and , A V region 39, a non-V region 70, and a V opening / closing member 71. The first big prize opening 30 includes an opening / closing member (first special prize opening opening / closing member) 32 that allows or inhibits the reception of the game ball by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by a first big prize opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). The first big prize opening 30 allows a game ball to enter when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state.

  The first grand prize winning device 31 includes a V region (specific region) 39, a V region sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V region (non-specific region) 70, and a non-V region sensor 70a (FIG. 3). The first big prize opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), a V opening / closing member 71, and a V opening / closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3) are provided. The V region (specific region) 39 and the non-V region (non-specific region) 70 are configured as regions through which the game ball that has passed through the first big winning opening 30 can pass inside the first big winning device 31. . The first grand prize opening sensor 30 a is disposed upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 and detects the winning of a game ball to the first big prize opening 30. The V area sensor 39 a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball to the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70 a is disposed in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70. The V opening / closing member 71 distributes the game balls that have passed through the first big winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71. The V opening / closing member 71 is configured to rotate and rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2). When the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to play the game ball. When the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is de-energized, the first state is assigned to the V region 39 (rotation state), and the second state (stop state) is assigned to the non-V region 70 at the origin. . Note that the V opening / closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game balls that have passed through the first grand prize opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. You may comprise so that it may move to the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. FIG. That is, when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is in a retracted state (first state) in which the game balls are distributed to the V area 39, and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the advancing state is allocated. You may comprise so that it may become (2nd state). In the gaming machine 1, the passing of the game ball to the V area 39 is an opportunity to shift to a high probability state described later. That is, the V region 39 is a probability changing operation port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a probability variation operating port. The first grand prize winning device 31 of the present embodiment further includes a first big prize winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first big prize winning device 31. The first grand prize winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V region 39 and the non-V region 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed the V region sensor 39a or the non-V region sensor 70a.

  The second grand prize winning device (second attacker, second special variable prize winning device) 36 is arranged on the upper right side of the first grand prize winning port 30 in the game area 3, and the second grand prize winning port (second special prize winning port) 35. It has. The second big prize opening 35 includes an opening / closing member (second special prize opening opening / closing member, movable member) 37 that inhibits or allows the reception of the game ball by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by a second big prize opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). The second grand prize opening 35 allows a game ball to enter when the opening / closing member 37 is in an open state.

The general winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3. The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges game balls that have not won any of the game holes 3 to the outside of the game area 3. The display devices 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. Details of the display devices 40 will be described later.
The general winning opening 29 is located in the lower right part of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first big winning opening 30.

  The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. The method of hitting a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called “left-handed”. On the other hand, a method of hitting a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is referred to as “right hit”. In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for winning at the first start port 20 by left-handed. On the other hand, it is configured to be able to aim for passing to the gate 28 by right-handed hitting, winning in the second starting port 21, the first major winning port 30, and the second major winning port 35.

  FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the display device 40. The display 40 includes a first special symbol indicator 41a, a second special symbol indicator 41b, a normal symbol indicator 42, a first special symbol reservation indicator 43a, and a second special symbol indicator 43b. , A general-purpose hold display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays the normal symbol. The first special figure hold indicator 43a displays the stored number of operation hold (first special figure hold) of the first special symbol indicator 41a. The second special figure hold indicator 43b displays the stored number of operation hold (second special figure hold) of the second special symbol display 41b. The general figure hold display 44 displays the number of stored operation hold (common figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is performed in response to a winning of a game ball at the first start port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed in response to a winning of a game ball at the second start port 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as “special symbols”. The first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as “special symbol display 41”. Further, the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b are collectively referred to as a “special figure hold indicator 43”.

  The special symbol display 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (variable display) and then stops and displays the lottery based on winning in the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 (lottery per special symbol). , The result of the jackpot lottery). The special symbol that is stopped and displayed (the special symbol that is derived and displayed as the display result of the stop symbol and variable display) is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol lottery. When the stop symbol is a special symbol (a jackpot symbol) having a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first big prize opening 30 is displayed in an open pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol that is displayed in a stopped state (the type of the winning jackpot). Alternatively, a special game (a jackpot game) is performed in which the second grand prize winning opening 35 is opened. In addition, the opening pattern of the special winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

  The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery per special symbol depending on the lighting mode. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of multiple types of jackpots to be described later), 1, 2 from the left such as “○ ●●● ○○ ●●” (○: lit, ●: unlit) , The jackpot symbol in which the fifth and sixth LEDs are lit is displayed. In the case of losing, a losing pattern in which only the rightmost LED is lit, such as “●●●●●●● ○”, is displayed. You may employ | adopt the aspect which light-extinguishes all LED as a loss pattern. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is varied (variably displayed) over a predetermined variation time. For example, each LED may be lit so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped (lighted display in a specific mode), and can be any lighting mode. For example, in the variation display mode, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously.

  In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball wins (wins) in the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, various random number values (numerical information) such as jackpot random numbers acquired for the win are obtained. Then, it is temporarily stored in the special figure storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if the winning is to the first start opening 20, it is stored in the first special figure holding storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as the first special figure holding, and if the winning is to the second starting opening 21. The second special figure hold is stored in the second special figure hold storage area 85b (FIG. 5). There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are four. The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is digested when a special symbol based on the special figure hold can be variably displayed. “Digestion of special figure hold” refers to determining a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure hold and executing variable display of a special symbol for indicating the determination result. Accordingly, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the execution of the variable symbol variable display is performed. Even if there is a win during the middle or the execution of the special game, it is possible to reserve the jackpot lottery right for the win up to a predetermined number. The number of special figure hold is displayed on the special figure hold display 43. The first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b are each composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure holding | maintenance display device 43 displays the number of special figure holding | maintenance by lighting LED for the number of special figure holding | maintenance.

  The variable display of the normal symbol is performed with the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 as an opportunity. The normal symbol display 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by variably displaying the normal symbol (variation display) and then displaying the stop symbol. A normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (a normal symbol that is derived and displayed as a variable display result) is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by a normal symbol lottery. If the normal stop symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (a normal symbol of a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal winning symbol), an auxiliary game that opens the second start port 21 to an open pattern according to the current game state Is done. The opening pattern of the second start port 21 will be described later.

  The normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the lighting mode. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal winning symbol in which both LEDs are lit is displayed as “◯◯” (◯: lit, ●: unlit). When the lottery result is a loss, a normal lose symbol in which only the right LED is lit is displayed as “● ○”. You may employ | adopt the aspect which light-extinguishes all LED as a normal lose pattern. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol is changed over a predetermined fluctuation time. For example, both LEDs may light up alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped (lighted display in a specific mode), and can be any lighting mode. For example, in the variation display mode, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously.

  In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes to the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (per random number) acquired for the passage is stored as a general figure hold in the general figure hold storage area 86 (FIG. 5). Once memorized. There is an upper limit to the number of pending map holds that can be stored in the reserved map storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The general map reservation stored in the general map storage area 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the general map storage becomes possible. The digestion of the general symbol hold means that a normal symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to the general symbol hold is determined and variable symbol display for displaying the determination result is executed. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable symbol display of the normal symbol or the auxiliary game. Even if there is, the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage can be reserved up to the predetermined number. The number of the general map hold is displayed on the general map hold display 44. The common figure hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of common figure holds by turning on the LEDs by the number of common figure holds.

2. Electrical configuration of gaming machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and a voice control board 106 ( 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that performs control related to game profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transition, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub control board 90 is an effect control board that performs control related to an effect executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. The sub-control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90.

  The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the program stored in the main ROM 83. Contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data to / from other boards via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from the sensors and outputs signals to the solenoids. Sensors connected via the relay board 88 include a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first large winning port sensor 30a, a second large winning port sensor 35a, and a V region. The sensor 39a, the non-V area sensor 70a, and the normal winning a prize port sensors 27a and 29a are illustrated. Examples of solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric Chu solenoid 24, the first big prize opening solenoid 33, the second big prize winning solenoid 38, and the V opening / closing member solenoid 73. The first start port sensor 20 a is provided inside the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has won the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21 a is provided inside the second start port 21 and detects a game ball that has won the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28 a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first big prize opening sensor 30 a is provided inside the first big prize opening 30 and detects a game ball won in the first big prize opening 30. The second grand prize opening sensor 35 a is provided inside the second big prize opening 35 and detects a game ball that has won the second big prize opening 35. The V area sensor 39 a is provided in the V area 39 inside the first big winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70 a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first big winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70. The normal winning port sensor 27 a is provided inside the normal winning port 27 and detects a game ball won in the normal winning port 27. The normal winning opening sensor 29 a detects a game ball that has passed through the normal winning opening 29. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first big prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening / closing member 32 of the first big prize winning device 31. The second big prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening / closing member 37 of the second big prize winning device 36. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71 of the first big prize winning device 31.

  Indicators 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special figure hold display 43a, a second special figure hold display 43b, and a general figure hold. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

  A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected with a prize ball payout device 120, a rental ball payout device 130, and a card unit 135, and a launch device 112 is connected via a launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out a prize ball. Based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81, the payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 to pay out the prize ball. The prize ball to be paid out is detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball payout device 130 pays out a rental ball. Based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1, the payout control board 110 drives the ball rental motor 131 of the ball rental payout device 130 to pay out the balls. The paid-out ball rental is detected by the ball rental sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information related to ball rental based on information such as the inserted prepaid card. The firing device 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a firing motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a firing volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launch device 112 detects the touch of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114, and detects the rotation amount of the handle 60 with the launch volume 115. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

  A sub control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that can only transmit signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means (for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed.

  The sub-control board 90 includes an effect control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the effect of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to the program. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a sub ROM 93 that stores a program for controlling an effect as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub ROM 93 that executes a program stored in the sub ROM 93. CPU92. Details of the data stored in the sub ROM 93 and details of the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. An image control board 100, an audio control board 106, a lamp control board 107, and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input / output circuit 95.

  The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100 and controls display of the image display device 7 (first image display device 7A and second image display device 7B) according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In addition to a program for controlling display, the ROM 103 stores still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. And image data such as a background image are stored. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for developing image data. The CPU 102 executes a program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to perform display control of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91 and performs display control based on the read image data.

  A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106, and the production control microcomputer 91 receives voice, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on a command received from the main control board 80. Etc. are output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may be mounted with a CPU, and may cause the CPU to execute voice control based on commands. Furthermore, the voice control board 106 may be mounted with a ROM, and may store acoustic data in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute sound control. Furthermore, acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

  The lamp control board 107 is connected to the frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15, and controls them. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs lighting control of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. In other words, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (also referred to as data for determining lighting / extinction, light emission color, or lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5, and the light emission pattern. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The first movable accessory 14 is a movable so-called gimmick provided below the image display device 7. The second movable accessory 15 is a movable so-called gimmick provided in the center decorative body 10. The production control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (driving data) for determining the operation modes of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15, and the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 14 are determined according to the operation pattern data. 2 Control the operation of the movable accessory 15. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a CPU, and may cause the CPU to perform lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable accessories 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and the ROM may store data relating to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern.

  An effect button detection switch 63a and a movable frame body 600 are connected to the relay board 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the frame movable body 600 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper part of the front frame 53 (FIG. 1). The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of the movable frame body 600, and controls the operation of the movable frame body 600 according to the operation pattern data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The relay board 108 includes a select button detection switch that detects that the select button 68 (FIG. 1) is pressed, a touch sensor that is provided on the front frame 53 and outputs a detection signal when a human body comes into contact. It may be connected.

3. Data structure of gaming machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub-ROM 93. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub-RAM 94.

  The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5A) includes a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. A determination table T6, an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7, a special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8, and a V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in a main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

  The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5B) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure hold storage area 85, and a general figure hold storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which a command output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side is set in the main control main process (described later). A variation start command, a variation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a gaming state designation command, a V passing command, a customer waiting command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the gaming state are set in the main control main process (described later), and a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a first prize flag, a second prize flag, A V flag, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area in which a counter used in main control main processing (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a probability variation counter, a time reduction counter, and the like are set therein. The special operation status set area 84d is an area in which a status in special operation processing described later is set. The special figure hold storage area 85 includes a first special figure hold storage area 85a in which the first special figure hold is stored, and a second special figure hold storage area 85b in which the second special figure hold is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, random number groups (holding information) such as random numbers per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation, respectively. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storage are provided. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, a first random number group (hold information) corresponding to each of the first, second, third, and fourth special figure reservations is stored. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The general figure hold storage area 86 stores a random value group (hold information) such as a normal symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the general figure hold. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. In addition to the above area, the main RAM 84 is set with a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and driving data for driving the movable accessories 14, 15 and the movable frame body 600. A drive data buffer is provided.

  The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a pre-reading effect pattern determination table T51, a basic effect pattern determination table T52, a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. . These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in a sub-control main process (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

  The sub RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a prior determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) for storing commands input from the main control unit side in the sub-control main process (described later), and includes a preliminary determination command, a reserved ball number command, a change start command, a change Stored are a stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a gaming state designation command, a V passing command, a customer waiting command, and the like. The effect command set area 94b is an area (in which a command output from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 is set in the sub control main process (described later) An output buffer), a change effect start command, a pre-change end command, a change effect end command, an opening effect start command, a round effect start command, an ending effect start command, and the like are set. The advance determination information storage area 94c stores advance determination information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which counters used in the sub-control main process (described later) are set, and is a random number counter, a first special figure hold effect counter, a second special figure hold effect counter, and a general figure hold effect counter. A probability variation effect counter, a time reduction effect counter, and the like are set.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 7A shows random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 7B shows random numbers acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. Yes. The game control microcomputer 81 acquires “big hit random number”, “big hit type random number”, “reach random number”, “variable pattern random number”, and “normal symbol random number (hit random number)” at a timing described later. It is configured as follows. The “big hit random number” is a random number used for a lottery (big hit determination) as to whether or not a big hit, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The “big hit type random number” is a random number used for the lottery (big hit type determination) of the winning big hit type, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “reach random number” is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate reach in the effect design variation effect indicating the result when the jackpot determination is lost, and a value in the range of 0 to 127 Take. Reach is a state where there is only one effect symbol that is variably displayed among a plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols), and depending on which symbol the effect symbol that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of “7 ↓ 7”) that is a combination of effect symbols indicating a big win. Note that the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if they are shaking in the display screen 7a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including a variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “ordinary symbol random number (per random number)” is used for a lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) as to whether or not an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 is performed. The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 255. The “big hit random number”, the “big hit type random number”, the “reach random number”, and the “variation pattern random number” are acquired based on the ball entering the starting port (the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21). The random value group acquired based on the entrance to the first start port 20 is stored in the first special figure storage area 85a, and the random value group acquired based on the entrance to the second start port 21 is It is stored in the second special figure storage area 85b. The “normal symbol random number (per random number)” is acquired based on the passage through the gate 28. The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the general symbol hold storage area 86.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a “prefetch effect random number” and a “chance up random number” at a timing described later. The “prefetch effect random number” is a random number used to determine the prefetch effect at the time of the change effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “chance up random number” is a random number used to determine the chance up effect at the time of the fluctuation effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “prefetching effect random number” is acquired based on the output of the prior determination command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub RAM 94. The “chance-up random number” is acquired based on the output of the change start command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8A shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8C shows the diagram. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8D shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

  The jackpot determination table T1 indicates whether or not the jackpot random number (any one of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to “big hit” or “lost” in the main control main process (described later). It is a table referred to for determination. In FIG. 8A, in the “normal probability state”, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 164”, it is determined as “jackpot”, and the jackpot random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 164” (165 to 65535). ")" Indicates that it is determined to be "lost". In the “high probability state”, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 649”, it is determined as “big hit”, and when the jackpot random number value is “a numerical value other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)”. Is determined to be “lost”. The contents of “normal probability state” and “high probability state” will be described later.

  In the reach determination table T2, in the game control microcomputer 81, the acquired reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) corresponds to “with reach” or “without reach” in the main control main process (described later). It is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not. In FIG. 8B, when the reach random number value is “0 to 13” in the “non-time-short state”, it is determined that “there is a reach”, and the reach random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 13” (14 to 13). 127) "indicates that it is determined that" no reach ". Further, when the reach random number value is “0 to 5” in the “short time state”, it is determined that “there is present”, and when the reach random number value is “a numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)”. Indicates that “no reach” is determined. The contents of “time saving state” and “non-time saving state” will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the time-short state is less likely to reach the lost time than the non-time-short state. This is to increase the digestion speed of special figure reservation by selecting more reachless loses with a short variation time in the short time state.

  The normal symbol hit determination table T3 corresponds to whether the acquired normal symbol random number value (any of 0 to 255) corresponds to “win” or “losing” in the main control main process (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81. It is a table referred to for determining whether to do. In FIG. 8C, when the normal symbol random number value is “0 to 2” in the “non-time-short state”, it is determined as “winning”, and the normal symbol random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 2” (3 ˜255) ”indicates that it is determined to be“ lost ”. Further, in the “time saving state”, when the normal symbol random number value is “0 to 254”, it is determined as “winning”, and when the normal symbol random number value is “a numerical value other than 0 to 254 (255)”. It is shown that it is determined as “losing”.

  The normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 determines how many seconds the variation time of the normal symbol depends on the game state (non-short-time state or short-time state) in the main control main process (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81. This is a table that is referred to. In FIG. 8D, the normal symbol variation time is determined to be “30 seconds” in the “non-short-time state”, and the normal symbol variation time is determined to be “1 second” in the “time-short state”. It has been shown.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. According to the jackpot type determination table T5, in the main control main process (described later), the game control microcomputer 81 obtains the jackpot type random number (any one of 0 to 127) according to the “big hit type” and “special symbol type”. It is a table referred to in order to determine “type”. In FIG. 9, when the lottery of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is won, if the jackpot type random number value is “0 to 24”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16RV planned passing jackpot”, One stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined as “big hit symbol 1”. When the jackpot type random number value is “25 to 49”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16RV scheduled jackpot”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be “jackpot symbol 2”. When the jackpot type random number value is “50 to 55”, the jackpot type is determined as “16R (substantially 15R) V passing planned jackpot”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined as “jackpot symbol 3”. When the jackpot type random number value is “56 to 67”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16R (substantial 13R) V passing planned jackpot”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be “jackpot symbol 4”. When the jackpot type random number value is “68 to 127”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be “jackpot symbol 5”. On the other hand, when winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), when the jackpot type random number value is “0 to 82”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16RV passing planned jackpot”, The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined as “big hit symbol 1”. When the jackpot type random number value is “83 to 127”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be “jackpot symbol 5”. By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the “special figure stop symbol data” corresponding to the special figure stop symbol, the “opening (OP) command”, the “round designation command”, the “ending (ED)” of the special game Command "can also be specified. For specific contents of “16RV planned jackpot”, “16R (substantial 15R) V planned jackpot”, “16R (substantial 13R) V planned jackpot” and “16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot” It will be described later.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 in the non-short-time state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 in the time-short state. The variation pattern determination table T6 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine a variation pattern according to the acquired variation pattern random value (0 to 127) in the main control main process (described later). . In FIG. 10, for example, the first start port 20 is won in the non-time-saving state, it is determined as “losing” in the jackpot determination table T1, “reach” is determined in the reach determination table T2, and the number of held balls is “1”. When the random number value of the variation pattern is “0 to 60”, the variation pattern is determined to be “P7”. In FIG. 11, for example, the second start port 21 is won in the short-time state, the jackpot determination table T1 is determined to be “big jackpot”, the jackpot type determination table T5 is determined to be “16RV expected jackpot”, and the fluctuation pattern random value Is “0 to 10”, it is indicated that the variation pattern is determined to be “P61”. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, if the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. In addition, when reaching reach, it is also determined whether the reach is normal reach or super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach production that has a longer variation time after reach than normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) having different fluctuation times are set. In SP1 to SP3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of pseudo-continuations.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew release pattern determination table T7. The electric chew release pattern determination table T7 is used for the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the open pattern of the electric chew 22 in accordance with the game state (non-short time state or short time state) in the main control main process (described later). It is a table to be referenced. In FIG. 12 (A), the open pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined as “open pattern 11” in the “non-short-time state”, and the open pattern is determined as “open pattern 12” in the “short-time state”. It has been shown. FIG. 12B shows the contents of the opening pattern 11 and the opening pattern 12. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once and the opening time is 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 22 is opened at an opening time of 3 seconds, an opening time of 2.0 seconds, and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains, when a predetermined number of game balls have been won (the prescribed number of winnings, a maximum of 10).

  FIG. 13 is a view for explaining the special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. In the main winning opening opening pattern determination table T8, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the main control main processing (described later) according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in accordance with the first main winning opening 30 and the second main winning opening. It is a table referred to in order to determine 35 open patterns. In FIG. 13A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 is “open pattern 21”. When the special symbol stop symbol data is “14H”, “15H”, “22H”, the release pattern is determined as “open pattern 22”, and when the special symbol stop symbol data is “13H”, the release is performed. The pattern is determined to be “open pattern 23”. FIG. 13B shows the contents of the opening pattern 21, the opening pattern 22, and the opening pattern 23. In the opening pattern 21, the first grand opening 30 is opened (long opening) for the 1st to 13th and 15th R, and the opening time is 29.5 seconds. The second grand prize winning opening 35 having an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, the first grand opening 30 is opened (long opening) for the 1st to 13th rounds with the number of times of opening once and the opening time of 29.5 seconds, and the number of times of opening once for the 14th and 16th rounds. The second big prize opening 35 is opened (short-open) for 0.1 seconds, and the first big prize opening 30 is opened (short-open) for the number of times of opening once and for 0.1 seconds at the 15th round. . In the opening pattern 23, the first grand prize opening 30 is opened (long opening) for the 1st to 13th and 15th R, with the number of times of opening once and the opening time of 29.5 seconds. The second grand prize opening 35 is opened (short opening) for 0.1 seconds, and at the 16th round, the second big prize opening 35 is opened (long opening) with the number of times of opening once and an opening time of 29.5 seconds. . However, the opening of the first grand prize opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35 may be performed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have been won (a predetermined number of prizes, a maximum of nine). Closed.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used for the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main process (described later). It is a table to be referenced. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the open pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is determined as “open pattern 31”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined. When the data is “13H”, the release pattern is determined as “open pattern 32”, and when the special figure stop symbol data is “14H”, the release pattern is determined as “open pattern 33”, and the special figure stop symbol data is When “15H” or “22H”, the open pattern is determined to be “open pattern 34”. FIG. 14B shows the contents of the opening pattern 31, the opening pattern 32, the opening pattern 33, and the opening pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds when the first winning prize 30 is received at the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth rounds. At the 10th and 12th R, when the first winning prize 30 is won, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 second, and when the second winning is received, the opening time The V opening / closing member 71 is opened long for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, when the first winning prize 30 is received at the second, fourth, sixth, and twelfth R, the V opening and closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 second. On the 8th and 10th R, when the first winning prize 30 is won, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 second, and when the second winning is received, the opening time The V opening / closing member 71 is opened long for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, when the first winning prize 30 is received in the second and sixth rounds, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds, and the second winning is found. When this occurs, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened long for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the fourth, eighth, tenth and twelfth rounds, when the first winning prize 30 is won, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds. In the opening pattern 34, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 second when the first winning prize 30 is received in the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth and twelfth rounds. .

4). Explanation of jackpot etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are “bonanza” and “losing” as a result of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of “hit”, the “hit symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of “losing”, the special symbol display 41 stops and displays “losing symbol”. When winning a jackpot, the winning prize opening (the first winning prize opening 30 and the second winning prize opening 35) is opened with an opening pattern corresponding to the type of special symbol (the type of jackpot) that is stopped and displayed. Is executed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes a plurality of round games (unit open game), an opening (OP) before the first round game is started, and an ending (ED) after the last round game is finished. Yes. Each round game starts at the end of the opening or at the end of the previous round game and ends at the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

  There are several types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, there are two types of jackpots: “V pass planned jackpot” and “V non-passed jackpot”. “V pass planned jackpot” operates the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37, and the V opening / closing member 71 in an opening pattern (a V passing scheduled opening pattern) in which a game ball can pass to the V region 39 during the jackpot game. It is a jackpot. Here, the jackpot of the special figure stop symbol data of 11H to 14H, 21H corresponds to the “V passing planned jackpot”. The combination of the opening pattern of the opening and closing member 32 and the opening and closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (open pattern 21: open pattern 31), (open pattern 22: open pattern 33). ) Or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), the game ball can pass to the V area 39 during the big hit game. “V non-passing expected jackpot” is an opening pattern in which a game ball cannot pass to the V area 39 during the jackpot game (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern), the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37 and the V opening / closing member 71. It is a jackpot that operates. Here, the jackpot of the special figure stop symbol data 15H and 22H corresponds to the “V non-passing plan jackpot”. When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the V region during the jackpot game The game ball cannot pass to 39. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 serves both as a V passing planned opening pattern and a V non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

  “V-planned jackpot” includes “16RV-planned jackpot”, “16R (substantial 13R) V-planned jackpot” and “16R (substantial 15R) V-planned jackpot”. The “16RV expected jackpot” has a substantial total number of rounds of 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first grand prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second grand prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first big prize opening 30.

  “16R (substantial 13R) V passing expected jackpot” has a total round number of 16R, but a substantial total round number of 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but at 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R and Even at 16R, the second grand prize opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this “16R (substantially 13R) V passing expected jackpot”, from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, and it is a round in which no winning ball can be expected. That is, “16R (substantially 13R) V passing expected jackpot” is a jackpot of substantially 13R. In 2R and 6R, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first big prize opening 30.

  “16R (substantially 15R) V passing expected jackpot” has a total number of rounds of 16R, but the total number of rounds is 15R. That is, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R The second big prize opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this “16R (substantially 15R) V passing expected jackpot”, 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short and no winning ball can be expected. That is, “16R (substantially 15R) V passing expected jackpot” is a jackpot of substantially 15R. In 8R and 10R, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first big prize opening 30.

  “V non-passing jackpot” is “16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot” of the open pattern 22 where the total number of rounds is 16R but the total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but at 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R and Even at 16R, the second grand prize opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing expected jackpot”, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short from 14R to 16R, and it is a round in which no winning ball can be expected. That is, “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot” is a jackpot of substantial 13R. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R, and 12R, the V opening and closing member 71 is opened, but the opening is a short opening (FIG. 14: opening pattern 34), and the V opening 39 is in the V area 39 in the first big winning opening 30. It is almost impossible for game balls to pass.

  As apparent from the above description, the “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing expected jackpot” and the “16R (substantially 13R) V expected passing jackpot” are the first grand prize opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35 ( The opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37) is the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). That is, “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing expected jackpot” is that it is almost impossible for a game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning opening 30 and the gaming state after the jackpot is Low accuracy time short state (low accuracy high base state). On the other hand, the “16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot” makes it easy to pass the game ball to the V area 39 in the first big winning opening 30 and the gaming state after the jackpot is highly accurate. It becomes a short time state (highly accurate high base state). This makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot” and “16R (substantially 13R) V expected jackpot”, and the gaming state after the jackpot is less probable. It becomes difficult to determine whether the time-short state (low-accuracy base state) or the high-accuracy time-short state (high-accuracy high-base state) is reached. That is, the game state after “16R (substantially 13R) V passing expected jackpot” is a high-probability time-short state (high-probability high-base state) when a game ball passes through the V region 39 in the first big winning opening 30. ) But a high probability is a latent state (latent probability variation state).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot distribution rate in the lottery of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V pass expected jackpot and 60/60 for the V non-passed jackpot. 128 (approximately 47%). On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol (Special Figure 2), the jackpot allocation rate is 83/128 (about 64.8%) for V passing planned jackpot and 45/128 (about 6% for planned V non-passing jackpot). 35.2%). As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the big hit that is performed by winning the game ball at the second starting port 21 rather than the big hit lottery (the lottery of the first special symbol) that is performed by winning the game ball at the first starting port 20. The lottery (the second special symbol lottery) is set to be advantageous to the player.

5. Description of the gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute “probability variation control” and “variation time reduction control” for the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 42, respectively. It is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is controlling the probability variation with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a “high probability state”, and the state in which the probability variation control is not performed is simply referred to as a “normal probability state ( Non-high probability state, low probability state) ”. The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is higher in the high probability state than in the normal probability state as the probability variation control of the special symbol. A high probability state is realized by performing the jackpot determination. Accordingly, the high probability state has a higher probability of jackpot than the normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability variation control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol display 41 is compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed. The probability that the display result of the special symbol variable display (stop symbol) becomes a jackpot symbol becomes high.

  In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is performing the variable time reduction control with respect to the special symbol on the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a “time-short state”, and the state in which the game time control is not being performed is simply “a non-time-short state”. That's it. In the short-time state, the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of variation display to the time when the display result is derived and displayed) is shorter than that in the non-short-time state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) determined so that the variation pattern having a short variation time is selected more frequently than the non-temporal reduction state in the short-time state. The used variation pattern is determined. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variable time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol is variable as compared with the case where the variable time reduction control is not executed. A short variation time is easily selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the short-time state, the special-patch holding pace is accelerated, and an effective winning (a winning that can be stored as a special-pending hold) at the starting port is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit with smooth progress of the game. Note that the game control microcomputer 81 may execute the probability variation control and the variation time reduction control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 at the same time, or may execute only one of them.

  The game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability variation control and the variation time reduction control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the variation time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability variation control and the variation time reduction control for the normal symbol in the time-short state and does not execute it in the non-time-short state. The game control microcomputer 81 performs normal symbol probability determination control T3 (the normal symbol per unit determination table T3 in which the number of normal symbol random values (hit random number values) determined to be hit is larger in the short-time state than in the non-short-time state. Using FIG. 8C, a hit determination (ordinary symbol determination) is performed. Therefore, in the short time state, the hit probability is higher than that in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability variation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol display 42 is used as compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed. The probability that the display result (stopped symbol) of the variable symbol normal display will be a winning symbol increases. In the short-time state, the normal symbol variation time is shorter than in the non-short-time state. Here, the variation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-short-time state, but is 1 second in the short-time state (FIG. 8D). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than that in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes open time extension control for the electric chew 22. In addition, in the short time state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than that in the non-short time state (FIG. 12). In other words, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the open count increase control for the electric chew 22. Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and opening time extension control and opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22, Compared to the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is frequently opened, and the game balls are frequently won at the second start port 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls, becomes high. Therefore, a state in which these controls are executed is referred to as a “high base state”, and a state in which these controls are not executed is referred to as a “low base state”. In the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the hand-held game balls. The high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control to support winning at the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is executed. The high base state (electric support control state) may not execute all the controls described above. That is, among the probability variation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the open time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the open count increase control for the electric chew 22 It is only necessary that the electric chew 22 be opened more easily by executing one or more controls than when the control is not being executed. Further, the high base state (electric support control state) may be independently controlled without accompanying the time-short state.

  In the gaming machine 1, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the planned V passing jackpot is a high probability state, a short time state, and a high base state if the player has passed the V area 39 during the jackpot game. . This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “highly accurate high base state” or a “highly accurate time-short state”. The high-accuracy base state is ended when a special symbol variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 160 times) or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the game state after the jackpot game due to winning the V non-passing jackpot is the normal probability state (non-high probability) if the V region 39 is not passed during the jackpot game (almost never). State, ie, a low probability state), a short time state, and a high base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “low accuracy high base state” and a “low accuracy time short state”. The low-accuracy base state is terminated when a special symbol variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. When the gaming machine 1 is played for the first time, the gaming state after power-on is a normal probability state, a non-short-time state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “low probability low base state”. The low probability low base state may be referred to as “normal gaming state” or “low probability non-short state (also simply referred to as non-short state)”. A state in which a special game (a jackpot game) is being executed is referred to as a “special game state (a jackpot game state)”. Furthermore, the state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state is referred to as a “specific game state”.

  In a high base state such as a high-accuracy high-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously when the game ball is advanced to the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting right. The electric support control makes it easier for the electric chew 22 to be opened than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. is there. For this reason, in the high base state, the player makes a right turn to win the game ball to the second starting port 21 while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which is a trigger for the normal symbol lottery. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of start prizes (win prizes at the start opening) rather than left-handed. Note that the gaming machine 1 plays a right-handed game even during a big hit game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by making the game ball enter the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by left-handed. Since the electric support control is not executed, the electric chew 22 is less likely to be opened than in the high base state, and it is easier to win the first start port 20 than to win the second start port 21. It is because it has become. For this reason, in the low base state, the player makes a left turn to win the game ball at the first start port 20. As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of start prizes than right-handed.

6). Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like that appear in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to a success / failure determination unit (FIG. 23) and a prior / failure determination unit (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83. In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs an initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, the main CPU 82 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. The initial setting is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

  After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits interruption of interrupt processing (step S002), and performs normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (step S003). In the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs various random number counter values (big hit random number value, big hit type random number value, reach random number value, fluctuation pattern random number value shown in FIG. 7A). , Normal symbol random value) is added and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

  After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits an interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While the interrupt is permitted, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). That is, the main-side timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). Then, after the main timer interrupt process is completed, the counter value update process by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process is repeatedly executed until the main timer interrupt process is started next. . When an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt processing is not started immediately but is started after the interrupt is permitted.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main-side timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. This random number update processing is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing performed in the main control main processing (FIG. 15). In other words, the update processing of various random number counter values is performed during the main timer interrupt process execution period and other periods (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt process until the start of the next main timer interrupt process) And both.

  After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1 and outputs payout data for paying out a winning ball according to the type of winning opening to the output of the main RAM 84. Set to buffer. The various sensors include, for example, a first start opening sensor 20a, a second start opening sensor 21a, a first big winning opening sensor 30a, a second big winning opening sensor 35a, a normal winning opening sensor 27a, and a normal winning opening sensor 29a (see FIG. 3).

  After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the start port sensor detection process (step S103), normal operation process (step S104), special operation process (step S105), V region sensor detection process (step S106), holding ball. Number processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the command set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each process described above to the sub-control board 90. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S109). In the other processing, for example, the second special figure holding indicator 43b is controlled to display the number based on the number of special figure 2 reserved balls described later, and the first special figure is displayed based on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. The hold indicator 43a is controlled to a display mode indicating the number.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 16: Step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether or not a game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. When the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normal symbol reservation balls is “4 (upper limit)” (step S202). The number of normal symbol reservation balls is the number of general symbol reservations, and more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of general symbol reservations provided in the main RAM 84. If the number of normal symbol reserved balls is “4” (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal symbol reservation balls is “3” or less (step S202: NO), after adding “1” to the number of normal symbol reservation balls (step S203), a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of label-TRND-H), and the acquired random number value is stored in the first to first reserved memory areas 86 of the main RAM 84. The fourth storage area is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls.

  In step S <b> 205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has won the second start port 21. This determination is made based on whether or not a game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 21a. If a game ball has not won the second start port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “4 (upper limit value)” (step S206). The special figure 2 reserved ball number is the number of the second special figure hold, more specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of the second special figure hold provided in the main RAM 84. If the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “4” (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “3” or less (step S206: NO), after adding “1” to the special figure 2 reserved ball number (step S207), a special figure 2 related random number acquisition process is performed (step S207). S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label-TRND-A), the value of jackpot type random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label-TRND-AS), the value of reach random number counter (FIG. 7: label) -TRND-RC value) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (FIG. 7: label-TRND-T1 value). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random value group in a storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved figure 2 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the second specified figure reserved storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random value group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the second special figure hold storage area 85b for the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 18) described later. Memorize (hold). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 2 preliminary determination process (step S209). Details of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process will be described later.

  In step S <b> 210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 20. This determination is made based on whether or not a game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won the first start port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball wins the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special figure 1 reserved ball number is “4 (upper limit value)” ( Step S211). The special figure 1 reserved ball number is the number of first special figure hold, more specifically, the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of first special figure hold. If the special figure 1 reserved ball number is “4” (step S211: YES), this process is terminated. When the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is “3” or less (step S211: NO), after adding “1” to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), a special figure 1 related random number acquisition process is performed (step S212). S213). Here, similarly to the above-described special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208), the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random value group in a storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved figure 1 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random value group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the first special figure holding storage area 85a for the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 19) described later. Memorize (hold). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 1 preliminary determination process (step S214). Details of the special figure 1 pre-determination process will be described later.

[Special Figure 2 Prior Judgment Processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S301). When the probability variation flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is OFF, no prior determination is performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot advance determination with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a prior determination as to whether or not the game is a jackpot using the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referenced and the jackpot random number value. Here, since the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 uses the high probability state table (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “649”) in the jackpot determination table T1. It is judged beforehand whether it is a big hit with reference. That is, when the jackpot random number value is “0” to “649”, it is preliminarily determined as “big hit”, and when it is any other value, it is preliminarily determined as “lost”. In this embodiment, prior determination is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later. However, as another embodiment, for prior determination different from the jackpot determination table T1. The prior determination may be performed using the jackpot determination table.

  When the result of the big hit prior determination is “losing” (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot prior determination is “big hit” (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type prior determination (step S305). In the jackpot type prior determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the jackpot type random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the prior determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To get. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot type prior determination based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, even if the jackpot type random number value is “0” to “127”, it is pre-determined as “16RV scheduled jackpot”. In this embodiment, prior determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination processing (FIG. 23) described later. However, as another embodiment, the advance determination is different from the jackpot type determination table T5. Prior determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

  In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a change pattern preliminary determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 firstly includes a variation pattern random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the prior determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). And the reach random value is acquired. Next, here, since the time-short state (the time-short flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the time-short state variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11), the jackpot advance determination result of step S304, The fluctuation pattern is specified from the reach presence / absence preliminary determination result obtained from the reach random number value and the fluctuation pattern random value. In the variation pattern determination table T6 in FIG. 11, the variation pattern to be selected may differ depending on the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that may be selected depending on the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, from the jackpot advance determination result and the reach presence / absence determination result, a loss with reach is determined in advance, and the random number value of the variation pattern is “60”, the game control microcomputer 81 indicates that the number of reserved balls is “1-2. ", The variation pattern" P64 "to be selected, and if the number of reserved balls is" 3-4 ", the variation pattern" P68 "to be selected is selected. In the present embodiment, prior determination is performed using a variation pattern determination table T6 used in a variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later. However, as another embodiment, a variation pattern determination table T6 is used. Pre-determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for pre-determination different from the above.

  In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a prior determination command. The advance determination command includes a jackpot advance determination result, (a jackpot type advance determination result in the case of winning), and a variation pattern advance determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created prior determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special Figure 1 Pre-judgment process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-described special figure 2 pre-determination process, when the probability variation flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is ON, the prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot advance determination with reference to the normal probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step). S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the prior determination buffer by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S213). To do. Next, since the normal probability state (the probability variation flag is OFF) here, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the normal probability state table (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “164” in the jackpot determination table T1). )) To determine whether or not it is a big hit. That is, when the jackpot random number value is “0” to “164”, it is preliminarily determined as “big hit”, and when it is any other value, it is preliminarily determined as “lost”. The jackpot prior determination may use a jackpot determination table for prior determination different from the jackpot determination table T1. Hereinafter, the processes in steps S404 to S408 are the same as steps S304 to S308 in the above-described special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 18), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S502). If the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the normal symbol is not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of retained balls of the normal symbol is “0” (step S503). When the number of reserved balls is “0” (step S503: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol held balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Accordingly, when a game ball passes through the gate 28 in a state where the number of held balls of the normal symbol is “0”, the number of held balls of the normal symbol is once “1” in step S203 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17). After that, the hold is digested in this step S504, and the number of held balls of the normal symbol immediately becomes “0”. The same applies to the number of reserved balls for special symbols. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of special symbols held temporarily becomes “1”, and thereafter, step S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) described later. In S1410, the reservation is digested and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes “0”. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8C) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 firstly sets a normal symbol random number value (as a determination value) stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the general figure hold storage area) of the general figure hold storage area 86. Per random number). Then, the normal symbol random number value, the gaming state (whether or not it is in the short time state), and the normal symbol per determination table T3 are used to determine whether or not it is a hit. For example, when the normal symbol random number is “0” to “2” in the non-time-short state, it is determined as “winning”, and when the normal symbol random number is other than that, it is determined as “lost”. (See FIG. 8C).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern by referring to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8D) (step S506). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first determines a gaming state (whether or not it is a short-time state), and uses the determination result of the gaming state and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 to change the normal symbol variation. The variation time of the normal symbol as a pattern is selected. Here, in the non-short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined as “30 seconds”, and in the short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined as “1 second” (see FIG. 8D). . The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern to start normal symbol variation display (step S507).

  In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has ended. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8D). If the variation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the normal symbol variation display is continued. On the other hand, when the variation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the variation display (step S509), and in the case of “losing” in the above-described hit determination (step S505). (Step S510: NO), this process is finished. On the other hand, if the winning determination is “win” (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets an electric chew release pattern (step S511). The open pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew open pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines a game state (whether or not it is a short time state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the electric chew release pattern determination table T7 to open the electric chew 22 release pattern. Select. Here, “open pattern 11” is selected in the non-time saving state, and “open pattern 12” is selected in the time saving state. After the selection of the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts an electric chew operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends the process.

  In step S501 described above, when the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings to the electric chew 22 has reached a predetermined maximum winning number (for example, six), or the time that the operating time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the electric chew 22 is closed. One of the things that has been achieved is fulfilled. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is an operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. If the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521). Finish.

[Special action processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display device 41 and the special prize winning device (the first big prize winning device 31 and the second big prize winning device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is set to “1” of “special operation status”, Called “2”, “3”, “4”. When the “special operation status” is “1” (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, jackpot determination, variation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the “special operation status” is “2” (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol variation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol variation processing, the variation stop command is output after the variation time has elapsed. When the “special operation status” is “3” (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol determination processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, an output of an opening command or the like is executed at the time of a big hit. When the “special operation status” is “4” (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), the special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing, a big hit game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is “1” in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: Step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “0” (step S1401). When the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “0” (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the random value group acquired due to the winning to the second starting port 21 is stored. If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1407. When the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “1” or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1402) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the special figure 2 reserved ball number is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the storage location of the hold information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b to the side read from the current position. While shifting by one, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the second special figure hold storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, when the hold information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the hold information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and the hold information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the hold information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. According to the above steps, the second special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was put on hold. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold image 9B (the leftmost hold image 9B among the four hold images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. In addition, the reserved images 9B (the second, third and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b are respectively on the left side. Shift one (FIG. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure hold has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, a fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and a fluctuation time timer is set. The variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is set in the variation time timer. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to “2”. The fluctuation start command (special figure 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process includes information on the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the fluctuation pattern selection process ( Information regarding the variation pattern set in step S1403) (including information regarding the variation time) is included.

  In step S1401, when the special figure 2 reserved ball number is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "0" ( Step S1407). In the case where the special figure 1 reserved ball number is “0” (step S1407: YES), that is, the random number value group acquired due to the winning to the first start port 20 in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a. If there is no storage, the process proceeds to step S1413. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is “1” or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random number values stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side read from the current position. At the same time, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the first special figure hold storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was put on hold. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold image 9A (the rightmost hold image 9A among the four hold images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. Also, the reserved images 9A (the second, third and fourth reserved images 9A from the left among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a are on the right side, respectively. Shift one (FIG. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one 1st special figure reservation was digested. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, a fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is set in the variation time timer. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to “2” (step S1406). Note that the fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process includes information on the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and a fluctuation pattern selection process ( Information regarding the variation pattern set in step S1409) (including information regarding the variation time) is included.

  In step S1407, when the special figure 1 reserved ball number is “0” (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1407). S1413). The standby screen is a demonstration screen for waiting for customers. For example, the game control microcomputer 81 may make a determination based on ON / OFF of a demo screen display flag for waiting for a customer. If it is a standby screen (step S1413: YES), this process is terminated. If it is not a standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a customer standby standby command for displaying a standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after a predetermined standby time has elapsed. (Step S1414) This processing is finished. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the special symbol variation display based on the first special figure hold is executed only when the second special figure hold is “0”. That is, the digestion of the second special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure hold. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure hold has a larger profit for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure hold (V pass planned jackpot). It is easier to win.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). The jackpot determination process (step S1402) in FIG. 2 and the jackpot determination process (step S1408) in FIG. 1 are the same in the process flow, and will be described together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of FIG. 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special chart hold area) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read. In the jackpot determination process in FIG. 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one in the first special chart hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a big hit using the jackpot determination table T1 and the jackpot random number value to be referred to. Here, since it is a high probability state (the probability variation flag is ON), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is based on the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “649”) in the jackpot determination table T1. judge.

  When the probability variation flag is OFF in step S1501 (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot determination with reference to the normal probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) ( Step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, here, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF), it is a big hit based on the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “164”) in the jackpot determination table T1. Determine whether or not.

  When the result of the jackpot determination is “big hit” (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a jackpot type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process in FIG. 2, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special chart holding storage area 85b is read. In the jackpot determination process in FIG. 1, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special chart holding storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After determining the jackpot type, the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of the big hit determination is “losing” in step S1503 or step S1505, the special figure stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the lost symbol is set in the big hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). This process is terminated.

[Variation pattern selection processing]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process (step S1403) in FIG. 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) in FIG. 1 have the same process flow and will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is a short time state (step S1600). The determination as to whether or not the time is short is made depending on whether or not the time flag is ON. If the time is short (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. If it is not the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S1602). When the big hit flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is special figure 2 (step S1603). If the jackpot is special figure 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type is always a V passing planned jackpot, so the process skips to step S1605. When the jackpot is special figure 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot type is a V passing planned jackpot (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. This is done based on the special figure stop symbol data.

  When the jackpot type is a V passing planned jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes with reference to the table for the non-time-saving state V passing scheduled jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a variation pattern random value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process in FIG. 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one in the second special figure reservation) 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of FIG. 1, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as the table for the non-time-saving state V passing expected jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V-passing expected jackpot in the non-time-saving state variation pattern determination table T6 shown in FIG. 10 (the fluctuation pattern is “P1 in FIG. 1). ”To“ P3 ”, and in FIG. 2, the variation pattern“ P21 ”to“ P23 ”) is referred to (the address is set). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of “P1” to “P3” is selected as the variation pattern in the special figure 1 and any one of “P21” to “P23” in the special figure 2.

  When the jackpot type is a V non-passing expected jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-short-time state V non-passing scheduled jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). Then, the variation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as the table for the non-time-short state V non-passing expected jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing jackpot (“P4” to “P6”) in the non-time-short state variation pattern determination table T6 shown in FIG. Part). One of “P4” to “P6” is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value.

  If the jackpot flag is OFF in step S1602 (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the reach random number value is a reach establishment random number value (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a reach random number value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process in FIG. 2, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one in the second special figure holding area) 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of FIG. 1, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) in the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8B) and the reach random number value. Here, since it is a non-short-time state, the reach determination table T2 is based on the table for the non-time-short state (reach presence determination value (reach establishment random number value is a portion from “0” to “13”)). Determine presence or absence.

  When the reach random number value is a reach establishment random number value (step S1607: YES), that is, when the reach is lost, the game control microcomputer 81 is in a non-short-time state in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected with reference to the reach loss table (step S1608). Here, as the table for non-short-time state reach loss, the portion corresponding to the reach-less loss in the non-time-short state change pattern determination table T6 shown in FIG. 10 (in FIG. 1, the change pattern is “P7” to Reference is made to the “P14” portion, and in FIG. 2 the fluctuation pattern “P24” to “P31” portion). In the special figure 1, any one of “P7” to “P14” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current special figure 1 reserved ball number (1 to 4). In the special figure 2, any one of “P24” to “P31” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current special figure 2 reserved ball number (1 to 4). Since the variation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, a function of shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls is activated. That is, in both of FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, when the number of reserved balls is “3” to “4”, the variation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is “1” to “2”. More short variation patterns are selected. Thereby, when there are many reservation balls, the digestion speed of special figure reservation can be accelerated.

  When the reach random number value is not the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: NO), that is, when there is no reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 is in a non-short-time state in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The variation pattern is selected with reference to the table for losing without reach (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-time-short state reach-less loss, the portion corresponding to the non-reach-time loss in the non-time-short state change pattern determination table T6 shown in FIG. 10 (in FIG. 1, the change pattern is “P15” to Reference is made to the “P16” portion, and in FIG. In the special figure 1, either “P15” or “P16” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current special figure 1 reserved ball number (1 to 4). In the special figure 2, either “P32” or “P33” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current special figure 2 reserved ball number (1 to 4). Again, since the variation pattern selected by the number of reserved balls changes, the function of shortening variation according to the number of retained balls is activated.

  If it is determined in step S1600 that the gaming state is the short-time state, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). Thereafter, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above, except for the following points, and a description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 is that in step S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to is already described in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609. And different. Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-short-time state is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the short-time state is used. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the expected V passing jackpot, the portion corresponding to the expected V passing jackpot in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the short time state shown in FIG. Is referred to as “P41” to “P43”, and in FIG. 2, the fluctuation pattern is “P61” to “P63”. From the read fluctuation pattern random value, any one of “P41” to “P43” is selected as the fluctuation pattern in the special figure 1 and any one of “P61” to “P63” in the special figure 2. Further, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is a planned V non-passing jackpot, the portion corresponding to the planned non-passing jackpot in the short-time state variation pattern determination table T6 shown in FIG. ”To“ P46 ”). One of “P44” to “P46” is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value.

  After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends the process. The set variation pattern information is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: step S108). Thereby, the change display of the special symbol is started.

[Special symbol change processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S1701). The special symbol variation time is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described above. If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the special symbol variation display started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a variation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to “3” (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the change stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the change display of the special symbol at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing.

[Special symbol confirmation processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol confirmation process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time reductions, and the contents will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to “1” (step S1808), and ends this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, and the process shifts to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) again, and the jackpot determination for the next hold is executed.

  When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the winning pattern and the opening / closing pattern of the V opening / closing member according to the selected jackpot type (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the special winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data, and determines the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “open pattern 21” is set as the open pattern of the special winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 from the special figure stop symbol data, and sets the determined opening pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “open pattern 31” is set as the open pattern of the V opening / closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds corresponding to the type of winning jackpot together with the set of the winning pattern and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, “16” is set in the round counter (FIG. 13B).

  After the release pattern is set, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag, and the contents will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to “4” (step S1807), and this process is finished.

[Game state management processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of times the special symbol is changed during the high probability state. Here, “160” is set in the probability variation counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become “0” as a result of decrementing the probability variation counter by 1 (step S2003). If the value of the probability variation counter is not “0” (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability variation counter is “0” (step S2003: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

  In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is ON. When the time reduction flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time reduction flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time reduction counter counts the number of times the special symbol is changed during the time reduction state. Here, at the time of shifting to the time reduction state, “100” is set to the time reduction counter in the low accuracy high base state, and “160” is set to the time reduction counter in the high accuracy high base state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become “0” as a result of decrementing the time reduction counter by 1 (step S2007). If the value of the time reduction counter is not “0” (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the hour / hour counter is “0” (step S2007: YES), the hour / hour flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

  In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The gaming state designation command includes information on the current gaming state that has just been set (whether it is a probable change state, a probable change counter value, whether it is a short time state, a short time counter value, etc.).

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the gaming state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is ON. When the time reduction flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process is finished. When the time reduction flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time reduction flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In other words, during the execution of the jackpot game, it becomes a non-high probability state and a non-time-short state. Since the gaming machine 1 is always in the low base state during the non-short-time state, the gaming machine 1 is in the low base state while the jackpot game is being executed.

[Special electric material processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory process (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The “hit winning flag” is a flag that indicates that the opening of the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) based on the release pattern has been completed in the running big hit game. If the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the big hit end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), V opening / closing member operation processing for operating the V opening / closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening / closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls have won the first grand prize opening 30. In the V opening / closing member operation process, the V opening / closing member operation process is performed according to the V opening / closing member opening pattern T9. When the predetermined game ball is won, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period. Details of the V opening / closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening / closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big prize opening (the first big prize opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35) is open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

  When the special winning opening is not being opened (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) for opening the special winning opening (step S2203). For example, when the time for opening the jackpot has passed and the opening time of the first round game has been reached, or when the time for opening the grand prize opening is reached, the grand prize opening that was temporarily closed after the opening is opened again This includes the time when the interval time (closing time) until has elapsed and the time for opening again is reached. If it is not time to open the big prize opening (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

  When it is time (timing) for opening the big winning opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a big winning opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of jackpot. After the big prize opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In the present embodiment, a large winning opening is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, in the case where a large number of winning holes are opened during a single round game, the gaming control microcomputer 81 is configured so that the opening of the large winning opening is in one round. It may be determined whether or not the opening is the first time, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this process is finished.

  In the above-described step S2202, when the special winning opening is being opened (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special winning opening closing condition is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes in the round winning game in the round game has reached the prescribed maximum winning quantity (for example, 9 per round), or the time for closing the winning prize opening. (That is, a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening). If the condition for closing the special prize opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition for the special winning opening is established (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the special winning opening (step S2211).

  If it is not the time (timing) to open the big winning opening in the above-described step S2203, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the grand prize opening was closed. This is because the closing time (interval time) of the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing as described above. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the closing of the special winning opening. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

  When the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round counter value to 1 decrement (step S2221), and determines whether or not the round counter value is “0”. A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not “0” (step S2226: NO), that is, if the prescribed number of round games has not been consumed yet, the present process is terminated to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is “0”, the jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game (step S2227), and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In the present embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when a game ball has passed to the V region 39 with “16R (substantially 13R) V passing expected jackpot” is “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled It is the same length as the ending time when there is no game ball passing to the V region 39 in the “big hit”. As a result, even if the player has passed the game ball to the V region 39 with the “16R (substantially 13R) V expected to pass big hit”, the “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passed expected big hit It can be recognized that the game ball has not passed through the V region 39. It should be noted that the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the “16R (substantially 13R) V passing expected jackpot” is also the same length as these. After the start of the jackpot ending, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this process is terminated.

  In the above-described step S2200, when the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), since the final round has ended, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and displays a special operation status. Is set to "1" (step S2233). Thus, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again in the next special operation process. Thereafter, a game state setting process (step S2234), which will be described later, is executed, and this process ends.

[V opening / closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 30: Step S2201). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the current round game (the round) is an open round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening round of the V opening and closing member 71. The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that the round is an open round when the value of the round counter is “15”, “13”, “11”, “9”, “7”, “5”. When it is not the open round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process is finished. This is because it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71 in the round.

  If it is the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The “first winning flag” is a flag indicating that the first big winning opening 30 has won the first ball in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. When the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the first ball winning is detected (step S2503). When the first ball winning is not detected (step S2503: NO), this process is finished. This is because there is no winning in the first big winning opening 30 in the round, and there is no need to operate the V opening / closing member 71.

  When the first winning is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 in a short circuit and performs a V valid period setting process (step S2504). The V opening / closing member 71 is opened short-circuited in the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14B), regardless of whether it is “short opening” or “long opening”. This is because sometimes a short opening (0.1 seconds in this case) is executed. Note that when the V opening / closing member 71 is short-circuited, the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is very short. Therefore, the first game ball won in the first big winning opening 30 does not pass through the V area 39 and is not It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V effective period setting process, a few seconds after the V opening / closing member 71 is opened and after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed are set to a V effective period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is effective. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 in a short circuit (here, 0.1 second) in accordance with the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14B), and the V opening / closing member 71 is being opened. And 1 second after closing is set as the V effective period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the jackpot game is not being executed) as a V invalid period for determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid. Here, “determining that the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is valid” means that the V flag is turned on based on the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a (V region sensor detection described later). Processing (see FIG. 33)). Further, “determining that the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is invalid” means that the V flag is not turned ON even if the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes a few seconds after the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 (ball brushing period) is because there is a physical distance between the V opening / closing member 71 and the V region sensor 39a. This is in consideration of a period until a game ball that has entered the V region 39 immediately before closing the V opening / closing member 71 is detected by the V region sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage during the V effective period (passing of the game ball to the V area 39) is detected, and the V flag is detected when the V passage outside the V effective period (V invalid period) is detected. It is supposed not to turn on. When the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is turned ON, that is, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability state (see the gaming state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). In this way, the V flag is turned on based on the passage of V due to fraud, so that the high probability state is not set. After the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

  In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already been won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. Is performed (step S2520). The “second winning flag” is a flag indicating that the first big winning opening 30 has won the second ball when the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the round is long open. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). If it is not long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, when it is long open (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning is detected (step S2522). When the second winning is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

  When the second winning is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 for a long time and performs a V valid period setting process (step S2523). The V opening / closing member 71 is opened long when the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14B) is “Long opening” and the long opening when the second ball is won (here, 31.5 seconds at the maximum). ). In addition, since the maximum round game time here is 31.5 seconds (maximum winning opening maximum opening time 29.5 seconds + interval closing time 2 seconds), generally the second ball winning The time from the time to the end of the round is less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, since the V opening / closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, the long opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 is because the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is relatively long, so that at least a part of the second and subsequent game balls won in the first big winning opening 30 will open the V region 39. It is configured to pass. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period when the V opening and closing member 71 is open, and sets the V invalid period along with the closing of the V open and closed member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

  In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening / closing member 71 is open. When the V opening / closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (2 seconds in this case) has elapsed since the closing of the special winning opening. Make a decision.

  When the round game has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), the V opening / closing member closing process, and the V ineffective period. Setting processing is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening / closing member 71, and after a few seconds (here, 1 second) has elapsed after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed, Set and finish this process.

  If the round game has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). Examples of the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 include, for example, that a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening / closing member 71 in the case of short opening. When the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), the V opening / closing member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and this process ends. When the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), the process is finished while the V opening / closing member 71 is opened and the V effective period is continued.

  In step S2540, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V opening / closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2571). If the round has been completed (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and the process ends. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), the process ends.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the hour / hour flag is turned ON (step S2302), and “100” is set to the hour / hour counter (step S2303). As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game becomes the “non-high probability state”, the “short time state”, and the “high base state” (that is, the low probability high base). This low-accuracy base state ends when the special symbol variable display is performed 100 times or the next jackpot is won.

On the other hand, if the V flag is ON in step S2301 (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability variation flag (step S2304), sets “10000” in the probability variation counter (step S2305), The V flag is turned off (step S2306). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time reduction flag (step S2307) and sets “160” in the time reduction counter (step S2308). As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game becomes a “high probability state”, a “time-short state”, and a “high base state” (that is, a highly accurate high base). This high-accuracy base state ends when either of the special symbol variable display is performed 10,000 times or the next jackpot is won.
In the high probability state, the jackpot probability is about 1/101. Actually, the jackpot lottery is almost won before 10,000 lottery lotteries are performed in the high-accuracy high-base state. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot at the special symbol 2 (via the second starting port) in the short-time state and the jackpot scheduled to pass V (the special symbol stop symbol data 21H) is during the jackpot game. If V is passed, it is almost guaranteed that the gaming state after the big hit will be in a highly accurate and high base state until the next big hit.

  In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The gaming state designation command includes information regarding the gaming state that has just been set.

[V-area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601). If no game ball is detected by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is during the V effective period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V effective period is set to several seconds (ball break period) when the V opening / closing member 71 is opened or closed during the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round. Is done. If it is not during the V effective period (step S2602: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is during the V effective period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passing command (step S2604), and ends this process. .

[Reserved ball count processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reserved ball number process (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the reserved ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The reserved ball number command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the reserved ball number, and includes information on the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number. . After setting the held ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing.

7). Operation of Effect Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94.

[Sub control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main process. The effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub control main process from the sub ROM 93 when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on. In the sub-control main process, the production control microcomputer 91 first performs a CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, setting of the sub CPU 92, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. Note that the CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

  After the CPU initialization process, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits interruption of the interruption process (step S4015) and performs a random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the production control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the random number counter value shown in FIG. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. In addition to adding one by one, two or more random numbers may be added. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

  After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits interruption of the interruption process (step S4025). While the interrupt is permitted, the sub timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub timer interruption process is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed after the sub timer interrupt process is completed and before the sub timer interrupt process is started next.

[Sub timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub timer interruption process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The production control microcomputer 91 first performs a received command analysis process (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a process during variation effect (step S4305). The process during the change effect is a process for setting a pre-change end command at a specific timing during the change effect and causing the display screen 7a to execute the specific display effect, and details thereof will be described later. After the variation effect processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs switch processing (step S4310). In the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display content of the display screen 7a based on switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 uses the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107 for various commands set in the effect command set area 94 b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 in the received command analysis process or the like. To the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received the various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received command. In addition, the voice control board 106 that has received various commands executes a voice effect that outputs voice from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received the various commands executes a lamp effect that performs light emission control of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in accordance with the received commands. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320) and ends the process. In other processing, for example, random number update processing or the like is performed.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a prior determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). The “prefetching effect determination process” is a process of determining whether or not to execute a prefetching effect and a prefetching effect pattern in the case of executing it. Details of the prefetch effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if not received (step S4415: NO), the above-described prefetch effect determination process is skipped. The pre-reading effect is an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility that jackpot is included in the hold information newly stored in the special figure hold storage area 85, and is executed during the change effect.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a reserved ball number command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If received (step S4445: YES), hold display processing is performed (step S4450). In the hold display process, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided based on the information on the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number included in the hold ball number command. The values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the general figure hold effect counter are updated. Thereby, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub-control board 90 side can hold the information on the number of reserved balls. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the ordinary figure hold effect counter, the hold image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, when the pending ball number command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described pending display process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If it has been received (step S4455: YES), variation effect start processing is performed (step S4460). “Variation effect start processing” is processing for selecting a variation effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the special symbol change. Details of the variation effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, if not received (step S4455: NO), the above-described variation effect start processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it has been received (step S4465: YES), variation effect end processing is performed (step S4470). The “variation effect end process” is a process for stopping the variation effect executed during the special symbol variation. In the variation effect end process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a counter and the like based on the analysis result of the variation stop command, and sets a variation effect end command for ending the variation effect. As a result, the decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 being changed is stopped and displayed. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. If the change stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-described change effect end process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If it has been received (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The “opening effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (contents) to be executed at the start of a special game (big hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command and sets information related to the special figure stop symbol data set at the time of the jackpot winning determination included in the opening command in the sub RAM 94. Then, an effect pattern of the opening effect that is preset corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is displayed in the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94 Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays a predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. Are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In step S4475, when the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-described opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If it is received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). The “round effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the opening of the big prize opening or during the interval between releases in the special game (big hit game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information related to the special figure stop symbol data and information related to the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub RAM 94. To do. Then, an effect pattern of a preset round effect corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and a round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is displayed in the effect of the sub RAM 94. Set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In step S4485, when the round designation command is not received (step S4485: NO), the round effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If received (step S4495: YES), an ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). “Ending effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command and sets information related to the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the above-described ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processes, for example, when the presentation control microcomputer 91 receives the gaming state designation command, the information related to the gaming state included in the gaming state designation command (whether the state is a high probability state, whether it is a short time state, whether or not Counter, hourly counter value, etc.) are held in the sub-RAM 94. In addition, when the V control command is received, the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the sub RAM 94 to hold the information that has passed V. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than those described above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Pre-reading effect determination process]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the prefetch effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a prior determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the production control microcomputer 91 includes a jackpot advance determination result (big hit determination information), a jackpot type advance determination result (big hit type information), and a variation included in the prior determination command received from the main control board 80. The pattern preliminary determination result (variation pattern information) is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the advance determination information storage area 94c. In the prior determination information storage area 94c, in addition to the jackpot determination information, the jackpot type information, and the variation pattern information described above, prefetch effect pattern information is stored. The prefetch effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the prefetch effect executed during the variation effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. In FIG. 39A, the jackpot determination information “losing” and the variation pattern information “P72” and “P73” are the first to third as the prior determination results respectively corresponding to the first to third pieces of the special figure 2 hold. A state is shown in which the prior determination result corresponding to the change is stored in the storage area and stored in the area. FIG. 39 (B) shows the special figure 2 winning from the state of FIG. 39 (A). The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, the jackpot determination information “big hit”, the jackpot type information “21H”, and the variation pattern information “P61” are stored as the prior determination information. In addition, in addition to the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth reserved special figure 2 and the area corresponding to the change, “pattern A” is used as the pre-reading effect pattern information. "Is set. FIG. 39C shows a state where the change has been completed from the state of FIG. 39B and the prior determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the advance determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the area, and the advance determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas. The preliminary determination information in the four storage areas is cleared. The prior determination information shift process is executed in the variation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

  Returning to FIG. 38, subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-read effect pattern information is stored in the prior determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-read effect pattern information is stored in any of the area of the prior determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas. If pre-reading effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process ends. That is, when the prefetch effect pattern information is stored in any of the relevant area of the prior determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the prefetch effect pattern information is not newly selected and stored. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is not stored in the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 indicates that the advance determination result included in the received advance determination command is “big hit”. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not “Leach with reach” has occurred (step S4603). Whether it is “big hit” or “losing with reach” can be determined, for example, based on a variation pattern prior determination result (variation pattern information). When the prior determination result included in the received prior determination command is “no reach loss” (step S4603: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 ends this process. This is because it is not necessary to perform pre-reading production. On the other hand, when the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is “big hit” or “losing with reach” (step S4603: YES), pre-reading effect execution determination for determining whether to execute the pre-reading effect, And prefetch effect pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the prefetch effect random number counter, and refers to the acquired random number value and the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the prefetch effect. Whether or not to perform the pre-read effect is determined.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the pre-judgment result is “big hit” and the prefetch effect random value is “0 to 55”, the prefetch effect is “none”, and when the prefetch effect random number is “56 to 67”, the prefetch effect is When “pattern A” is selected and the prefetch effect random number is “68 to 127”, “pattern B” is selected as the prefetch effect. Also, if the pre-determined result is “Leach with reach” and the prefetch effect random value is “0 to 107”, the prefetch effect is “None”, and if the prefetch effect random value is “108 to 114”, the prefetch effect is When “pattern A” is selected and the pre-reading effect random value is “115 to 127”, “pattern B” is selected as the pre-reading effect. Note that the type and content of the prefetch effect pattern and the range of the selected random value can be arbitrarily set.

  Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the prefetch effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected prefetch effect pattern is stored in the prior determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-reading effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command among the first to fourth storage areas but also the storage before the corresponding storage area. The prefetch effect pattern is also stored in the area and the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), not only “pattern A” is set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received prior determination command, but also the first to third storage areas and the area. Also set “Pattern A”. As a result, the prefetch effect pattern A is also executed in the variation effect (variation effect corresponding to the region and the first to third storage areas) executed before the change effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed. . Whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed with the changing effect corresponding to the region depends on the progress of the changing effect. That is, in the variation effect, the prefetch effect is not executed when the timing for executing the prefetch effect has already passed, but is executed at the timing before the timing for executing the prefetch effect. This will be described later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the pre-reading effect is not executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variable effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The production control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the change start command (step S5000). Here, the production control microcomputer 91 sets information related to the special figure stop symbol data included in the change start command and information related to the change pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and symbol information acquired here can be referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 as appropriate.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a basic effect pattern determination process (step S5010). The basic effect pattern determination process is a basic structure of a variable effect (for example, display and switching of a background image on the image display device 7, display and operation of a predetermined character, output of a melody and sound effect using the speaker 67). , Lamp lighting control, etc.). The variation effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as a chance-up effect and a look-ahead effect on the basic effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the basic effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93 and determines the basic effect pattern.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the basic effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, a plurality of types of basic effect patterns for performing normal reach effects, a plurality of types of basic effect patterns for performing SP1 effects, a plurality of types of basic effect patterns for performing SP2 effects, and a plurality of types of basic effect patterns for performing SP3 effects, A plurality of types of basic production patterns for performing reach-less loss production are set. The kind of basic production pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is “P1”, the basic effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is “P72”, the basic effect pattern that performs the reach-less loss effect is selected.

  Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up effect pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the chance-up random number counter, and determines the chance-up effect pattern by referring to the acquired random value and the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only a portion of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variable effect pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time-short state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows a chance-up effect pattern that is executed when the variation patterns included in the variation start command are “P1” to “P16”. The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 includes a part for determining a chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the variation pattern is “P21” to “P33”, “P41” to “P56”, “61” to “73”. It may or may not be provided.

  In FIG. 43, “2-NO” “2-SP1” “2-SP2” “2-SP3” “3-NO” “3-SP1” “3-SP2” “3-SP3” “ “4-NO”, “4-SP1”, “4-SP2”, “4-SP3”, and “ANO” are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance up effects described later.

  Returning to FIG. 41, after the chance-up effect pattern is determined, the effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54 to combine the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be stopped and displayed. May be determined. Thus, what kind of effect is to be performed as the variable effect is determined.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 sets a change effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that a change effect based on the change effect pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5015 is realized. Step S5020). When the change effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the change effect image. The data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variable effect timer (step S5030), and ends this process. In the variation effect timer, a variation time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command is set. For example, when the variation pattern is “P1”, “40 seconds” is set in the variation effect timer.

[Processing during fluctuation production]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the fluctuating effect process (FIG. 36: step S4305). The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the change effect is being performed (step S4701). Whether or not the changing effect is being performed can be determined, for example, based on whether or not the changing effect timer is zero. If the variation effect is not being performed (step SS4701: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the changing effect is being performed (step SS4701: YES), the effect controlling microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is time to set the pre-change end command in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-change end command is a command for the effect control microcomputer 91 to notify the image control board 100 or the like that it is a specific timing during the change effect, and the image control board 100 receives the pre-change end command. In accordance with the information included in the pre-change end command, the effect content is switched, a specific image is displayed, and the like.

  If it is not the time to set the command before the end of change (step S4702: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is time to set the command before the end of change (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area of the prior determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-read effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), the pre-change end command including the pre-read effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, when there is no prefetch effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), the pre-change end command not including the prefetch effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4705). Thereby, when there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a command before end of change including pre-reading effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the change effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a prefetch effect for displaying a prefetch effect image on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, the pre-change end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the change. Here, when the preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the preview fade effect for fading the preview image.

8). Operation of Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. A buffer or the like which appears in the operation description of the image control microcomputer 101 is provided in the RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the display control process. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization process, the display control process is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variable effect start command is received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). When the image is received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the change effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variation effect start command, reads a predetermined variation effect image instructed in the variation effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. Display. On the other hand, if not received (step S5001: NO), the above process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a pre-change end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). If it is received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts pre-reading effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the pre-change end command, and if the pre-change end command includes pre-read effect pattern information, reads a predetermined pre-read effect image from the ROM 103, and displays the image display device. 7 on the display screen 7a. Even if the pre-reading effect pattern information is not included in the pre-change end command, if the preview image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the preview fade effect for fading the preview image is performed. Do it. On the other hand, if not received (step S5003: NO), the above process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variation effect end command is received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). When the image is received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads the image with the variable effect stopped and displayed from the ROM 103, and performs the variable effect stop display to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if not received (step S5005: NO), the above process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when receiving the opening effect start command, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a predetermined opening effect image instructed in the opening effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays the display screen of the image display device 7. 7a is displayed. When a round effect start command is received, a predetermined round effect image instructed by the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. When a ending effect start command is received, a predetermined ending effect image instructed by the ending effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a, and this process is terminated.

9. Operation of the movable board (first movable accessory 14 and second movable accessory 15) The operation of the movable board (first movable accessory 14 and second movable accessory 15) will be described with reference to FIGS. explain. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the second movable accessory 15. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 during a game effect (display effect) or an initial operation when the power is turned on.

  The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that a plate-like member can move up and down, and can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) shown in FIG. 1 (first mode). At this time, the first movable accessory 14 is visible to the player. The first movable accessory 14 can move from the state shown in FIG. 1 to the advance position (deployment position) shown in FIG. 2 embodiment). In the second aspect, a part of the image display device 7 is covered. Also, the first movable accessory 14 can move from the state of FIG. 46 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 by moving (retracting) downward, and can be stopped there. The first movable accessory 14 is configured to increase the area covering the display screen 7a when transitioning from the first mode to the second mode.

  The second movable accessory 15 includes a rotating body on which a face is drawn. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can be stationary at a retracted position (home position) where the rotating body is stored in the center decorative body 10 (first mode). At this time, a part of the lower side of the rotating body is visible. In the second movable accessory 15, the rotating body advances downward from the state of FIG. 1, and a rotation effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 47 in front of the display screen 7 a (second mode).

10. Examples of Effects, Examples of Effects, Modifications, and Aspects of Embodiments Hereinafter, examples of effects (examples of display effects, examples of movable object effects) of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, an effect example, a modification example, and an example of the effect example will be described together. The effects described below are based on various information (such as jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, variation pattern information, prior determination information) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, as described above. This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. Moreover, although the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display effect example, it is actually displayed unless otherwise noted.

  The decorative symbol variation effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 48 to 51. This decorative design variation effect can be executed during a decorative design variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and reads the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 when an instruction to execute the decoration symbol variation effect is included. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Decorative design variation effect A]
FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect A. In the decorative symbol variation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 48A, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. When the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed, the positions of these display screens 7a in the vertical direction may be the same or different. In the stop display of FIG. 48 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C have the same position in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R is from the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C. Is also located above. Note that the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R may be stopped and displayed in the same vertical position. The hold icons 9A are displayed side by side along the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

  At the start of the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display), first, as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L moves upward. Next, as shown in FIG. 48C, the medium decorative design 8C moves upward. The left decorative pattern 8L that has been moved upward is lowered in the upward movement speed as if gravity is working in the downward direction, and folds back above the display screen 7a to start moving downward. Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (D), the right decorative design 8R moves upward. The medium decorative symbol 8C that has moved upward is lowered in the upward movement speed as if gravity is working in the downward direction, and folds back above the display screen 7a to start moving downward. The left decorative pattern 8L that has moved downward increases the moving speed in the downward direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (E), the right decorative symbol 8R that has been moved upward decreases in the upward movement speed as if gravity is working downward, and the display screen 7a Fold up and start moving downward. The medium decorative design 8C that has moved downward increases the moving speed in the downward direction.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (F) and FIG. 48 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R increase in order in the downward movement speed. It becomes a mode in which numbers are not visible. FIG. 48G shows a mode in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed at a high speed (constant speed). The moving direction when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change is the same as the direction in which the hold icons 9A are arranged.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L that has been variably displayed disappears from the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (I), the variably displayed middle decorative symbol 8C disappears from the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R is variably displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (J), the right decorative symbol 8R that has been variably displayed disappears from the display screen 7a, and all of the decorative symbols variably displayed become difficult to visually recognize.

[Decorative design variation effect B]
FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect B. First, as shown in FIG. 49A, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. The mode of stop display is the same as that in FIG. 48 (A) of the decorative symbol variation effect A. Next, the decorative symbol variation effect of FIG. 49 (B) is executed. This decorative symbol variation effect is the same as FIG. 48 (G) of the decorative symbol variation effect A. That is, FIGS. 48A to 48G of the decorative symbol variation effect A may be executed between the stop display of FIG. 49A and the variation display of FIG. 49B. Next, the decorative symbol disappearing effect shown in FIG. 49 (C) is executed. The decorative symbol disappearance effect is the same as that in FIG. 48 (J) of the decorative symbol variation effect A. That is, FIGS. 48 (G) to 48 (J) of the decorative symbol variation effect A may be executed between the variation display in FIG. 49 (B) and the decorative symbol disappearance effect in FIG. 49 (C).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 49 (D), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R which are displayed in a variable manner are displayed. In the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R, the moving speed in the downward direction decreases, and as shown in FIG. 49 (E), the numbers gradually become visible. Next, as shown in FIG. 49 (F), a left / right symbol reverse direction moving effect is executed. Specifically, the right decorative design 8R starts moving upward (reverse direction) while the left decorative design 8L continues to move downward. Then, as shown in FIG. 49G, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed. At this time, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R may have different vertical positions. Next, as shown in FIG. 49 (H), an intermediate decorative symbol 8C that is displayed in a variable manner is displayed between the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R that are stopped. As for the medium decorative design 8C, the moving speed in the downward direction decreases, and as shown in FIG. 49 (I), the numbers are gradually visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (J), all symbols are stopped and displayed.

[Decorative design variation effect C]
FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect C. First, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. This decorative symbol variation effect is the same as FIG. 48 (G) of the decorative symbol variation effect A. That is, before the variation display of FIG. 50 (A), FIGS. 48 (A) to 48 (G) of the decorative symbol variation effect A may be executed. Next, the decorative symbol disappearing effect of FIG. 50 (B) is executed. The decorative symbol disappearance effect is the same as that in FIG. 48 (J) of the decorative symbol variation effect A. That is, FIGS. 48 (G) to 48 (J) of the decorative symbol variation effect A may be executed between the variation display in FIG. 50 (A) and the decorative symbol disappearance effect in FIG. 50 (B).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 50C, a left decorative design appearance effect is executed. Specifically, the left decorative design 8L gradually becomes visible as it moves from the upper side to the lower side on the curved track that is bent leftward while the moving speed decreases. More specifically, the left decorative design 8L appears from the upper left of the display screen 7a, goes to the vicinity of the center while drawing an arc, and goes to the lower left of the display screen 7a while drawing an arc. That is, the left decorative design 8L moves along a curved track curved in an arc. At this time, the image of the left decorative design 8L gradually increases as it moves.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 50D, a right decorative design appearance effect is executed. Specifically, the right decorative design 8R gradually becomes visible as it moves from the upper side to the lower side on the curved track that is bent in the right direction while the moving speed decreases. More specifically, the right decorative design 8R appears from the upper right of the display screen 7a, goes to the vicinity of the center while drawing an arc, and goes to the lower right of the display screen 7a while drawing an arc. That is, the right decorative design 8R moves along a curved track curved in an arc. At this time, the right decorative design 8R gradually increases in size as it moves.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (E), the medium decoration symbol appearance effect is executed. Specifically, with the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R being stopped and displayed in a reach state, the middle decorative symbol 8C moves from the upper side to the lower side on the straight track while the moving speed decreases. Gradually becomes visible. At this time, the image of the medium decorative design 8C gradually increases as it moves. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50 (F), the medium decorative design 8C becomes in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize again. Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (G), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are displayed with the three-dimensional figure rotated horizontally. Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (H), a special reach effect is executed. As the contents of the special reach production, any production can be performed. Here, as an example, a battle effect in which the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight is performed. When defeated by the battle effect, as shown in FIG. 50 (I), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are displayed in a state where the three-dimensional figures are horizontally rotated, and the middle decorative design 8C is displayed by the left decorative design 8L. Also, numbers different from the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50 (J), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed.

[Decorative design variation effect D]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect D. The decorative symbol variation effect D differs from the decorative symbol variation effect A of FIG. 48 in the direction in which the decorative symbols are arranged and the variation direction. In the decorative symbol variation effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 51A, the upper decorative symbol 8R, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the lower decorative symbol 8L are stopped and displayed. When the upper decorative symbol 8R, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the lower decorative symbol 8L are stopped and displayed, the positions of these display screens 7a in the left-right direction may be the same or different. 51A, the upper decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C have the same position in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a, and the lower decorative symbol 8L has the upper decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C. It is located on the left side. The upper decorative symbol 8R, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the lower decorative symbol 8L may be stopped and displayed in the same state in the left-right direction. The hold icons 9A are displayed side by side along the left-right direction below the display screen 7a.

  At the start of the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display), first, as shown in FIG. 51 (B), the upper decorative symbol 8R moves to the right. Next, as shown in FIG. 51C, the medium decorative design 8C moves to the right. The upper decorative pattern 8R that has moved to the right decreases in speed to the right as if it is sucked to the left, and turns back on the right side of the display screen 7a to start moving to the left. Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (D), the lower decorative design 8L moves to the right. The medium decorative design 8C that has moved to the right decreases in speed to the right as if it is sucked to the left, folds on the right side of the display screen 7a, and starts moving to the left. The upper decorative pattern 8R that has moved to the left increases in the movement speed in the left direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (E), the lower decorative pattern 8L that has moved to the right decreases in speed to the right as if it is sucked to the left, and on the right side of the display screen 7a. Turn around and start moving to the left. The medium decorative design 8C that has moved to the left increases in the movement speed in the left direction.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (F) and FIG. 51 (G), the upper decorative symbol 8R, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the lower decorative symbol 8L sequentially increase in moving speed in the left direction. It becomes a mode in which numbers are not visible. FIG. 51 (G) shows an aspect in which the upper decorative symbol 8R, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the lower decorative symbol 8L are variably displayed at high speed (constant speed). The movement direction when the upper decorative symbol 8R, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the lower decorative symbol 8L fluctuate is the same as the direction in which the hold icons 9A are arranged.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 51H, the variably displayed upper decorative symbol 8R disappears from the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative symbol 8C and the lower decorative symbol 8L are variably displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (I), the variably displayed middle decorative symbol 8C disappears from the display screen 7a, and the lower decorative symbol 8L is variably displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (J), the variably displayed lower decorative symbol 8L disappears from the display screen 7a, and all the variably displayed decorative symbols become difficult to visually recognize.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of the effect of a decoration design change effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, the first effect (FIG. 48) in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a. (A)), after the first effect, a second effect (FIG. 48 (G)) in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed; After the production, the left decorative symbol 8L that has been variably displayed disappears from the display screen 7a, and the third effect (FIG. 48 (H)) in which the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed, After the third effect, the fourth effect (FIG. 48 (I)) in which the middle decorative symbol 8C variably displayed disappears from the display screen 7a and the right decorative symbol 8R is variably displayed may be executed. it can. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 48 (B) to (F), the variation display in the second effect includes the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Each of them moves in the vertical direction, and at the start of the variable display, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R sequentially move upward, and then sequentially move downward. To do. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48A, in the stop display in the first effect, one of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The decorative symbol is different in the vertical position from the other two decorative symbols. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, in the second effect, a plurality of hold icons are arranged along the vertical direction. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 48 (I) and (J), after the fourth effect, the fifth effect in which the right decorative symbol 8R that is variably displayed disappears from the display screen 7a, As shown in FIGS. 49 (C) and 49 (D), after the fifth effect, the sixth effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed is shown again in FIG. 49 (F). Thus, after the sixth effect, it is possible to execute the seventh effect in which the right decorative design 8R moves upward while the left decorative design 8L is moving downward. ing. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49 (H), after the seventh effect, with the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R being stopped and displayed, the middle decorative symbol 8C is again displayed. It is possible to execute the eighth effect in which is displayed in a variable manner. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 48 (I), (J), and FIG. 50 (B), after the fourth effect, the right decoration symbol 8R that is variably displayed disappears from the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 50 (C), after the fifth effect, a sixth effect in which a left decorative symbol 8L that moves along a curved path is drawn after the fifth effect, As shown in FIG. 50 (D), after the sixth effect, a seventh effect in which a right decorative design 8R that moves along a trajectory curved so as to draw an arc is displayed, and FIG. 50 (E). As shown, after the seventh effect, it is possible to execute the eighth effect in which the middle decorative symbol 8C moving in the vertical direction is displayed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, in the sixth effect, the image of the left decorative symbol 8L increases with movement, and in the seventh effect, the right decorative symbol 8R increases with movement. In the seventh effect, the medium decorative design 8C becomes larger as it moves. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a decoration design change effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
48 (B) to 48 (D), the timing at which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start moving upward can be arbitrarily set. The interval at which each starts moving may be, for example, an interval of 1 second or an interval of 0.01 seconds. The same applies to FIGS. 51B to 51D.

[Modification 2]
In FIG. 48 (H) to FIG. 48 (J), the timing at which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are variably displayed, disappear from the display screen 7a can be arbitrarily set. The interval at which each disappears may be, for example, an interval of 1 second or an interval of 0.01 seconds. The same applies to FIGS. 51 (H) to 51 (J).

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first decorative design,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative design,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third decorative design,
A first effect in which the first decorative design, the second decorative design, and the third decorative design are stopped and displayed on the display means;
After the first effect, a second effect in which the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol are variably displayed;
After the second effect, a third effect in which the first decorative symbol variably displayed disappears from the display means, and the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol are variably displayed;
After the third effect, the second decoration symbol variably displayed disappears from the display means, and a fourth effect in which the third decoration symbol is variably displayed can be executed. A gaming machine.
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
The variable display in the second effect is such that the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol move along a first direction, respectively. At the start of the variable display, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol are sequentially moved toward one side in the first direction, and then the first decorative symbol is sequentially displayed. A gaming machine characterized by moving toward the other side of the direction.
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A1-2,
In the stop display in the first effect, one of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol is positioned in the first direction. Is different from the position of the other two decorative symbols.
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect A1-2 or aspect A1-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
In the second effect, a plurality of the hold icons are arranged along the first direction.
◇ [Aspect A1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A1-2 to A1-4,
After the fourth effect, a fifth effect in which the third decorative symbol variably displayed disappears from the display means;
After the fifth effect, a sixth effect in which the first decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol are variably displayed,
After the sixth effect, the third decorative symbol is moved to the other side in the first direction while the first decorative symbol is moving toward the other side in the first direction. A game machine characterized by being capable of performing a seventh performance that moves toward the.
◇ [Aspect A1-6]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A1-5,
After the seventh effect, the eighth effect in which the second decorative symbol is variably displayed can be executed again in a state where the first decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. A gaming machine characterized by this.
◇ [Aspect A1-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A1-2 to A1-4,
After the fourth effect, a fifth effect in which the third decorative symbol variably displayed disappears from the display means;
After the fifth effect, a sixth effect in which the first decorative symbol that moves along a trajectory curved so as to draw an arc is displayed;
After the sixth effect, a seventh effect in which the third decorative symbol moving along a trajectory curved so as to draw an arc is displayed;
After the seventh effect, an eighth effect in which the second decorative symbol moving along the first direction is displayed can be executed.
◇ [Aspect A1-8]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A1-7,
In the sixth performance, the first decorative symbol increases in size as it moves,
In the seventh performance, the image of the third decorative symbol increases as it moves,
In the seventh performance, the second decorative symbol has an image that increases with movement.

  The decorative symbol target effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. This decorative symbol target effect can be executed during a decorative symbol variation effect, a jackpot game, or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decoration symbol target effect, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Decorative design target production A]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol target effect A.
In the decorative symbol target effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 52 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (B), a target area display effect is executed. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 is set (displayed) in the area where the decorative design 8L has changed. This target area A21 is associated with the decorative design 8L and represents a state in which the display screen 7a is broken, and becomes a target for stopping the decorative design as will be described later. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative design 8L is set on the reach line LAA. The decorative design 8L is displayed in a variable manner within the target area A21. Thereby, it seems to the player that the decorative design 8L is variably displayed beyond the target area A21 on the display screen 7a. The other decorative symbols 8C and 8R are variably displayed in the same manner as during the variation start effect. Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol target effect A, an effect indicating whether or not a predetermined decorative symbol stops in the target area A21 is also referred to as a target effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (C), a decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In the decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the target area A21, and the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed. In this case, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed on the reach line LAA with a “6” symbol, and the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed on the reach line LAB with a “7” symbol. Since the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the target area A21, the target effect is successful.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52D, a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, a teammate character CRA and a chance-up image A22 including characters representing “Gekiatsu” are displayed, and the teammate character CRA screams “Gekiatsu”. The “super hot” represented by the chance-up image A22 suggests that the degree of expectation for jackpot is very high.
Instead of this chance-up effect, another effect may be performed. For example, a timer display effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, an accessory moving effect, and the like may be performed.

  In FIG. 52C, there is a case where the decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed on the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8L (for example, a blank symbol is stopped and displayed). In this case, the target effect is a failure, and the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 52 (D) is not performed.

[Decorative design target effect B]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol target effect A.
In the decorative symbol target effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 53 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (B), a target area display effect is executed. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 is set (displayed) for each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. That is, the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative design 8L has changed, the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative design 8C has changed, and the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative design 8R has changed. Is set. This target area A21 is associated with each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and represents a state in which the display screen 7a is broken, and becomes a target when the decorative symbol is stopped as will be described later. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative design 8L is set on the reach line LAA, and the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative design 8C, 8R is set on the LBB. Further, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed in the corresponding target area A21. That is, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed in a variable manner in the target area A21, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner in the target region A21, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a variable manner in the target region A21. Thereby, it seems to the player that each decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the other side of the target area A21 on the display screen 7a. Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol target effect B, an effect indicating whether or not a predetermined decorative symbol stops in the target area A21 is also referred to as a target effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (C), a decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the target area A21. That is, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8L, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in the target region A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8C, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the decorative symbol 8R. Is stopped and displayed in the target area A21. In this case, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed on the reach line LAA with the symbol “6”, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed on the reach line LAB with the symbol “6”, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the reach line LAB. Is stopped and displayed with the symbol “7” In each target area A21, the decorative design is stopped and displayed, so that the target effect is successful.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53D, a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, a teammate character CRA and a chance-up image A22 including characters representing “Gekiatsu” are displayed, and the teammate character CRA screams “Gekiatsu”. The “super hot” represented by the chance-up image A22 suggests that the degree of expectation for jackpot is very high.
Instead of this chance-up effect, another effect may be performed. For example, a timer display effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, an accessory moving effect, and the like may be performed.

  In FIG. 53C, among the target areas A21, there is a case where there is a target area A21 where the decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed (for example, when a blank symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific target area A21). In this case, the target effect is a failure, and the chance-up effect of FIG. 53 (D) is not performed.

[Decorative design target effect C]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol target effect C. As shown in FIG.
In the decorative symbol target effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 54 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), a target area display effect is executed. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 is set (displayed) for each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. That is, the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative design 8L has changed, the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative design 8C has changed, and the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative design 8R has changed. Is set. This target area A21 is associated with each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and represents a state in which the display screen 7a is broken, and becomes a target when the decorative symbol is stopped as will be described later. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative design 8L is set on the reach line LAA, and the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative design 8C, 8R is set on the LBB. Further, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed in the corresponding target area A21. That is, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed in a variable manner in the target area A21, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner in the target region A21, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a variable manner in the target region A21. Thereby, it seems to the player that each decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the other side of the target area A21 on the display screen 7a. Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol target effect C, an effect indicating whether or not a predetermined decorative symbol stops in the target area A21 is also referred to as a target effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 54C, a decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the target area A21. That is, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8L, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in the target region A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8C, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the decorative symbol 8R. Is stopped and displayed in the target area A21. In this case, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed on the reach line LAA with the symbol “6”, and the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed on the reach line LAB with the symbol “6”. In each target area A21, the same decorative design (here, “6” design) is stopped and displayed, so that the target effect is successful.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54D, a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a teammate character CRA and a timer image A23 are displayed. The timer image A23 represents a predetermined timer value. When the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 0:00), it is suggested that an effect with high expectation is executed.
Instead of this timer display effect, other effects may be performed. For example, a chance-up display effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, an accessory moving effect, etc. may be performed.

  In FIG. 54C, there is a case where the same decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed in each target area A21 (for example, a blank symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific target area A21). In this case, the target effect is a failure, and the timer display effect of FIG. 54 (D) is not performed.

[Decorative design target effect D]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol target effect D. As shown in FIG.
In the decorative symbol target effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 55 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), a target area display effect is executed. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 is set (displayed) for each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. That is, the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative design 8L has changed, the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative design 8C has changed, and the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative design 8R has changed. Is set. This target area A21 is associated with each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and represents a state in which the display screen 7a is broken, and becomes a target when the decorative symbol is stopped as will be described later. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative design 8L is set on the reach line LAA, and the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative design 8C, 8R is set on the LBB. Further, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed in the corresponding target area A21. That is, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed in a variable manner in the target area A21, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner in the target region A21, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a variable manner in the target region A21. Thereby, it seems to the player that each decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the other side of the target area A21 on the display screen 7a. Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol target effect D, an effect indicating whether or not a predetermined decorative symbol stops in the target area A21 is also referred to as a target effect.

  In this target area display effect, a target symbol suggestion image A25 and a button image A24 are displayed. The button image A24 is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63. The target symbol suggestion image A25 suggests a specific decorative symbol that should be stopped and displayed in the target area A21 in the target effect. Here, the target symbol suggestion image A25 suggests that the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the target area A21 in the target effect is the “6” symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 55C, a decorative symbol stop effect (button press effect) is executed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the target area A21 when the player presses the effect button 63. That is, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8L, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in the target region A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8C, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the decorative symbol 8R. Is stopped and displayed in the target area A21. In this case, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed on the reach line LAA with the symbol “6”, and the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed on the reach line LAB with the symbol “6”. In each target area A21, the decorative design (here, “6” symbol) suggested in the target symbol suggestion image A25 is stopped and displayed, so that the target effect is successful.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (D), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a teammate character CRA and a timer image A23 are displayed. The timer image A23 represents a predetermined timer value. When the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 0:00), it is suggested that an effect with high expectation is executed.
Instead of this timer display effect, other effects may be performed. For example, a chance-up display effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, an accessory moving effect, etc. may be performed.

  In FIG. 55 (C), in each target area A21, when the decorative design suggested in the target design suggestion image A25 is not stopped and displayed (for example, when a blank design is stopped and displayed in a specific target area A21, specified In the target area A21, a decorative symbol other than the decorative symbol suggested in the target symbol suggestion image A25 is displayed. In this case, the target effect is a failure, and the timer display effect of FIG. 55 (D) is not performed.

  The decorative symbol target effects A to D are executed before the reach effect is formed by the decorative symbol and the reach effect is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbol target effects A to D may be performed during the reach effect.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of the effect of a decoration design target production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the target area A21 is displayed when the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the decorative symbol target effect, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the target area A21. A chance-up effect and a timer display effect are performed. According to this configuration, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined whether or not the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is performed based on whether or not the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the target area A21. The player can be paid attention to the stop display of the decorative symbol, and the interest at the time of the stop display of the decorative symbol can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol target effect, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, the target area A21 is set corresponding to each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. According to this configuration, the player can be focused on the stop display of each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the interest at the time of the decorative symbol stop display can be further improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol target effect, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, the chance is based on the fact that one decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in each target area A21 in the target region display effect. Up production and timer display production are performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the stop display of each of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and to further improve the interest at the time of displaying the decorative symbols stopped it can. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative symbol target effect is performed from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the start of the reach effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the stop display of the decorative symbol even before reaching the reach effect, and it is possible to further improve the interest during the stop display of the decorative symbol. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol target effect, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, based on the fact that a specific decorative symbol (in the above example, the decorative symbol “6”) is stopped and displayed, A predetermined effect (timer display effect) is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the stop display of a specific decorative design, and it is possible to further improve the interest at the time of display stop of the decorative design. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a decoration design target effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative symbol target effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a plurality of decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed in the target area A21 instead of one decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the target area A21.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative symbol target effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, other objects, for example, characters and characters may be stopped and displayed in the target area A21 instead of the decorative symbol.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative symbol target effects B to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the target area A21 may be set to the same reach line, or may be set to different reach lines. For example, the target area A21 may be set to reach line LAA, reach line LAB, and reach line LAC, respectively.

[Modification 4]
In the decorative symbol target effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when setting the target area A21, a plurality of target areas A21 are set for each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R instead of one target area A21. You may make it do.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, another display device (also referred to as another display device) may be provided in front of the display device 7. Then, in the decorative symbol target effect, the display area 7 may perform the change and stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R by setting the target area A21 in another display device. Further, the target area A21 may be set on the display device 7 so that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed and stopped on another display device.

[Modification 6]
In the decorative design target effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after setting the target area A21 and stopping and displaying the decorative design, the target area A21 is moved so that the specific decorative design is included in the target area A21. May be.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of changing a decorative pattern,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a target area for the decoration symbol to stop on the display means,
The third display effect is an effect of performing a predetermined effect,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and in the second display effect, the target region is set. The third display effect is performed based on the stop display of the decorative design.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A2-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect A2-1,
The decorative design has a plurality of decorative design groups,
The target area has a plurality of target areas,
The first display effect is an effect of performing each variation of the plurality of decorative symbols.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the plurality of target areas on the display means,
In the second display effect, the plurality of target regions are displayed in the same number as the number of the plurality of decorative symbol groups, and one decorative symbol group is associated with one target region.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A2-2,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed based on the fact that one decoration symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of target areas in the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A2-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A2-1 to A2-3,
The combination effect is performed before the start of reach production from the start of variation of the decorative design,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A2-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A2-1 to A2-4,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed. In the second display effect, the target area is The third display effect is performed based on the specific decorative design being stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The reach decorative pattern superimposing effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59. This reach decoration pattern superimposing effect can be executed during decoration effect variation effect (during reach effect) or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the reach decorative symbol overlay effect, the corresponding image data or drive data from the ROM 103 is included. Is an effect of reading the image and displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Decoration design overlay effect A during reach]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern superimposing effect A during reach.
In the reach decorative pattern superimposing effect A, first, the reach effect 1 is executed as shown in FIG. In the reach effect 1, the reach state is formed by causing the decorative symbols 8L and 8R to be stopped and displayed on the reach line LX1 and displaying the decorative symbol 8C at high speed. In FIG. 56 (A), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed as “7” symbols, and the reach state is formed using the “7” symbols.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), reach effect 2 is executed. In the reach effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C is changed at a low speed, and the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed so as not to overlap the line LX2. In this case, the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed with higher transparency than the decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state. The two decorative symbols 8C are displayed between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R. In FIG. 56 (B), “7” symbols are displayed as two decorative symbols 8C. Hereinafter, in the two decorative symbols 8C, one decorative symbol 8C is also referred to as a first decorative symbol 8C, and the other decorative symbol 8C is also referred to as a second decorative symbol 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 56C, reach effect 3 is executed. In this reach effect 3, an effect in which the two decorative symbols 8C gradually approach is executed. Specifically, the first decorative design 8C approaches the second decorative design 8C, and the second decorative design 8C approaches the first decorative design 8C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative design 8C may be stopped, and the second decorative design 8C may move so as to approach the first decorative design 8C. In this case, the decorative symbols 8C may move at the same speed as each other, or one may move at a faster speed than the other. Further, the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped, the second decorative symbol 8C moves so as to approach the first decorative symbol 8C, and then the second decorative symbol 8C is stopped, and then the first decorative symbol 8C. The design 8C may move so as to approach the direction of the second decorative design 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (D), reach effect 4 is executed. In this reach effect 4, the effect that two decorative symbols 8C are superimposed (combined) to become one decorative symbol 8C is executed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (“7” symbols are displayed on the reach line LX1. ) Is displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C after being superimposed has a lower transmittance than the two decorative patterns 8C before being superimposed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (E), a jackpot symbol display effect is executed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, a jackpot symbol array using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R ("7" symbols) is displayed on the line LX2.
Next, after execution of the jackpot symbol display effect, the second movable accessory 15 is moved to the unfolded position, and an effect of emphasizing the jackpot is performed.

[Decoration design overlay B during reach]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the reach decorative pattern superimposition effect B.
In the reach decorative pattern superimposing effect B, first, the reach effect 1 is executed as shown in FIG. In the reach production 1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed on the reach line LX1 and the reach line LX3, and the decorative symbol 8C is displayed at a high speed so as to form a W reach state (double reach state). . In FIG. 57A, on the reach line LX1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the symbol “7”, and the reach state is formed using the symbol “7”. On the reach line LX3, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed as “6” symbols, and the reach state is formed using the “6” symbols. That is, the W reach state of “6” symbol and “7” symbol is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), reach effect 2 is executed. In the reach effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C is changed at a low speed, and the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed so as not to overlap the line LX2. In this case, the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed with higher transparency than the decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state. The two decorative symbols 8C are displayed between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R. In FIG. 57 (B), “6” symbols are displayed as the two decorative symbols 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), reach effect 3 is executed. In this reach effect 3, an effect in which the two decorative symbols 8C gradually approach is executed. Specifically, the first decorative design 8C approaches the second decorative design 8C, and the second decorative design 8C approaches the first decorative design 8C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative design 8C may be stopped, and the second decorative design 8C may move so as to approach the first decorative design 8C. In this case, the decorative symbols 8C may move at the same speed as each other, or one may move at a faster speed than the other. Further, the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped, the second decorative symbol 8C moves so as to approach the first decorative symbol 8C, and then the second decorative symbol 8C is stopped, and then the first decorative symbol 8C. The design 8C may move so as to approach the direction of the second decorative design 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (D), reach effect 4 is executed. In this reach effect 4, the effect that two decorative symbols 8C are superimposed (combined) to become one decorative symbol 8C is executed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (“6” symbols are displayed on the reach line LX3. ) Is displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C after being superimposed has a lower transmittance than the two decorative patterns 8C before being superimposed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (E), a jackpot symbol display effect is executed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, a jackpot symbol array using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R ("6" symbols) is displayed on the line LX2.
Next, after execution of the jackpot symbol display effect, the second movable accessory 15 is moved to the unfolded position, and an effect of emphasizing the jackpot is performed.

[Decoration design overlay effect C during reach]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the reach decorative pattern superimposing effect C.
In the reach decorative pattern superimposing effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), reach effect 1 is executed. In the reach production 1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed on the reach line LX1 and the reach line LX3, and the decorative symbol 8C is displayed at a high speed so as to form a W reach state (double reach state). . In FIG. 58 (A), on the reach line LX1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed as “7” symbols, and the reach state is formed using the “7” symbols. On the reach line LX3, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed as “6” symbols, and the reach state is formed using the “6” symbols. That is, the W reach state of “6” symbol and “7” symbol is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), reach effect 2 is executed. In the reach effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C is changed at a low speed, and the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed so as not to overlap the line LX2. In this case, the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed with higher transparency than the decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state. The two decorative symbols 8C are displayed between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R. In FIG. 58 (B), “6” symbols are displayed as the two decorative symbols 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), reach effect 3 is executed. In this reach effect 3, an effect in which the two decorative symbols 8C gradually approach is executed. Specifically, the first decorative design 8C approaches the second decorative design 8C, and the second decorative design 8C approaches the first decorative design 8C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative design 8C may be stopped, and the second decorative design 8C may move so as to approach the first decorative design 8C. In this case, the decorative symbols 8C may move at the same speed as each other, or one may move at a faster speed than the other. Further, the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped, the second decorative symbol 8C moves so as to approach the first decorative symbol 8C, and then the second decorative symbol 8C is stopped, and then the first decorative symbol 8C. The design 8C may move so as to approach the direction of the second decorative design 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (D), reach effect 4 is executed. In this reach effect 4, the effect that the two decorative symbols 8C are combined into one decorative symbol 8C is executed. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C before the combination is the “6” symbol, but the decorative symbol 8C after the combination is the “8” symbol. The decorative pattern 8C after being combined has lower transmittance than the two decorative patterns 8C before being combined. As a result, a lost symbol array using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the reach line LX3.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (E), reach effect 5 is executed. In the reach effect 5, the decorative symbol 8C is changed again at a low speed, and the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed so as not to overlap the line LX2. In this case, the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed with higher transparency than the decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state. The two decorative symbols 8C are displayed between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R. In FIG. 58E, “7” symbols are displayed as two decorative symbols 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (F), reach effect 6 is executed. In this reach effect 3, an effect in which the two decorative symbols 8C gradually approach is executed. Specifically, the first decorative design 8C approaches the second decorative design 8C, and the second decorative design 8C approaches the first decorative design 8C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative design 8C may be stopped, and the second decorative design 8C may move so as to approach the first decorative design 8C. In this case, the decorative symbols 8C may move at the same speed as each other, or one may move at a faster speed than the other. Further, the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped, the second decorative symbol 8C moves so as to approach the first decorative symbol 8C, and then the second decorative symbol 8C is stopped, and then the first decorative symbol 8C. The design 8C may move so as to approach the direction of the second decorative design 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (G), reach effect 7 is executed. In this reach effect 7, the effect that two decorative symbols 8C are superimposed (combined) to become one decorative symbol 8C is executed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (“7” symbols are displayed on the reach line LX3. ) Is displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C after being superimposed has a lower transmittance than the two decorative patterns 8C before being superimposed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (H), a jackpot symbol display effect is executed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, a jackpot symbol array using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R ("7" symbols) is displayed on the line LX2.
Next, after execution of the jackpot symbol display effect, the second movable accessory 15 is moved to the unfolded position, and an effect of emphasizing the jackpot is performed.

[Decoration effect superposition effect D during reach]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the reach decorative pattern superimposing effect D. FIG.
In the reach decorative pattern overlay effect D, first, the reach effect 1 is executed as shown in FIG. In the reach effect 1, the reach state is formed by causing the decorative symbols 8L and 8R to be stopped and displayed on the reach line LX1 and displaying the decorative symbol 8C at high speed. In FIG. 59 (A), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed as “7” symbols, and the reach state is formed using the “7” symbols.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), reach effect 2 is executed. In the reach effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C is changed at a low speed, and the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed so as not to overlap the line LX2. In this case, the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed with higher transparency than the decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state. The two decorative symbols 8C are displayed between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R. In FIG. 59B, “7” symbols are displayed as two decorative symbols 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), reach effect 3 is executed. In this reach effect 3, an effect in which the two decorative symbols 8C gradually approach is executed. Specifically, the first decorative design 8C approaches the second decorative design 8C, and the second decorative design 8C approaches the first decorative design 8C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative design 8C may be stopped, and the second decorative design 8C may move so as to approach the first decorative design 8C. In this case, the decorative symbols 8C may move at the same speed as each other, or one may move at a faster speed than the other. Further, the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped, the second decorative symbol 8C moves so as to approach the first decorative symbol 8C, and then the second decorative symbol 8C is stopped, and then the first decorative symbol 8C. The design 8C may move so as to approach the direction of the second decorative design 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (D), reach effect 4 is executed. In this reach effect 4, the effect that two decorative symbols 8C are superimposed (combined) to become one decorative symbol 8C is executed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (“7” symbols are displayed on the reach line LX1. ) Is displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C after being superimposed has a lower transmittance than the two decorative patterns 8C before being superimposed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (E), a jackpot symbol display effect 1 is executed. In the jackpot symbol display effect 1, the decorative symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed as compared with the reach effect 4 o'clock. In this case, the decorative design 8C may be displayed large enough to overlap the decorative design 8L, 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (F), jackpot symbol display effect 2 is executed. In the jackpot symbol display effect 2, a jackpot symbol array using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R ("7" symbols) is displayed on the line LX2.
Next, after the jackpot symbol display effect 2 is executed, the second movable accessory 15 is moved to the unfolded position, and the effect of emphasizing the jackpot is performed.

[Example of effects]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative pattern superimposing effect at the time of reach is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the reach decoration effect superimposing effect, the reach effect 2 and 5 are arranged so that the two decorative symbols 8C do not overlap the line LX2, and the reach effect 3 and 6 are The decorative design 8C is approached, and in the reach effects 4 and 7, the two decorative designs 8C are overlapped (combined) to generate a decorative design 8C having low permeability, and the decorative design 8C and the decoration that forms a reach state A jackpot symbol array is formed using symbols 8L and 8R. According to this configuration, two decorative symbols 8C having high transparency are superimposed (combined) to form a jackpot symbol array, so that the player pays attention to the two decorative symbols 8C and superimposes them. (Union) will be expected. As a result, the interest in reach production can be greatly improved, and the interest of games can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the reach decorative pattern superimposing effect, the two decorative symbols 8C to be superimposed by the reach effect and the decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state are the same symbol. According to this configuration, the player can recognize that if the two decorative symbols 8C are superimposed (combined), the player can recognize that it is a big hit, and the superimposed effect of the two decorative symbols 8C is greatly excited, which makes the game more interesting. Can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the reach decorative effect superimposing effect, the decorative symbol 8C generated by superimposing the two decorative symbols 8C in the reach effect, and the decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state are provided. Used to construct a jackpot symbol array. According to this configuration, since the player becomes a big hit if the two decorative symbols 8C are superimposed (combined), the superimposed effect of the two decorative symbols 8C is greatly excited and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the reach decorative pattern superimposing effects B and C, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed to form the W reach state, and the two decorative symbols 8C are superimposed. Then, in the reach decorative pattern superimposing effect B, a jackpot symbol array is formed on the reach line LX3 using the superimposed decorative design 8C, and in the reach decorative pattern superimposing effect C, the superimposed decorative design 8C is used. Thus, a jackpot symbol array is formed on the reach line LX1. According to this configuration, if the two decorative designs 8C are successfully superimposed in either one of the two superimposing effects using the two decorative symbols 8C, it will be a big hit. A greater sense of expectation can be given to the superimposed effect in the W reach state than the time. As a result, the effect of superimposing the two decorative symbols 8C is greatly excited, and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the reach decorative symbol superimposing effect, after executing the jackpot symbol display effect, the second movable accessory 15 is moved to the deployed position and the effect of emphasizing the jackpot is performed. According to this configuration, it can be emphasized that the player has won a big hit due to the superimposed effect of the two decorative symbols 8C in the reach state, and then the player has two decorative symbols in the reach state. When the 8C superimposing effect is experienced, an expectation can be given to the superimposing effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the decoration design superimposed effect at the time of reach is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the reach decorative pattern superimposing effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative pattern 8C generated by superimposing the two decorative symbols 8C and the decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state are used in the reach effect. Instead of a jackpot symbol array, a chance symbol pattern array representing a chance eye, a prefetch suggestion symbol array suggesting a prefetch effect (pre-determination effect), and a pseudo continuous effect suggestion symbol array indicating a pseudo continuous effect are formed. Also good.

[Modification 2]
In the reach decorative pattern superimposing effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect of moving the second movable accessory 15 to the unfolded position is performed when the two decorative symbols 8C are successfully superimposed. Also good.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the reach decoration symbol superimposing effect and the character appearance effect described later may be performed with the same variation. For example, in the same variation, after executing the character appearance effect, the reach decorative pattern overlay effect may be performed, or after the reach decorative symbol overlay effect, the character appearance effect may be performed, You may make it perform a decoration symbol superimposition production | presentation and a character appearance production simultaneously.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the two decorative symbols 8C having high transparency are displayed during the reach decorative symbol superimposing effect, a predetermined character or character is displayed on the background of the two decorative symbols 8C. May be. After that, when the two decorative symbols 8C are successfully superimposed, a part or all of these characters and characters may be made invisible by the decorative symbol 8C generated by the superposition.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect A3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of forming a first reach state using a first decorative design,
In the second display effect, a second decorative symbol having a higher transparency than the first decorative symbol is displayed at a first position, and a third decorative symbol having a higher transparency than the first decorative symbol is displayed. At a second position different from the first position,
In the third display effect, the second decorative design is moved from the first position, the third decorative design is moved from the second position, and the second decorative design and the first display are moved. 3 decoration designs are superimposed to produce the second decoration design and a fourth decoration design that is less permeable than the third decoration design,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed, and the third display effect is performed after the second display effect. Display effect is performed, and using the first decorative design forming the first reach state in the first display effect and the fourth decorative design generated in the third display effect. A first symbol array is formed;
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A3-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect A3-1,
The first decorative symbol that forms the first reach state in the first display effect and the fourth decorative symbol generated in the third display effect are the same symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A3-1 or aspect A3-2,
As the first symbol arrangement, the first decorative symbol forming the first reach state in the first display effect and the fourth decorative symbol generated in the third display effect are used. A jackpot symbol arrangement is formed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A3-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A3-1 to A3-3,
In the first display effect, a first reach state is formed using the first decorative design, and a second reach state different from the first reach state is formed using a fifth decorative design. It is a production to form,
In the combination effect, the second decoration symbol is generated using the fifth decoration symbol that forms the second reach state in the first display effect and the fourth decoration symbol generated in the third display effect. The pattern arrangement of
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A3-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A3-1 to A3-4,
In the combination effect, after the first symbol arrangement is formed, an accessory effect that moves a predetermined accessory is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The character appearance effects will be described below with reference to FIGS. This character appearance effect can be executed during a decorative symbol variation effect, a jackpot game, or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and reads the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 when an instruction to execute the target area display effect is included. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Character appearance effect A]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the character appearance effect A.
In the character appearance effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), a decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state of being stopped in the lost symbol arrangement. In FIG. 60A, the decorative symbol 8L is a “6” symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is a “8” symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is a “7” symbol. In this state, the special symbol has not changed yet.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 60C, a reach formation effect is executed. In this reach formation effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed on the reach line LX1 and the reach line LX3, and the decorative symbol 8C is displayed with high-speed fluctuation to form a W reach state (double reach state). . In FIG. 60A, on the reach line LX1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed as “6” symbols, and the reach state is formed using the “6” symbols. On the reach line LX3, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at the “7” symbol, and the reach state is formed using the “7” symbol. That is, the W reach state of “6” symbol and “7” symbol is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60D, character appearance effect 1 is executed. In this character appearance effect 1, the decorative design 8C changes at a low speed and is displayed between the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R. Further, in the character appearance effect 1, the character image A41 is arranged on the back side (back) of the decorative symbol 8C that fluctuates at a low speed. In this case, the entire area of the character image A41 is located on the back (back) of the decorative design 8C. Further, the decorative design 8C has such a degree of transparency as to make the character image A41 completely invisible when viewed from the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative design 8C may have a transparency that allows the character image A41 to be slightly seen. In FIG. 60D, a “7” symbol is displayed as the decorative symbol 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60E, character appearance effect 2 is executed. In this character appearance effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C continues to change at low speed, and the transparency is higher than that in the character appearance effect 1. Therefore, in this character appearance effect 2, the character image A41 located on the back side of the decorative design 8C can be visually recognized by the player.

  In the character appearance effects 1 and 2, the decorative design 8C fluctuates at a low speed, but may stop.

  If character image A41 appears in character appearance effect 2, then a super reach effect is performed. Thus, the appearance of the character image A41 suggests that it will develop into a super reach production.

[Character appearance effect B]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the character appearance effect B. As shown in FIG.
In the character appearance effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), a decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state of being stopped in the lost symbol arrangement. In FIG. 60A, the decorative symbol 8L is a “6” symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is a “8” symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is a “7” symbol. In this state, the special symbol has not changed yet.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), a reach formation effect is executed. In this reach formation effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed on the reach line LX1 and the reach line LX3, and the decorative symbol 8C is displayed with high-speed fluctuation to form a W reach state (double reach state). . In FIG. 61A, on the reach line LX1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed as “6” symbols, and the reach state is formed using the “6” symbols. On the reach line LX3, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at the “7” symbol, and the reach state is formed using the “7” symbol. That is, the W reach state of “6” symbol and “7” symbol is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), character appearance effect 1 is executed. In this character appearance effect 1, the decorative design 8C changes at a low speed and is displayed between the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R. Further, in the character appearance effect 1, the character image A41 is arranged on the back side (back) of the decorative symbol 8C that fluctuates at a low speed. In this case, part of the character image A41 is located on the back side of the decorative design 8C, and part of the character image A41 protrudes from the decorative design 8C. Further, the decorative design 8C has such a degree of transparency as to make the character image A41 completely invisible when viewed from the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative design 8C may have a transparency that allows the character image A41 to be slightly seen. In FIG. 61 (D), the symbol “7” is displayed as the decorative symbol 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (E), the character appearance effect 2 is executed. In this character appearance effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C continues to change at low speed, and the transparency is higher than that in the character appearance effect 1. Therefore, in this character appearance effect 2, the character image A41 (part) positioned on the back of the decorative design 8C is visible to the player, that is, the entire character image A41 is visible to the player.

  In the character appearance effects 1 and 2, the decorative design 8C fluctuates at a low speed, but may stop.

  If character image A41 appears in character appearance effect 2, then a super reach effect is performed. Thus, the appearance of the character image A41 suggests that it will develop into a super reach production.

[Character appearance effect C]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the character appearance effect C. As shown in FIG.
In the character appearance effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), a decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state of being stopped in the lost symbol arrangement. In FIG. 60A, the decorative symbol 8L is a “6” symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is a “8” symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is a “7” symbol. In this state, the special symbol has not changed yet.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), the change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 62C, a reach formation effect is executed. In this reach formation effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed on the reach line LX1 and the reach line LX3, and the decorative symbol 8C is displayed with high-speed fluctuation to form a W reach state (double reach state). . In FIG. 62A, on the reach line LX1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed as “6” symbols, and the reach state is formed using the “6” symbols. On the reach line LX3, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at the “7” symbol, and the reach state is formed using the “7” symbol. That is, the W reach state of “6” symbol and “7” symbol is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), a jackpot finalizing effect is executed. In this jackpot finalizing effect, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the symbol “7”, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all “7” symbols, and the jackpot symbol array is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. As a result, the player knows that the player has won a jackpot. In this jackpot finalizing effect, the character image A41 is arranged on the back (back) of the decorative design 8C. In this case, the entire area of the character image A41 is located on the back of the decorative symbol 8C. Further, the decorative design 8C has such a degree of transparency as to make the character image A41 completely invisible when viewed from the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative design 8C may have a transparency that allows the character image A41 to be slightly seen.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62E, a character appearance effect is executed. In this character appearance effect, the decorative design 8C has a higher transparency than that in the jackpot finalizing effect. Therefore, in this character appearance effect, the player can visually recognize the character image A41 located on the back of the decorative pattern 8C.

  In the jackpot finalizing effect, the character image A41 is configured such that the entire region is positioned behind the decorative design 8C, but the character image A41 is partially positioned behind the decorative design 8C and partially decorated. The structure may protrude from the pattern 8C.

  When the character image A41 appears in the character appearance effect, the appearance of the character image A41 suggests that something advantageous for the player occurs. For example, when the character image A41 appears, the appearance of the character image A41 may indicate that there is a jackpot in the hold (holding ball chain), and in the jackpot game, 16R (maximum round Number) It may indicate that it is a decisive jackpot, or it may indicate that the gaming state after the jackpot game is advantageous to the player (probability change state).

[Character appearance effect D]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the character appearance effect D. As shown in FIG.
In the character appearance effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), a decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state of being stopped in the lost symbol arrangement. In FIG. 60A, the decorative symbol 8L is a “6” symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is a “8” symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is a “7” symbol. In this state, the special symbol has not changed yet.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), a reach formation effect is executed. In this reach formation effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed on the reach line LX1 and the reach line LX3, and the decorative symbol 8C is displayed with high-speed fluctuation to form a W reach state (double reach state). . In FIG. 63A, on the reach line LX1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed as “6” symbols, and the reach state is formed using the “6” symbols. On the reach line LX3, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at the “7” symbol, and the reach state is formed using the “7” symbol. That is, the W reach state of “6” symbol and “7” symbol is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), the character appearance effect 1 is executed. In this character appearance effect 1, the decorative design 8C changes at a low speed and is displayed between the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R. In the character appearance effect 1, two character images A43 are arranged on the back (back) of the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, respectively. In this case, a part of the character image A41 protrudes from the decorative design, and a part thereof is located on the back of the decorative design 8C. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have such a degree of transparency that the character image A43 is completely invisible when viewed from the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may have such a degree of transparency that the character image A43 can be seen slightly. In FIG. 63D, “7” symbol is displayed as the decorative symbol 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (E), the character appearance effect 2 is executed. In the character appearance effect 2, the decoration symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at a low speed, and the transparency of the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is higher than that in the character appearance effect 1. Therefore, in this character appearance effect 2, the player can visually recognize the character image A43 located on the back of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the character appearance effects 1 and 2, the decorative design 8C fluctuates at a low speed, but may stop. In the character appearance effect 1, the character image A43 may have a configuration in which the entire area is arranged on the back of the decorative symbol 8L or the decorative symbol 8R.

  If character image A43 appears in character appearance effect 2, then a super reach effect is performed. Thus, the appearance of the character image A43 suggests that it will develop into a super reach production.

[Example of effects]
The following are examples of effects for character appearance effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the decorative symbol 8C is displayed with relatively high transparency in the character appearance effects A to C, the character image A41 is disposed on the back of the eight decorative symbol 8C. After that, when the decorative design 8C is displayed with a relatively low transparency, the character image A41 is displayed so as to be visible through the decorative design 8C. In the character appearance effect D, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed with relatively high transparency, the character image A43 is placed behind the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Thereafter, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a state where the transparency is relatively low, the character image A43 is displayed so as to be visible through the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. According to this configuration, since the character image hidden in the decorative design appears when the decorative design transparency increases, a great surprise can be given to the player. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character appearance effects A and B, when the decorative symbol 8C is variably displayed with relatively high transparency, the character image A41 is arranged on the back of the eight decorative symbol 8C. After that, when the decorative design 8C is displayed in a state where the transparency is relatively low, the character image A41 is displayed so as to be visible through the decorative design 8C. According to this configuration, since the character image hidden in the decorative symbol 8C being displayed in a variable manner appears when the decorative symbol is increased in transparency, the player is given a great sense of surprise during the decorative symbol variable display. Can do. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character appearance effects A and B, after the decorative symbol 8C is displayed with high-speed fluctuation, the character image is displayed when the decorative symbol 8C is displayed with low-speed fluctuation with relatively high transparency. When A41 is arranged on the back side of the decorative design 8C, and then the decorative design 8C is displayed in a state where the transparency is relatively low, the character image A41 is displayed so as to be visible through the decorative design 8C. According to this configuration, since the character image hidden in the decorative symbol 8C during the low-speed fluctuation display appears when the decorative symbol transparency increases, the appearance of the character image can be impressed to the player, and the player Can give a big surprise. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the character appearance effect C, the character image A41 is arranged on the back side of the decorative symbol 8C that is relatively high in transparency and is stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the character image A41 is displayed so as to be visible to the player through the decorative pattern 8C that is stopped and displayed, so that the player can be impressed with the appearance of the character image. As a result, even when the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed and is boring, a great sense of surprise can be given to the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the character appearance effect, the character image may be arranged on the back of the decorative pattern having a relatively low transparency in the character appearance effect 1 or the jackpot finalizing effect. At this time, the character image (all or part of the character image) becomes invisible to the player by the decorative design. According to this configuration, by creating the invisible state, the next character appearance can be emphasized, and the character appearance effect can be made more interesting. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a character appearance effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the character appearance effects A, B, and D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the appearance of the character image A41 suggests that it develops into a super reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the appearance of the character image A41 may be suggested to develop into a pseudo-continuous effect, a prefetch effect, a chance-up effect, and the like. In this case, when the character image A41 appears, a pseudo-continuous effect, a pre-reading effect, and a chance-up effect are performed.
Further, the appearance of the character image A41 may be a big hit suggestion.

[Modification 2]
In the character appearance effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the appearance of the character images A41 and A43 was during the character appearance effect 1 and the jackpot finalizing effect, but during the decorative symbol stop effect, during the change start effect, and the reach formation effect. It may be done at times. Thereafter, the character appearance effect and the jackpot finalizing effect shown in FIGS.

[Modification 3]
In the character appearance effects A, B, and D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, first, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a low-speed fluctuation manner with the “6” symbol, and at that time, the character appearance effect 1 is executed, and then the decorative symbol 8C. The character appearance effect 2 may be executed at the time when the low-speed fluctuation display is performed with the “7” symbol. That is, in the character appearance effects A, B, and D, in the W reach state, the character appearance effect 1 is first performed with the reach of one reach line, and the character appearance effect 2 is performed with the reach of the other reach line. May be.

[Modification 4]
In the character appearance effects A to C of the gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment, the character image A41 is a character appearance effect. In FIG. 60, it is arranged so as to be hidden behind the “7” symbol) and appears when the transparency of the decorative symbol 8C increases, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the character appearance effect, when the character image A41 is stopped, the decorative symbol 8C that cannot constitute the jackpot symbol array together with the decorative symbols 8L and 8R (for example, “8” symbol in the situation of FIG. 60). It may be arranged so as to be hidden, and may appear when the transparency of the decorative design 8C increases.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a decorative design with a first transparency,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the decorative design with a second transparency higher than the first transparency.
The third display effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined character,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed. When the second display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed. The predetermined character in the third display effect may be disposed behind the decorative symbol displayed with the second transparency, and may be displayed so as to be visible through the decorative symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A4-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect A4-1,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of forming a reach state using the decorative design,
The reach decorative pattern includes a stopped decorative pattern and a fluctuating decorative pattern,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, when the fourth display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and in the second display effect, the decorative pattern in the variation state is the second transparency. The predetermined character is arranged behind the fluctuating decorative symbol, and may be displayed so as to be visible through the decorative symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A4-2,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the decoration pattern in the variation state is displayed in a low-speed variation display from a high-speed variation display, and the predetermined character is arranged behind the decoration symbol in the low-speed variation display. , And may be displayed in a visible manner through the decorative design.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A4-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect A4-2 or aspect A4-3,
In the combination effect, when the fourth display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and in the second display effect, the decorative pattern in the stopped state is the second transparency. The predetermined character may be displayed behind the decorative symbol in the stopped state and displayed so as to be visible through the decorative symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A4-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A4-1 to A4-4,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed when the first display effect or the second display effect is performed, and when the first display effect is performed. When the third display effect is performed, the predetermined character is disposed behind the decorative symbol displayed with the first transparency, and may not be visible due to the decorative symbol. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The jackpot symbol arrangement display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This jackpot symbol arrangement display effect can be executed during a decorative symbol variation effect, a jackpot game, or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the jackpot symbol array display effect, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of reading and displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Big hit symbol arrangement display effect A]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot symbol array display effect A.
In the jackpot symbol array display effect, first, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), a reach effect is executed. In the reach effect, the reach state is formed by causing the decorative symbols 8L and 8R to be in a stopped display state on the reach line LN1 and displaying the decorative symbol 8C at a high speed. In FIG. 64 (A), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the “6” symbol, and the reach state is formed using the “6” symbol. The reach line LN1 is a line extending diagonally upward to the right.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64C, the W reach effect is executed. In this W reach production, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are further stopped and displayed on the reach line LN2 while maintaining the decorative symbols 8C in the high-speed fluctuation display, and the W reach state on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2. Is formed. In FIG. 64 (C), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the “6” symbol and the “7” symbol, and the W reach state is formed using the “6” symbol and the “7” symbol. The reach line LN2 is a line extending diagonally to the left. Accordingly, the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2 cross each other to form an “X” character by two lines.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64D, jackpot display effect 1 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 1, the “6” symbol of the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed on the reach line LN1, so that the jackpot symbol array is formed on the reach line LN1 using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In FIG. 64D, a jackpot symbol array of “6” symbols is formed on the reach line LN1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (E), jackpot display effect 2 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 2, a jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed on the line LN4. The line LN4 is a line parallel to the upper left side of the display screen 7a at the upper left of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the line LN4 is displayed smaller than the jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. In FIG. 64E, the same “6” symbol jackpot symbol array as the jackpot display effect 1 is formed on the line LN4.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (F), a jackpot game effect is executed. This jackpot game effect is a display effect during the jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot game effect, in the jackpot game effect, the same jackpot symbol array as the jackpot symbol array displayed in the jackpot display effect is displayed on the line LN5. The line LN5 is a line at the lower right of the display screen 7a and parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the line LN5 is displayed smaller than the jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. In FIG. 64 (F), the same “6” symbol jackpot symbol array as the jackpot display effect 2 is formed on the line LN5. In the jackpot game effect, a jackpot hour symbol array image A51 is displayed. This jackpot time symbol array image A51 is a capture screen at the time of the jackpot display effect 1, that is, the reach line and the information on the jackpot symbol array that were hit in the jackpot display effect 1. In the jackpot game effect, an image representing round information, an image suggesting a right-hand hit, an image representing earned ball information, a predetermined character, and the like are displayed.

  The effects shown in FIGS. 64A to 64E are performed during the same variation, and the effects shown in FIG. 64F are performed during the jackpot game immediately after any variation. In addition, it is not restricted to this, The production of FIG.64 (E)-(F) may be performed during a jackpot game.

[Big hit symbol arrangement display effect B]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot symbol array display effect B.
In the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect, first, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), a reach effect is executed. In the reach effect, the reach state is formed by causing the decorative symbols 8L and 8R to be in a stopped display state on the reach line LN1 and displaying the decorative symbol 8C at a high speed. In FIG. 65 (A), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed as “6” symbols, and the reach state is formed using the “6” symbols. The reach line LN1 is a line extending diagonally upward to the right.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65C, the W reach effect is executed. In this W reach production, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are further stopped and displayed on the reach line LN2 while maintaining the decorative symbols 8C in the high-speed fluctuation display, and the W reach state on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2. Is formed. In FIG. 65 (C), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the “6” symbol and the “7” symbol, and the W reach state is formed using the “6” symbol and the “7” symbol. The reach line LN2 is a line extending diagonally to the left. Accordingly, the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2 cross each other to form an “X” character by two lines.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), jackpot display effect 1 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 1, the “6” symbol of the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed on the reach line LN1, so that the jackpot symbol array is formed on the reach line LN1 using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In FIG. 65 (D), a jackpot symbol array of “6” symbols is formed on the reach line LN1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65E, jackpot display effect 2 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 2, a jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed on the line LN4. The line LN4 is a line parallel to the upper left side of the display screen 7a at the upper left of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the line LN4 is displayed smaller than the jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. In FIG. 65 (E), a jackpot symbol array of the same “6” symbols as the jackpot display effect 1 is formed on the line LN4.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), jackpot display effect 3 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 3, a jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed on the line LN6. The line LN6 is a line substantially in the center of the display screen 7a and parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the line LN6 is displayed larger than the jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the line LN4 in the jackpot display effect 2. In FIG. 65F, the same “6” symbol jackpot symbol array as the jackpot display effect 1 is formed on the line LN6.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (G), a jackpot game effect is executed. This jackpot game effect is a display effect during the jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot game effect, in the jackpot game effect, the same jackpot symbol array as the jackpot symbol array displayed in the jackpot display effect is displayed on the line LN5. The line LN5 is a line at the lower right of the display screen 7a and parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the line LN5 is displayed smaller than the jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. In FIG. 65 (G), a jackpot symbol array of the same “6” symbols as the jackpot display effect 2 is formed on the line LN5. In the jackpot game effect, a jackpot hour symbol array image A51 is displayed. This jackpot time symbol array image A51 is a capture screen at the time of the jackpot display effect 1, that is, the reach line and the information on the jackpot symbol array that were hit in the jackpot display effect 1. In the jackpot game effect, an image representing round information, an image suggesting a right-hand hit, an image representing earned ball information, a predetermined character, and the like are displayed.

  The effects shown in FIGS. 65A to 65F are performed during the same fluctuation, and the effects shown in FIG. 65G are performed during the jackpot game immediately after any fluctuation. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the effects shown in FIGS. 65 (E) to 65 (G) may be performed during the jackpot game.

[Big hit symbol arrangement display effect C]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot symbol array display effect C. FIG.
In the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect, first, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), a reach effect is executed. In the reach effect, the reach state is formed by causing the decorative symbols 8L and 8R to be in a stopped display state on the reach line LN1 and displaying the decorative symbol 8C at a high speed. In FIG. 66 (A), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the “6” symbol, and the reach state is formed using the “6” symbol. The reach line LN1 is a line extending diagonally upward to the right.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (C), the W reach effect is executed. In this W reach production, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are further stopped and displayed on the reach line LN2 while maintaining the decorative symbols 8C in the high-speed fluctuation display, and the W reach state on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2. Is formed. In FIG. 66 (C), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the “6” symbol and the “7” symbol, and the W reach state is formed using the “6” symbol and the “7” symbol. The reach line LN2 is a line extending diagonally to the left. Accordingly, the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2 cross each other to form an “X” character by two lines.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), jackpot display effect 1 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 1, the “6” symbol of the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed on the reach line LN1, so that the jackpot symbol array is formed on the reach line LN1 using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In FIG. 66 (D), a jackpot symbol array of “6” symbols is formed on the reach line LN1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), jackpot display effect 2 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C displayed on the reach line LN1 is enlarged and displayed. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C overlaps with the decorative symbols 8L and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (F), jackpot display effect 3 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 3, a jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed on the line LN4. The line LN4 is a line parallel to the upper left side of the display screen 7a at the upper left of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the line LN4 is displayed smaller than the jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. In FIG. 66 (F), a jackpot symbol array of the same “6” symbols as the jackpot display effect 1 is formed on the line LN4.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (G), the jackpot display effect 4 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 4, a jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed on the line LN6. The line LN6 is a line substantially in the center of the display screen 7a and parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the line LN6 is displayed larger than the jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the line LN4 in the jackpot display effect 3. In FIG. 66 (G), a jackpot symbol array of the same “6” symbols as the jackpot display effect 1 is formed on the line LN6.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (H), a jackpot game effect is executed. This jackpot game effect is a display effect during the jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot game effect, in the jackpot game effect, the same jackpot symbol array as the jackpot symbol array displayed in the jackpot display effect is displayed on the line LN5. The line LN5 is a line at the lower right of the display screen 7a and parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the line LN5 is displayed smaller than the jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. In FIG. 66 (G), a jackpot symbol array of the same “6” symbols as the jackpot display effect 2 is formed on the line LN5. In the jackpot game effect, a jackpot hour symbol array image A51 is displayed. This jackpot time symbol array image A51 is a capture screen at the time of the jackpot display effect 1, that is, the reach line and the information on the jackpot symbol array that were hit in the jackpot display effect 1. In the jackpot game effect, an image representing round information, an image suggesting a right-hand hit, an image representing earned ball information, a predetermined character, and the like are displayed.

  66 (A) to 66 (G) are performed during the same change, and the effect of FIG. 66 (G) is performed during the jackpot game immediately after any change. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the effects shown in FIGS. 66 (F) to 66 (H) may be performed during the jackpot game.

[Big hit symbol arrangement display effect D]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot symbol array display effect D. As shown in FIG.
In the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect, first, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), a reach effect is executed. In the reach effect, the reach state is formed by causing the decorative symbols 8L and 8R to be in a stopped display state on the reach line LN1 and displaying the decorative symbol 8C at a high speed. In FIG. 67 (A), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed as “6” symbols, and the reach state is formed using the “6” symbols. The reach line LN1 is a line extending diagonally upward to the right.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), a W reach effect is executed. In this W reach production, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are further stopped and displayed on the reach line LN2 while maintaining the decorative symbols 8C in the high-speed fluctuation display, and the W reach state on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2. Is formed. In FIG. 67 (C), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the “6” symbol and the “7” symbol, and the W reach state is formed using the “6” symbol and the “7” symbol. The reach line LN2 is a line extending diagonally to the left. Accordingly, the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2 cross each other to form an “X” character by two lines.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (D), jackpot display effect 1 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 1, the “6” symbol of the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed on the reach line LN1, so that the jackpot symbol array is formed on the reach line LN1 using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In FIG. 67 (D), a jackpot symbol array of “6” symbols is formed on the reach line LN1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (E), jackpot display effect 2 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C displayed on the reach line LN1 is enlarged and displayed. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C overlaps with the decorative symbols 8L and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (F), an accessory movable effect is executed. In this combination movable effect, the second movable combination 15 is moved to the advanced position and moved to the front of the display screen 7a. In this case, on the display screen 7a, the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed on the reach line LN1. That is, the player can visually recognize the jackpot symbol arrangement on the reach line LN1 from the area not covered by the second movable accessory 15 on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (G), jackpot display effect 3 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 3, a jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed on the line LN4. The line LN4 is a line parallel to the upper left side of the display screen 7a at the upper left of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the line LN4 is displayed smaller than the jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. In FIG. 67 (F), a jackpot symbol array of the same “6” symbols as the jackpot display effect 1 is formed on the line LN4.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (H), jackpot display effect 4 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 4, a jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed on the line LN6. The line LN6 is a line substantially in the center of the display screen 7a and parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the line LN6 is displayed smaller than the jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the line LN4 in the jackpot display effect 3. In FIG. 67 (G), a jackpot symbol array of the same “6” symbols as the jackpot display effect 1 is formed on the line LN6.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (I), a jackpot game effect is executed. This jackpot game effect is a display effect during the jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot game effect, in the jackpot game effect, the same jackpot symbol array as the jackpot symbol array displayed in the jackpot display effect is displayed on the line LN5. The line LN5 is a line at the lower right of the display screen 7a and parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the line LN5 is displayed smaller than the jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. In FIG. 67 (G), a jackpot symbol array of the same “6” symbols as the jackpot display effect 2 is formed on the line LN5. In the jackpot game effect, a jackpot hour symbol array image A51 is displayed. This jackpot time symbol array image A51 is a capture screen at the time of the jackpot display effect 1, that is, the reach line and the information on the jackpot symbol array that were hit in the jackpot display effect 1. In the jackpot game effect, an image representing round information, an image suggesting a right-hand hit, an image representing earned ball information, a predetermined character, and the like are displayed.

  67 (A) to 67 (H) are performed during the same change, and the effect of FIG. 67 (I) is performed during the jackpot game immediately after any change. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effects shown in FIGS. 67 (G) to 67 (I) may be performed during the jackpot game.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of the effect of the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect, the reach state is formed on the reach line LN1, the W reach state is formed on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2, and then on the reach line LN1. The jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed, and then the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed on the line LN4 and the line LN5. According to this configuration, it is possible to enjoy the production of decorative symbols on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2, and then the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed on the reach line LN1 and on the line LN4 or the line LN5. The player can change the viewpoint and display the jackpot symbol arrangement, and the jackpot can be emphasized to amplify the joy that the player has won. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect, the reach state is formed on the reach line LN1, the W reach state is formed on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2, and then on the reach line LN1. The jackpot symbol array is displayed, and then the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN4. Further, during the subsequent jackpot game, the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN5. According to this configuration, it is possible to enjoy the effect of the decorative symbols on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2, and then the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed on the reach line LN1 and on the line LN4. The jackpot symbol arrangement can be displayed by changing the viewpoint, and the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed on the line LN5 during the jackpot game. Can be amplified. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot symbol array display effect, the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the reach line LN1 (for example, FIG. 64D), the line LN4, the line LN5, or The effect (for example, FIG. 64 (E)) in which the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed on the line LN6 is performed during the same fluctuation. According to this configuration, since it is possible to display the jackpot symbol arrangement by changing the viewpoint to the player during the same variation, the jackpot is emphasized during the same variation, and the joy that has become the player's jackpot is further amplified. be able to. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot symbol array display effect, the jackpot symbol array displayed on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1 is larger than the jackpot symbol array arranged on the line LN4 or the line LN5. Is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to emphasize the jackpot by displaying the jackpot symbol arrangement large at the beginning of the jackpot display effect, and it is possible to further amplify the joy that the player has won. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot symbol display effect D, after the jackpot symbol display is displayed on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1, the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 2. After a part is enlarged and displayed, the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed on the line LN4 in the jackpot display effect 3. According to this configuration, the jackpot can be emphasized by displaying the jackpot symbol arrangement large, and the joy that has been a jackpot of the player can be further amplified. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
The following is a variation of the jackpot symbol array display effect.
[Modification 1]
In the jackpot symbol array display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the jackpot symbol array displayed on the line LN4 may be displayed larger than the jackpot symbol array displayed on the reach line LN1.

[Modification 2]
In the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the reach line LN1, the reach line LN2, the line LN4, the line LN5, and the line LN6 is one of the decorative symbols. Some or all of them may overlap. The jackpot symbols arranged on the reach line LN1, on the reach line LN2, on the line LN4, on the line LN5, and on the line LN6 may be increased or decreased, and may be contracted. You may move.

[Modification 3]
In the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, an accessory movable effect is performed between the jackpot display effect 2 and the jackpot display effect 3, but the accessory movable effect is a jackpot display effect 1 Between the jackpot display effects 2, the jackpot display effects 3 and the jackpot display effects 4, between the jackpot display effects 4 and the jackpot game effects, and during these jackpot display effects or during the jackpot game effects May be. Further, the size of the jackpot symbol array and the line on which the jackpot symbol array is displayed may be changed before and after the accessory moving effect.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of reaching a reach state by stopping and displaying a decorative symbol on the first line in the display means,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the first jackpot symbol arrangement by stopping and displaying the decorative symbol on the first line,
The third display effect is an effect of reaching a reach state by stopping and displaying a decorative symbol on the second line different from the first line in the display means,
The fourth display effect is an effect of displaying a second jackpot symbol arrangement by stopping and displaying a decorative symbol on a third line different from the first line and the second line,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and when the first display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed, and the first display effect and the third display effect are performed. The second display effect is performed after the display effect, and the fourth display effect is performed after the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect A5-1,
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
In the fifth display effect, a third jackpot symbol array is obtained by stopping and displaying a decorative symbol on a fourth line different from the first line, the second line, and the third line. Is an effect that displays
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the fourth display effect and during the jackpot game.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A5-2,
In the combination effect, the second display effect and the fourth display effect are performed during the same fluctuation.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-4]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A5-3,
The first jackpot symbol array in the second display effect is larger than the second jackpot symbol array in the fourth display effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-5]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A5-4,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a sixth display effect may be performed.
The sixth display effect is an effect of enlarging and displaying the first jackpot symbol arrangement,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the sixth display effect,
In the combination effect, the sixth display effect is performed after the second display effect is performed, and the fourth display effect is performed after the sixth display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  Hereinafter, the decorative symbol jackpot suggesting effect will be described with reference to FIGS. This ornamental symbol jackpot suggesting effect can be executed in connection with the variation display of the ornamental symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter also simply referred to as “special symbol”). The decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effects A, B, and C are on-hold jackpot suggestions, and the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect D is a jackpot suggestion of the change.

[Decoration design suggestion effect A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol jackpot suggesting effect A. FIG.
In the decorative symbol jackpot suggesting effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 68 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the central symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In FIG. 68A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed side by side at the left end of the display screen 7a. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 68 (A), H1 indicates “3” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it is suggested that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is “3” and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is “0”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), a lost symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lost symbol stop effect indicates that the fluctuation result shown in FIG. 68 (A) is lost. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are provided with the upper line JL and the lower line GL as specified stop positions. When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop after fluctuation and indicate the symbol arrangement, Then, they are aligned horizontally along the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. That is, in the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (B), the lost symbol array is shown in two upper and lower stages. In this example, in the lost symbol arrangement, “869” is indicated in the upper line JL, and “958” is indicated in the lower line GL.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 68 (B), as shown in FIG. 68 (C), there may be a case where a left decorative symbol lower shift stop effect is executed. This left decorative symbol lower shift stop effect indicates that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have stopped after fluctuation, and the decorative symbols 8C and 8R stop at the upper line JL and the lower line GL that are the predetermined stop positions. However, the left decorative pattern 8L is shifted downward from the upper stage line JL and the lower stage line GL and is stopped. In this example, for the decorative symbols 8C and 8R, “77” is shown in the upper line JL and “66” is shown in the lower line GL, and the left decorative symbol 8L is “5”, which is shifted downward from the upper line JL. “6” is shown below the GL. That is, the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left decorative symbol lower shift stop effect is “5” of “577” shifted downward from the upper line JL, and the left of “666”. “6” indicates a symbol arrangement shifted downward from the lower line GL. If any one of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R deviates from the specified stop position, the lost symbol arrangement is obtained. Therefore, “666” which becomes a big hit symbol arrangement when stopped at the upper line JL or the lower line GL which is the specified stop position is also a lost symbol arrangement in the left decorative symbol lower deviation stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (C). Become.
In the present example, the left decorative design 8L has stopped from being shifted downward from the upper stage line JL and the lower stage line GL. However, although illustration is omitted, the right decorative design 8R or the middle decorative design 8C Similarly, there may be a case where the line JL and the lower line GL are similarly shifted downward and stopped.

Furthermore, in place of FIG. 68 (B), as shown in FIG. 68 (D), there is a case where a right decorative design top deviation stop effect is executed. This right decorative design upshift stop effect shows a state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have stopped after fluctuation, and the decorative symbols 8L and 8C stop at the upper line JL and the lower line GL, which are the predetermined stop positions. However, the left decorative design 8R is shifted upward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. In this example, in the decorative symbols 8L and 8C, "68" is shown in the upper line JL and "77" is shown in the lower line GL, and the left decorative symbol 8L is shifted upward from the upper line JL to "8". “7” is indicated by shifting upward from the GL. That is, the pattern arrangement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the right decorative symbol upper misalignment stop effect is the symbol arrangement in which “8” on the right of “688” is shifted upward from the upper line JL. “7” on the right side of FIG. 4 indicates a symbol arrangement shifted upward from the lower line GL. Therefore, “777”, which becomes a big hit symbol arrangement when stopped at the upper line JL or the lower line GL, which is the specified stop position, is also a loss symbol arrangement in the right decorative symbol upper deviation stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (D). Become.
In this example, the right decorative design 8R is shifted upward from the upper stage line JL and the lower stage line GL. However, although illustration is omitted, the left decorative design 8L or the middle decorative design 8C is Similarly, there may be a case where the line JL and the lower line GL are similarly shifted upward and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (E), a jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot finalizing effect is an effect that is performed after the left decorative symbol lower shift stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (C) or the right decorative symbol upper shift stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (D). In this jackpot finalizing effect, the holding number H2 indicates the same “0” as before, but the holding number H1 is changed from “3” to “1”. That is, in this jackpot finalizing effect, the first special symbol is suspended from the left decorative symbol lower shift stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (C) or the right decorative symbol upper shift stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (D). 2 shows digestion. The jackpot symbol array “777” indicated by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicates the variation result of the second hold of the first special symbol. Further, in the jackpot finalizing effect shown in FIG. 68 (E), the jackpot symbol array “777” is displayed alone (one step) in the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, The text “Big hit!” Is displayed. With this jackpot finalizing effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.
The jackpot finalizing effect shown in FIG. 68 (E) is the effect of stopping the left decorative symbol lower misalignment shown in FIG. 68 (C) or the effect of stopping the right decorative symbol upper misalignment shown in FIG. 68 (D). Even in this case, it is not necessarily performed, and the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 68B may be performed with a predetermined probability.

  In other words, in the decorative symbol jackpot suggesting effect A shown in FIG. 68, when any of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R deviates from the predetermined stop position and stops in a predetermined variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Is likely to be a big hit in the fluctuation related to the hold after the predetermined fluctuation. In other words, in the predetermined variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, if there is a big hit by pre-reading the contents of the hold, the decorative symbol 8L, Either 8C or 8R is shifted from the specified stop position to stop. In addition, in the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect A, the symbol array that is shifted from the specified stop position (lost pattern array) is indicated by the symbol array that becomes the jackpot symbol array if stopped at the specified stop position. This suggests (suggests) that the player will be a big hit.

[Decoration design suggestion B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol jackpot suggesting effect B.
In the decorative symbol jackpot suggesting effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 69A, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the central symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. 69A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed side by side at the left end of the display screen 7a. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 69 (A), H1 indicates “3” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it is suggested that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is “3” and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is “0”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), a left decorative design bottom shift stop blue effect effect is executed. This left decorative design bottom shift stop blue effect production shows a state in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have stopped after fluctuations, and the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are the upper line JL and the lower line GL that are the predetermined stop positions. However, the left decorative pattern 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. In this example, for the decorative symbols 8C and 8R, “77” is shown in the upper line JL and “66” is shown in the lower line GL, and the left decorative symbol 8L is “5”, which is shifted downward from the upper line JL. “6” is shown below the GL. That is, the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left decorative symbol lower shift stop effect is “5” of “577” shifted downward from the upper line JL, and the left of “666”. “6” indicates a symbol arrangement shifted downward from the lower line GL. If any one of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R deviates from the specified stop position, the lost symbol arrangement is obtained. Therefore, “666” which becomes a big hit symbol arrangement when stopped at the upper line JL or the lower line GL which is the specified stop position is also a lost symbol arrangement in the left decorative symbol lower deviation stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (C). Become.
In the present example, the left decorative design 8L has stopped from being shifted downward from the upper stage line JL and the lower stage line GL. However, although illustration is omitted, the right decorative design 8R or the middle decorative design 8C Similarly, there may be a case where the line JL and the lower line GL are similarly shifted downward and stopped.
Further, in the symbol arrangement in which “6” on the left of “666” is shifted downward from the lower line GL, water droplets are placed so as to surround “6” which is the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. A simulated blue effect image is displayed.

  On the other hand, instead of FIG. 69 (B), as shown in FIG. The left decorative pattern bottom misalignment stop red effect effect is the same as the left decorative design bottom misalignment stop blue effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (B), and the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is “577”. Of these, “5” indicates a symbol array shifted downward from the upper line JL, and “666” on the left of “666” indicates a symbol array shifted downward from the lower line GL. In the symbol array in which “6” on the left side of FIG. 6 is shifted downward from the lower line GL, a red effect image imitating a flame is encircled so as to surround “6” which is a stop symbol of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. It is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (D), a lost symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lost symbol stop effect is produced after the left decorative symbol lower shift stop blue effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (B) or the left decorative symbol lower error stop red effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (C). It is. In this lost symbol stop effect, the number of holds H2 indicates the same “0” as before, but the number of holds H1 is changed from “3” to “1”. That is, in this lost symbol stop effect, the first left from the left decorative symbol lower shift stop blue effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (B) or the left decorative symbol lower shift stop red effect effect shown in FIG. It shows how two special symbols have been reserved. That is, the lost symbol array indicated by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicates the variation result of the second hold of the first special symbol, “869” in the upper line JL and “958” in the lower line GL. "It is shown.
It should be noted that the probability that this loss symbol stop effect is performed is lower when the left decorative symbol lower shift shown in FIG. 69 (C) is performed when the left decorative symbol lower shift stop blue effect effect is performed. It is higher than when the stop red effect effect is performed.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 69 (D), as shown in FIG. 69 (E), a jackpot finalizing effect may be executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot finalizing effect is shown in the left decorative symbol under-shift stop blue effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (B) or the blue effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (C) in the same manner as the lose symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 69 (D). This is an effect that is performed after the left decorative design under-shift stop red effect effect is performed. In this jackpot finalizing effect, the holding number H2 indicates the same “0” as before, but the holding number H1 is changed from “3” to “1”. In other words, in this jackpot finalizing effect, the first special left-decoration stop blue effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (B) or the left-decoration lower shift stop red effect effect shown in FIG. It shows a situation where two symbols are reserved. That is, the jackpot symbol array “777” indicated by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicates the fluctuation result of the second hold of the first special symbol. In the jackpot finalizing effect shown in FIG. 69 (E), the jackpot symbol array “777” is displayed alone (one step) at the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, The text “Big hit!” Is displayed. With this jackpot finalizing effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.
Note that the probability that this jackpot finalizing effect will be performed is that when the left decorative design lower misalignment stop red effect production shown in FIG. 69 (C) is performed, the left decorative design lower misalignment shown in FIG. 69 (B) is stopped. It is higher than when the blue effect was performed.

  That is, in the decorative symbol jackpot suggesting effect B shown in FIG. 69, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop changing, a plurality of types of effect effects (in this example, a blue effect effect and a red effect effect) can be executed. The jackpot grant rate changes depending on the type of effect production. In other words, if there is a big hit by pre-reading the contents of the hold in the predetermined variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a plurality of types of effects as a jackpot suggesting effect with a predetermined probability (such as lottery using random numbers) A predetermined effect production is performed from the production.

[Decoration design suggestion effect C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol jackpot suggesting effect C.
In the decorative symbol jackpot suggesting effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 70A, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the central symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. FIG. 70A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (while scrolling downward).
Further, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed side by side at the left end of the display screen 7a. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 70A, H1 indicates “3” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it is suggested that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is “3” and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is “0”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), the left decorative symbol “6” bottom shift stop effect is executed. The left decorative symbol “6” lower shift stop effect indicates a state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have stopped after the fluctuation, and the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are the upper line JL and the lower line that are the predetermined stop positions. Although it stops at GL, the left decorative design 8L is shifted downward from the upper stage line JL and the lower stage line GL and stopped. In this example, for the decorative symbols 8C and 8R, “77” is shown in the upper line JL and “66” is shown in the lower line GL, and the left decorative symbol 8L is “5”, which is shifted downward from the upper line JL. “6” is shown below the GL. That is, the decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R of the decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R in the left decorative pattern “6” lower shift stop effect is a pattern array in which “5” of “577” is shifted downward from the upper line JL. The left “6” shows a symbol arrangement shifted downward from the lower line GL. If any one of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R deviates from the specified stop position, the lost symbol arrangement is obtained. Therefore, “666” which becomes a big hit symbol arrangement when stopped at the upper line JL or the lower line GL which is the predetermined stop position is also lost in the left decorative symbol “6” lower shift stop effect shown in FIG. It becomes a symbol arrangement.
In the present example, the left decorative design 8L has stopped from being shifted downward from the upper stage line JL and the lower stage line GL. However, although illustration is omitted, the right decorative design 8R or the middle decorative design 8C Similarly, there may be a case where the line JL and the lower line GL are similarly shifted downward and stopped.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 70 (B), as shown in FIG. 70 (C), there is a case where a right decoration symbol “7” upshift stop effect is executed. This right decoration symbol “7” upper shift stop effect indicates a state in which the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have stopped after fluctuations. Although it stops at GL, the left decorative design 8R is shifted upward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. In this example, in the decorative symbols 8L and 8C, "68" is shown in the upper line JL and "77" is shown in the lower line GL, and the left decorative symbol 8L is shifted upward from the upper line JL to "8". “7” is indicated by shifting upward from the GL. That is, in the decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R in the right decorative pattern “7” upper shift stop effect, the right “8” of “688” is shifted upward from the upper line JL, “777”. "7" on the right of "" indicates a symbol arrangement shifted upward from the lower line GL. Therefore, “777” which becomes a big hit symbol arrangement when stopped at the upper line JL or the lower line GL which is the specified stop position is also lost in the right decoration symbol “7” upper shift stop effect shown in FIG. 70 (C). It becomes a symbol arrangement.
In this example, the right decorative design 8R is shifted upward from the upper stage line JL and the lower stage line GL. However, although illustration is omitted, the left decorative design 8L or the middle decorative design 8C is Similarly, there may be a case where the line JL and the lower line GL are similarly shifted upward and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70D, a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the effect that is performed after the left decorative pattern “6” bottom shift stop effect shown in FIG. 70 (B) or the right decorative pattern “7” top shift stop effect shown in FIG. 70 (C) is performed. It is. In this reach effect, the hold number H2 indicates the same “0” as before, but the hold number H1 is changed from “3” to “1”. That is, in this reach effect, the first left decorative symbol “6” lower shift stop effect shown in FIG. 70 (B) or the right decorative symbol “7” upper shift stop effect shown in FIG. It shows how two special symbols have been reserved. Then, the loss symbol array “68” of the upper line JL and the reach symbol array “77” of the lower line GL corresponding to the second hold variation of the first special symbol, where the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped. ing. In the reach effect shown in FIG. 70D, the characters “Leach!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.
The reach effect shown in FIG. 70 (D) is the left decorative symbol “6” lower shift stop effect shown in FIG. 70 (B) or the right decorative symbol “7” upper shift stop shown in FIG. 70 (C). Even if the performance is performed, it is not always performed, and it may not reach. In addition, the probability that this reach effect will be performed is that the left decorative pattern “6” shown in FIG. 70 (B) is higher when the right decoration design “7” shown in FIG. 70 (C) is shifted upward. It is higher than when the bottom shift stop effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70E, a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle effect is an effect performed by switching from the reach effect shown in FIG. 70 (D), and the player side ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle instead of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. An image is displayed. That is, the battle effect shown in FIG. 70E is performed when the gaming state is reach. In this battle effect, the numbers H1 and H2 of holding are “1” and “0”, similarly to the reach effect shown in FIG.
Note that the battle effect shown in FIG. 70 (E) is not necessarily performed even when the reach effect shown in FIG. 70 (D) is performed, and the battle effect is not developed from the reach effect. There is also a possibility. In addition, the probability (battle development rate) that this battle effect is performed is the left when the right decoration symbol “7” upper shift stop effect shown in FIG. 70 (C) is performed is shown in FIG. 70 (B). It is higher than the case where the decorative pattern “6” lower shift stop effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (F), a jackpot confirmation suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the jackpot confirmation suggestion effect, as a result of the battle between the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB, the character “Victory!” Indicating that the teammate character CRA has won is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying this character “Victory!”, It is possible to make the player think that the current reach will be a big hit (a privilege advantageous to the player is given). In this jackpot confirmation suggestion effect, the number of holds H1 and H2 indicate “1” and “0” in the same manner as the reach effect shown in FIG. 70 (D) and the battle effect shown in FIG. 70 (E). ing.
Although illustration is omitted, there is a case where the teammate character is defeated by the battle effect. In this case, the jackpot finalizing suggestion effect shown in FIG. 70 (F) is not performed, and instead the teammate character is defeated. The characters “losing!” Are displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying this character “losing!”, It is possible to make the player think that the current reach will not be a big hit (a privilege advantageous to the player will not be given).
It should be noted that the probability that the teammate character CRA wins in the battle effect (the expected level of battle victory) is shown in FIG. 70 (B) when the right decoration symbol “7” upper shift stop effect shown in FIG. 70 (C) is performed. This is higher than the case where the left decorative pattern “6” lower shift stop effect shown in FIG. In other words, the probability of the teammate character CRA losing in the battle effect is the right decoration shown in FIG. 70 (C) when the left decoration symbol “6” bottom shift stop effect shown in FIG. 70 (B) is performed. The pattern “7” is higher than the case where the effect of stopping the shift is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (G), a jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jackpot finalizing effect, the jackpot symbol array “777” is displayed in place of the characters “Victory!” Indicating that the teammate character CRA has won in the jackpot finalizing suggesting effect shown in FIG. With this jackpot finalizing effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. In the jackpot finalizing effect shown in FIG. 70 (G), the jackpot symbol array “777” is displayed alone (one step) at the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, The text “Big hit!” Is displayed.
As described above, when the reach effect shown in FIG. 70 (D) was not performed (when the reach effect was not achieved), the reach effect did not develop from the reach effect shown in FIG. 70 (E). When the teammate character CRA is defeated in the case of the battle effect and the jackpot confirmation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 70 (F) is not performed, the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 70 (G) is performed. Instead, a loss confirmation effect is performed (see FIGS. 68B and 69D).

  That is, in the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect C shown in FIG. 70, when any of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is shifted from the predetermined stop position and stopped in a predetermined variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Depending on the type of the shifted symbol arrangement, the rate of reaching, the rate of development to the battle after reach, and the level of battle victory expectation in the battle performance will change in the fluctuation related to the hold after the predetermined fluctuation. Yes. For example, as described above, when the shifted symbol arrangement is “777” rather than “666”, the rate of reaching reach, the rate of development to reach the battle after reach, and the expectation of winning the battle in the battle performance are higher. ing. That is, in the decorative symbol jackpot suggesting effect C, a plurality of game indices such as reach rate, battle development rate, and battle victory expectation level are simultaneously suggested in one effect of displaying a shifted symbol arrangement.

[Decoration design suggestion D]
71 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol jackpot suggesting effect D. FIG.
In the decorative symbol jackpot suggesting effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 71A, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the central symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. 71A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed side by side at the left end of the display screen 7a. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 68 (A), H1 indicates “3” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it is suggested that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is “3” and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is “0”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), the lower “6” symbol reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The lower “6” symbol reach effect indicates that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are sequentially stopped in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 71 (A) and reach as a result. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are provided with an upper line JL and a lower line GL as symbol arrangement lines. Are simultaneously stopped, aligned horizontally along the upper line JL and the lower line GL, and stopped. That is, in the lower “6” symbol reach production shown in FIG. 71 (B), the symbol arrangement is shown in the upper and lower two rows. In this example, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are “57” and “66” indicating the reach state is displayed on the lower line GL.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), the lower “6” symbol reach loss effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lower “6” symbol reach loss effect indicates that the result of the lower “6” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (B) is lost. That is, in the lower “6” symbol reach loss production shown in FIG. 71 (C), the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped, and the loss symbol arrangement is shown in the upper and lower two rows as the variation result. In this example, in the lost symbol arrangement, “587” is indicated on the upper line JL, and “676” indicating the reach loss state is indicated on the lower line GL.

  On the other hand, instead of FIG. 71 (B), as shown in FIG. 71 (D), the lower “7” symbol reach effect may be executed. This lower “7” symbol reach effect indicates that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are sequentially stopped in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 71 (A) and reach as a result. That is, in the lower stage “7” symbol reach production shown in FIG. 71 (D), the symbol arrangement is shown in the upper and lower two stages. In this example, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are “67”, “77” indicating the reach state is displayed on the lower line GL.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (E), a “7” symbol jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The “7” symbol jackpot finalizing effect is an effect performed after the lower “7” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (D) is performed. The “7” symbol jackpot finalizing effect indicates that the result of the lower “7” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (D) is a jackpot. Incidentally, in the “7” symbol jackpot finalizing effect shown in FIG. 71 (E), the jackpot symbol array “777” is displayed alone (one step) in the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. In the upper part, the letters “big hit!” Are displayed. With this “7” symbol jackpot finalizing effect, the player is convinced that the “7” symbol is a jackpot.

  Furthermore, instead of FIG. 71 (B) and FIG. 71 (D), as shown in FIG. 71 (F), the upper “8” symbol reach effect may be executed. The upper “8” symbol reach effect indicates that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are sequentially stopped in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 71A and reach as a result. That is, in the upper “8” symbol reach production shown in FIG. 71 (F), the symbol arrangement is shown in the upper and lower two levels, and in this example, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R indicate the reach state on the upper line JL. “88” and “97” are displayed in the lower line GL.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (G), an “8” symbol jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The “8” symbol jackpot finalizing effect is an effect performed after the upper “8” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (F) is performed. This “8” symbol jackpot finalizing effect indicates that the result of the upper “8” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (F) is a jackpot. Note that in the “8” symbol jackpot finalizing effect shown in FIG. 71 (G), the jackpot symbol array “888” is displayed alone (one step) in the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. In the upper part, the letters “big hit!” Are displayed. With this “8” symbol jackpot finalizing effect, the player is convinced that the player has won a jackpot with the “8” symbol.

The lower “6” symbol reach loss effect shown in FIG. 71 (C) is always performed even when the lower “6” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (B) is performed. In the same manner as in FIGS. 71E and 71G, the “6” symbol jackpot finalizing effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. In addition, the “7” symbol jackpot finalizing effect shown in FIG. 71 (E) is always performed even when the lower “7” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (D) is performed. In the same manner as in FIG. 71 (C), the lower “7” symbol reach loss effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the jackpot finalizing effect is performed is lower than the case where the lower “6” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (B) is performed, and the lower “7” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (D) is performed. The case is higher.
In addition, the “8” symbol jackpot finalizing effect shown in FIG. 71 (G) is always performed even when the upper “8” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (F) is performed. In the same manner as in FIG. 71 (C), the upper “8” symbol reach loss effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. Although illustration is omitted, even if the reach effect is performed on the upper line JL with a symbol other than the “8” symbol, the jackpot finalizing effect is performed with a predetermined probability as in FIG. 71 (G). It may be. However, the probability that the jackpot finalizing effect will be performed is that the upper “8” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (F) is performed, compared to the case where the reach effect is performed on the upper line JL with a symbol other than the “8” symbol. The case is higher.

  In other words, in the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect D shown in FIG. 71, a plurality of left decorative symbols 8L and right decorative symbols 8R are stopped at the same time in a predetermined variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and a plurality of symbol arrangement lines (books) are simultaneously displayed. In the example, an upper line JL and a lower line GL can be displayed, and when a predetermined left decorative symbol 8L and a right decorative symbol 8R are stopped on a predetermined symbol array line among a plurality of symbol array lines (in this example, The reach of “88” symbol on the upper line JL and the reach of “77” symbol on the lower line GL) are likely to be big hits in the predetermined fluctuation. That is, in the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect D, the expectation level for jackpots is high when a predetermined symbol array is reached in a predetermined symbol array line. In other words, in the predetermined variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, if the variation is a big hit, a predetermined probability (a lottery using random numbers, etc.) is given to a predetermined symbol arrangement line as a jackpot suggesting effect. Reach production is performed by the symbol arrangement.

[Example of effects]
Below, the effect example of the decorative design jackpot suggestion effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, when the decorative symbol is stopped at a predetermined stop position and when the decorative symbol is shifted from the predetermined stop position in a predetermined variation of the decorative symbol, Therefore, when the vehicle stops after deviating from the specified stop position, it is more likely to be a big hit in the change related to the hold after the predetermined change than when stopped at the specified stop position. According to this configuration, when any of the decorative symbols deviates from the predetermined stop position, the player can face the game with great expectation. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. It is also possible to change the jackpot expectation degree according to the type of the shifted decorative symbol in association with the shifted decorative symbol and the jackpot expectation factor.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, the gaming machine 1 has a first decorative symbol, a second decorative symbol, and a third decorative symbol, and stops the decorative symbol at a predetermined stop position. When the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol are stopped in a single line, and the decorative symbol is shifted from a predetermined stop position, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped. Any one of the second decorative design and the third decorative design is shifted from one line and stopped. According to this configuration, when the decorative symbol is shifted from the predetermined stop position and stopped, it can be displayed in a manner that is easy to understand for the player in various modes. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, a plurality of types of effect effects can be executed in connection with the stop of the decoration symbol, and the bonus grant rate to the player is the effect effect. The configuration varies depending on the type. According to this configuration, the player is relieved every time the effect presentation is performed, and when the effect presentation with a high expectation level is performed, the player can face the game with great expectation. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, the decorative symbols have a first decorative symbol, a second decorative symbol, and a third decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol. It is possible to stop after the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and to stop a plurality of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol and display a plurality of symbol arrangement lines at the same time in a predetermined variation of the decorative symbol. When the predetermined first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped in the predetermined symbol array line among the plurality of symbol array lines, the jackpot is likely to be a big hit in the predetermined variation. According to this configuration, when the predetermined first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped on the predetermined symbol array line, the player has a high jackpot expectation and then stops the third While the decorative pattern changes, you can keep an eye on it while maintaining great expectations. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, the plurality of symbol arrangement lines are displayed in a step shape, and the first decorative symbol is displayed in a predetermined step of the plurality of symbol arrangement lines displayed in the step shape. When the second decorative symbol is stopped and reach is reached with a predetermined symbol arrangement, the jackpot is likely to be a big hit in the predetermined variation. According to this configuration, when the player reaches the reach in the predetermined symbol arrangement in the predetermined symbol arrangement line, the expectation of jackpot is extremely high, and the third decorative symbol to be stopped after that is changing. You can keep an eye on it while sustaining great expectations. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. It is also possible to relate the reach symbol and the jackpot expectation degree in the predetermined symbol arrangement line and change the jackpot expectation degree according to the type of the reach symbol.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the decorative design jackpot suggestion effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, two stages of the upper line JL and the lower line GL are shown as the prescribed stop positions of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Is not limited to this. For example, the specified stop positions of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be three levels of the upper line, middle line, and lower line, or four or more levels in the upper and lower directions. Furthermore, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are scrolled horizontally, a plurality of vertical lines (left line, middle line, and right line) may be set as specified stop positions in the left-right direction.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 71, the symbol arrangement line shows two lines of the upper line JL and the lower line GL. However, as with the above-mentioned stop position, the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, The upper and lower lines may be 4 lines or more. Furthermore, when there are three or more upper and lower symbol arrangement lines, diagonal symbol arrangement lines may be provided in addition to this (for example, in the case of three upper and lower lines, two diagonal symbols, rising right and falling right). Array line). Furthermore, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are scrolled horizontally, a plurality of vertical symbol arrangement lines (for example, a left symbol arrangement line, a middle symbol arrangement line, and a right symbol arrangement line) are provided in the left-right direction. It may be.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, if the symbol arrangement in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shifted from the specified stop position and stopped is stopped at the specified stop position. Although the symbol arrangement is a jackpot symbol arrangement, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the symbol arrangement that stops after deviating from a specified stop position may be a specific rose or reach symbol arrangement. Furthermore, in the case of a symbol array that becomes a jackpot symbol array if it stops at the specified stop position, if it stops at a specified stop position, the symbol array that has shifted and stopped The jackpot symbol arrangement may be displayed with the same symbol arrangement. If comprised in this way, not only the jackpot suggestion but also the jackpot symbol arrangement can be suggested, and as a result, the player can determine in advance whether or not the current jackpot is a promising jackpot.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are shifted from the specified stop position and stopped, an effect using a color called a blue effect effect or a red effect is performed. Although the jackpot grant rate is changed depending on the type of effect production, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect production may use three or more colors, and the jackpot grant rate may be changed depending on the difference between these colors. Alternatively, the effect presentation may use a plurality of types of characters instead of colors, and change the jackpot grant rate depending on the types of these characters. Of course, the effect may be produced using both the color and the character. Furthermore, for the effect production, a blue effect image imitating water drops and a red effect image imitating flames were used, but these water drops and flames are not particularly limited. (However, an image that makes a particular color feel is desirable.)

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shifted from the predetermined stop position and stopped, a battle effect is performed with a predetermined probability. Although the jackpot is suggested, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a story effect may be performed instead of a battle effect, and the jackpot may be suggested based on the content of the story effect. In this case, according to the type of the shifted symbol arrangement, the rate of reaching within the subsequent hold, the rate of development to the post-reach story effect, and the content (expected expectation level) in the story effect may be changed. If configured in this way, a single effect of displaying a shifted symbol arrangement, and simultaneously suggesting a plurality of game indicators such as the reach rate within the hold, the story production development rate, and the jackpot expectation degree in the story production As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol are arranged in a predetermined symbol array line among a plurality of symbol array lines in a predetermined variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Although the 8R is stopped and the predetermined reach symbol is displayed, it is suggested that the predetermined fluctuation tends to be a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped on a predetermined symbol arrangement line and a specific loose eye other than the reach is displayed, it may be suggested that the predetermined variation is likely to be a big hit. Good. In this case, after the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R stop at a break, immediately perform a so-called pseudo-ream that re-variates the decorative design 8L, 8R, and then the left decorative design 8L and the predetermined design array line The right decorative design 8R may be stopped and a predetermined reach design may be displayed. If comprised in this way, the interest of a game can be improved further.
Note that the pseudo-ream is an effect that makes it appear as if the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols continues for a predetermined number of times, and is an effect that can be executed at the start of the change or during the reach effect. For example, the pseudo-ream can produce an effect of repeating the effect of starting and temporarily stopping the decorative symbol, an effect of repeating the effect of temporarily stopping at least a part of the predetermined symbol arrangement of the decorative symbol, and a predetermined logo (for example, NEXT). It includes an effect that repeats the temporary stop effect, or an effect that executes a variation effect of the decorative symbols, along with a display reminiscent of a pseudo-relation, such as “× 2”, “× 3”, and “pseudo”. Note that the number of repeated effects is also referred to as “pseudo continuous number”, and “pseudo 2”, “× 2” if it is 2 times, “pseudo 3”, “x3” if it is 3 times.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect A6-1]
A symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of symbols;
Decoration symbol display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decoration symbol in accordance with the variation display of the symbol by the symbol display means;
A gaming machine equipped with
In the predetermined variation of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display means, there are a case where the decorative symbol is stopped at a predetermined stop position and a case where the decorative symbol is shifted from a predetermined stop position and stopped.
When stopping after deviating from the specified stop position, it is easier to give a privilege advantageous to the player in the change related to the hold after the predetermined change than when stopping at the specified stop position.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A6-2]
The decorative design has a first decorative design, a second decorative design, and a third decorative design,
The decorative design display means includes:
When stopping the decorative design at the specified stop position, the first decorative design, the second decorative design, and the third decorative design are stopped in a line,
When the decorative design is shifted from the predetermined stop position and stopped, any one of the first decorative design, the second decorative design, and the third decorative design is shifted from the one line and stopped. ,
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-1, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect A6-3]
Provided with a display means capable of performing a plurality of display effects,
The display means can execute a plurality of types of effect effects as one effect of the plurality of display effects in connection with the stop of the decorative design,
The rate of granting advantageous benefits to the player varies depending on the type of effect production,
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-1 or aspect A6-2, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect A6-4]
A symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of symbols;
Decoration symbol display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decoration symbol in accordance with the variation display of the symbol by the symbol display means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The decorative symbol has a first decorative symbol, a second decorative symbol, and a third decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol is more than the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. Shall stop later,
The decorative symbol display means can stop a plurality of the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols and display a plurality of symbol arrangement lines at the same time in a predetermined variation.
When the predetermined first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped on a predetermined symbol array line among the plurality of symbol array lines, a privilege advantageous to the player is given in the predetermined variation. Cheap,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A6-5]
The plurality of symbol arrangement lines are displayed in a step shape,
When the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol stop and reach a predetermined symbol arrangement at a predetermined level of the plurality of symbol arrangement lines displayed in the step shape, the predetermined fluctuation In the game, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is easily granted.
A gaming machine according to aspect A6-4, which is characterized in that.

  Hereinafter, the decorative symbol superimposing effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. This decorative symbol superimposing effect can be executed during a decorative symbol variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and reads the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 when an instruction to execute the decorative symbol overlay effect is included. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Decorated design overlay effect A]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol superimposing effect A. FIG. In the decorative symbol superimposing effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 72A, a decorative symbol non-display effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not displayed during the variable effect. Executed. The decorative symbol non-display effect is the same as the decorative symbol disappearance effect of the decorative symbol variation effect A shown in FIG. That is, before the decorative symbol non-display effect of FIG. 72 (A), the effects of the decorative symbol variation effect A of FIGS. 48 (A) to 48 (I) may be performed. The decorative symbol non-display effect in FIG. 72 (A) is that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not displayed, and any other image may be displayed. Good. For example, any special reach production may be performed.

  Next, the decorative symbol enlarged display effect shown in FIG. 72 (B) is executed. Specifically, each of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R protrudes from the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative design 8C includes the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R. It is displayed overlapping one part. Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), a jackpot image superimposed display effect is executed. Specifically, the first big hit image MF1 is displayed on the left decorative design 8L, the second big hit image MF2 is displayed on the middle decorative design 8C, and the third big hit image MF3 is displayed on the right decorative design 8R. Is displayed. The first jackpot image MF1, the second jackpot image MF2, and the third jackpot image MF3 are images written as “big jackpot”, respectively, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol This suggests that the symbol 8R is a combined jackpot. The middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the first big hit image MF1, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the third big hit image MF3.

  Next, the decorative symbol reduction display effect shown in FIG. 72 (D) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a reduced size. At this time, the first jackpot image MF1, the second jackpot image MF2, and the third jackpot image MF3 are also reduced and displayed. Due to this reduction, the middle decorative symbol 8C does not overlap the first big hit image MF1, and the middle decorative symbol 8C does not overlap the third big hit image MF3. That is, by transitioning from FIG. 72 (C) to FIG. 72 (D), the state where the medium decorative design 8C overlaps the first big hit image MF1 is changed from the state where the medium decorative design 8C overlaps the first big hit image MF1. A transition is made from a state in which the middle decorative symbol 8C overlaps the third big hit image MF3 to a state in which the middle decorative symbol 8C does not overlap the third big hit image MF3.

  Next, the special jackpot image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 72 (E) is executed. Specifically, the first special jackpot image MS1 is displayed so as to overlap the first jackpot image MF1, the second special jackpot image MF2 is displayed so as to overlap the second jackpot image MF2, and the third special jackpot image MF3 is displayed as the third special jackpot image MF3. The jackpot image MS3 is displayed in an overlapping manner. The first special jackpot image MS1, the second special jackpot image MS2, and the third special jackpot image MS3 are images written as “special jackpot” respectively, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, And, it is suggested that the combination jackpot of the right decorative design 8R is special, that is, the probability variation jackpot. In other words, the first special jackpot image MS1, the second special jackpot image MS2, and the third special jackpot image MS3 suggest a jackpot type. The second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the first special jackpot image MS1, and the second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the third special jackpot image MS3. The first special jackpot image MS1 is displayed so that a part of the first jackpot image MF1 is visible, and the second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed so that a part of the second jackpot image MF2 is visible. The third special jackpot image MS3 is displayed so that a part of the third jackpot image MF3 can be visually recognized.

[Decorated design overlay effect B]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol superimposing effect B. FIG. The decorative symbol superimposing effect B is different from the decorative symbol superimposing effect A in the timing at which the jackpot images MF1 to MF3 are displayed. The decorative symbol non-display performance of FIG. 73 (A) is the same as FIG. 72 (A) of the decorative symbol superimposing effect A. Next, the jackpot image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 73 (B) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are newly displayed from the state where they are not displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the first big hit image MF1 is already displayed on the left decorative design 8L, the second big hit image MF2 is displayed on the middle decorative design 8C, and the third big hit image MF3 is already displayed on the right decorative design 8R. It is displayed. The first jackpot image MF1, the second jackpot image MF2, and the third jackpot image MF3 are images written as “big jackpot”, respectively, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol This suggests that the symbol 8R is a combined jackpot. The middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the first big hit image MF1, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the third big hit image MF3.

  Next, the decorative symbol reduction display effect shown in FIG. 73 (C) is executed. The decorative symbol reduction display effect of FIG. 73 (C) is the same as that of FIG. 72 (D) of the decorative symbol overlap effect A. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a reduced size. At this time, the first jackpot image MF1, the second jackpot image MF2, and the third jackpot image MF3 are also reduced and displayed. Due to this reduction, the middle decorative symbol 8C does not overlap the first big hit image MF1, and the middle decorative symbol 8C does not overlap the third big hit image MF3.

  Next, the special jackpot image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 73 (D) is executed. The special jackpot image superimposed display effect in FIG. 73D is the same as that in FIG. 72E of the decorative symbol superimposed effect A. Specifically, the first special jackpot image MS1 is displayed so as to overlap the first jackpot image MF1, the second special jackpot image MF2 is displayed so as to overlap the second jackpot image MF2, and the third special jackpot image MF3 is displayed as the third special jackpot image MF3. The jackpot image MS3 is displayed in an overlapping manner. The first special jackpot image MS1, the second special jackpot image MS2, and the third special jackpot image MS3 are images written as “special jackpot” respectively, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, And, it is suggested that the combination jackpot of the right decorative design 8R is special, that is, the probability variation jackpot. The second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the first special jackpot image MS1, and the second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the third special jackpot image MS3.

[Decorated design overlay effect C]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol superimposing effect C. The decorative symbol superimposing effect C differs from the decorative symbol superimposing effect A in the contents of the images MF1 to MF3 and the images MS1 to MS3. The decorative symbol non-display performance of FIG. 74 (A) is the same as FIG. 72 (A) of the decorative symbol superimposing effect A. 74 (B) is the same as the decorative symbol superimposing effect A in FIG. 72 (B).

  Next, a predetermined image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 74 (C) is executed. Specifically, the first image MF1 is displayed overlaid on the left decorative design 8L, the second image MF2 is displayed displayed over the middle decorative design 8C, and the third image MF3 is displayed overlaid on the right decorative design 8R. . The first image MF1, the second image MF2, and the third image MF3 are images in which “HELLO” is written. The middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the first image MF1, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the third image MF3.

  Next, the decorative symbol reduction display effect shown in FIG. 74 (D) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a reduced size. At this time, the first image MF1, the second image MF2, and the third image MF3 are also reduced and displayed. By this reduction, the medium decorative design 8C does not overlap the first image MF1, and the medium decorative design 8C does not overlap the third image MF3. That is, by transitioning from FIG. 74 (C) to FIG. 74 (D), a transition is made from the state in which the medium decoration symbol 8C overlaps the first image MF1 to the state in which the medium decoration symbol 8C does not overlap the first image MF1. From the state where the medium decorative design 8C overlaps the third image MF3, the state transits to the state where the medium decorative design 8C does not overlap the third image MF3.

  Next, the special jackpot image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 74 (E) is executed. Specifically, the special jackpot image MS is displayed so as to overlap the first image MF1, the second image MF2, and the third image MF3. The special jackpot image MS is an image written as “special jackpot”, and the jackpot combination of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is special, that is, a promiscuous jackpot. Suggests that. In other words, the special jackpot image MS suggests a jackpot type. The special jackpot image MS is displayed so that a part of each of the first image MF1, the second image MF2, and the third image MF3 is visible.

[Decorated design effect D]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol superimposing effect D. FIG. The decorative symbol superimposing effect D is different from the decorative symbol superimposing effect A in the contents of the images MF1 to MF3 and the images MS1 to MS3 and in the displayed conditions. First, as shown in FIG. 75 (A), a state in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the losing eye is displayed during the variation effect. Next, the suggested image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 75 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first suggestion image MF1 is displayed overlapping the left decorative design 8L, the second suggestion image MF2 is displayed overlapping the middle decorative design 8C, and the third suggestion image MF3 overlaps the right decorative design 8R. Is displayed. The first suggestion image MF1, the second suggestion image MF2, and the third suggestion image MF3 are images that are written “Moshiya!”, “No way!”, And “!!”, and are temporarily displayed. This indicates that the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R may not be confirmed. In addition, the middle decoration symbol 8C may be displayed so as to overlap a part of the first suggestion image MF1, or the middle decoration symbol 8C may be displayed so as to overlap a part of the third suggestion image MF3.

  Next, the special suggestion image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 75 (C) is executed. Specifically, the special suggestion image MS is displayed so as to overlap the first suggestion image MF1, the second suggestion image MF2, and the third suggestion image MF3. The special suggestion image MS is an image written as “No way !!”, and there is a high possibility that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are temporarily displayed are not confirmed. It suggests that. In other words, the special suggestion image MS suggests the start of pseudo-continuous production and also indicates that the degree of expectation of jackpot has increased. The special suggestion image MS is displayed so that a part of each of the first suggestion image MF1, the second suggestion image MF2, and the third suggestion image MF3 is visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are temporarily displayed are variably displayed again, and a pseudo-continuous effect is executed.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of an effect of a decoration symbol superimposition production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the first big hit image MF1 is displayed so as to overlap the left decorative symbol 8L, and the second big hit image MF2 is displayed so as to overlap the middle decorative symbol 8C. The first effect in which the third jackpot image MF3 is displayed so as to overlap the right decorative design 8R, and after the first effect, the first special jackpot image MS1 is displayed so as to overlap the first jackpot image MF1. It is possible to execute a second effect in which the second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed so as to overlap the jackpot image MF2, and the third special jackpot image MS3 is displayed so as to overlap the third jackpot image MF3. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72 (C) and 73 (C), in the first effect, after the medium decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the third jackpot image MF3, the figure is displayed. As shown in FIG. 72 (D) and FIG. 73 (D), a transition is made to a state in which the middle decorative symbol 8C does not overlap the third big hit image MF3. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72C and 73C, in the first effect, the medium decoration symbol 8C is displayed so as to overlap the first big hit image MF1. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72 (E) and 73 (E), in the second effect, the second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed so as to overlap the first special jackpot image MS1, The second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed overlapping the third special jackpot image MS3. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72E and 73E, in the second effect, the first special jackpot is made so that a part of the first jackpot image MF1 is visible. The second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed so as to overlap so that the image MS1 is overlapped and displayed, and a part of the second jackpot image MF2 is visible, and a part of the third jackpot image MF3 is visible. The third special jackpot image MS3 is displayed in an overlapping manner. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72 (E) and 73 (E), in the second effect, a combination of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Indicates a jackpot, and the first special jackpot image MS1, the second special jackpot image MS2, and the third special jackpot image MS3 indicate the types of jackpots. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a decoration symbol superimposition effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
72B to 72E, images other than the images exemplified above may be included. For example, in FIGS. 72B to 48E, a right-handed image or the like may be displayed in addition to the decorative design. The same applies to FIGS. 73 and 74.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A7-1]
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first decorative design,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative design,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third decorative design,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image having the same content as the first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third image having the same content as the first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a fourth image having a different content from the first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a fifth image having the same content as the fourth image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a sixth image having the same content as the fourth image,
The first image is displayed so as to overlap the first decorative symbol, the second image is displayed superimposed on the second decorative symbol, and the third image is superimposed on the third decorative symbol. And the first effect displayed
After the first effect, the fourth image is displayed to overlap the first image, the fifth image is displayed to overlap the second image, and the third image is displayed to the third image. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing a second effect in which six images are displayed in an overlapping manner.
◇ [Aspect A7-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect A7-1,
In the first effect, after the second decorative symbol is displayed so as to overlap the third image, the second decorative symbol is shifted to a state where the second decorative symbol does not overlap the third image. To play.
◇ [Aspect A7-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A7-1 or aspect A7-2,
In the first effect, the second decorative symbol is displayed so as to overlap the first image.
◇ [Aspect A7-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A7-1 to A7-3,
In the second effect, the fifth image is displayed so as to overlap the fourth image, and the fifth image is displayed so as to overlap the sixth image.
◇ [Aspect A7-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A7-1 to A7-4,
In the second effect, the fourth image is displayed so as to be partly visible so that a part of the first image is visible, and the part of the second image is visible. 5. A gaming machine, wherein the fifth image is displayed in an overlapping manner, and the sixth image is displayed in an overlapping manner so that a part of the third image is visible.
◇ [Aspect A7-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A7-1 to A7-5,
In the second effect, the combination of the first decorative design, the second decorative design, and the third decorative design suggests a jackpot, the fourth image, and the fifth And the sixth image suggest a type of jackpot.

  The jackpot background display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This jackpot background display effect can be executed during a decorative symbol variation effect, a jackpot game, or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the jackpot background display effect, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Big hit background display effect A]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot background display effect A. FIG.
This jackpot background display effect A is an effect that is executed when the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed after the reach effect. In this jackpot background display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 76 (A), the jackpot effect 1 is executed. In this jackpot time effect 1, a background image HK1 and a jackpot symbol array A81 are displayed. The background image HK1 represents a scene in which a teammate character and an enemy character are performing a battle effect. The jackpot symbol array A81 is configured by decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have a “6” symbol. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. The jackpot symbol array of “6” symbols is a jackpot symbol array in which it cannot be determined whether the gaming state after the jackpot game is a normal state or a probable change state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), the big hit effect 2 is executed. In the jackpot time effect 2, the background image HK2 (cross hatch portion) is displayed as the background image of the jackpot symbol array A81. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed in the background image HK2, and is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK2. The background image HK2 is arranged in the background image HK1, and is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. The size of the background image HK2 is smaller than the size of the background image HK1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (C), the big hit effect 3 is executed. In the jackpot time effect 3, the jackpot symbol array A81 changes again on the background image HK2.
Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (D), the big hit effect 4 is executed. In this jackpot effect 4, the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed again on the background image HK2. The jackpot symbol array A81 is composed of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have a “7” symbol. This jackpot symbol array A81 is a jackpot symbol array that is different from the jackpot symbol array A81 at the time of jackpot presentation 2, and is a jackpot symbol array that suggests that the gaming state after the jackpot will be a probable change state.

  Note that the jackpot symbol array A81 displayed in the jackpot time effect 4 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 in the jackpot time effect 2, and suggests that the gaming state after the jackpot will be in a probabilistic state. Although it is a jackpot symbol arrangement, it is not limited to this, and may be the same jackpot symbol array as the jackpot symbol array A81 at the time of jackpot effect 2.

[Big hit background display effect B]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot background display effect B.
This jackpot background display effect B is an effect executed when the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed after the reach effect. In this jackpot background display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 77 (A), a jackpot effect 1 is executed. In this jackpot time effect 1, a background image HK1 and a jackpot symbol array A81 are displayed. The background image HK1 represents a scene in which a teammate character and an enemy character are performing a battle effect. The jackpot symbol array A81 is configured by decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have a “6” symbol. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. The jackpot symbol array of “6” symbols is a jackpot symbol array in which it cannot be determined whether the gaming state after the jackpot game is a normal state or a probable change state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), the big hit effect 2 is executed. In the jackpot time effect 2, the background image HK2 (cross hatch portion) is displayed as the background image of the jackpot symbol array A81. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed in the background image HK2, and is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK2. The background image HK2 is arranged in the background image HK1, and is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. Further, a boundary line KL is displayed at the boundary between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2. The size of the background image HK2 is smaller than the size of the background image HK1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), the big hit effect 3 is executed. In the jackpot time effect 3, the jackpot symbol array A81 changes again on the background image HK2. Further, in this big hit effect 3, a button image BTN is displayed. This button image BTN is arranged on the boundary portion (on the boundary line KL) between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2. This button image BTN is displayed to prompt the player to press the effect button 63.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (D), the big hit effect 4 is executed. In the jackpot effect 4, the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed again on the background image HK2 when the player presses the effect button 63. The jackpot symbol array A81 is composed of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have a “7” symbol. This jackpot symbol array A81 is a jackpot symbol array that is different from the jackpot symbol array A81 at the time of jackpot presentation 2, and is a jackpot symbol array that suggests that the gaming state after the jackpot will be a probable change state.

  Note that the jackpot symbol array A81 displayed in the jackpot time effect 4 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 in the jackpot time effect 2, and suggests that the gaming state after the jackpot will be in a probabilistic state. Although it is a jackpot symbol arrangement, it is not limited to this, and may be the same jackpot symbol array as the jackpot symbol array A81 at the time of jackpot effect 2.

[Big hit background display effect C]
78 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot background display effect C. FIG.
The jackpot background display effect C is an effect executed when the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed after the reach effect. In the jackpot background display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 78 (A), the jackpot effect 1 is executed. In this jackpot time effect 1, a background image HK1 and a jackpot symbol array A81 are displayed. The background image HK1 represents a scene in which a teammate character and an enemy character are performing a battle effect. The jackpot symbol array A81 is configured by decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have a “6” symbol. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. The jackpot symbol array of “6” symbols is a jackpot symbol array in which it cannot be determined whether the gaming state after the jackpot game is a normal state or a probable change state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), the big hit effect 2 is executed. In the jackpot time effect 2, the background image HK2 (cross hatch portion) is displayed as the background image of the jackpot symbol array A81. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed in the background image HK2, and is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK2. The background image HK2 is arranged in the background image HK1, and is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. Further, a boundary line KL is displayed at the boundary between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2. The size of the background image HK2 is larger than the size of the background image HK1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (C), the big hit effect 3 is executed. In the jackpot time effect 3, the jackpot symbol array A81 changes again on the background image HK2. Further, in this big hit effect 3, a button image BTN is displayed. This button image BTN is arranged on the boundary portion (on the boundary line KL) between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2. This button image BTN is displayed to prompt the player to press the effect button 63.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (D), the big hit effect 4 is executed. In the jackpot effect 4, the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed again on the background image HK2 when the player presses the effect button 63. The jackpot symbol array A81 is composed of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have a “7” symbol. This jackpot symbol array A81 is a jackpot symbol array that is different from the jackpot symbol array A81 at the time of jackpot presentation 2, and is a jackpot symbol array that suggests that the gaming state after the jackpot will be a probable change state.

  Note that the jackpot symbol array A81 displayed in the jackpot time effect 4 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 in the jackpot time effect 2, and suggests that the gaming state after the jackpot will be in a probabilistic state. Although it is a jackpot symbol arrangement, it is not limited to this, and may be the same jackpot symbol array as the jackpot symbol array A81 at the time of jackpot effect 2.

[Big hit background display effect D]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot background display effect D. FIG.
This jackpot background display effect D is an effect executed when the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed after the reach effect. In the jackpot background display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 79 (A), the jackpot effect 1 is executed. In this jackpot time effect 1, a background image HK1 and a jackpot symbol array A81 are displayed. The background image HK1 represents a scene in which a teammate character and an enemy character are performing a battle effect. The jackpot symbol array A81 is configured by decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have a “6” symbol. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. The jackpot symbol array of “6” symbols is a jackpot symbol array in which it cannot be determined whether the gaming state after the jackpot game is a normal state or a probable change state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), the big hit effect 2 is executed. In the jackpot time effect 2, the background image HK2 (cross hatch portion) is displayed as the background image of the jackpot symbol array A81. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed in the background image HK2, and is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK2. The background image HK2 is arranged in the background image HK1, and is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. Further, a boundary line KL is displayed at the boundary between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2. The size of the background image HK2 is smaller than the size of the background image HK1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (C), the big hit effect 3 is executed. In the jackpot time effect 3, the jackpot symbol array A81 changes again on the background image HK2. Further, in this big hit effect 3, a button image BTN is displayed. This button image BTN is arranged on the boundary portion (on the boundary line KL) between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2. This button image BTN is displayed to prompt the player to press the effect button 63.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (D), the big hit effect 4 is executed. In the jackpot effect 4, the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed again on the background image HK2 when the player presses the effect button 63. The jackpot symbol array A81 is composed of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have a “7” symbol. This jackpot symbol array A81 is a jackpot symbol array that is different from the jackpot symbol array A81 at the time of jackpot presentation 2, and is a jackpot symbol array that suggests that the gaming state after the jackpot will be a probable change state.

  Note that the jackpot symbol array A81 displayed in the jackpot time effect 4 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 in the jackpot time effect 2, and suggests that the gaming state after the jackpot will be in a probabilistic state. Although it is a jackpot symbol arrangement, it is not limited to this, and may be the same jackpot symbol array as the jackpot symbol array A81 at the time of jackpot effect 2.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (E), the big hit effect 5 is executed. In the jackpot time effect 5, the background image HK2 is deleted, and the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed on the background image HK1. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. Further, the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed larger than the case of the jackpot effect 4 when the display position moves to the middle of the display screen 7a.

[Example of effects]
The following is an example of the effect of the jackpot background display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot background display effect, when the background image HK1 is displayed and the background image HK1 is displayed, the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed. When the background image HK1 is displayed after the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed, the background image HK2 is displayed, and the background image HK2 is displayed before the background image HK1. When the background image HK2 is displayed, the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed, and the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed in front of the background image HK2. According to this configuration, at the time of the jackpot, the background image HK2 is displayed in front of the background image HK1, and the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed in front of the background image HK2. The jackpot symbol array A81 can be emphasized while performing. Therefore, the player can enjoy the joy of the jackpot symbol array A81 while enjoying the effect in the background image HK1. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the boundary line KL is provided between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2 in the jackpot background display effect. According to this configuration, since the boundary between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2 becomes clear, the player can clarify the division between the effect performed in the background image HK1 and the display of the jackpot symbol array A81. it can. Therefore, the player can enjoy the joy of the jackpot symbol array A81 while enjoying the effect in the background image HK1. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot background display effects A, B, D, the size of the background image HK2 is smaller than the size of the background image HK1. According to this configuration, even when the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed, the predetermined effect in the background image HK1 can be enjoyed meaningfully. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot background display effect, the jackpot symbol array A81 displayed in the jackpot time effect 2 cannot determine whether the game state after the jackpot game is a normal state or a probable change state. The jackpot symbol array A81 displayed in the jackpot time effect 4 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 in the jackpot time effect 2, and suggests that the gaming state after the jackpot will be a probable change state. It is a jackpot symbol arrangement. The jackpot symbol arrangement A81 for both the jackpot time effect 2 and the jackpot time effect 4 is performed in an area in front of the background image HK2 and in which the background image HK2 is displayed. According to this configuration, a re-lottery effect for changing from a jackpot symbol array that suggests a relatively disadvantageous to the player to a jackpot symbol array that indicates a relatively advantageous to the player is placed in front of the background image HK1. Since the displayed background image HK2 can be executed as a background, this re-lottery effect can be impressed on the player. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot background display effect D, after the re-lottery effect, the background image HK2 is deleted and the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed on the background image HK1. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. According to this configuration, the jackpot symbol array A81 can be more emphasized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot background display effect, the jackpot symbol array A81 in the jackpot effect 1 and the jackpot effect 2 is a symbol array using the same symbol. According to this configuration, the jackpot symbol array A81 can be more emphasized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a decoration design change effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the jackpot background display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the jackpot symbol arrangement A81 may be different between the jackpot effect 1 and the jackpot effect 2.

[Modification 2]
In the jackpot background display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the position of the background image HK2 may be the upper left, lower left, lower right, or middle of the background image HK1. Further, the gaming machine 1 may include a display device different from the image display device 7. Then, the background image HK1 may be displayed on a display device different from the image display device 7, and the background image HK2 may be displayed on the display device.

[Modification 3]
In the jackpot background display effect B of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button image BTN may have a plurality of display forms (for example, colors and patterns). In this case, the jackpot expectation may be different depending on the display mode of the button image BTN. In addition, when the button image BTN is displayed, the effect button 63 may have a plurality of patterns. In this case, the degree of jackpot expectation may differ depending on how the effect button 63 is illuminated.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect A8-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying the first background image,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a first jackpot symbol array representing a jackpot,
The third display effect is an effect of displaying the second background image,
The fourth display effect is an effect of displaying a second jackpot symbol array representing a jackpot,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed, and the first jackpot in the second display effect is performed. The symbol array is displayed before the first background image of the first display effect, and after the second display effect is performed and when the first display effect is performed. The third display effect is performed, and the second background image in the third display effect is arranged in front of the first background image in the first display effect, and the third display effect is provided. Is performed, the fourth display effect is performed, and the second jackpot symbol arrangement in the fourth display effect is in front of the second background image of the third display effect. Is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A8-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect A8-1,
When the second background image is arranged in front of the first background image, a predetermined line is arranged at the boundary between the second background image and the first background image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A8-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A8-2,
When the second background image is arranged in the first background image, an area in which the second background image is displayed is smaller than an area in which the first background image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A8-4]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A8-3,
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The fifth display effect is an effect of changing the second jackpot symbol array to a third jackpot symbol array representing the jackpot,
The jackpot represented by the third jackpot symbol array is a jackpot advantageous to the player over the jackpot represented by the second jackpot symbol array,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the fourth display effect, and the fifth display effect is an area in which the second background image of the third display effect is displayed. Done in
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A8-5]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A8-4,
In the combination effect, the display of the second background image in the third display effect is terminated after the fifth display effect, and then, the third jackpot symbol arrangement of the first background image Displayed in the foreground,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A8-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 5,
The first jackpot symbol array and the second jackpot symbol array are the same symbol array,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  Hereinafter, the multi-timer effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. This multi-timer effect can be executed during a decorative symbol variation effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a plurality of timer effects, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Multiple timer production A]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the multi-timer effect A. The timer effects from FIG. 80 (A) to FIG. 80 (J) are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the multi-timer effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 80 (A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. At this time, the timer image is not yet displayed on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, the timer image display effect shown in FIG. 80 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the decorative symbol variation effect. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside the rectangular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point by counting down (here, “ 01 ”to“ 99 ”). It should be noted that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not always necessary to cause some display change when a certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point when the operation reception period (operation possible period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, random number display / countdown effects shown in FIGS. 80 (C) and 80 (D) are executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 displays “30” at the time of display, and then starts to count down (starts). On the other hand, the second timer TM2 is not started at the time of display (not counting down), and is displayed as a random number. Here, the random number display means that a numerical value between “00” and “99” is displayed randomly (irregularly). The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is faster than the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value of the first timer TM1.

  After this random number display / countdown effect is executed for a while, the second timer TM2 starts to count down (starts) as shown in FIG. When the second timer TM2 is started, a remaining period shorter than the remaining period displayed by the first timer TM1 is displayed. Here, in a state where the remaining period of the first timer IM1 displays “28”, the second timer TM2 displays “10” as the remaining period after the random number is displayed, and then the countdown starts. The When the countdown starts, the second timer TM2 has a slow numerical value switching speed. Thereby, the player can recognize that the countdown has started.

  After the second timer TM2 starts counting down (after starting), as shown in FIG. 80 (F), each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 executes countdown for a while (double countdown effect) ). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80 (G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, a first expectation suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 80 (H). In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image that suggests the probability (expectation degree) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first expectation in which “Chance!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. A degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, as shown in FIG. 80 (J), the second expectation suggestion effect is performed. Similar to the first expectation suggestion effect, the second expectation suggestion effect displays an image that suggests a probability (expectation) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the second where “Gekiatsu!” Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. An expectation suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 displays contents having a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1.

[Multiple timer production B]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the multi-timer effect B. The multiple timer effect B differs from the multiple timer effect A in the number of timer images displayed and the number of digital digits to be displayed. The timer effects from FIG. 81 (A) to FIG. 81 (J) are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the multi-timer effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), the first timer TM1 is displayed in a state where the decorative symbol variation effect is executed. Here, the first timer TM1 is a timer image in which a three-digit digital display is shown inside a rectangular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point by counting down (here, “001” to “999”). "Seconds"). The first timer TM1 displays “100” as the remaining period when displayed, and then starts to count down (starts). As in the case of the multi-timer effect A, a certain time point is an arbitrary time point, and it is not always necessary to cause some display change when the certain time point is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point when the operation reception period (operation possible period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), the second timer TM2 is displayed while the first timer TM1 is displayed. The first timer TM1 is a three-digit digital display timer image, which is not started at the time of display (the countdown is not started) and is displayed as a random number. The random number display here means that a numerical value between “000” and “999” is displayed randomly (irregularly). The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is faster than the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value of the first timer TM1. The first timer TM1 continues to count down.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81C, the third timer TM3 is displayed while the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed. The third timer TM3 is a three-digit digital display timer image, and displays a remaining period shorter than the remaining period displayed by the first timer TM1. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 is displaying “86”, the remaining period of the second timer TM2 is displayed as “60”, and the countdown is started (started). Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (D), the countdown of the second timer TM2 is started (started). When the second timer TM2 is started, a remaining period shorter than the remaining periods displayed by the first timer TM1 and the third timer TM3 is displayed. Here, in a state where the remaining period of the first timer IM1 displays “55” and the remaining period of the third timer IM3 displays “55”, the second timer TM2 displays the remaining number after displaying the random number. "10" is displayed as the period of, and then the countdown is started. When the countdown starts, the second timer TM2 has a slow numerical value switching speed. Thereby, the player can recognize that the countdown has started.

  After each of the three timers TM1 to TM3 performs the countdown, as shown in FIG. 81 (E), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, as shown in FIG. 81 (F). The first expectation suggestion effect is performed. In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image that suggests the probability (expectation degree) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first expectation in which “Chance!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. A degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (G), when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero “0”, a third expectation suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 81 (H). Similar to the first expectation suggestion effect, the third expectation suggestion effect displays an image that suggests a probability (expectation) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect. Here, when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero “0”, the display of the third timer TM3 disappears, and the third where “heat !!” is drawn at the position where the third timer TM3 was displayed. An expectation suggestion image EI3 is displayed. In this case, the third expectation degree suggestion image EI3 displays contents having a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, a second expectation suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 81 (J). Similar to the first and third expectation suggestion effects, the second expectation suggestion effect displays an image that suggests a probability (expectation) that is a big hit in the variation during the variation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the second where “Gekiatsu!” Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. An expectation suggestion image EI2 is displayed. In this case, the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 displays contents having a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 and the third expectation degree suggestion image EI3.

[Multiple timer production C]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the multi-timer effect C. FIG. The multiple timer effect C differs from the multiple timer effect A in the structure of the timer image and the display content of the timer image before starting. The timer effects from FIG. 82 (A) to FIG. 82 (J) are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the multiple timer effect C, first, a timer image display effect shown in FIG. 82 (A) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the decorative symbol variation effect. Here, in the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, a frame image is formed around a two-digit digital display, and an “ON” or “OFF” display is provided beside the frame image. The second timer TM2 has a mode in which the shutter is closed and the digital display cannot be seen. “ON” and “OFF” shown beside the frame images of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 indicate whether or not the shutter is open. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 display the remaining period (here, the number of seconds from “01” to “99”) until reaching a certain time point by counting down. It should be noted that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not always necessary to cause some display change when a certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point when the operation reception period (operation possible period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 82 (B) and 82 (C), a first timer countdown effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 displays “30” at the time of display, and then starts to count down (starts). On the other hand, the second timer TM2 is not started at the time of display (the countdown is not started), and the shutter is closed. Next, as shown in FIG. 82D, when the shutter of the second timer TM2 is opened, the digital display indicating “10” becomes visible. That is, the remaining period shorter than the remaining period displayed by the first timer TM1 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 82E, the second timer TM2 countdown is started (started).

  After the second timer TM2 starts counting down (after starting), as shown in FIG. 82 (F), each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 executes countdown for a while (double countdown effect) ). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82 (G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, a first expectation suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 82 (H). In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image that suggests the probability (expectation degree) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first expectation in which “Chance!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. A degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, a second expectation suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 82 (J). Similar to the first expectation suggestion effect, the second expectation suggestion effect displays an image that suggests a probability (expectation) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the second where “Gekiatsu!” Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. An expectation suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 displays contents having a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1.

[Multiple timer production D]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the multi-timer effect D. The multiple timer effect D is different from the multiple timer effect A in that the timer is not digital. The timer effects from FIGS. 83A to 83J are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the multiple timer effect D, first, a timer image display effect shown in FIG. 83 (A) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the decorative symbol variation effect. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are bar-shaped meters, and represent the remaining period until the meter has a remaining amount of time. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 indicate that the remaining period of the meter will decrease as the remaining amount of the meter decreases, and that a certain point in time has been reached when the remaining amount of the meter disappears (becomes zero) To suggest. It should be noted that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not always necessary to cause some display change when a certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point when the operation reception period (operation possible period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), the first timer start effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 is displayed when the meter is full, and thereafter, the reduction of the remaining amount of the meter is started (started). On the other hand, the second timer TM2 is not started at the time of display, and the meter does not decrease. Next, as shown in FIG. 83C, the third timer TM3 is displayed while the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed. The third timer TM3 is a bar-shaped meter and represents the remaining period until the meter reaches a certain time. When the third timer TM3 is displayed, a remaining amount smaller than the remaining amount of the meter of the first timer TM1 is displayed. Then, the reduction of the meter remaining amount is started. Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (D), the second timer TM2 is started. That is, a decrease in the meter remaining amount of the second timer TM2 is started. Immediately after starting, the second timer TM2 displays a remaining amount less than the meter remaining amount of the first timer TM1 and larger than the meter remaining amount of the third timer TM3. Then, the reduction of the meter remaining amount is started. After that, the remaining amount of the meter decreases in each of the three timers. Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (E), when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the third timer TM3 becomes zero, a third expectation suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 83 (F). In the third expectation suggestion effect, an image that suggests the probability (expectation) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect is displayed. Here, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the third timer TM3 becomes zero, the display of the third timer TM3 disappears, and the “chance!” Is drawn at the position where the third timer TM3 was displayed. 3 Expectation degree suggestion image EI3 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (G), when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero, as shown in FIG. 83 (H), the first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. . In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image that suggests the probability (expectation degree) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect is displayed. Here, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and “heat!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. A first expectation suggestion image EI1 is displayed. Here, the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 displays contents having a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the third expectation degree suggestion image EI3.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (I), when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero, a second expectation suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 83 (J). . In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting a probability (expectation degree) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect is displayed. Here, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and “Gekiatsu!” Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. A second expectation suggestion image EI2 is displayed. In this case, the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 displays contents having a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 and the third expectation degree suggestion image EI3.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of the effect of multiple timer production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 (B) (C), 81 (B) (C), 82 (B) (C), 83 (B) (C), The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed on the screen 7a, and the first effect in which the first timer TM1 is started in a state where the second timer TM2 is not started, and FIG. 81 (D), FIG. 82 (D), and FIG. 83 (D), after the first effect, the second timer TM2 starts and the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1. It is possible to execute the second effect in which the second timer TM2 displays the shorter remaining period. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 (B) (C), 81 (B) (C), 82 (B) (C), in the first effect, the second timer TM2 Displays a random number in a digital display. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 (G) (H), 81 (G) (H), 82 (G) (H), 83 (G) (H), After the production of 2, the first timer TM1 is displaying the remaining period, the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 is lost, and the first expected degree is at the position where the second timer TM2 is displayed. A third effect in which the suggestion image EI1 is displayed can be executed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 (I) (J), 81 (I) (J), 82 (I) (J), and 83 (I) (J), After the third effect, the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1 disappears, and the fourth effect in which the second expectation suggestion image EI2 is displayed at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed may be executed. it can. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 (H) (J), 81 (H) (J), 82 (H) (J), and 83 (H) (J), The first effect, the second effect, the third effect, and the fourth effect are executed during the changing effect, and the first expectation suggestion image EI1 and the second expectation suggestion image EI2 is a suggestion image that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 (H) (J), 81 (H) (J), 82 (H) (J), and 83 (H) (J), The expectation degree of jackpot suggested by the two expectation degree suggestion images EI2 may be higher than the expectation degree of jackpot suggested by the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of multiple timer production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above (for example, FIG. 80 (J)), the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 is assumed to display contents with a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1. However, the second expectation level suggestion image EI2 may display content with a lower expectation level than the first expectation level suggestion image EI1 or may display content with the same expectation level. In FIG. 81 (J), the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 is displayed with contents having a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 and the third expectation degree suggestion image EI31. . However, the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 may be displayed with a content with a lower expectation degree of jackpot than at least one of the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 and the third expectation degree suggestion image EI3, and the expectation degree is the same. The content may be displayed.
[Modification 2]
In the above (for example, FIG. 80), when the remaining periods of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 become “0”, the expectation suggestion images EI1 and EI2 are displayed. However, an image other than the expected level suggestion image may be displayed. For example, an operation unit image may be displayed, or an image in which a decorative symbol being variably displayed is stopped and displayed may be displayed.
[Modification 3]
In the above (for example, FIG. 80 (B)), the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is assumed to be faster than the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value of the first timer TM1. However, the numerical value switching speed displayed on the second timer TM2 may be the same as or slower than the numerical value switching speed (1 second) of the first timer TM1. Further, the second timer TM2 may be stopped in a state where a specific numerical value is displayed instead of displaying a random number.
[Modification 4]
As described above (for example, FIG. 80), the timer may include not only a portion (for example, a digital display portion) that changes with the passage of time but also other image elements. For example, the timer may be an image digitally displayed in the middle of a triangular image. In this case, the triangular image portion also corresponds to the timer. An image in which the digital display portion is temporarily difficult to visually recognize also corresponds to the timer.
[Modification 5]
The timer speed effect is performed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). However, the above timer speed effect may be executed over a plurality of variations.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first timer indicating a remaining period until reaching a certain time point,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second timer indicating a remaining period until reaching a certain time point,
A first effect in which the first timer and the second timer are displayed on the display means, and the first timer is started in a state where the second timer is not started;
After the first effect, the second timer is started, and the second effect is such that the second timer displays a remaining period shorter than the remaining period indicated by the first timer. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of performing the above.
◇ [Aspect B1-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
The second timer indicates a remaining period by a countdown of a digital display,
In the first performance, the second timer displays a random number on the digital display.
◇ [Aspect B1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or aspect B1-2,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first predetermined image,
After the second effect, the remaining period indicated by the second timer disappears in a state where the first timer displays the remaining period, and the second timer is displayed at the position where the second timer is displayed. A gaming machine, wherein a third effect in which the first predetermined image is displayed can be executed.
◇ [Aspect B1-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect B1-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second predetermined image,
After the third effect, the remaining period indicated by the first timer disappears, and the fourth effect in which the second predetermined image is displayed at the position where the first timer was displayed is executed. A gaming machine characterized by what is possible.
◇ [Aspect B1-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect B1-4,
The first effect, the second effect, the third effect, and the fourth effect are executed during a fluctuating effect,
The gaming machine, wherein the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image are suggestion images suggesting a degree of expectation of jackpot.
◇ [Aspect B1-6]
A gaming machine according to Aspect B1-5,
The gaming machine characterized in that the expected degree of jackpot suggested by the second predetermined image may be higher than the expected degree of jackpot suggested by the first predetermined image.

  Hereinafter, the timer effect will be described with reference to FIGS. This timer effect can be executed in connection with the variation display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter also simply referred to as “special symbol”). For example, it can be executed at the start of the special symbol variation display, at the start of the decorative symbol variation production, or during the reach production (super reach production).

[Timer production A]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect A. FIG.
In timer effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 84A, a timer effect execution availability effect is executed. In this timer effect execution availability effect, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, and the middle symbol is displayed. The middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In FIG. 84 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicate that they are changing (while scrolling downward).
In addition, a battle effect is executed in which an image of battle between the player-side teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. This battle effect is an effect for determining whether or not to execute the timer effect. As a result of the battle, the timer effect is executed when the teammate character CRA wins, and the timer is displayed when the teammate character CRA is lost. The production is not executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), a timer effect impossibility suggesting effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the timer effect impossibility suggestion, as a result of the battle effect shown in FIG. 84 (A), a character “defeated!” Indicating that the teammate character CRA has lost is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying this character “defeated!”, It is suggested that the timer effect is not executed during the fluctuating effects of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R this time.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84C, a lost symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lost symbol stop effect indicates that the variation results of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. In this example, “958” is shown in this lost symbol array.

  On the other hand, instead of FIG. 84 (B), as shown in FIG. 68 (D), a timer effect suggestion effect may be executed. In the timer effect suggestion effect, as a result of the battle effect shown in FIG. 84 (A), a letter “Victory!” Indicating that the teammate character CRA has won is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying this character “Victory!”, It is suggested that the timer effect is executed during the fluctuating effects of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R this time.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84E, a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. The timer image TM is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value is counted down. The timer image TM shown in FIG. 84 (E) shows 10 seconds as the timer initial value.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (F), a timer stop reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop reach effect, when the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 84 (E) is counted down to 0 seconds, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. It has become. In this example, the reach symbol arrangement is “7 ↓ 7”. In addition, the characters “Leach!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (G), the jackpot expectation suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot expectation suggestion effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this jackpot expectation suggestion effect, the timer image TM is erased, the left decorative design 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a, the right decorative design 8R moves to the right corner, and a predetermined jackpot expectation suggestion is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Production DKE is performed. Note that the jackpot expectation degree suggestion effect DKE is not particularly limited, and may be any effect as long as it is an effect suggesting the jackpot expectation degree, such as a battle effect or a story effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (H), a jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot finalizing effect indicates that the reach result shown in FIGS. 84 (F) and 84 (G) was a jackpot. That is, the jackpot symbol array “777” indicated by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicates the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. It should be noted that the letters “big hit!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. With this jackpot finalizing effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.
Note that the jackpot finalizing effect shown in FIG. 84 (E) is not necessarily performed, and the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 84 (C) may be performed with a predetermined probability.

  That is, in the timer effect A shown in FIG. 84, a timer effect execution availability effect (battle effect) as a first effect of whether or not to perform the timer effect is performed, and as a result of the battle effect, the teammate character CRA wins. The timer effect is performed as the second effect. Then, when the timer value is counted down by the timer effect and reaches “0”, that is, when the timer value stops at the predetermined value, the timer image TM is deleted (timer effect end), and the jackpot expectation degree as the third effect is suggested. The jackpot expectation suggestion effect DKE is performed.

[Timer production B]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining timer effect B. FIG.
In the timer effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 85 (A), a timer effect execution enable / disable effect is executed. In this timer effect execution availability effect, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, and the middle symbol is displayed. The middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In FIG. 85A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicate that they are changing (while scrolling downward).
In addition, a battle effect is executed in which an image of battle between the player-side teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. This battle effect is an effect for determining whether or not to execute the timer effect. As a result of the battle, the timer effect is executed when the teammate character CRA wins, and the timer is displayed when the teammate character CRA is lost. The production is not executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), a timer effect suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the timer effect suggestion effect, as a result of the battle effect shown in FIG. 85 (A), a letter “Victory!” Indicating that the teammate character CRA has won is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying this character “Victory!”, It is suggested that the timer effect is executed during the fluctuating effects of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R this time.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85C, a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. The timer image TM is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value is counted down. The timer image TM shown in FIG. 85 (C) shows 10 seconds as the timer initial value.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85D, a timer stop reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop reach effect, when the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 85 (C) is counted down to 0 seconds, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. It has become. In this example, the reach symbol arrangement is “7 ↓ 7”. In addition, the characters “Leach!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (E), a character display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This character display effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this character display effect, the timer image TM is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed instead of the erased timer image TM. The predetermined character MKE is an effect suggesting the expected degree of jackpot of the change, and in FIG. 85 (E), the character MKE of “chance” is displayed at substantially the same position as the position where the timer image TM was displayed. Is done.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (F), a lost symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lost symbol stop effect indicates that the reach result shown in FIG. 85 (E) is lost. In this example, “958” is shown in this lost symbol array. That is, the lost symbol array “958” indicated by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicates the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  On the other hand, instead of FIG. 85 (E), a character display effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 85 (G). This character display effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this character display effect, the timer image TM is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed instead of the erased timer image TM. This predetermined character MKE is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the jackpot of the change, and in FIG. 85 (E), the character MKE “extreme heat” is located at substantially the same position as where the timer image TM was displayed. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (H), a jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot finalizing effect indicates that the reach result shown in FIG. 85 (G) was a jackpot. That is, the jackpot symbol array “777” indicated by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicates the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. It should be noted that the letters “big hit!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. With this jackpot finalizing effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.
Note that the jackpot finalizing effect shown in FIG. 85 (H) is not necessarily performed, and the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 85 (F) may be performed with a predetermined probability. Similarly, the above-described lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 85 (F) is not necessarily performed, and the jackpot finalizing effect shown in FIG. 85 (H) may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the jackpot finalizing effect is performed is higher when the character display effect shown in FIG. 85 (G) is performed than when the character display effect shown in FIG. 85 (E) is performed. Yes.

  That is, in the timer effect B shown in FIG. 85, a timer effect execution enable / disable effect (battle effect) is performed as a first effect indicating whether or not the timer effect is performed, and as a result of the battle effect, the teammate character CRA wins. The timer effect is performed as the second effect. Then, when the timer value is counted down by the timer effect and reaches “0”, that is, when the timer value stops at the predetermined value, the timer image TM is deleted (timer effect end), and the jackpot expectation degree as the third effect is suggested. A character display effect is performed. A predetermined character MKE is displayed in the character display effect, and the expected degree of jackpot is suggested by the content of the displayed predetermined character MKE. That is, the character display effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot, and the degree of expectation of jackpot is changed according to the contents of the characters displayed in the character display effect.

[Timer effect C]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect C. FIG.
In timer effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), a timer effect execution enable / disable effect is executed. In this timer effect execution availability effect, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, and the middle symbol is displayed. The middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. 86A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
In addition, a battle effect is executed in which an image of battle between the player-side teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. This battle effect is an effect for determining whether or not to execute the timer effect. As a result of the battle, the timer effect is executed when the teammate character CRA wins, and the timer is displayed when the teammate character CRA is lost. The production is not executed.

  If the teammate character CRA wins the battle effect in the timer effect execution enable / disable effect shown in FIG. 86 (A), then, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), the timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The timer image TM is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value is counted down. The timer image TM shown in FIG. 86 (B) shows 10 seconds as the timer initial value.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86C, a timer stop reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop reach effect, when the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 86 (B) is counted down to 0 seconds, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. It has become. In this example, the reach symbol arrangement is “7 ↓ 7”. In addition, the characters “Leach!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86D, a character display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This character display effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this character display effect, the timer image TM is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed instead of the erased timer image TM. This predetermined character MKE is an effect that suggests the expected degree of jackpot of the change, and in FIG. 86 (D), the character MKE of “chance” is displayed at substantially the same position as where the timer image TM was displayed. Is done.
And although illustration is omitted, when the character display effect shown in FIG. 86 (D) is executed, next, as shown in FIG. 85 (F) described above, the lost symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Is done.

  On the other hand, instead of FIG. 86 (B), as shown in FIG. 86 (E), a decorative symbol variation effect may be executed. This decoration symbol change is an effect performed after the teammate character CRA wins in the battle effect in the timer effect execution enable / disable effect shown in FIG. 86 (A). In this decorative design variation effect, only the decorative design variations 8L, 8C, and 8R are performed, and the timer image TM is not displayed yet. That is, the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 86 (E) is an image in which the battle effect is deleted in the timer effect execution feasibility effect shown in FIG. 86 (A).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (F), a timer display reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This timer display reach effect is produced when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop in the reach symbol arrangement in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 86 (E), or the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R When a predetermined time elapses after stopping at the reach symbol arrangement (before the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped), the timer image TM is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The timer image TM is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value is counted down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 86 (F), 50 seconds as the timer initial value is shown. That is, in the timer display reach effect shown in FIG. 86 (E), the display timing of the timer image TM is when the reach is established by the change or after that and later than the timer display effect shown in FIG. 86 (B). Furthermore, the timer initial value is longer than the timer display effect shown in FIG. 86 (B).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (G), a timer stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop effect, a predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) RE is performed when the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 86 (F) is counted down to 0 seconds. . In this timer stop effect, the left decorative symbol 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a and the right decorative symbol 8R moves to the right corner, and a predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) RE is performed at the center of the display screen 7a. It has become. The predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) RE is not particularly limited, and may be a battle effect or a story effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (H), a character display effect is executed. This character display effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this character display effect, the timer image TM is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed instead of the erased timer image TM. This predetermined character MKE is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the jackpot of the change, and in FIG. 86 (E), the character MKE “extreme heat” is located at substantially the same position as where the timer image TM was displayed. Is displayed.
Then, although illustration is omitted, when the character display effect shown in FIG. 86 (H) is executed, next, as shown in FIG. 85 (H) described above, the jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The
It should be noted that the jackpot finalizing effect after the character display effect shown in FIG. 86 (H) is not necessarily performed, and a lost symbol stop effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. Similarly, the lost symbol stop effect after the character display effect shown in FIG. 86 (D) is not necessarily performed, and the jackpot finalizing effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the jackpot finalizing effect is performed is higher when the timer display reach effect shown in FIG. 86 (F) is performed than the timer display effect shown in FIG. 86 (B), and FIG. The character display effect shown in FIG. 86 (H) is higher than the character display effect shown in D).

  That is, in the timer effect C shown in FIG. 86, the timer effect execution availability effect (battle effect) as the first effect of whether or not to perform the timer effect is performed. As a result of the battle effect, the teammate character CRA wins. The timer effect is performed as the second effect. Here, in the timer effect, the greater the display timing of the timer image TM and the longer the timer initial value of the timer image TM, the higher the jackpot expectation. That is, the display timing of the timer image TM and the timer initial value of the timer image TM are effects that suggest the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation is determined by the difference in the display timing of the timer image TM and the timer initial value of the timer image TM. It is going to change. Then, when the timer value is counted down by the timer effect and reaches “0”, that is, when the timer value stops at the predetermined value, the timer image TM is deleted (timer effect end), and the jackpot expectation degree as the third effect is suggested. A character display effect is performed. A predetermined character MKE is displayed in the character display effect, and the expected degree of jackpot is suggested by the content of the displayed predetermined character MKE. That is, the character display effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot, and the degree of expectation of jackpot is changed according to the contents of the characters displayed in the character display effect.

[Timer effect D]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect D. FIG.
In timer effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), a timer effect execution enable / disable effect is executed. In this timer effect execution availability effect, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, and the middle symbol is displayed. The middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. 87A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (while scrolling downward).
In addition, a battle effect is executed in which an image of battle between the player-side teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. This battle effect is an effect for determining whether or not to execute the timer effect. As a result of the battle, the timer effect is executed when the teammate character CRA wins, and the timer is displayed when the teammate character CRA is lost. The production is not executed.

  If the teammate character CRA wins the battle effect in the timer effect execution enable / disable effect shown in FIG. 87 (A), then, as shown in FIG. 87 (B), the timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The timer image TM is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value is counted down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 87 (B), 10 seconds as the timer initial value is shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (C), a timer stop reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop reach effect, when the timer value TM of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 87B is counted down to 0 seconds, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. It has become. In this example, the reach symbol arrangement is “7 ↓ 7”. In addition, the characters “Leach!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87D, a character display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This character display effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this character display effect, the timer image TM is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed instead of the erased timer image TM. This predetermined character MKE is an effect that suggests the expected degree of jackpot of the change. In FIG. 87D, the character MKE “chance” is displayed at substantially the same position as the position where the timer image TM was displayed. Is done.
And although illustration is omitted, when the character display effect shown in FIG. 87 (D) is executed, next, as shown in FIG. 85 (F) described above, the lost symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Is done.

  On the other hand, although illustration is omitted instead of FIG. 87 (B), when the timer effect execution enable / disable effect shown in FIG. 87 (A) is executed, next, as shown in FIG. 86 (E) described above. On the display screen 7a, a decorative symbol variation effect may be executed. In this decorative design variation effect, only the decorative design variations 8L, 8C, and 8R are performed, and the timer image TM is not displayed yet. That is, the decorative symbol variation effect is an image in which the battle effect is erased in the timer effect execution enable / disable effect shown in FIG. 87 (A).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (E), a timer W (double) display reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This timer W display reach effect is when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the decorative symbol variation effect, or the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. Timer image TM1 and timer image TM2 are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a when a predetermined time has elapsed (before the middle decorative symbol 8C stops). The timer images TM1 and TM2 are displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value is counted down. In FIG. 87E, the timer image TM1 shows 50 seconds as the timer initial value, and the timer image TM2 shows 30 seconds as the timer initial value. That is, in the timer W display reach effect shown in FIG. 86 (E), when the display timing of the timer images TM1 and TM2 is reached or after the reach is established by the fluctuation, the timer display effect shown in FIG. 87 (B). The timer initial value is longer than the timer display effect shown in FIG. 87 (B).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (F), the timer TM2 stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer TM2 stop effect, when the timer value of the timer image TM2 shown in FIG. 87 (E) is counted down to 0 seconds, a predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) RE is performed. Yes. At this time, the timer image TM1 is similarly counted down to 20 seconds. In this timer TM2 stop effect, the left decorative symbol 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a and the right decorative symbol 8R moves to the right corner, and a predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) RE is performed at the center of the display screen 7a. It is like that. The predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) RE is not particularly limited, and may be a battle effect or a story effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (G), a timer TM2 character display effect is executed. This timer TM2 character display effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM2 stops at 0 seconds. In this timer TM2 character display effect, the timer image TM2 is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed instead of the erased timer image TM2. The predetermined character MKE is an effect that suggests the expected degree of jackpot of the change. In FIG. 87 (E), the character MKE2 “chance” is displayed at substantially the same position as the position where the timer image TM2 was displayed. Is done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (H), a timer TM1 character display effect is executed. This timer TM1 character display effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM1 stops at 0 seconds. In the timer TM1 character display effect, the timer image TM1 is deleted, and a predetermined character MKE1 is displayed instead of the deleted timer image TM1. This predetermined character MKE1 is an effect that suggests the expected degree of jackpot of the change, and in FIG. 87 (H), the character MKE1 of “extreme heat” is at the same position as the position where the timer image TM1 was displayed. Is displayed.
Then, although illustration is omitted, when the timer TM1 character display effect shown in FIG. 87 (H) is executed, next, as shown in FIG. 85 (H) described above, the jackpot confirmation effect is displayed on the display screen 7a. Executed.
Note that the jackpot finalizing effect after the timer TM1 character display effect shown in FIG. 87 (H) is not necessarily performed, and a lost symbol stop effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. Similarly, the lost symbol stop effect after the character display effect shown in FIG. 87 (D) is not necessarily performed, and the jackpot finalizing effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the jackpot finalizing effect is performed is higher when the timer W display reach effect shown in FIG. 87 (E) is performed than the timer display effect shown in FIG. 87 (B), and FIG. The case where the character display effect shown to FIG. 87 (G) (H) is performed is higher than the case where the character display effect shown to (D) is performed.

  That is, in the timer effect D shown in FIG. 87, a timer effect execution possibility effect (battle effect) is performed as a first effect indicating whether or not the timer effect is to be performed, and as a result of the battle effect, the teammate character CRA wins. The timer effect is performed as the second effect. Here, in the timer effect, the greater the display timing of the timer image TM, the longer the timer initial value of the timer image TM, and the greater the number of displayed timer images TM, the higher the jackpot expectation. . That is, the display timing of the timer image TM, the timer initial value of the timer image TM, and the number of display of the timer image TM are effects that suggest the expectation degree of jackpot, and the display timing of the timer image TM, the timer initial value of the timer image TM, and The jackpot expectation is changed according to the difference in the number of display of the timer image TM. When the timer value is counted down by the timer effect and reaches “0”, that is, when the timer value is stopped at the predetermined value, the timer images TM1 and TM2 are sequentially deleted (timer effect end), and the big hit expectation as the third effect is expected. A character display effect suggesting the degree is performed. Then, predetermined characters MKE1 and MKE2 are sequentially displayed in the character display effect, and the expected degree of jackpot is suggested by the contents of the displayed predetermined characters MKE1 and MKE2. That is, the character display effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot, and the degree of expectation of jackpot is changed according to the contents of the characters displayed in the character display effect.

[Example of effects]
The following is an example of the effect of the timer effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 87, predetermined first effects, second effects, and third effects can be executed, and the first effects are displayed in the first mode. The effect includes an effect and an effect displayed in the second mode. The second effect displays a predetermined timer image, counts the timer value using the timer image, and sets the timer value to a predetermined value. The third effect is an effect including a display suggesting a jackpot expectation, and when the effect displayed in the first mode is performed in the first effect, the second effect is displayed. When the timer value is stopped at a predetermined value in the second effect, the third effect is performed. According to this configuration, when the player performs an effect displayed in the first mode in the first effect, the player stops the timer value at a predetermined value and performs the third effect in the second effect. , Can play games with great expectations. In addition, since it is determined whether or not to produce an effect that suggests the jackpot expectation degree with a timer image whose timer value visually changes with the passage of time, the player can maintain a sense of expectation with the passage of time. In addition, by stopping the timer value at various numerical values, the player can be relieved. Further, it is possible to associate the timer value to be stopped with the jackpot expectation level and change the jackpot expectation level according to the numerical value of the stopped timer value. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 87, the first effect is a battle effect in which a player-side teammate character and an enemy character battle each other, and the first aspect is a battle effect. This is an effect in which the teammate character wins, and the second mode is a configuration in which the teammate character is defeated in the battle effect. According to this structure, the battle effect which determines whether the 2nd effect is performed is performed, and the 2nd effect will be performed when the teammate character on the player side wins by this battle effect. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the determination as to whether or not to perform the second performance in an easy-to-understand manner, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 85 to 87, the second effect is an effect that causes the countdown display to stop the timer value at a predetermined value, and the third effect is that the timer value is a predetermined value. This is a character effect that displays a predetermined character when stopped at, and the jackpot expectation is configured to change depending on the content of the character displayed in the character effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to change the expectation degree of jackpot by displaying characters with various contents in the character production. As a result, the player can be satisfied with the contents of the displayed characters and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the jackpot expectation degree is configured to change according to the display timing of the timer image in the second effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to display the timer image at various timings and change the degree of jackpot expectation. As a result, the player is relieved by the display timing of the timer image and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, the jackpot expectation degree is configured to change depending on the number of timer images to be displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to easily change the jackpot expectation degree by variously changing the number of timer images. As a result, the player is relieved by the number of timer images to be displayed, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a timer effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 87, the timer display effect has been shown by a countdown method in which the timer value is counted down, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the timer display effect may be such that the timer value changes irregularly (random change). Alternatively, the timer display effect may be displayed by a count-up method in which the timer value is counted up.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 87, when the timer value stops at a predetermined value (0 seconds), the jackpot expectation suggesting effect is performed and the jackpot is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined value at which the timer value stops is associated with a jackpot expectation suggestion effect, and the jackpot expectation suggestion effect is also suggested as a jackpot type (for example, as a jackpot type, a probabilistic jackpot or normal jackpot or a jackpot with a different number of rounds) You may do it. By configuring in this way, not only the jackpot suggestion but also the jackpot type (hitpot arrangement) can be suggested, and as a result, the player can determine whether or not the current jackpot is a promising jackpot, It is possible to determine in advance whether or not it is a big hit with many.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, two timer images are displayed in the timer display effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, three or more timer images may be displayed. Further, the color arrangement of the timer image may be different from the same color. If comprised in this way, it will become possible to suggest a jackpot expectation degree also by the color scheme and number of timer images. Further, the two timer images (a plurality of timer images) may be displayed so that the timer values are partially overlapped so as to be visible. Further, the display timings of the two timer images (a plurality of timer images) may not be the same, and may be displayed with a time difference.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85 to FIG. 87, the characters suggesting the jackpot expectation displayed in the character display effect are two types of “chance” and “hot”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, there may be a plurality of types of characters indicating the expected degree of jackpot displayed in the character display effect such as “fever”, “NEXT”, and “hit”. In this case, the character type and the jackpot type (big jackpot symbol arrangement) are associated with each other so as to suggest the jackpot type (for example, the jackpot type is a probability jackpot or normal jackpot or a jackpot with a different number of rounds). Also good. By configuring in this way, not only the jackpot suggestion but also the jackpot type (hitpot arrangement) can be suggested, and as a result, the player can determine whether or not the current jackpot is a promising jackpot, It is possible to determine in advance whether or not it is a big hit with many. In addition, the display of two characters (a plurality of characters) of “chance” and “extreme heat” may be performed so that a part of the characters is superimposed so that the characters can be visually recognized. Further, the display of the character (a plurality of characters) may not be performed simultaneously, and the previously displayed character may be erased before the next character is displayed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 87, the effect of determining whether or not to execute the timer effect is. Although the battle effect is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect for determining whether or not to execute the timer effect is a button effect (for example, when the meter is full with a button hit or when an effect indicating success is performed with a button push) It may be an effect that wins by lottery (for example, an effect that wins by roulette) or an effect that wins the first place in a competition (for example, an effect that wins by short-distance running). However, it is desirable to have a production that can determine victory or defeat, or success or failure).

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of performing a plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined first effect as one of the plurality of display effects.
The display means can execute a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects.
The display means can execute a predetermined third effect as one of the plurality of display effects.
The first effect is an effect including an effect displayed in the first aspect and an effect displayed in the second aspect.
The second effect is an effect including a display that displays a predetermined timer image, counts a timer value using the timer image, and a display that stops the timer value at a predetermined value,
The third effect is an effect including a display suggesting a jackpot expectation,
The display means performs the second effect when an effect displayed in the first mode is performed in the first effect, and when the timer value stops at a predetermined value in the second effect, Do the third production,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B2-2]
The first effect is a battle effect in which a player's teammate character and an enemy character battle each other,
The first aspect is an effect in which the teammate character wins in the battle effect,
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1, wherein the second aspect is an effect in which the teammate character loses in the battle effect.
[Aspect B2-3]
The second effect is an effect of performing a countdown display and stopping the timer value at a predetermined value,
The third effect is a character effect that displays a predetermined character when the timer value stops at a predetermined value,
The jackpot expectation changes depending on the content of the characters displayed in the character effect.
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or aspect B2-2, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect B2-4]
The jackpot expectation varies depending on the display timing of the timer image in the second effect,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-3, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect B2-5]
The jackpot expectation varies depending on the number of timer images displayed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-4, characterized in that:

  The timer speed effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. This timer speed effect can be executed during a decorative symbol variation effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the timer speed effect, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Timer speed effect A]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the timer speed effect A. In FIG. The timer effects from FIG. 88 (A) to FIG. 88 (J) are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the timer speed effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), a decoration effect change effect is executed. At this time, the timer image is not yet displayed on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, the timer image display effect shown in FIG. 88 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the decorative symbol variation effect. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside the rectangular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point by counting down (here, “ 01 "to" 99 "). It should be noted that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not always necessary to cause some display change when a certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point when the operation reception period (operation possible period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (C), a countdown effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 displays “20” at the time of display, and then starts to count down (starts). The second timer TM2 displays “30” at the time of display, and then starts counting down (starts). The switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value (digital display) of the first timer TM1 is 1 second, but the switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is the numerical value of the first timer TM1. Faster than the switching speed (1 second) (for example, 0.5 seconds). Here, description will be made assuming that the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is 0.5 seconds. That is, in the second timer TM2, the numerical value (digital display) is switched twice per second (the numerical value is decremented), so the numerical value is switched at twice the speed of the first timer TM1. The numerical value of the first timer TM1 is the same as the number of seconds. Note that the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 can be any speed other than 0.5 seconds.

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 88 (D), the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are “30” and “20” at the time of display, but the difference in numerical value (count value) decreases. . Here, the difference in numerical value (count value) is “10” at the time of display, but the difference is “8”. Then, the difference between the numerical values (count values) is gradually reduced, and the count values are temporarily matched as shown in FIG. 88 (E), and then the count values are reversed as shown in FIG. 88 (F). . After the count value is reversed, as shown in FIG. 88 (G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 first becomes zero “0”, as shown in FIG. 88 (H), the first expectation degree suggestion Production is performed. In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image that suggests the probability (expectation degree) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first expectation in which “Chance!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. A degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, a second expectation suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 88 (J). Similar to the first expectation suggestion effect, the second expectation suggestion effect displays an image that suggests a probability (expectation) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the second where “Gekiatsu!” Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. An expectation suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 displays contents having a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1.

[Timer speed effect B]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the timer speed effect B. FIG. The timer speed effect B is different from the timer speed effect A in that the timer is not digital. The timer effects from FIG. 89 (A) to FIG. 89 (J) are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the timer speed effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 89 (A), a decoration effect change effect is executed. At this time, the timer image is not yet displayed on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, the first timer image display effect shown in FIG. 89 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 is displayed during the decorative design variation effect. Here, the first timer TM1 is a rod-shaped meter, and represents the remaining period until the remaining amount of the meter reaches a certain point. The first timer TM1 suggests that the remaining period becomes shorter as the remaining amount of the meter decreases, and indicates that a certain point in time has been reached when the remaining amount of the meter disappears (becomes zero). It should be noted that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not always necessary to cause some display change when a certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point when the operation reception period (operation possible period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed. The first timer TM1 is displayed when the meter is full at the time of display, and thereafter, the reduction of the remaining amount of the meter is started (started).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89C, the second timer TM2 is displayed while the first timer TM1 is displayed. The second timer TM2 is a rod-shaped meter and represents the remaining period until the meter reaches a certain time. The second timer TM2 is displayed when the meter is full when displayed, and thereafter, the remaining amount of the meter is started to decrease (starts). The decreasing rate of the meter of the second timer TM2 (the rate at which the remaining period changes) is faster than the decreasing rate of the meter of the first timer TM1.

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 89 (D), the difference between the meter remaining amount of the first timer TM1 and the meter remaining amount of the second timer TM2 is gradually reduced. Then, as shown in FIG. 89 (E), the remaining amount of the meter temporarily matches, and thereafter, the remaining amount of the meter is reversed as shown in FIG. 89 (F). After the meter remaining amount is reversed, as shown in FIG. 89 (G), when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero, as shown in FIG. 89 (H), the first expectation A direction suggestion is performed. In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image that suggests the probability (expectation degree) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect is displayed. Here, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and “heat!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. A first expectation suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (I), when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero, a second expectation suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 89 (J). . In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting a probability (expectation degree) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect is displayed. Here, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and “Gekiatsu!” Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. A second expectation suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 displays contents having a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1.

[Timer speed effect C]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the timer speed effect C. FIG. . The timer speed effect C differs from the timer speed effect A in that the timer speed changes midway. The timer effects from FIG. 90 (A) to FIG. 90 (J) are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the timer speed effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. At this time, the timer image is not yet displayed on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, the timer image display effect shown in FIG. 90 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the decorative symbol variation effect. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside the rectangular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point by counting down (here, “ 01 "to" 99 "). It should be noted that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not always necessary to cause some display change when a certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point when the operation reception period (operation possible period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90C, a countdown effect is executed. Specifically, both the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 display “20” at the time of display, and then each countdown starts (starts). The switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value (digital display) of the first timer TM1 and the switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 are the same and are 1 second. For this reason, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 display the same numerical value (count value) for a while after the display.

  Thereafter, the speed-up start effect shown in FIG. 90 (D) is executed. Specifically, the suggestion image C1 suggesting that the switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value (digital display) of the second timer TM2 is increased is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, an image drawn as “speed up” is displayed. The numerical value switching speed (switching interval) displayed on the second timer TM2 is faster than the numerical value switching speed (1 second) of the first timer TM1. Here, the description will be made assuming that the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is 0.5 seconds. That is, in the second timer TM2, the numerical value (digital display) is switched twice per second (the numerical value is decremented), so the numerical value is switched at twice the speed of the first timer TM1. The numerical value of the first timer TM1 is the same as the number of seconds. Note that the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 can be any speed other than 0.5 seconds.

  Thereby, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 have the same count value (the difference between the count values is “0”) for a while after the display, but are shown in FIGS. 90E and 90F. In this way, the difference in the count value increases. In FIG. 90 (E), the count value difference is “1”, and in FIG. 90 (F), the count value difference is “3”. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 90 (G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 first becomes zero “0”, the first expectation suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 90 (H). In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image that suggests the probability (expectation degree) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first expectation in which “Chance!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. A degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, a second expectation suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 90 (J). Similar to the first expectation suggestion effect, the second expectation suggestion effect displays an image that suggests a probability (expectation) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the second where “Gekiatsu!” Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. An expectation suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 displays contents having a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1.

[Timer speed effect D]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the timer speed effect D. FIG. The timer speed effect D is different from the timer speed effect A in the number of timer images displayed and the number of digital digits to be displayed. The timer effects from FIG. 91 (A) to FIG. 91 (J) are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the timer speed effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 91 (A), the third timer TM3 is displayed in a state where the decorative symbol variation effect is executed. Here, the third timer TM3 is a timer image in which a three-digit digital display is shown inside the rectangular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point by counting down (here, “001” to “999”). ”) Is displayed. A certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not always necessary to change some display when a certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point when the operation reception period (operation possible period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.
The third timer TM3 is not started at the time of display (the countdown is not started) and is displayed as a random number. The random number display here means that a numerical value between “000” and “999” is displayed randomly (irregularly).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), the first timer TM1 is displayed while the third timer TM3 is displayed. The first timer TM1 is a three-digit digital display timer image, and “100” is displayed as the remaining period at the time of display, and then the countdown is started (started). The numerical value switching speed displayed on the third timer TM3 is faster than the numerical value switching speed (1 second) of the first timer TM1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81C, the second timer TM2 is displayed while the third timer TM3 and the first timer TM1 are displayed. The second timer TM2 is a three-digit digital display timer image, and displays a remaining period longer than the remaining period displayed by the first timer TM1. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 is displaying “86”, the remaining period of the second timer TM2 is displayed as “100”, and the countdown is started (started).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (D), the countdown of the third timer TM3 is started (started). When the third timer TM3 is started, a remaining period shorter than the remaining period displayed by the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 is displayed. Here, in a state where the remaining period of the first timer IM1 displays “70” and the remaining period of the second timer IM2 displays “68”, the third timer TM3 displays the remaining number after displaying the random number. "10" is displayed as the period of, and then the countdown is started. In the third timer TM3, when the countdown starts, the numerical value switching speed becomes slow. Thereby, the player can recognize that the countdown has started. Further, the speed-up start effect of the second timer TM2 is executed before and after the countdown of the third timer TM3 is started. Specifically, a suggestion image (not shown) suggesting that the switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value (digital display) of the second timer TM2 is increased is displayed on the display screen 7a. The numerical value switching speed (switching interval) displayed on the second timer TM2 is faster than the numerical value switching speed (1 second) of the first timer TM1. Here, the description will be made assuming that the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is 0.5 seconds. That is, in the second timer TM2, the numerical value (digital display) is switched twice per second (the numerical value is decremented), so the numerical value is switched at twice the speed of the first timer TM1. The numerical value of the first timer TM1 is the same as the number of seconds. Note that the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 can be any speed other than 0.5 seconds.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (E), when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero “0”, the third expectation suggesting effect is performed as shown in FIG. 91 (F). In the third expectation suggestion effect, an image that suggests the probability (expectation) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero “0”, the display of the third timer TM3 disappears, and the third expectation in which “chance!” Is drawn at the position where the third timer TM3 was displayed. A degree suggestion image EI3 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, as shown in FIG. 91 (H), the first expected degree suggesting effect is performed. Similar to the third expectation suggestion effect, the first expectation suggestion effect displays an image that suggests a probability (expectation) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first “heat!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. An expectation suggestion image EI1 is displayed. Here, the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 displays contents having a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the third expectation degree suggestion image EI3.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, a second expectation suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 91 (J). Similar to the first and third expectation suggestion effects, the second expectation suggestion effect displays an image that suggests a probability (expectation) that is a big hit in the variation during the variation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the second where “Gekiatsu!” Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. An expectation suggestion image EI2 is displayed. In this case, the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 displays contents having a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 and the third expectation degree suggestion image EI3.

[Example of effects]
An example of the effect of the timer speed effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1 in a state where the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The first effect can be executed in which the speed at which the second timer TM2 changes is different from the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 changes. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 88, 90 and 91, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 indicate the remaining period by the countdown of the digital display. In production, each countdown speed is different. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 89, each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 indicates the remaining period by changing so that the length of a specific image becomes shorter. In the first performance, the speed at which the length of each specific image is shortened is different. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed before the first effect, and the remaining time indicated by the first timer TM1 is displayed. A second effect can be executed in which the speed at which the period changes and the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 changes are the same. According to this configuration, since the speed at which the remaining period changes changes from the middle, it is possible to entertain the player visually and improve the interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88, in the first effect, the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 changes in the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1. In a state where the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed before the first presentation, the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1 is higher than the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2. After the short second effect and the first effect, the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 disappears while the first timer TM1 is displaying the remaining period, and the second timer TM2 is displayed. And a third effect in which a predetermined image is displayed at the selected position. According to this configuration, since the remaining period is reversed, it is possible to entertain the player visually and improve the interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, in the first effect, the rate at which the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 changes is the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1. The second effect in which the first timer TM1 is displayed before the first effect and the second timer TM2 is newly displayed from the state where the second timer TM2 is not displayed before the first effect. After the first effect, in the state where the first timer TM1 displays the remaining period, there is no remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2, and the second timer TM2 is not displayed on the display screen 7a. 3 effects can be executed. According to this configuration, since the timer displayed later becomes zero first, it is possible to entertain the player visually and improve the interest.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a timer speed effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above (for example, FIG. 88), the switching speed of the numerical value (digital display) of the second timer TM2 may be at least temporarily different from the switching speed of the numerical value of the first timer TM1. For example, the switching speed of the numerical value (digital display) of the second timer TM2 may be temporarily lower than the switching speed of the numerical value of the first timer TM1, or the switching speed changes to temporarily change the speed. However, it may be faster or slower than the first timer TM1. In the above (for example, FIG. 89), the decrease rate of the meter of the second timer TM2 may be at least temporarily different from the decrease rate of the meter of the first timer TM1. For example, the decrease rate of the meter of the second timer TM2 may be temporarily slower than the decrease rate of the meter of the first timer TM1, or the decrease rate changes to temporarily decrease the first rate. It may be faster or slower than the timer TM1.
[Modification 2]
In the above (for example, FIG. 88), at least one of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 may move during the countdown. Moreover, it may move and a part of each other may overlap. Further, at least one of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 may be invisible from the display screen 7a during the countdown.
[Modification 3]
The timer speed effect is performed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). However, the above timer speed effect may be executed over a plurality of variations.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B3-1]
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first timer indicating a remaining period until reaching a certain time point,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second timer indicating a remaining period until reaching a certain time point,
In the state where the first timer and the second timer are displayed on the display means, the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the first timer changes, and the remaining period indicated by the second timer A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing a first effect different in speed at which the speed changes.
◇ [Aspect B3-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
The first timer and the second timer indicate a remaining period by a countdown of a digital display,
In the first performance, each countdown speed is different.
◇ [Aspect B3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
Each of the first timer and the second timer indicates a remaining period by changing so that the length of a specific image is shortened.
In the first performance, the speed at which the length of each of the specific images is shortened is different.
◇ [Aspect B3-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-3,
Prior to the first presentation, the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the first timer changes in a state where the first timer and the second timer are displayed, and the second timer. A gaming machine characterized in that the second effect can be executed at the same speed as the remaining period indicated by.
◇ [Aspect B3-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-3,
In the first performance, the rate at which the remaining period indicated by the first timer changes is faster than the rate at which the remaining period indicated by the second timer changes,
Before the first performance, the remaining period indicated by the second timer is greater than the remaining period indicated by the first timer in a state where the first timer and the second timer are displayed. With a short second production,
After the first effect, in the state where the second timer is displaying the remaining period, the remaining period indicated by the first timer is lost, and the first timer is displayed at the position where the first timer is displayed. And a third effect in which a predetermined image is displayed.
◇ [Aspect B3-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-3,
In the first performance, the rate at which the remaining period indicated by the first timer changes is faster than the rate at which the remaining period indicated by the second timer changes,
Before the first production, the second timer is displayed, and the second production in which the first timer is newly displayed from the state where the first timer is not displayed,
After the first effect, the remaining period indicated by the first timer disappears in a state where the second timer displays the remaining period, and the first timer is displayed on the display means. A gaming machine characterized by being able to execute the third production that disappears.

  The timer count effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. This timer count effect can be executed during a decorative symbol variation effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the timer count effect, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Timer count effect A]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect A. FIG. The timer effects from FIG. 92 (A) to FIG. 92 (J) are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the timer count effect A, first, a timer image display effect is executed as shown in FIG. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the decorative symbol variation effect. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside the rectangular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point by counting down (here, “ 01 ”to“ 99 ”). It should be noted that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not always necessary to cause some display change when a certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point when the operation reception period (operation possible period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, the random number display / countdown effect shown in FIGS. 92 (B) and 92 (C) is executed. Specifically, the second timer TM2 displays “2” at the time of display, and then starts to count down (starts). On the other hand, the first timer TM1 is not started at the time of display (the countdown is not started), and is displayed as a random number. Here, the random number display means that a numerical value between “00” and “99” is displayed randomly (irregularly). The numerical value switching speed displayed on the first timer TM1 is faster than the numerical value switching speed (1 second) of the second timer TM2.

  In the second timer TM2 that has started (started) the countdown, the interlocking image RM is displayed so as to be superimposed on the digital display portion (numerical portion). The interlocking image RM here is an image (region image) indicating a region indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside the rectangular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion). The area of the interlocking image RM periodically changes inside the rectangular image surrounding the digital display part (numerical part). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 92A to 92D, the area of the interlocking image RM decreases with time, and when the area of the interlocking image RM disappears, the digital display portion (numerical portion) ), The next count is displayed. When the next count is displayed, the interlocking image RM again covers the entire inner side of the rectangular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion) (the area is restored). As described above, the interlocking image RM changes in shape (area decreases) from the time when one count during the countdown is displayed until the next count is switched, and every time the count is switched (one second). Every time) a constant change (decrease in area) is repeated. Due to the change in the shape of the interlocking image RM, the player can make a strong impression of the countdown.

  After this random number display / countdown effect is executed for a while, the countdown of the first timer TM1 is started (started) as shown in FIG. 92 (D). When the countdown starts (starts), the first timer TM1 displays the interlocking image RM superimposed on the digital display part (numerical part). Here, after the random number is displayed, the first timer TM1 displays “5” as the remaining period. By displaying the interlocking image RM on the first timer TM1, the player can recognize that the countdown has started.

  After the first timer TM1 starts counting down (after starting), as shown in FIGS. 92 (E) to 92 (H), each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 counts down for a while. Perform (double countdown production). At this time, the interlocking image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, and the area changes corresponding to each count change. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92 (I), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, as shown in FIG. 92 (J), the first expected degree suggesting effect is performed. In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image that suggests the probability (expectation degree) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first expectation in which “Chance!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. A degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Thereafter, the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, and a second expectation suggestion effect is performed. Similar to the first expectation suggestion effect, the second expectation suggestion effect displays an image that suggests a probability (expectation) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the second where “Gekiatsu!” Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. An expectation suggestion image is displayed. Here, the second expectation degree suggestion image displays contents having a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1.

[Timer count effect B]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect B. In FIG. The timer count effect B differs from the timer count effect A in the operation mode of the interlocking image RM and the mode until the timer is started. 93A to 93J are executed within the same variation (within one variation rendering period). In the timer count effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 93A, a timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the decorative symbol variation effect. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside a circular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point by countdown (here, “ 01 ”to“ 99 ”). It should be noted that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not always necessary to cause some display change when a certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point when the operation reception period (operation possible period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, 88 display / countdown effects shown in FIGS. 93 (B) and 93 (C) are executed. Specifically, the second timer TM2 displays “2” at the time of display, and then starts to count down (starts). On the other hand, the first timer TM1 is not started at the time of display (the countdown is not started), “88” is displayed and is stopped in that state. In the second timer TM2 that has started (started) the countdown, the interlocking image RM is displayed so as to be superimposed on the digital display portion (numerical portion). The interlocking image RM here is an image (region image) indicating a region indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion). The interlocking image RM periodically changes in area like a radar image or a pie chart inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion). Specifically, as illustrated in FIGS. 93A to 93D, the area of the interlocking image RM increases with time, and the image area of the interlocking image RM occupies the entire inner side of the circular image. In the digital display part (number part), the next count is displayed. When the next count is displayed, the interlocked image RM is not displayed again inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion) (starts again from zero). As described above, the interlocking image RM changes in shape (increases in area) between the time when one count during the countdown is displayed and the time when it switches to the next count, and every time the count is switched (one second). Every time) a constant change (area increase) is repeated. Due to the change in the shape of the interlocking image RM, the player can make a strong impression of the countdown.

  After this random number display / countdown effect is executed for a while, the countdown of the first timer TM1 is started (started) as shown in FIG. 93 (D). When the countdown starts (starts), the first timer TM1 displays the interlocking image RM superimposed on the digital display part (numerical part). Here, after the random number is displayed, the first timer TM1 displays “5” as the remaining period. By displaying the interlocking image RM on the first timer TM1, the player can recognize that the countdown has started.

  After the first timer TM1 starts counting down (after starting), as shown in FIGS. 93E to 93H, each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 counts down for a while. Perform (double countdown production). At this time, the interlocking image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, and the area changes corresponding to each count change. After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (I), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the first expectation suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 93 (J). In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image that suggests the probability (expectation degree) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first expectation in which “Chance!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. A degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Thereafter, the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, and a second expectation suggestion effect is performed. Similar to the first expectation suggestion effect, the second expectation suggestion effect displays an image that suggests a probability (expectation) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the second where “Gekiatsu!” Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. An expectation suggestion image is displayed. Here, the second expectation degree suggestion image displays contents having a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1.

[Timer count effect C]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect C. In FIG. The timer count effect C differs from the timer count effect A in the operation mode of the interlocking image RM and the combination effect mode with the movable accessory. The timer effects from FIG. 94 (A) to FIG. 94 (J) are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the timer count effect C, first, a timer image display effect is executed as shown in FIG. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the decorative symbol variation effect. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside a circular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point by countdown (here, “ 01 ”to“ 99 ”). It should be noted that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not always necessary to cause some display change when a certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point when the operation reception period (operation possible period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, the countdown effect shown in FIGS. 94 (B) to 94 (E) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 displays “10” at the time of display, and then starts to count down (starts). The second timer TM2 displays “2” at the time of display, and then starts to count down (starts). In the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 that have started (started) the countdown, the interlocking image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (numerical portion). The interlocking image RM here is an image (region image) indicating a region indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion). The interlocking image RM periodically changes in area like a radar image or a pie chart inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion). On the other hand, the interlocking image RM of the first timer TM1 and the interlocking image RM of the second timer TM2 are different in switching timing (cycle). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 94 (B) to (E), the interlocking image RM of the first timer TM1 has an image area of the interlocking image RM that occupies the entire inner side of the circular image at the time of display, and the area along with the countdown When the count decreases to zero, the area of the interlocking image RM also disappears. That is, the interlocking image RM of the first timer TM1 represents the remaining period until the count becomes zero. Even in this case, it can be said that the interlocking image RM is interlocked with the count because the area is constantly decreased with the count. On the other hand, the interlocked image RM of the second timer TM2, like the timer count effect B, increases in area with the passage of time, and when the image area of the interlocking image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image, In (part), the next count is displayed. When the next count is displayed, the interlocked image RM is not displayed again inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion) (starts again from zero). The interlocked image RM of the second timer TM2 changes its shape (area increases) from the time when one countdown is displayed until it switches to the next count, and every time the count is switched (one A constant change (increase in area) is repeated every second).

  During the countdown effect, as shown in FIG. 94 (F), the movable accessory driving effect may be executed. Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position and stops at the advanced position. By this. A part of the display screen 7 a is covered with the first movable accessory 14. At this time, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are in a state in which the lower half is covered with the first movable accessory 14 and is difficult to visually recognize. On the other hand, the player can recognize that the timer is counting down by changing the visible portion of the interlocking image RM.

  Thereafter, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0” as shown in FIG. 94 (G), the first expectation suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 94 (H). In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image that suggests the probability (expectation degree) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first expectation in which “Chance!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. A degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the first timer TM1 is continued as shown in FIG. 94 (I), and when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0” as shown in FIG. Expectation degree suggestion is performed. Similar to the first expectation suggestion effect, the second expectation suggestion effect displays an image that suggests a probability (expectation) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the second where “Gekiatsu!” Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. An expectation suggestion image is displayed. Here, the second expectation degree suggestion image displays contents having a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1.

[Timer count effect D]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect D. FIG. The timer count effect D is different from the timer count effect A in the operation mode of the interlocking image RM and the combination effect mode with the movable accessory. The timer effects from FIG. 95 (A) to FIG. 95 (J) are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the timer count effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 95 (A), the first timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 is displayed during the decorative design variation effect. Here, the first timer TM1 is a timer image in which a three-digit digital display is shown inside a rectangular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point by counting down (here, “1” to “999”). "Seconds"). It should be noted that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not always necessary to cause some display change when a certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point when the operation reception period (operation possible period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, the countdown effect shown in FIG. 95 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 displays “100” at the time of display, and then starts to count down (starts). In the first timer TM1 that has started (started) the countdown, the interlocking image RM is displayed so as to be superimposed on the digital display portion (numerical portion). The interlocking image RM here is an image (region image) indicating a region indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside the rectangular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion). The area of the interlocking image RM periodically changes inside the rectangular image surrounding the digital display part (numerical part). Specifically, as with the timer count effect A, the area of the interlocking image RM decreases with the passage of time, and when the area of the interlocking image RM disappears, the next count is displayed in the digital display part (number part). Is done. When the next count is displayed, the interlocking image RM again covers the entire inner side of the rectangular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion) (the area is restored). As described above, the interlocking image RM changes in shape (area decreases) from the time when one count during the countdown is displayed until the next count is switched, and every time the count is switched (one second). Every time) a constant change (decrease in area) is repeated. Due to the change in the shape of the interlocking image RM, the player can make a strong impression of the countdown.

  Next, the second timer image display effect shown in FIG. 95 (C) is executed. Specifically, the second timer TM2 is newly displayed in a state where the first timer TM1 is executing a countdown during the decorative symbol variation effect. Here, the second timer TM2 is a timer image in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside the circular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point by counting down (here, “01” to “99”). "Seconds"). Note that, as described above, a certain time point is an arbitrary time point, and it is not always necessary to cause some display change when a certain time point is reached.

  Next, the countdown effect shown in FIG. 95 (D) is executed. Specifically, the second timer TM2 displays “2” at the time of display, and then starts to count down (starts). In the second timer TM2 that has started (started) the countdown, the interlocking image RM is displayed so as to be superimposed on the digital display portion (numerical portion). The interlocking image RM here is an image (region image) indicating a region indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion). The interlocking image RM periodically changes in area like a radar image or a pie chart inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion). Similarly to the timer count effect B, the area of the interlocking image RM of the second timer TM2 increases with the passage of time. The next count is displayed. When the next count is displayed, the interlocked image RM is not displayed again inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion) (starts again from zero). The interlocked image RM of the second timer TM2 changes its shape (area increases) from the time when one countdown is displayed until it switches to the next count, and every time the count is switched (one A constant change (increase in area) is repeated every second). Due to the change in the shape of the interlocking image RM, the player can make a strong impression of the countdown.

  Next, a third timer image display effect shown in FIG. 95 (E) is executed. Specifically, the third timer TM3 is newly displayed while the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are counting down. Here, the third timer TM3 is not superimposed on the interlocking image RM and is displayed at a position close to the interlocking image RM. The third timer TM3 is a two-digit digital display, and displays the remaining period (here, the number of seconds from “01” to “99”) until reaching a certain time point by counting down. The interlocking image RM is an image (region image) indicating a region indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside the rectangular image. The interlocking image RM periodically changes in area inside the rectangular image that does not surround the digital display portion (numerical portion). Specifically, the area of the interlocking image RM decreases with the passage of time, and when the area of the interlocking image RM disappears, the next count is displayed in the digital display part (numerical part). When the next count is displayed, the interlocking image RM again covers the entire inside of the rectangular image (the area is restored). As described above, the interlocking image RM changes in shape (area decreases) from the time when one count during the countdown is displayed until the next count is switched, and every time the count is switched (one second). Every time) a constant change (decrease in area) is repeated. Due to the change in the shape of the interlocking image RM, the player can make a strong impression of the countdown.

  During the countdown effect by the three timers, as shown in FIG. 95 (F), the movable accessory driving effect may be executed. Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position and stops at the advanced position. By this. A part of the display screen 7 a is covered with the first movable accessory 14. At this time, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are in a state in which the lower half is covered with the first movable accessory 14 and is difficult to visually recognize. On the other hand, the player can recognize that the timer is counting down by changing the visible portion of the interlocking image RM.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the first expected degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 95 (H). In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image that suggests the probability (expectation degree) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first expectation in which “Chance!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. A degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 95 (I), when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero “0”, the second expectation suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 95 (J). Similar to the first expectation suggestion effect, the second expectation suggestion effect displays an image that suggests a probability (expectation) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect. Here, when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero “0”, the display of the third timer TM3 disappears, and the second where “heat !!” is drawn at the position where the third timer TM3 was displayed. Expectation degree suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 displays contents having a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1.

[Example of effects]
The following is an example of the effect of the timer count effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 95, the first timer TM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a and superimposed on the first timer TM1 to count down the first timer TM1. A linked interlocking image RM can be displayed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 95, the interlocking image RM has a shape in a predetermined manner from when one countdown is displayed until the next count is switched. Each time the count changes, the shape change in a predetermined manner is repeated. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 95, the area of the interlocking image RM changes with the passage of time during one count. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, after the first effect in which the first timer TM1 that has not been started is displayed on the display screen 7a and the first effect, The second effect that the 1 timer TM1 starts a countdown can be executed. In the first effect, the interlocking image RM is not displayed, and in the second effect, the interlocking image RM is displayed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92, in the first effect, the first timer TM1 displays a random number in digital display. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, in the first effect, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed, and the first timer TM1 is not started. The second timer TM2 is started, and an interlocking image RM linked to the countdown of the second timer TM2 is displayed superimposed on the second timer TM2. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a timer count production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above (for example, FIG. 95 (J)), the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 is assumed to display contents having a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1. However, the second expectation level suggestion image EI2 may display content with a lower expectation level than the first expectation level suggestion image EI1 or may display content with the same expectation level.
[Modification 2]
In the above (for example, FIG. 95), when the remaining periods of the first timer TM1 and the third timer TM3 become “0”, the expectation suggestion images EI1 and EI2 are displayed. However, an image other than the expected level suggestion image may be displayed. For example, an operation unit image may be displayed, or an image in which a decorative symbol being variably displayed is stopped and displayed may be displayed.
[Modification 3]
In the above (for example, FIG. 93 (D)), the first timer TM1 is displayed for a period longer than the remaining period displayed by the second timer TM2 at the start, but the second timer TM2 displays A period longer than the remaining period may be displayed.
[Modification 4]
The timer speed effect is performed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). However, the above timer speed effect may be executed over a plurality of variations.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B4-1]
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first timer indicating a remaining period until a certain time is reached by a countdown,
A gaming machine, wherein the display means can display a linked image that is superimposed on the first timer and linked to the countdown of the first timer in a state where the first timer is displayed.
◇ [Aspect B4-2]
A gaming machine according to Aspect B4-1,
The interlock image changes in shape in a predetermined manner from when one count during the countdown is displayed until the next count is switched, and each time the count is switched, the shape change in the predetermined manner is repeated. A gaming machine characterized by
◇ [Aspect B4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B4-2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that an area of the interlocking image changes with time during the one count.
◇ [Aspect B4-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspect B4-1 to Aspect B4-3,
A first effect in which the first timer that has not been started is displayed on the display means, and a second effect in which the first timer starts counting down after the first effect is executed. Is possible,
In the first effect, the interlocked image is not displayed, and in the second effect, the interlocked image is displayed.
◇ [Aspect B4-5]
A gaming machine according to Aspect B4-4,
In the first production, the first timer displays a random number in a digital display.
◇ [Aspect B4-6]
A gaming machine according to Aspect B4-4 or Aspect B4-5,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second timer indicating a remaining period until a certain time is reached by a countdown,
In the first performance, the first timer and the second timer are displayed, the second timer is started in a state where the first timer is not started, and the second timer is started. An interlocking image that is superimposed on and linked to the countdown of the second timer is displayed.

  The movable accessory timer effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 96 to 99. This movable accessory timer effect can be executed during a decorative symbol variation effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the movable accessory timer effect, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of reading and displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Moving accessory timer production A]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory timer effect A. In FIG. The timer effects from FIG. 96 (A) to FIG. 96 (J) are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the movable accessory timer effect A, first, a timer image display effect is executed as shown in FIG. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the decorative symbol variation effect. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside a circular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point by countdown (here, “ 01 ”to“ 99 ”). It should be noted that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not always necessary to cause some display change when a certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point when the operation reception period (operation possible period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, the random number display / countdown effect shown in FIG. 96 (B) is executed. Specifically, the second timer TM2 displays “22” at the time of display, and then starts to count down (starts). On the other hand, the first timer TM1 is not started at the time of display (the countdown is not started), and is displayed as a random number. Here, the random number display means that a numerical value between “00” and “99” is displayed randomly (irregularly). The numerical value switching speed displayed on the first timer TM1 is faster than the numerical value switching speed (1 second) of the second timer TM2.

  In the second timer TM2 that has started (started) the countdown, the interlocking image RM is displayed so as to be superimposed on the digital display portion (numerical portion). The interlocking image RM here is an image (region image) indicating a region indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion). The interlocking image RM periodically changes in area like a radar image or a pie chart inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion). Specifically, as shown in the timer count effect B of FIG. 93, when the interlocking image RM increases in area as time passes and the image area of the interlocking image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image, the digital display portion In (number part), the next count is displayed. When the next count is displayed, the interlocked image RM is not displayed again inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion) (starts again from zero). As described above, the interlocking image RM changes in shape (increases in area) between the time when one count during the countdown is displayed and the time when it switches to the next count, and every time the count is switched (one second). Every time) a constant change (area increase) is repeated. Due to the change in the shape of the interlocking image RM, the player can make a strong impression of the countdown.

  During the countdown effect, as shown in FIG. 96 (C), the movable accessory advance effect is executed. Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position. Thereby, a part of the display screen 7 a is covered with the first movable accessory 14. While the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the second timer TM2 is in a state in which the lower half is covered with the first movable accessory 14 and is difficult to see. The first timer TM1 has not been started yet and is displayed as a random number.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (D), a movable accessory stationary effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable accessory 14 moves upward (advances) from the retracted position, it stops at the advanced position. Thereby, almost the whole of the second timer TM2 is covered with the first movable accessory 14, and it becomes difficult to visually recognize the second timer TM2. Note that the second timer TM2 may be covered with the first movable accessory 14 and may be in a state in which it is difficult to see completely, or may be partially visible. The first timer TM1 has not been started yet and is displayed as a random number.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (E), the movable accessory retreat effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable accessory 14 moves downward (retracts) from the advanced position, it stops at the retracted position. As a result, the second timer TM2, which is almost entirely covered by the first movable accessory 14, becomes visible again. The first timer TM1 has not been started yet and is displayed as a random number.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96 (F), the countdown of the first timer TM1 is started (started). When the countdown starts (starts), the first timer TM1 displays the interlocking image RM superimposed on the digital display part (numerical part). Here, after the random number is displayed, the first timer TM1 displays “5” as the remaining period. That is, the first timer TM1 starts and displays a remaining period shorter than the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2. Note that the linked image RM is displayed on the first timer TM1, whereby the player can recognize that the countdown has started.

  After the first timer TM1 starts counting down (after starting), each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 executes countdown for a while (double countdown effect). At this time, the interlocking image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, and the area changes corresponding to each count change. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96 (G), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, a first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 96 (H). In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image that suggests the probability (expectation degree) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the first expectation in which “Chance!” Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. A degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96 (I), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, a second expectation suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 96 (J). Similar to the first expectation suggestion effect, the second expectation suggestion effect displays an image that suggests a probability (expectation) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the second expectation in which “Chance!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. A degree suggestion image is displayed. Note that the second expectation degree suggestion image EM1 may display contents having a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1.

[Moving accessory timer effect B]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory timer effect B. In FIG. The movable accessory timer effect B differs from the movable accessory timer effect A in that the first timer TM1 is started from the display time. The timer effects from FIG. 97 (A) to FIG. 97 (J) are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the movable accessory timer effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 97A, a timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the decorative symbol variation effect. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside a circular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point by countdown (here, “ 01 ”to“ 99 ”). It should be noted that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not always necessary to cause some display change when a certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point when the operation reception period (operation possible period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, the double countdown effect shown in FIG. 97 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 displays “17” at the time of display, and then starts to count down (starts). The second timer TM2 displays “23” at the time of display, and then starts counting down (starts).

  In the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 that have started (started) the countdown, the interlocking image RM is displayed so as to be superimposed on the digital display portion (numerical portion). The interlocking image RM here is an image (region image) indicating a region indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion). The interlocking image RM periodically changes in area like a radar image or a pie chart inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion). Specifically, as shown in the timer count effect B of FIG. 93, when the interlocking image RM increases in area as time passes and the image area of the interlocking image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image, the digital display portion In (number part), the next count is displayed. When the next count is displayed, the interlocked image RM is not displayed again inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion) (starts again from zero). As described above, the interlocking image RM changes in shape (increases in area) between the time when one count during the countdown is displayed and the time when it switches to the next count, and every time the count is switched (one second). Every time) a constant change (area increase) is repeated. Due to the change in the shape of the interlocking image RM, the player can make a strong impression of the countdown.

  During the countdown effect, as shown in FIG. 97 (C), the movable accessory advance effect is executed. Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position. Thereby, a part of the display screen 7 a is covered with the first movable accessory 14. While the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the second timer TM2 is in a state in which the lower half is covered with the first movable accessory 14 and is difficult to see. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue to count down. Therefore, the interlocking image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, and the area changes corresponding to each count change.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (D), a movable accessory stationary effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable accessory 14 moves upward (advances) from the retracted position, it stops at the advanced position. Thereby, almost the whole of the second timer TM2 is covered with the first movable accessory 14, and it becomes difficult to visually recognize the second timer TM2. Note that the second timer TM2 may be covered with the first movable accessory 14 and may be in a state in which it is difficult to see completely, or may be partially visible. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue to count down.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (E), the movable accessory retreat effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable accessory 14 moves downward (retracts) from the advanced position, it stops at the retracted position. As a result, the second timer TM2 that is almost entirely covered by the first movable accessory 14 becomes visible again. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue to count down. Therefore, the interlocking image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, and the area changes corresponding to each count change.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97 (F), the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue to count down again with the whole being visible (double countdown effect). A linked image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2. After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (G), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the first expectation suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 97 (H). In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image that suggests the probability (expectation degree) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the first expectation in which “Chance!” Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. A degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97 (I), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, a second expectation suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 97 (J). Similar to the first expectation suggestion effect, the second expectation suggestion effect displays an image that suggests a probability (expectation) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the second expectation in which “Chance!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. A degree suggestion image is displayed. Note that the second expectation degree suggestion image EM1 may display contents having a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1.

[Moving accessory timer production C]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory timer effect C. FIG. The movable accessory timer effect C differs from the movable accessory timer effect A in the number of displayed timers. The timer effects from FIG. 98 (A) to FIG. 98 (J) are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the movable accessory timer effect C, first, a timer image display effect is executed as shown in FIG. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the decorative symbol variation effect. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside a circular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point by countdown (here, “ 01 ”to“ 99 ”). It should be noted that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not always necessary to cause some display change when a certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point when the operation reception period (operation possible period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, the random number display / countdown effect shown in FIG. 98 (B) is executed. Specifically, the second timer TM2 displays “22” at the time of display, and then starts to count down (starts). On the other hand, the first timer TM1 is not started at the time of display (the countdown is not started), and is displayed as a random number. Here, the random number display means that a numerical value between “00” and “99” is displayed randomly (irregularly). The numerical value switching speed displayed on the first timer TM1 is faster than the numerical value switching speed (1 second) of the second timer TM2. Further, the third timer TM3 is displayed during the random number display / countdown effect. The third timer TM3 is a timer image in which a three-digit digital display is shown inside the rectangular image, and the remaining period (here, “001” to “999” seconds until reaching a certain time point by counting down) Number). The third timer TM3 displays “100” as the remaining period when displayed, and then starts to count down (starts).

  In the second timer TM2 that has started (started) the countdown, the interlocking image RM is displayed so as to be superimposed on the digital display portion (numerical portion). The interlocking image RM here is an image (region image) indicating a region indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion). The interlocking image RM periodically changes in area like a radar image or a pie chart inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion). Specifically, as shown in the timer count effect B of FIG. 93, when the interlocking image RM increases in area as time passes and the image area of the interlocking image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image, the digital display portion In (number part), the next count is displayed. When the next count is displayed, the interlocked image RM is not displayed again inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion) (starts again from zero). As described above, the interlocking image RM changes in shape (increases in area) between the time when one count during the countdown is displayed and the time when it switches to the next count, and every time the count is switched (one second). Every time) a constant change (area increase) is repeated. Due to the change in the shape of the interlocking image RM, the player can make a strong impression of the countdown. The interlocked image RM is not displayed on the third timer TM3 that has started (started) the countdown. Thereby, a different characteristic can be given for every timer, and the improvement of interest can be aimed at.

  During the countdown effect, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), the movable accessory advance effect is executed. Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position. Thereby, a part of the display screen 7 a is covered with the first movable accessory 14. While the first movable combination 14 is moving, the third timer TM3 and the second timer TM2 are covered with the first movable combination 14 in order from the lower side, and it becomes difficult to visually recognize. The first timer TM1 has not been started yet and is displayed as a random number.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (D), a movable accessory stationary effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable accessory 14 moves upward (advances) from the retracted position, it stops at the advanced position. As a result, the entire third timer TM3 and almost the entire second timer TM2 are covered with the first movable accessory 14, which makes it difficult to view. Note that the second timer TM2 may be covered with the first movable accessory 14 and may be in a state in which it is difficult to see completely, or may be partially visible. The first timer TM1 has not been started yet and is displayed as a random number.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (E), a movable accessory retreat effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable accessory 14 moves downward (retracts) from the advanced position, it stops at the retracted position. As a result, the second timer TM2 and the third timer TM3, which are almost entirely covered by the first movable accessory 14, become visible again. The first timer TM1 has not been started yet and is displayed as a random number.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 98 (F), the first timer TM1 starts to count down (starts). When the countdown starts (starts), the first timer TM1 displays the interlocking image RM superimposed on the digital display part (numerical part). Here, after the random number is displayed, the first timer TM1 displays “5” as the remaining period. That is, the first timer TM1 starts and displays a remaining period shorter than the remaining periods indicated by the second timer TM2 and the third timer TM3. Note that the linked image RM is displayed on the first timer TM1, whereby the player can recognize that the countdown has started.

  After the first timer TM1 starts counting down (after starting), each of the first timer TM1, the second timer TM2, and the third timer TM3 executes a countdown for a while (double countdown effect). At this time, the interlocking image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1, the second timer TM2, and the third timer TM3, and the area changes corresponding to each count change. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 98 (G), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, as shown in FIG. 98 (H), the first expected degree suggesting effect is performed. In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image that suggests the probability (expectation degree) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the first expectation in which “Chance!” Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. A degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 98 (I), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the second expectation suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 98 (J). Similar to the first expectation suggestion effect, the second expectation suggestion effect displays an image that suggests a probability (expectation) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the second expectation in which “Chance!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. A degree suggestion image is displayed. Note that the second expectation degree suggestion image EM1 may display contents having a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1. Thereafter, the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero “0”, and a third expectation suggestion effect is performed. Similar to the first and second expectation suggestion effects, the third expectation suggestion effect displays an image that suggests a probability (expectation) that is a big hit in the variation during the variation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero “0”, the display of the third timer TM3 disappears, and the third timer TM3 drawn “Gekiatsu!” At the position where the third timer TM3 was displayed. An expectation suggestion image is displayed.

[Moving accessory timer production D]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory timer effect D. FIG. The movable accessory timer effect D is different from the movable accessory timer effect A in that the timer is not digital. The timer effects from FIG. 99 (A) to FIG. 99 (J) are executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the movable accessory timer effect D, first, a timer image display effect is executed as shown in FIG. Specifically, the second timer TM2 is displayed during the decorative design variation effect. Here, the second timer TM2 is a rod-shaped meter, and represents the remaining period until the meter reaches a certain time. The second timer TM2 indicates that the remaining period becomes shorter as the remaining amount of the meter decreases, and indicates that a certain point has been reached when the remaining amount of the meter disappears (becomes zero). It should be noted that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not always necessary to cause some display change when a certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point when the operation reception period (operation possible period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point when the operation reception period ends. Further, it may be the time when an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed. The second timer TM2 is displayed when the meter is full when displayed, and thereafter, the remaining amount of the meter is started to decrease (starts).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99B, the first timer TM1 is displayed while the second timer TM2 is displayed. The first timer TM1 is a rod-shaped meter and represents the remaining period until the meter reaches a certain time. The first timer TM1 is displayed when the meter is full at the time of display, and thereafter, the reduction of the remaining amount of the meter is started (started). The decreasing rate of the meter of the first timer TM1 (the rate at which the remaining period changes) is the same as the decreasing rate of the meter of the second timer TM2. In addition, the decreasing rate of the meter of the first timer TM1 (the rate at which the remaining period changes) may be faster than the meter of the second timer TM2.

  While the meter remaining amount of both the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 is decreasing, as shown in FIG. 99 (C), the movable accessory advance effect is executed. Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position. Thereby, a part of the display screen 7 a is covered with the first movable accessory 14. While the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the second timer TM2 is in a state in which the lower half is covered with the first movable accessory 14 and is difficult to see. In the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, the remaining amount of the meter continues to decrease.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99D, a movable accessory stationary effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable accessory 14 moves upward (advances) from the retracted position, it stops at the advanced position. Thereby, almost the whole of the second timer TM2 is covered with the first movable accessory 14, and it becomes difficult to visually recognize the second timer TM2. Note that the second timer TM2 may be covered with the first movable accessory 14 and may be in a state in which it is difficult to see completely, or may be partially visible. In the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, the remaining amount of the meter continues to decrease.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (E), the movable accessory retreat effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable accessory 14 moves downward (retracts) from the advanced position, it stops at the retracted position. As a result, the second timer TM2 that is almost entirely covered by the first movable accessory 14 becomes visible again. In the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, the remaining amount of the meter continues to decrease.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (F), the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue to decrease in the meter remaining amount with the whole being visible again (double meter remaining amount reduction effect). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (G), when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, as shown in FIG. It is carried out. In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image that suggests the probability (expectation degree) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect is displayed. Here, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears and “Chance!” Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The first expected degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (I), when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, as shown in FIG. It is carried out. Similar to the first expectation suggestion effect, the second expectation suggestion effect displays an image that suggests a probability (expectation) that is a big hit in the change during the change effect. Here, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears and “Chance!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The second expected degree suggestion image is displayed. Note that the second expectation degree suggestion image EM1 may display contents having a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1.

[Example of effects]
The following is an example of the effect of the movable accessory timer effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 99, after the first effect in which the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed on the display screen 7a, and after the first effect. The second effect in which at least a part of the second timer TM2 becomes difficult to visually recognize due to the advancement of the first movable accessory 14 can be executed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 98, in the first effect, the second timer TM2 is started and the second timer TM2 is started while the first timer TM1 is not started. In production, the first timer TM1 is not started. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 98, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 indicate the remaining period by the countdown of the digital display. The first timer TM1 is not started, a random number is displayed in a digital display, the second timer TM2 is counting down, and in the second effect, the first timer TM1 is not started, A random number is displayed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 98, after the second effect, the third effect that the first movable accessory 14 moves backward and the second timer TM2 becomes visible is provided. ,
After the third effect, the first timer TM1 is started and the fourth effect in which the first timer TM1 displays a remaining period shorter than the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 is executed. be able to. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 98, after the fourth effect, the remaining time indicated by the first timer TM1 is displayed in the state where the second timer TM2 displays the remaining period. It is possible to execute the fifth effect in which the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed at the position where the period has disappeared and the first timer TM1 has been displayed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 98, in the first effect, the interlocking image RM that is superimposed on the 2 timer TM2 and interlocked with the countdown of the 2 timer TM2 can be displayed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a movable accessory timer effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above-mentioned movable combination stationary effect (for example, FIG. 96D), the second timer TM2 may be completely invisible by the first movable combination 14. Further, the second timer TM2 may be configured to be in a plurality of difficult states by moving the first movable accessory 14 in the vertical direction a plurality of times. Further, the first movable accessory 14 may be configured not to visually recognize at least a part of the first timer TM1 as well as the second timer TM2.
[Modification 2]
In the timer effect described above, the first movable accessory 14 is configured such that at least a part of the second timer TM2 is difficult to visually recognize. However, for example, it may be configured such that at least a part of the second timer TM2 becomes invisible by an accessory other than the first movable accessory 14, such as the second movable accessory 15.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 96 and 98, the first timer TM1 is displayed as a random number until the countdown starts after the display. However, the first timer TM1 may be displayed other than the random number display until the countdown is started after the display. For example, the first timer TM1 may stop at 88 display until the countdown is started after the display.
[Modification 4]
The timer effect described above is executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). However, the above timer speed effect may be executed over a plurality of variations.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B5-1]
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A gaming machine comprising a movable accessory that can advance over the entire surface of the display means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first timer indicating a remaining period until reaching a certain time point,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second timer indicating a remaining period until reaching a certain time point,
A first effect in which the first timer and the second timer are displayed on the display means;
After the first effect, the second effect can be executed, wherein at least a part of the second timer is difficult to visually recognize due to advancement of the movable accessory.
◇ [Aspect B5-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect B5-1,
In the first performance, the second timer is started in a state where the first timer is not started,
In the second performance, the first timer is not started.
◇ [Aspect B5-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B5-2,
The first timer and the second timer indicate a remaining period by a countdown of a digital display,
In the first performance, the first timer is not started, a random number is displayed in digital display, and the second timer is counting down,
In the second performance, the first timer is not started, and the random number is displayed.
◇ [Aspect B5-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect B5-3,
After the second effect, a third effect in which the movable accessory moves backward and the second timer becomes visible,
After the third effect, the first timer starts, and a fourth effect in which the first timer displays a remaining period shorter than the remaining period indicated by the second timer; A gaming machine characterized by being capable of performing the above.
◇ [Aspect B5-5]
A gaming machine according to Aspect B5-4,
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image,
After the fourth effect, in the state where the second timer is displaying the remaining period, the remaining period indicated by the first timer is lost, and the first timer is displayed at the position where the first timer is displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that a fifth effect in which the predetermined image is displayed can be executed.
◇ [Aspect B5-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspect B5-3 to Aspect B5-5,
In the first effect, a gaming machine capable of displaying a linked image superimposed on the second timer and linked to the countdown of the second timer.

  The icon selection effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This icon selection effect can be executed during a decorative symbol variation effect, a jackpot game, or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the icon selection effect, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Icon selection effect A]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining icon selection effect A. FIG.
In this icon selection effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 100A, a first icon display effect 1 is executed. In the first icon display effect 1, an icon B62A, an icon B62B, and an icon B62C are displayed as the first icon B62. In the first icon display effect 1, the button image B61 is displayed. In the first icon B62, a star mark and a character image are associated with each other. This star mark represents the degree of expectation of jackpot, and the greater the number of stars, the higher the degree of expectation of jackpot. The number of star marks included in each first icon B62 is 1-5. One star mark indicates that the expectation of jackpot is very low, two stars indicate that the expectation of jackpot is relatively low, and three stars indicate that the expectation of jackpot is moderate. When there are four star marks, this means that the expectation degree of jackpot is relatively high, and when there are five star marks, it means that the expectation degree of jackpot is very high. The character image represents the type of reach production to be developed from now on, and more specifically, it indicates the reach production in which the character represented by the character image appears. For example, the icon B62A has four star marks, which indicates that the degree of expectation of jackpot is relatively high, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62A appears. In addition, the icon B62B represents that the icon B62A has three star marks and the expectation degree of jackpot is medium, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62B appears. The icon B62C has two star marks and represents a relatively low expectation degree of jackpot, suggesting a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62C appears. The icons B62A, the icons B62B, and the icons B62C are different in icon image characters, and therefore, the suggested development destination reach effects are also different. Each first icon B62 has a circular shape.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), the second icon display effect 1 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, the second icon B63 is displayed. The second icon B63 includes an image in which characters representing “NEXT” are represented. The characters “NEXT” indicate that when the icon is selected in an icon selection effect described later, the icon selection effect is performed again. The second icon B63 has a quadrangular shape.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100C, icon selection effect 1 is executed. This icon selection effect 1 is an effect in which one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B, icon B62C) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 1, the color of the button image B61 changes to prompt the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are selected in order (the selected icons are hatched). And one icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 100C shows that the second icon B63 is selected.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (D), an icon number changing effect is executed. In this icon number change effect, an icon number reduction suggestion image B64 and a re-icon selection suggestion image B65 are displayed. The re-icon selection suggestion image B65 is an image that suggests that the icon selection effect will be performed again next, and the characters “NEXT” are represented. The characters “NEXT” also indicate that the icon number changing effect is a pseudo-continuous effect. The icon number reduction suggestion image B64 suggests that the number of icons is reduced in the next icon selection effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (E), the first icon display effect 2 is executed. In the first icon display effect 2, an icon B62A and an icon B62B are displayed as the first icon B62. In the first icon display performance 2, the button image B61 is displayed. In the first icon display effect 2, the first icon B62 is reduced by one compared to the first icon display effect 1. Specifically, the icon B62C is lost.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (F), the second icon display effect 2 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, the second icon B63 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (G), icon selection effect 2 is executed. This icon selection effect 2 is an effect in which one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 2, the color of the button image B61 changes to prompt the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are sequentially selected (the selected icons are hatched). And one icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 100G shows that the icon B62B of the first icon B62 has been selected.

Next, an effect based on the icon selected in icon selection effect 2 is performed. Specifically, since the icon B62B is selected in the icon selection effect 2, the character is included in the icon B62B. This reach production suggests that the expectation degree of jackpot is medium since the icon B62B includes three star marks.
When the second icon B63 is selected in the icon selection effect 2, the icon selection effect is executed again. In the present embodiment, icon selection effects can be performed up to four times. When the icon selection effect is the fourth time, the first icon B62 is always selected.

[Icon selection effect B]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining icon selection effect B. FIG.
In this icon selection effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), the first icon display effect 1 is executed. In the first icon display effect 1, an icon B62A, an icon B62B, and an icon B62C are displayed as the first icon B62. In the first icon display effect 1, the button image B61 is displayed. In the first icon B62, a star mark and a character image are associated with each other. This star mark represents the degree of expectation of jackpot, and the greater the number of stars, the higher the degree of expectation of jackpot. The number of star marks included in each first icon B62 is 1-5. One star mark indicates that the expectation of jackpot is very low, two stars indicate that the expectation of jackpot is relatively low, and three stars indicate that the expectation of jackpot is moderate. When there are four star marks, this means that the expectation degree of jackpot is relatively high, and when there are five star marks, it means that the expectation degree of jackpot is very high. The character image represents the type of reach production to be developed from now on, and more specifically, it indicates the reach production in which the character represented by the character image appears. For example, the icon B62A has four star marks, which indicates that the degree of expectation of jackpot is relatively high, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62A appears. In addition, the icon B62B represents that the icon B62A has three star marks and the expectation degree of jackpot is medium, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62B appears. The icon B62C has two star marks and represents a relatively low expectation degree of jackpot, suggesting a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62C appears. The icons B62A, the icons B62B, and the icons B62C are different in icon image characters, and therefore, the suggested development destination reach effects are also different. Each first icon B62 has a circular shape.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), the second icon display effect 1 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, the second icon B63 is displayed. The second icon B63 includes an image in which characters representing “NEXT” are represented. The characters “NEXT” indicate that when the icon is selected in an icon selection effect described later, the icon selection effect is performed again. The second icon B63 has a quadrangular shape.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (C), icon selection effect 1 is executed. This icon selection effect 1 is an effect in which one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B, icon B62C) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 1, the color of the button image B61 changes to prompt the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are selected in order (the selected icons are hatched). And one icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 101C shows that the second icon B63 has been selected.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (D), an icon number changing effect is executed. In this icon number change effect, an icon number increase suggestion image B66 and a re-icon selection suggestion image B65 are displayed. The re-icon selection suggestion image B65 is an image that suggests that the icon selection effect will be performed again next, and the characters “NEXT” are represented. The characters “NEXT” also indicate that the icon number changing effect is a pseudo-continuous effect. Icon number increase suggestion image B66 suggests that the number of icons will increase in the next icon selection effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (E), the first icon display effect 2 is executed. In the first icon display effect 2, an icon B62A and an icon B62B are displayed as the first icon B62. In the first icon display performance 2, the button image B61 is displayed. In the first icon display effect 2, the first icon B62 is increased by one compared to the first icon display effect 1. Specifically, an icon B62D is newly displayed. This icon B62D has five star marks and represents that the expectation level for jackpot is very high, and suggests a reach effect in which the character shown in the icon B62D appears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (F), the second icon display effect 2 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, the second icon B63 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (G), icon selection effect 2 is executed. In this icon selection effect 2, one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B, icon B62C, icon B62D) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 2, the color of the button image B61 changes to prompt the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are sequentially selected (the selected icons are hatched). And one icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 101G shows that the icon B62D of the first icon B62 has been selected.

Next, an effect based on the icon selected in icon selection effect 2 is performed. Specifically, since the icon B62D is selected in the icon selection effect 2, it develops into a reach effect in which a character included in the icon B62D appears. This reach production suggests that the big hit expectation is very high because the icon B62D includes five star marks.
When the second icon B63 is selected in the icon selection effect 2, the icon selection effect is executed again. In the present embodiment, icon selection effects can be performed up to four times. When the icon selection effect is the fourth time, the first icon B62 is always selected.

[Icon selection effect C]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining an icon selection effect C.
In this icon selection effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 102 (A), the first icon display effect 1 is executed. In the first icon display effect 1, an icon B62A, an icon B62B, and an icon B62C are displayed as the first icon B62. In the first icon display effect 1, the button image B61 is displayed. In the first icon B62, a star mark and a character image are associated with each other. This star mark represents the degree of expectation of jackpot, and the greater the number of stars, the higher the degree of expectation of jackpot. The number of star marks included in each first icon B62 is 1-5. One star mark indicates that the expectation of jackpot is very low, two stars indicate that the expectation of jackpot is relatively low, and three stars indicate that the expectation of jackpot is moderate. When there are four star marks, this means that the expectation degree of jackpot is relatively high, and when there are five star marks, it means that the expectation degree of jackpot is very high. The character image represents the type of reach production to be developed from now on, and more specifically, it indicates the reach production in which the character represented by the character image appears. For example, the icon B62A has four star marks, which indicates that the degree of expectation of jackpot is relatively high, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62A appears. In addition, the icon B62B represents that the icon B62A has three star marks and the expectation degree of jackpot is medium, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62B appears. The icon B62C has two star marks and represents a relatively low expectation degree of jackpot, suggesting a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62C appears. The icons B62A, the icons B62B, and the icons B62C are different in icon image characters, and therefore, the suggested development destination reach effects are also different. Each first icon B62 has a circular shape.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (B), the second icon display effect 1 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, a square second icon B63 is displayed. The second icon B63 includes an image in which characters representing “NEXT” are represented and a star mark. The characters “NEXT” indicate that when the icon is selected in an icon selection effect described later, the icon selection effect is performed again. The star mark represents the degree of expectation of jackpot, and the greater the number of stars, the higher the degree of expectation of jackpot. The number of star marks included in the second icon B63 is 1-5. A single star mark indicates that the jackpot expectation is very low, two star marks indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and a three star mark indicates that the jackpot expectation is moderate. When there are four star marks, this means that the expectation degree of jackpot is relatively high, and when there are five star marks, it means that the expectation degree of jackpot is very high. The second icon B63 shown in FIG. 102 (B) has three star marks, which suggests that the degree of jackpot expectation is medium.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (C), icon selection effect 1 is executed. This icon selection effect 1 is an effect in which one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B, icon B62C) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 1, the color of the button image B61 changes to prompt the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are selected in order (the selected icons are hatched). And one icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 102C shows that the second icon B63 has been selected. Since the selected second icon B63 has three star marks, this suggests that an effect with an intermediate degree of jackpot expectation will be performed in the future.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (D), an icon number changing effect is executed. In this icon number change effect, an icon number reduction suggestion image B64 and a re-icon selection suggestion image B65 are displayed. The re-icon selection suggestion image B65 is an image that suggests that the icon selection effect will be performed again next, and the characters “NEXT” are represented. The characters “NEXT” also indicate that the icon number changing effect is a pseudo-continuous effect. The icon number reduction suggestion image B64 suggests that the number of icons is reduced in the next icon selection effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (E), the first icon display effect 2 is executed. In the first icon display effect 2, an icon B62A and an icon B62B are displayed as the first icon B62. In the first icon display performance 2, the button image B61 is displayed. In the first icon display effect 2, the first icon B62 is reduced by one compared to the first icon display effect 1. Specifically, the icon B62C is lost.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (F), the second icon display effect 2 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, the second icon B63 is displayed. In this case, the second icon B63 includes a star mark. The number of star marks is three as with the icon selection effect 1 in FIG. 102 (C), suggesting that the degree of jackpot expectation is medium.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (G), icon selection effect 2 is executed. This icon selection effect 2 is an effect in which one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 2, the color of the button image B61 changes to prompt the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are sequentially selected (the selected icons are hatched). And one icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 102G shows that the icon B62B of the first icon B62 has been selected.

Next, an effect based on the icon selected in icon selection effect 2 is performed. Specifically, since the icon B62B is selected in the icon selection effect 2, the character is included in the icon B62B. The number of star marks (three) included in the icon B62B suggests that the expectation degree of jackpot for this reach production is moderate.
When the second icon B63 is selected in the icon selection effect 2, the icon selection effect is executed again. In the present embodiment, icon selection effects can be performed up to four times. When the icon selection effect is the fourth time, the first icon B62 is always selected.

[Icon selection effect D]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining an icon selection effect D. FIG.
In this icon selection effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 103 (A), the first icon display effect 1 is executed. In the first icon display effect 1, an icon B62A, an icon B62B, and an icon B62C are displayed as the first icon B62. In the first icon display effect 1, the button image B61 is displayed. In the first icon B62, a star mark and a character image are associated with each other. This star mark represents the degree of expectation of jackpot, and the greater the number of stars, the higher the degree of expectation of jackpot. The number of star marks included in each first icon B62 is 1-5. One star mark indicates that the expectation of jackpot is very low, two stars indicate that the expectation of jackpot is relatively low, and three stars indicate that the expectation of jackpot is moderate. When there are four star marks, this means that the expectation degree of jackpot is relatively high, and when there are five star marks, it means that the expectation degree of jackpot is very high. The character image represents the type of reach production to be developed from now on, and more specifically, it indicates the reach production in which the character represented by the character image appears. For example, the icon B62A has four star marks, which indicates that the degree of expectation of jackpot is relatively high, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62A appears. In addition, the icon B62B represents that the icon B62A has three star marks and the expectation degree of jackpot is medium, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62B appears. The icon B62C has two star marks and represents a relatively low expectation degree of jackpot, suggesting a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62C appears. The icons B62A, the icons B62B, and the icons B62C are different in icon image characters, and therefore, the suggested development destination reach effects are also different. Each first icon B62 has a circular shape.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), the second icon display effect 1 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, a square second icon B63 is displayed. The second icon B63 includes an image in which characters representing “NEXT” are represented and a star mark. The characters “NEXT” indicate that when the icon is selected in an icon selection effect described later, the icon selection effect is performed again. The star mark represents the degree of expectation of jackpot, and the greater the number of stars, the higher the degree of expectation of jackpot. The number of star marks included in the second icon B63 is 1-5. A single star mark indicates that the jackpot expectation is very low, two star marks indicate that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and a three star mark indicates that the jackpot expectation is moderate. When there are four star marks, this means that the expectation degree of jackpot is relatively high, and when there are five star marks, it means that the expectation degree of jackpot is very high. The second icon B63 shown in FIG. 103 (B) has two star marks, suggesting that the degree of expectation for jackpot is relatively low.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (C), icon selection effect 1 is executed. This icon selection effect 1 is an effect in which one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B, icon B62C) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 1, the color of the button image B61 changes to prompt the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are selected in order (the selected icons are hatched). And one icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 103C shows that the second icon B63 has been selected. Since the selected second icon B63 has three star marks, this suggests that an effect having a medium or higher expectation level for jackpots will be performed in the future.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (D), an icon number changing effect is executed. In this icon number change effect, an icon number reduction suggestion image B64 and a re-icon selection suggestion image B65 are displayed. The re-icon selection suggestion image B65 is an image that suggests that the icon selection effect will be performed again next, and the characters “NEXT” are represented. The characters “NEXT” also indicate that the icon number changing effect is a pseudo-continuous effect. The icon number reduction suggestion image B64 suggests that the number of icons is reduced in the next icon selection effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (E), the first icon display effect 2 is executed. In the first icon display effect 2, an icon B62A and an icon B62B are displayed as the first icon B62. In the first icon display performance 2, the button image B61 is displayed. In the first icon display effect 2, the first icon B62 is reduced by one compared to the first icon display effect 1. Specifically, the icon B62C is lost.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (F), the second icon display effect 2 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, the second icon B63 is displayed. In this case, the second icon B63 includes a star mark. The number of star marks is increased by one from the icon selection effect 1 in FIG. 103 (C) to 3, which suggests that the degree of expectation for jackpot is medium.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (G), icon selection effect 2 is executed. This icon selection effect 2 is an effect in which one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 2, the color of the button image B61 changes to prompt the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are sequentially selected (the selected icons are hatched). And one icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 103 (G) shows that the icon B62B of the first icon B62 has been selected.

Next, an effect based on the icon selected in icon selection effect 2 is performed. Specifically, since the icon B62B is selected in the icon selection effect 2, the character is included in the icon B62B. This reach production suggests that the expectation degree of jackpot is medium since the icon B62B includes three star marks.
When the second icon B63 is selected in the icon selection effect 2, the icon selection effect is executed again. In the present embodiment, icon selection effects can be performed up to four times. When the icon selection effect is the fourth time, the first icon B62 is always selected.

[Example of effects]
The following are examples of effects of icon selection effects.
[Effect 1]
In the icon selection effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first icon B62 and the second icon B63 are displayed, and one icon is selected from the first icon B62 and the second icon B63. When the icon selection effect 1 to be selected is performed and the second icon B63 is selected, the display of the first icon B62 and the second icon B63 is performed, and the icon selection effect 2 is performed again. According to this configuration, when the second icon B63 different from the first icon B62 in which the jackpot expectation and the character are associated is selected in the icon selection effect 1, the icon selection effect 2 is performed again. Therefore, it is possible to amplify the expectation for the jackpot while continuing the player's expectation for the jackpot, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the icon selection effects A, C, and D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of icons of the first icon B62 in the icon selection effect 2 is smaller than the number of icons of the first icon B62 in the icon selection effect 1. According to this configuration, in the icon selection effect 2, the number of the first icons B62 is smaller than the number of the first icons B62 in the icon selection effect 1, so that in the icon selection effect 2, the player is It can be felt that the first icon B62 desired to be selected is easily selected, and the interest of the icon selection effect 2 can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the icon selection effects A, C, and D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of icons of the first icon B62 in the icon selection effect 2 is one less than the number of icons of the first icon B62 in the icon selection effect 1. . According to this configuration, in the icon selection effect 2, the number of first icons B62 is one less than the number of icons of the first icon B62 in the icon selection effect 1, so that in the icon selection effect 2, the player selects The player can feel that the first icon B62 that he / she wishes to select is easily selected while suppressing the exclusion of the first icon B62 that desires the icon, and the icon selection effect 2 is improved. Can be made. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the icon selection effects A, C, and D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the lowest jackpot expectation degree in the jackpot expectation degree suggestion display included in the icon of the first icon B62 in the icon selection effect 2 is the icon selection effect. 1 is higher than the lowest jackpot expectation degree of the jackpot expectation degree suggestion display included in the icon of the first icon B62. According to this configuration, there is a higher possibility that the expectation of jackpot will be higher if the icon is selected in the icon selection effect 2 than in the icon selection effect 1. Therefore, when the transition to the icon selection effect 2 is made, it is greater for the player. A sense of expectation can be imparted. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the icon selection effects A and B of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second icon B63 in the icon selection effect 1 and the icon selection effect 2 does not include the suggestion (star mark) of the jackpot expectation degree. According to this configuration, when the second icon B63 is selected, since the next development is unknown, the player can be excited. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of icon selection production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the icon selection effect A of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the icon selection effect 2, two or more icons may be reduced compared to the icon selection effect 1. In icon selection effect B, in icon selection effect 2, two or more icons may increase compared to icon selection effect 1. In the icon selection effects A to D, there may be a plurality of second icons B63.

[Modification 2]
In the icon selection effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first icon B62 and the second icon B63 may have the same icon shape. For example, both the first icon B62 and the second icon B63 may be circular. The first icon B62 may have a different shape for each icon.

[Modification 3]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the first icon display effect 2, the icon having the most star marks (the jackpot expectation is high in the first icon B62 in the first icon display effect 1). An icon with more star marks (an icon with a high expectation degree of jackpot) may appear than an icon).
Further, in the icon selection effects A to D, in the first icon display effect 2, among the first icons B62 in the first icon display effect 1, a star is smaller than an icon having the smallest star mark (an icon with a low expectation degree of jackpot). An icon with many marks (an icon with a high expectation level for jackpots) may appear.

[Modification 4]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the first icon display effect 2, the icon having the smallest star mark (the jackpot expectation is low) among the first icons B62 in the first icon display effect 1. An icon with the same number of star marks (an icon with a high expectation of jackpot) may appear. Further, in the icon selection effects A to D, in the first icon display effect 2, among the first icons B62 in the first icon display effect 1, a star is smaller than an icon having the smallest star mark (an icon with a low expectation degree of jackpot). An icon with a small number of marks (an icon with a high expectation level for jackpots) may appear.

[Modification 5]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, each icon of the second icon B63 of the first icon display effect 2 has the same character as each icon of the first icon B62 in the first icon display effect 1. While using as it is, you may make it increase / decrease the number of star marks.

[Modification 6]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the highest jackpot expectation degree in the jackpot expectation degree suggestion display included in the icon of the first icon B62 in the icon selection effect 2 is the icon selection effect 1 You may make it make it higher than the highest jackpot expectation degree of the jackpot expectation degree suggestion display contained in the icon of 1st icon B62. According to this configuration, when an icon is selected in the icon selection effect 2 rather than the icon selection effect 1, it is possible to select an icon with an extremely high expectation degree of jackpot. A great expectation can be given to a person. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification 7]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first icon B62 and the second icon B63 are not star marks, but numbers (for example, percentages), colors, patterns, icon sizes, icon You may make it suggest jackpot expectation degree by a darkness, the position of an icon, etc.

[Modification 8]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the second icon B63 is selected in the icon selection effect 1, the star associated with the second icon B63 in the next icon selection effect 2 The number of marks may be configured to be equal to or greater than the number of star marks of the second icon B63 selected in the icon selection effect 1. Further, the icon selection effect 2 may be configured such that the first icon B62 having a star mark smaller than the number of star marks of the second icon B63 is not displayed. In other words, the greater the number of icon selection effects, the higher the jackpot expectation.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect B6-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of performing a first display that displays a plurality of icons including a character display that suggests a development destination of a reach effect by a character and a jackpot expectation suggestion display that suggests a jackpot expectation. Yes,
The second display effect is an effect of performing a second display for displaying an icon different from the icon in the first display,
In the third display effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed, and one icon is selected from the first display icon and the second display icon. It is an effect that performs the first selection effect to be selected,
The fourth display effect is performed after the third display effect, and the first display icon is selected when the second display icon is selected in the first selection effect of the third display effect. The display effect and the second display effect are performed, and the second selection effect for selecting one icon from the first display icon and the second display icon is performed. is there,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application Example B6-2]
A gaming machine described in Application Example B6-1,
The number of icons of the first display in the second selection effect is smaller than the number of icons of the first display in the first selection effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application Example B6-3]
A gaming machine according to Application Example B6-1 or Application Example B6-2,
The number of icons of the first display in the second selection effect is one less than the number of icons of the first display in the first selection effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application Example B6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Example B6-1 to Application Example B6-3,
The lowest jackpot expectation degree of the jackpot expectation suggestion display included in the icon of the first display in the second selection effect is a jackpot included in the icon of the first display in the first selection effect. Higher than the lowest jackpot expectation in the expectation indication,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Application Example B6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Example B6-1 to Application Example B6-4,
The icon of the second display in the first selection effect does not include the jackpot expectation suggestion display,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  Hereinafter, the changing effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107. This changing effect can be executed in connection with the change display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter also simply referred to as “special symbol”). For example, it can be executed at the start of the special symbol variation display, at the start of the decorative symbol variation production, or during the reach production (super reach production).

[Direction A during fluctuation]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the changing effect A. FIG.
In the changing effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 104 (A), the decorative symbol changing effect is executed in synchronization with the changing display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the central symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In FIG. 68A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104B, a transparent logo effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This transparent logo effect is the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 104 (A), and is still performed by switching the display screen 7a before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop. When the display screen 7a is switched, the character (logo) image TLG1 “G” is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This “G” logo image TLG1 is displayed in a mode in which the whole is colored in blue and the degree of transparency of the logo is small (there is almost no transparency). That is, in the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 104 (B), the big hit expectation degree is suggested depending on the transmission degree and color of the “G” logo image TLG1, and a big hit expectation is expected when the degree of transparency is small and the color is blue. The degree will be smaller (the expectation of jackpot is blue <green <red).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104C, a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, after the “G” logo image TLG1 shown in FIG. 104 (B) is displayed for a predetermined period, the display screen 7a is switched again, and the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 104 (A) is displayed. The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are shown to have stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. In this example, the reach symbol arrangement is “8 ↓ 8”. In addition, the characters “Leach!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (D), a lost symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lost symbol stop effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 104 (A) is lost after reaching reach in FIG. 104 (C). . In this example, the lost symbol arrangement is “858”.

  On the other hand, a transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 104 (E) may be executed instead of FIG. 104 (B). This transparent logo effect is the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 104 (A), and is still performed by switching the display screen 7a before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop. When the display screen 7a is switched, a character (logo) image TLG2 "G" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The “G” logo image TLG2 is colored in a light red color with the logo outline outlined in dark red. As a result, the “G” logo image TLG2 is displayed in a mode in which the degree of logo transmission is large (the background behind the logo is almost visible). That is, in the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 104 (E), the big hit expectation degree is suggested depending on the transmission degree and color of the “G” logo image TLG1. The degree will increase (the expectation of jackpot is blue <green <red).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (F), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, after the “G” logo image TLG2 shown in FIG. 104 (E) is displayed for a predetermined period, the display screen 7a is switched again to display the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 104 (A). The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are shown to have stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. In this example, the reach symbol arrangement is “7 ↓ 7”. In addition, the characters “Leach!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (G), a jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot finalizing effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 104 (A) is a big hit after reaching reach in FIG. 104 (F). In this example, “777” is shown in the jackpot symbol arrangement. It should be noted that the letters “big hit!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. With this jackpot finalizing effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.
Note that the jackpot finalizing effect shown in FIG. 104 (G) is a case where the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 104 (E) (the effect that the degree of transparency of the red logo is large and the expectation level of the jackpot is high) is performed. However, the loss symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 104 (D) may be performed with a predetermined probability. Similarly, the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 104 (D) is the case where the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 104 (B) (the effect that the degree of transparency of the blue logo is small and the expectation level of jackpot is low) is performed. However, it is not necessarily performed, and the jackpot finalizing effect shown in FIG. 104 (G) may be performed with a predetermined probability.

  In other words, in the changing effect A shown in FIG. 104, a transparent logo effect suggesting a jackpot expectation degree can be executed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. The degree is changing. That is, in a logo image (character image) displayed in a transparent logo effect, the big hit expectation is low when the degree of transparency of the logo is small, and the big hit expectation is high when the degree of transparency of the logo is large. Further, in the logo image (character image), when the logo is blue, the expectation for jackpot is low, and when the logo is red, the expectation for jackpot is high. In other words, when the variation results of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are big hits, a plurality of logos with different degrees of transparency as jackpot suggesting effects with a predetermined probability (lottery using random numbers, etc.) during the fluctuations. A predetermined transparent logo production is performed from various types of transparent logo production.

[Direction B during fluctuation]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the changing effect B.
In the changing effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 105 (A), the decorative symbol changing effect is executed in synchronization with the changing display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the central symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In FIG. 68A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (B), a transparent logo effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This transparent logo effect is the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 105 (A), and is still performed by switching the display screen 7a before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop. When the display screen 7a is switched, a character (logo) image TLG3 "G" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This “G” logo image TLG3 is displayed in a mode in which the whole is colored in green and the degree of transparency of the logo is medium (translucent and the background behind it is visible about 50%). In other words, in the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 105 (B), the effect of suggesting the big hit expectation degree is suggested by the transmission degree and color of the “G” logo image TLG3, and the transmission degree is medium and the color is green. And the jackpot expectation is moderate (the jackpot expectation is blue <green <red).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105C, a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, after the “G” logo image TLG3 shown in FIG. 105 (B) is displayed for a predetermined period, the display screen 7a is switched again, and the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 105 (A) is displayed. The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are shown to have stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. In this example, the reach symbol arrangement is “8 ↓ 8”. In addition, the characters “Leach!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (D), a lost symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lost symbol stop effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 105 (A) is lost after reaching reach in FIG. 105 (C) (reach loss). . In this example, the lost symbol arrangement is “858”.

  On the other hand, in place of FIG. 105 (B), the logo accessory movable effect shown in FIG. 105 (E) may be executed. The logo accessory movable effect is such that the logo accessory LYA descends from the home position during the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 105 (A), and stops for a predetermined time at the front center of the display screen 7a. ing. The logo accessory LYA has the same “G” logo body as the “G” logo image TLG3 shown in FIG. 105 (B) at the front end. The entire display stops at the front center of the display screen 7a so as to be visible. At this time, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are erased, and instead, a display effect is performed as if the periphery of the “G” logo body is shining. This enhances the production effect. It should be noted that the logo accessory LYA as the movable accessory shown in this figure is provided as a part of the above-described panel movable accessory 15 (see FIG. 1).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (F), a transparent logo effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this transparent logo effect, the logo accessory LYA rises until the “G” logo body, which has stopped at the approximate center of the front side of the display screen 7a, is hidden about half as shown in FIG. 105 (F). A character (logo) image TLG3 “G” is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a immediately below the logo body. This “G” logo image TLG3 is displayed in a mode in which the whole is colored in green and the degree of transparency of the logo is medium (translucent and the background behind it is visible about 50%). The “G” logo image TLG3 is displayed in the same size as the “G” logo body. This enhances the production effect. That is, in the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 105 (B), the “G” logo image TLG3 is displayed in association with the movement of the logo accessory LYA. The “G” logo image TLG3 has the same display as that shown in FIG. 105 (B), but the jackpot expectation is shown in FIG. 105 (F) because it is displayed in association with the movement of the logo accessory LYA. The transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 105 is higher than the transparent logo effect shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (G), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, after the “G” logo image TLG3 shown in FIG. 105 (F) is displayed for a predetermined period, the logo accessory LYA rises and returns to the home position, and the display screen 7a is switched again to display FIG. The decorative symbol variation effect shown in A) is displayed, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R appear to have stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. In this example, the reach symbol arrangement is “7 ↓ 7”. In addition, the characters “Leach!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (H), a jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot finalizing effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 105 (A) is a jackpot after reaching reach in FIG. 105 (G). In this example, “777” is shown in the jackpot symbol arrangement. It should be noted that the letters “big hit!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. With this jackpot finalizing effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.
Note that the jackpot finalizing effect shown in FIG. 105 (H) is the case where the transparent logo effect (transparent logo effect performed in connection with the movement of the logo accessory LYA) shown in FIG. 105 (F) is performed. However, it is not necessarily performed, and the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 105 (D) may be performed with a predetermined probability. Similarly, the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 105 (D) described above is the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 105 (B) (the transparent logo effect that was not performed in connection with the movement of the logo accessory LYA). Even if it is a case, it is not necessarily performed, and the jackpot finalizing effect shown in FIG. 105 (H) may be performed with a predetermined probability.

  In other words, in the changing effect B shown in FIG. 105, a transparent logo effect suggesting a jackpot expectation can be executed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. The expectation of jackpot changes depending on whether or not it is done in relation to the movement. In other words, when a logo image (character image) displayed with a transparent logo effect is displayed in association with the movement of a movable accessory, the jackpot expectation is high, and is displayed regardless of the movement of the movable accessory. The expectation of jackpot is low. In other words, when the variation result of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is a big hit, the probability that the logo image is displayed in relation to the movement of the movable accessory is independent of the movement of the movable accessory. Will be higher than the probability of being displayed.

[Fluctuation production C]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the changing effect C. FIG.
In the changing effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 106 (A), the decorative symbol changing effect is executed in synchronization with the changing display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the central symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. 106A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward). In this decorative design variation effect, the display stage 7a is an effect stage that is displayed behind the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and is a first stage as a background image HG1 with a “mountain” motif. (Stay Stage) is displayed. It should be noted that an effect stage selected from a plurality of effect stages with different background images is displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the variation of the symbol is displayed) For example, when the number of times reaches a predetermined number, when a predetermined time elapses, when a gaming state changes, or when a player performs an operation stage selection operation).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (B), a reach symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach symbol stop effect indicates that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 106 (A). In this example, the reach symbol arrangement is “7 ↓ 7”. In addition, the characters “Leach!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (C), the first stage exclusive reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This first stage exclusive reach effect is a dedicated reach effect corresponding to the first stage, which is performed only when the first stage is staying. In the first stage dedicated reach effect, the left decorative symbol 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a, the right decorative symbol 8R moves to the right corner, and a predetermined reach in which the character CRA1 dedicated to the first stage appears in the center of the display screen 7a. It is supposed to produce. The predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) is not particularly limited, and may be a battle effect or a story effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (D), a jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot finalizing effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 106 (A) is a big hit after reaching reach in FIG. 106 (B). In this example, “777” is shown in the jackpot symbol arrangement. It should be noted that the letters “big hit!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. With this jackpot finalizing effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. Note that the jackpot finalizing effect shown in FIG. 106 (D) is not always performed, and there is a possibility that the game will be lost at a predetermined probability.

  On the other hand, instead of FIG. 106 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 106 (E) may be executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the central symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. FIG. 106 (E) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (while scrolling downward). In this decorative design variation effect, the display stage 7a is an effect stage that is displayed behind the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and is a second stage as a background image HG2 with the motif of “tree”. (Stay Stage) is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (F), a reach symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach symbol stop effect indicates that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 106 (E). In this example, the reach symbol arrangement is “7 ↓ 7”. In addition, the characters “Leach!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (G), the second stage exclusive reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This second stage exclusive reach effect is a dedicated reach effect corresponding to the second stage, which is performed only when the second stage is staying. In the second stage dedicated reach effect, the left decorative symbol 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a, the right decorative symbol 8R moves to the right corner, and the second stage dedicated character CRA2 appears at the center of the display screen 7a. It is supposed to produce. The predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) is not particularly limited, and may be a battle effect or a story effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (H), a jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot finalizing effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 106 (E) is a big hit after reaching reach in FIG. 106 (F). In this example, “777” is shown in the jackpot symbol arrangement. It should be noted that the letters “big hit!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. With this jackpot finalizing effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. It should be noted that the jackpot finalizing effect shown in FIG. 106 (H) is not necessarily performed, and there is a possibility that the game is lost at a predetermined probability. However, the first stage dedicated reach effect shown in FIG. 106 (C) and the second stage dedicated reach effect shown in FIG. 106 (G) have a difference in the jackpot expectation (big hit reliability). Therefore, the expected value that is a big hit when the first stage dedicated reach or the second stage dedicated reach is performed is the same.

  That is, in the changing effect C shown in FIG. 106, the effect stage selected from the effect stages with different background images is displayed as the stay stage, and each effect stage has a respective effect stage. Dedicated reach production that does not have a difference in the jackpot expectation (corresponding to the jackpot) corresponding to the stage can be executed.

[Fluctuation production D]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the changing effect A. FIG.
In the changing effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 107 (A), the decorative symbol changing effect is executed in synchronization with the changing display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the central symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In FIG. 68A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), the G zone entry effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This G zone entry effect is the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 107 (A), and is performed by switching the display screen 7a before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are still stopped. That is, the entry timing to the G zone in the G zone entry effect shown in FIG. 107 (B) is changing before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop. When the display screen 7a is switched, a character image “G zone!” Is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. The G zone is an effect accompanied by display of information suggesting the degree of expectation of jackpot, and is a specific image effect that is different from the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (C), the G zone variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This G zone variation effect is performed by switching the character image “G zone!” Shown in FIG. 107 (B). When the G zone variation effect is executed, an upper telop (caption) UT and a lower telop (caption) ST flow in the upper and lower portions of the display screen 7a. In the upper telop UT, a horizontal band is displayed from the left end of the display screen 7a to the right end while inclining upward in a taper shape, and characters “G zone” and “chance” are alternately displayed in the horizontal band. The characters “G zone” and “chance” repeatedly flow in the direction indicated by the arrow YAR (rightward). In the lower telop ST, a horizontal band is displayed from the right end of the display screen 7a to the left end while inclining upward in a taper shape, and characters “G zone” and “chance” are alternately displayed in the horizontal band. The characters “G zone” and “chance” repeatedly flow in the direction indicated by the arrow YAL (leftward). The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed between the upper telop UT and the lower telop ST. As shown in FIG. 107 (C), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a change before being stopped. This is because the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. It shows that the production continues.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (D), a lost symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lost symbol stop effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIGS. 107 (A) and 107 (C) is lost. In this example, “958” is shown in this lost symbol array.

  On the other hand, after the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 107 (A) is executed, the reach effect shown in FIG. 107 (E) may be executed instead of FIG. 107 (B). In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 107 (A). As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. It shows how it looks. In this example, the reach symbol arrangement is “7 ↓ 7”. In addition, the characters “Leach!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (F), the G zone entry effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This G zone entry effect is the reach effect shown in FIG. 107 (E), and is performed by switching the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol 8C is still stopped. That is, the entry timing to the G zone in the G zone entry effect shown in FIG. 107 (F) is during reach before the decorative symbol 8C stops. That is, the entry timing to the G zone shown in FIG. 107 (B) is changing before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop, whereas the entry timing to the G zone shown in FIG. 107 (F). The timing is during reach after the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped. When the display screen 7a is switched, a character image “G zone!” Is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (G), the G zone reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This G zone reach effect is performed by switching the character image “G zone!” Shown in FIG. 107 (F). When the G zone reach effect is executed, an upper telop (caption) UT and a lower telop (caption) ST flow in the upper and lower portions of the display screen 7a. In the upper telop UT, a horizontal band is displayed from the left end of the display screen 7a to the right end while inclining upward in a taper shape, and characters “G zone” and “fever” are alternately displayed in the horizontal band. The characters “G zone” and “fever” repeatedly flow in the direction indicated by the arrow YAR (rightward). In the lower telop ST, a horizontal band is displayed from the right end of the display screen 7a to the left end while inclining upward in a taper shape, and characters "G zone" and "fever" are alternately displayed in the horizontal band. The characters “G zone” and “fever” repeatedly flow in the direction indicated by the arrow YAL (leftward). The reach effect is displayed between the upper telop UT and the lower telop ST. As shown in FIG. 107 (G), the reach effect is such that the left decorative symbol 8L moves to the left end of the display screen 7a, the right decorative symbol 8R moves to the right end, and a predetermined character CRA appears at the center of the display screen 7a. The reach production is to be done. The predetermined reach effect is not particularly limited, and may be a battle effect or a story effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (H), a jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot finalizing effect indicates that the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 107 (A) has been a big hit as a result of the reach effects shown in FIGS. 107 (E) and 107 (G). . In this example, “777” is shown in the jackpot symbol arrangement. It should be noted that the letters “big hit!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. With this jackpot finalizing effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. The jackpot finalizing effect shown in FIG. 107 (H) is not necessarily performed, and the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 107 (D) may be performed with a predetermined probability. Similarly, the loss symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 107 (D) is not necessarily performed, and the jackpot final effect shown in FIG. 107 (H) may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the jackpot finalizing effect will be performed is that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped more than when the entry timing to the G zone is changing before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop. The time during the later reach is higher (the later the timing of entering the G zone, the higher the probability that a jackpot finalizing effect will be performed), and the characters in the telop in the G zone performance are “fever” rather than “chance” "Is higher.

  That is, in the changing effect D shown in FIG. 107, a zone effect accompanied by display of information suggesting a jackpot expectation level can be executed. The jackpot expectation level is the timing of entering the G zone and the character display in the G zone. Depending on the content of the. That is, when the variation results of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are big hits, the probability that the entry timing to the G zone is delayed is high, and the characters in the telop in the G zone effect are “fever”. The probability that

[Example of effects]
In the following, an example of the effect of the changing effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104 and FIG. 105, a certain character image or mark image can be displayed as the first display, and the first effect is the first display. This is an effect that changes the degree of image transmission, and an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot depending on the degree of transmission of the first display image. According to this configuration, since the big hit expectation changes due to the difference in the degree of transmission of the first display image, the player is relieved by the difference in the degree of transmission of the first display image. In addition, by displaying the first display image with various degrees of transparency, it is possible to easily change the expected degree of jackpot in various ways. Further, as shown in the changing effect B, the first display image is displayed in connection with the movement of the movable accessory, or the color combination and the transmission degree of the first display image are related to each other, so Can also be changed. In particular, by making the movable combination and the first display image the same, it is possible to provide more relevance. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the jackpot expectation degree is configured to increase as the transmission degree of the first display image increases. According to this configuration, when the first display image is displayed as an image with a high degree of transparency, the player can face the game with great expectations. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, the display of the effect stage selected from the effect stages having different background images as the second display can be executed. Is configured to perform a dedicated reach corresponding to the stage displayed on the second display. According to this configuration, since a dedicated reach specific to each stage is provided, the player can easily determine the stage currently staying by looking at this dedicated reach. . For example, if the gaming state is related to the production stage, the player can easily determine the current gaming state simply by looking at the dedicated reach. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, each of the dedicated reach corresponding to the production stage has a configuration in which no difference is expected in the jackpot expectation. According to this configuration, the player can have a sense of expectation for the jackpot regardless of whether the dedicated reach is performed at any stage. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, it is possible to execute display of a certain zone effect accompanied by display of information suggesting a jackpot expectation level as the third display, An effect of rushing into the zone effect can be executed at a predetermined timing, and the jackpot expectation is configured to change according to the rush timing of the zone effect. According to this configuration, since the big hit expectation changes at the timing of entering the zone effect, the player is anxious about the difference in the timing of entering the zone effect. Moreover, it is possible to easily change the jackpot expectation degree variously by performing the timing of entering the zone effect at different timings. Furthermore, it is possible to change the jackpot expectation level in various ways by associating the timing of entering the zone effect with the information display of the jackpot expectation level suggested by the zone effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
The following is a variation of the changing effect.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104 and FIG. 105, the first display having a different degree of transparency is displayed with a character (logo) image “G”. It is not limited to this. For example, instead of a character (logo) image, the first display may be an image of a symbol or mark, or a specific shaped object or article.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the jackpot expectation changes depending on the transparency and color scheme of the first display, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the degree of expectation for jackpot may be changed depending on the size of the first display, the number displayed, or the display timing.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, each of the plurality of performance stages has been provided with a dedicated reach production corresponding to each production stage, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, a plurality of dedicated reach effects may be performed on one effect stage, and the number of dedicated reach effects set may be different for each effect stage.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, the jackpot expectation degree of the change is suggested by the difference in the entry timing to the zone effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the contents of the hold may be prefetched, and the jackpot expectation degree of the fluctuation related to the hold may be suggested by the difference in the entry timing to the zone effect. If it does in this way, it will become possible to suggest a jackpot expectation degree over multiple fluctuations. In addition, the rush timing for the zone effect is shown in the changing effect D shown in FIG. 107, indicating that the symbol is changing and reaching. This is, for example, when the symbol change starts, when the symbol change ends, immediately after the reach, It may be during reach.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, in the zone effect, the letters indicating the jackpot expectation displayed on the upper telop and the lower telop are the same, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, the characters displayed on the upper telop and the lower telop may be different. In this way, the jackpot expectation can be further changed by a combination of characters displayed on the upper telop and the lower telop.
Further, the characters displayed on the telop are made to flow within the horizontal band of the telop, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the jackpot expectation is extremely high, the characters displayed on the telop may be displayed larger than the horizontal band of the telop. Alternatively, the horizontal band itself may be erased so that only characters are displayed.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect B7-1]
Production means capable of performing multiple productions;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of displays is a first display;
The first display is a display of a certain character image or mark image;
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is an effect that changes the degree of transmission of the first display image, and is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for jackpot depending on the degree of transmission of the first display image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B7-2]
The degree of expectation for jackpot increases as the degree of transmission of the first display image increases.
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-1, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect B7-3]
One of the plurality of displays is a second display;
The second display is a display of the production stage selected from the production stages having different background images,
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is an effect of performing a dedicated reach corresponding to the effect stage displayed on the second display.
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-1 or aspect B7-2, which is characterized by the above.
[Aspect B7-4]
Each of the dedicated reach corresponding to the stage, there is no difference in the jackpot expectation,
A gaming machine according to aspect B7-3, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect B7-5]
One of the plurality of displays is a third display;
The third display is a display of a certain zone effect accompanied by display of information suggesting the expected degree of jackpot,
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is an effect of rushing into the zone effect at a predetermined timing,
The jackpot expectation varies depending on the entry timing of the zone effect,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B7-1 to B7-4, characterized in that:

  The character display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This character display effect is an effect of displaying characters (including kanji, hiragana, katakana, alphabets, numbers, symbols, marks, etc.) displayed on the display screen in a predetermined manner, and the gaming state becomes a predetermined state. It can be executed when

[Character display effect A]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect A. FIG.
In the character display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 108 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the central symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. 108A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (B), a jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot finalizing effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. In this example, “777” is shown in the jackpot symbol arrangement. It should be noted that the letters “big hit!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. With this jackpot finalizing effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (C), a round-number-overrun display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. When the jackpot is reached, the display of the jackpot symbol array “777” shown in FIG. 108 (B) is switched to the round display RSH indicating the current jackpot round number shown in FIG. 108 (C). In the rounded-out display effect, a part of the number indicating the number of rounds is displayed in a manner that protrudes from the display screen 7a in the round display RSH. That is, of the display of “16R” indicating the number of rounds of the big hit this time, the number 16 is displayed large, and a part of the upper end and the lower end protrudes from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. Has been. Note that R in the display of “16R” is displayed at the lower right of the number 16 in a manner that fits on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (D), the number of appearing balls is displayed on the display screen 7a. The number of appearing balls is displayed from the screen of the round display RSH indicating the number of rounds shown in FIG. 108 (C), and the jackpot number suggesting display DSH indicating the number of hits for this time is displayed. Production. In the overhang display effect, part of the numbers indicating the number of balls in the jackpot number suggestion display DSH is displayed in a manner that protrudes from the display screen 7a. That is, of “2200 MAX” indicating the number of hits for this jackpot, the number 2200 is displayed large, and a part of the upper end thereof is displayed so as to protrude from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. (The leftmost part 2 is displayed with a part of the leftmost part protruding from the display screen 7a). Note that MAX in the display of “2200 MAX” is displayed below the 2200 number in a manner that fits on the display screen 7a. In addition, MAX suggests the upper limit of the number of balls in this 16R jackpot.

  That is, in the character display effect A shown in FIG. 108, a part of the characters in the round display RSH and the number-of-balls suggestion display DSH when the jackpot is obtained as the character display related to the jackpot is displayed from the display screen 7a. It is displayed in a protruding manner.

[Character display effect B]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect B. FIG.
In the character display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 109 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the central symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. FIG. 109A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (B), a jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot finalizing effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 109 (A) is a jackpot. In this example, “777” is shown in the jackpot symbol arrangement. It should be noted that the letters “big hit!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. With this jackpot finalizing effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (C), the display of the number of rounds is performed on the display screen 7a. When the jackpot is reached, the display of the jackpot symbol array “777” shown in FIG. 109 (B) is switched to the round display RSH indicating the current jackpot round number shown in FIG. 109 (C). In the rounded-out display effect, a part of the number indicating the number of rounds is displayed in a manner that protrudes from the display screen 7a in the round display RSH. That is, of the display of “16R” indicating the number of rounds of the big hit this time, the number 16 is displayed large, and a part of the upper end and the lower end of the display protrudes from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. Has been. Note that R in the display of “16R” is displayed at the lower right of the number 16 in a manner that fits on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (D), the number of appearing balls is displayed on the display screen 7a. The number of appearing balls is displayed from the screen of the round display RSH indicating the number of rounds shown in FIG. 109 (C), and a jackpot number suggesting display DSH indicating the number of hits for this time is displayed. Production. In the overhang display effect, part of the numbers indicating the number of balls in the jackpot number suggestion display DSH is displayed in a manner that protrudes from the display screen 7a. That is, among the “2200 MAX” indicating the number of hits for this jackpot, the number 2200 is displayed large, and a part of the upper end thereof is displayed so as to protrude from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 109 (D). (The leftmost part 2 is displayed with a part of the leftmost part protruding from the display screen 7a). Note that MAX in the display of “2200 MAX” is displayed below the 2200 number in a manner that fits on the display screen 7a. In addition, MAX suggests the upper limit of the number of balls in this 16R jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (E), the Fever V protrusion display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This Fever V overhang display effect is switched from the big hitting ball number suggestion display DSH screen that suggests the number of big hitting balls shown in FIG. It is an effect to be displayed. In the Fever V protrusion display effect, in the jackpot suggestion display FEHV, a part of a specific character in a character string (alphabet) suggesting a jackpot is displayed in a state of protruding from the display screen 7a. That is, of “FEVER”, which indicates that this time it has been a big hit, only the letter V is enlarged and displayed, and part of the upper and lower ends protrude from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. Is displayed. And in this jackpot suggestion display FEHV, the letter V displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a covers a part of the other letters (the letter E adjacent to both sides of the letter V) constituting the character string. It is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (F), a right-handed V winning instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot is the above-mentioned 16RV scheduled jackpot, and this right-handed V winning instruction effect is such that the V opening and closing member 71 is opened long and the passage to the V region 39 in the first winning opening 30 becomes easy. At the start of a round game. In this right-handed V winning instruction effect, a message MGL consisting of the letters “Aim at V!” Is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In this message MGL, the letter “V” is larger than the other letters. (About twice) is displayed. Above the message MGL, a right-handed arrow YAR1 for prompting the player to make a right-hand shot is displayed, and in the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR1, a message MGU1 including the characters “right-handed” is displayed. . The player is prompted to display the right-hand arrow YAR1 and hits the right to make it possible to win a game ball in the V area 39 in the first big winning opening 30.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (G), the V projection display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This V protrusion display effect is performed when a game ball passes the V area 39 in a round game in which the passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easy. In other words, when the game ball passes through the V area 39, the V protrusion display effect is switched from the right-handed V winning instruction effect screen shown in FIG. 109 (F), indicating that the game ball has passed the V area 39. This is an effect of displaying the suggested V region passage suggestion display VRH. In this V protrusion display effect, in the V region passage suggestion display VRH, a part of a single character that suggests that the game ball has passed the V region 39 is displayed in a manner that protrudes from the display screen 7a. That is, the letter “V” indicating that the game ball has passed through the V area 39 is displayed in a large size, and a part of the upper end and the lower end thereof are displayed so as to protrude from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. ing.

  That is, in the character display effect B shown in FIG. 109, a part of the characters in the round display RSH and the number-of-balls suggestion display DSH when the jackpot is displayed as the character display related to the jackpot is displayed from the display screen 7a. It is displayed in a protruding manner. Further, as a character display related to the jackpot, a part of specific characters in the jackpot suggestion display FEHV that suggests that the jackpot has been won is displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a. Further, in the jackpot suggestion display FEHV, a specific character enlarged and displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a is displayed so as to cover a part of other characters constituting the character string. Further, as a character display related to the jackpot, a part of the characters in the V region passage suggestion display VRH that suggests that the game ball has passed through the V region 39 is displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a.

[Character display effect C]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect B. FIG.
In the character display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 110 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the central symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. 110A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (B), a jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot finalizing effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 110 (A) is a jackpot. In this example, “777” is shown in the jackpot symbol arrangement. It should be noted that the letters “big hit!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. With this jackpot finalizing effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (C), the display number 7a is displayed on the display screen 7a. When the jackpot is reached, the display of the jackpot symbol array “777” shown in FIG. 110 (B) is switched to the round display RSH indicating the current jackpot round number shown in FIG. 110 (C). In the rounded-out display effect, a part of the number indicating the number of rounds is displayed in a manner that protrudes from the display screen 7a in the round display RSH. That is, of the display of “16R” indicating the number of rounds of the big hit this time, the number 16 is displayed large, and a part of its upper end and lower end protrudes from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. Has been. Note that R in the display of “16R” is displayed at the lower right of the number 16 in a manner that fits on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (D), the number of appearing balls is displayed on the display screen 7a. The number of appearing balls is displayed from the round display RSH screen indicating the number of rounds shown in FIG. 110 (C), and the jackpot number suggesting display DSH indicating the number of hits for this time is displayed. Production. In the overhang display effect, part of the numbers indicating the number of balls in the jackpot number suggestion display DSH is displayed in a manner that protrudes from the display screen 7a. That is, among the “2200 MAX” indicating the number of hits for this jackpot, the number 2200 is displayed large, and a part of the upper end thereof is displayed so as to protrude from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 110 (D). (The leftmost part 2 is displayed with a part of the leftmost part protruding from the display screen 7a). Note that MAX in the display of “2200 MAX” is displayed below the 2200 number in a manner that fits on the display screen 7a. In addition, MAX suggests the upper limit of the number of balls in this 16R jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (E), a fever-brightness display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This fever rose display display effect is performed by switching from the screen of the jackpot number suggestion display DSH indicating the number of jackpots shown in FIG. 110 (D). In this Fever-Blurred display effect, a character string (alphabet) that suggests that the game has been won is moved and displayed one character at a time. That is, the character string “FEVER” that indicates that the game has been won is moved one by one from the front side to the back side of the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 110 (E), the character string “FEVER” is separated by one character in the order of “R”, “E”, “V”, “E”, and “F” from the near side to the far side of the display screen 7a. Is displayed while moving. Therefore, in FIG. 110 (E), “R” that has been moved and displayed first is the smallest, and “F” that has been moved and displayed last is the largest. And as for this "F", a part of the lower end protrudes from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. In other words, each character that is moved and displayed one character at a time is positioned on the front side of the display screen 7a so that a part of the character protrudes from the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (F), the entire fever reduced display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This Fever overall reduction display effect is obtained by executing the Fever-brightness display effect shown in FIG. 110 (E). As a result, the characters “R”, “E”, “V”, “E”, and “F” are displayed on the display screen 7a. After all the images are moved to the far side and reduced and displayed, they are arranged to form a character string “FEVER”, and all characters are displayed on the display screen 7a. That is, the overall fever reduced display effect is an effect of displaying the jackpot suggestion display FEHS that suggests that the jackpot has been won. In the jackpot suggestion display FEHS, as shown in FIG. 110 (F), all characters are reduced and displayed as a whole in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. However, in “FEVER”, only the letter “V” is displayed in an enlarged manner than the other letters, and the other letters are displayed in the same size.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (G), the Fever V protrusion enlarged display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this Fever V overhanging display effect, the character string “FEVER” which is reduced to the approximate center in the display screen 7a and displayed as a whole in the Fever overall reduction display effect shown in FIG. The display screen 7a is an effect that is enlarged and displayed by moving and displaying from the back side to the front side. In other words, the Fever V overhanging display display effect is an effect of displaying the jackpot suggestion display FEHV that suggests that the jackpot has been won. This jackpot suggestion display FEHV is displayed by enlarging only the letter V of “FEVER” indicating that the jackpot has been won, as in the jackpot suggestion display FEHS shown in FIG. 110 (F). A part of the lower end is displayed so as to protrude from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. And in this jackpot suggestion display FEHV, the letter V displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a covers a part of the other letters (the letter E adjacent to both sides of the letter V) constituting the character string. It is displayed.

  That is, in the character display effect C shown in FIG. 110, a part of the characters in the round display RSH and the number-of-balls suggestion display DSH when the jackpot is obtained as the character display related to the jackpot is displayed from the display screen 7a. It is displayed in a protruding manner. Also, the jackpot suggestion display FEHS, which indicates that the jackpot has been won, is displayed as a whole on the display screen 7a with all characters reduced, and only certain characters are displayed over other characters. It is displayed in an enlarged manner. In addition, the jackpot suggestion display FEHV suggesting that the jackpot has been won as a character display related to the jackpot is an enlarged display of the jackpot suggestion display FEHS, and a part of a specific character protrudes from the display screen 7a. It is displayed. Further, in the jackpot suggestion display FEHV, a specific character enlarged and displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a is displayed so as to cover a part of other characters constituting the character string.

[Character display effect D]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect B. FIG.
In the character display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 111A, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the central symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In FIG. 111A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (B), a jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot finalizing effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. In this example, “777” is shown in the jackpot symbol arrangement. It should be noted that the letters “big hit!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. With this jackpot finalizing effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (C), the display number 7a is displayed on the display screen 7a. When the jackpot is reached, the display of the jackpot symbol array “777” shown in FIG. 111 (B) is switched to the round display RSH indicating the current jackpot round number shown in FIG. 111 (C). In the rounded-out display effect, a part of the number indicating the number of rounds is displayed in a manner that protrudes from the display screen 7a in the round display RSH. That is, of the display of “16R” indicating the number of rounds of the big hit this time, the number 16 is displayed large, and a part of the upper end and lower end of the display protrudes from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. Has been. Note that R in the display of “16R” is displayed at the lower right of the number 16 in a manner that fits on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (D), the number of appearing balls is displayed on the display screen 7a. The number of appearing balls is displayed from the round display RSH screen showing the number of rounds shown in FIG. 111 (C), and the jackpot number suggesting display DSH indicating the number of hits for this time is displayed. Production. In the overhang display effect, part of the numbers indicating the number of balls in the jackpot number suggestion display DSH is displayed in a manner that protrudes from the display screen 7a. In other words, among the “2200 MAX” indicating the number of hits for this jackpot, the number 2200 is displayed large, and a part of the upper end thereof is displayed so as to protrude from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. (The leftmost part 2 is displayed with a part of the leftmost part protruding from the display screen 7a). Note that MAX in the display of “2200 MAX” is displayed below the 2200 number in a manner that fits on the display screen 7a. In addition, MAX suggests the upper limit of the number of balls in this 16R jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (E), a fever-separated display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This fever-brightness display effect is performed by switching from the screen of the jackpot appearance number suggestion display DSH that suggests the number of hits in the jackpot shown in FIG. 111 (D). In this Fever-Blurred display effect, a character string (alphabet) that suggests that the game has been won is moved and displayed one character at a time. That is, the character string “FEVER” that indicates that the game has been won is moved one by one from the front side to the back side of the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 111 (E), the character string “FEVER” is separated by one character in the order of “R”, “E”, “V”, “E”, and “F” from the near side to the far side of the display screen 7a. Is displayed while moving. Therefore, in FIG. 111 (E), “R” that has been moved and displayed first is the smallest, and “F” that has been moved and displayed last is the largest. This “F” is displayed with a part of the lower end thereof protruding from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 111 (E). In other words, each character that is moved and displayed one character at a time is positioned on the front side of the display screen 7a so that a part of the character protrudes from the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (F), the entire fever reduced rotation display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This Fever whole reduction rotation display effect is obtained by executing the Fever scattered display effect shown in FIG. 111 (E). As a result, the characters “R”, “E”, “V”, “E”, and “F” are displayed on the display screen 7a. After moving all the way to the back of the image and displaying it in a reduced size, the characters are aligned to form a character string of “FEVER”, and all characters are displayed on the display screen 7a. That is, the overall fever reduced rotation display effect is an effect of displaying the jackpot suggestion display FEHS that suggests that the jackpot has been won. In the jackpot suggestion display FEHS, as shown in FIG. 111 (F), all characters are reduced and displayed at the approximate center in the display screen 7a. However, in “FEVER”, only the letter “V” is displayed in an enlarged manner than the other letters, and the other letters are displayed in the same size. The jackpot suggestion display FEHS is horizontally rotated in a state where all characters are reduced and displayed at the approximate center in the display screen 7a and then displayed as shown by an arrow YA at the same position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (G), the Fever V protrusion enlarged display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this Fever V protrusion enlarged display effect, the character string “FEVER” which is reduced to the approximate center in the display screen 7a and displayed as a whole in the Fever overall reduction rotation display effect shown in FIG. This is an effect that the display is stopped and this time, on the contrary, the display screen 7a is integrally moved from the back side to the front side and displayed enlarged. In other words, the Fever V overhanging display display effect is an effect of displaying the jackpot suggestion display FEHV that suggests that the jackpot has been won. This jackpot suggestion display FEHV is displayed in an enlarged manner by the letter V of “FEVER” indicating that the jackpot has been won, similarly to the jackpot suggestion display FEHS shown in FIG. 111 (F). A part of the lower end is displayed so as to protrude from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. And in this jackpot suggestion display FEHV, the letter V displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a covers a part of the other letters (the letter E adjacent to both sides of the letter V) constituting the character string. It is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (H), a fever display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This Fever V display effect is a Fever V protrusion enlargement display effect shown in FIG. 111 (G), and is an effect of reducing the letter V displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a. That is, the fever display effect is an effect of displaying the jackpot suggestion display FEH that suggests that the jackpot has been won. The jackpot suggestion display FEH is displayed in such a manner that the V character that protrudes from the display screen 7a shown in FIG. However, in “FEVER”, only the letter “V” is displayed in an enlarged manner than the other letters, and the other letters are displayed in the same size. In the jackpot suggestion display FEH, the letter V is displayed so as not to cover a part of the other letters constituting the character string (the letter E adjacent to both sides of the letter V).

  In other words, in the character display effect D shown in FIG. 111, a part of the characters in the round display RSH and the number-of-balls suggestion display DSH as the character display related to the jackpot are displayed from the display screen 7a. It is displayed in a protruding manner. Also, the jackpot suggestion display FEHS, which indicates that the jackpot has been won, is displayed as a whole on the display screen 7a with all characters reduced, and only certain characters are displayed over other characters. It is displayed in an enlarged manner. In addition, the jackpot suggestion display FEHV suggesting that the jackpot has been won as a character display related to the jackpot is an enlarged display of the jackpot suggestion display FEHS, and a part of a specific character protrudes from the display screen 7a. It is displayed. Further, in the jackpot suggestion display FEHV, a specific character enlarged and displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a is displayed so as to cover a part of other characters constituting the character string. The jackpot suggestion display FEH that suggests that the jackpot has been displayed as a character display related to the jackpot is a reduced display of a specific character that protrudes from the display screen 7a in the jackpot suggestion display FEHV and displays all character strings. It is displayed in a manner that fits within the screen 7a. However, in this jackpot suggestion display FEH, a specific character is displayed in an enlarged manner as compared with other characters, and is displayed so as not to cover other characters constituting the character string.

[Example of effects]
In the following, an example of the effect of the changing effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108 to FIG. 111, the character display related to the jackpot can be executed as the first display, and the first effect is that a part of the characters in the character display is displayed. It is configured such that it can be displayed in a manner that protrudes from the display screen. According to this configuration, the character display related to the jackpot can be appealed to the player in an extremely impactful manner. Therefore, the player is less likely to miss the character display related to the jackpot that is extremely important in the game. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, the character display is composed of a plurality of characters, and the first effect is to enlarge a specific character in the character display from the display screen. It is configured to display in a protruding manner. According to this configuration, it is possible to appeal a specific character in the character display related to the jackpot to the player in a very impactful manner. Therefore, the player is less likely to miss the character display related to the jackpot that is extremely important in the game. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to appeal to the player by making a particular character a prominent shape or color scheme.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109 to FIG. 111, the specific character displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen is displayed so as to cover a part of the other characters constituting the character display. It is the composition which can be done. According to this structure, only a specific character in the character display related to the jackpot can be strongly appealed to the player in an extremely impactful manner. Therefore, the player is less likely to miss the character display related to the jackpot that is extremely important in the game. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to appeal to the player by making a particular character a prominent shape or color scheme.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110 and FIG. 111, the second effect is to display the character display composed of a plurality of characters one by one on the display screen, and then display the display screen. It is possible to display all the characters inside, and the first effect is configured to be performed after the second effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to appeal to the player a character display made up of a plurality of characters related to the jackpot in an extremely impactful manner. Therefore, the player is less likely to miss the character display related to the jackpot that is extremely important in the game. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111, the third effect is performed after the first effect, and specific characters displayed in a manner that protrudes from the display screen in the first effect are displayed. In the aspect in which a specific character is reduced and displayed so as to fit within the display screen, it is configured to be displayed larger than other characters constituting the character display. According to this configuration, even if a specific character displayed in a manner that protrudes from the display screen is reduced, it is displayed larger than the other characters that make up the character display. It is possible to appeal a specific character of the player to the player in a very impactful manner. Therefore, the player is less likely to miss the character display related to the jackpot that is extremely important in the game. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to appeal to the player by making a particular character a prominent shape or color scheme.

[Modification]
The following is a variation of the changing effect.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109 to FIG. 111, the specific character displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen is displayed so as to cover a part of the other characters constituting the character display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a specific character displayed in a manner that protrudes from the display screen may be displayed so as to cover all of the other characters that constitute the character display.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, the numbers of “2200 MAX” indicating the number of big hits are displayed in a manner in which all the numbers protrude from the display screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the numbers in “2200 MAX” may be displayed in a form in which only some of the numbers protrude from the display screen (for example, a part of 2 displayed at the left end protrudes from the display screen). Display in a manner). Further, the MAX is set to fit within the display screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and all or some of the characters of the MAX are displayed in a manner that protrudes from the display screen. Also good.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109, the right-handed V winning instruction effect is a V passing expected jackpot, the V opening / closing member 71 is long opened, and the V area 39 in the first big winning opening 30 Although it is performed at the start of a round game that makes it easy to pass through, the V winning remaining time notification effect is performed with a game machine commonly called a V-ST machine. It is not limited to. For example, the right-handed V winning instruction effect is won at the variable start opening (special 2) and is performed when a two-type attacker having a V region is opened, that is, a game machine called a so-called type-one / two-type mixer. You may do it.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, a part of the characters in the character display is displayed in a manner protruding from one display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the image display device is provided with a first display screen disposed on the front side and a second display screen disposed on the rear side, and characters displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen are displayed on the first display screen. You may make it display with. If it does in this way, the character which protrudes from a display screen will be displayed nearer by a player, and it can appeal to a player intensely in a mode with a very strong impact. Note that the image display device having the first display screen and the second display screen may be configured to display a stereoscopic image (3D). In this way, it is possible to further appeal to the player by displaying the characters protruding from the display screen in 3D.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, a part of the characters in the character display related to the jackpot is displayed in a manner that protrudes from the display screen. It is not limited to this. For example, characters that are displayed in a manner that protrudes from the display screen are replaced with characters that are related to jackpots, such as characters that direct the operation of the effect buttons (for example, press, push, and continuous strikes), and characters that direct the right stroke (for example, A part of the characters in the character display related to the game instruction may be displayed in a manner that protrudes from the display screen.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect C1-1]
Production means capable of performing multiple productions;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of displays is a first display;
The first display is a character display related to the jackpot,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
The first effect may be displayed in a manner in which a part of the characters in the character display protrudes from the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C1-2]
The character display consists of a plurality of characters,
In the first effect, a specific character in the character display is enlarged and displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen.
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect C1-3]
The specific character displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen may be displayed so as to cover a part or all of the other characters constituting the character display.
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-2, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect C1-4]
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is an effect of displaying the entire character on the display screen after displaying the character display composed of the plurality of characters one by one on the display screen.
The first production is performed after the second production,
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-2 or aspect C1-3, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect C1-5]
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is an effect performed after the first effect,
The third effect is an effect of reducing and displaying the specific characters displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen in the first effect so as to fit within the display screen,
In the aspect in which the specific character is displayed in a reduced size, the character is displayed larger than other characters constituting the character display.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-2 to C1-4, characterized in that.

  The pending continuous chain suggestion effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 112 to 115. This on-hold continuous-chang suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined timing in connection with the content of the hold during the jackpot game. For example, if the content of the hold is prefetched during the jackpot game and the content of the hold is a jackpot, it can be executed during the round game, during the ending, or immediately after the jackpot game ends.

[On-hold ream Chang suggestion A]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect A. FIG.
In the pending continuous chain suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 112 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the central symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. 112A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed side by side at the left end of the display screen 7a. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 112A, H1 indicates “3” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it is suggested that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is “3” and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is “0”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (B), a jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot finalizing effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 112 (A) is a jackpot. In this example, “777” is shown in the jackpot symbol arrangement. It should be noted that the letters “big hit!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. With this jackpot finalizing effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112C, a round game effect is executed on the display screen 7a. When the jackpot is reached, a predetermined jackpot game is played. In the jackpot game, first, a predetermined opening effect indicating the start of the jackpot game (round game) is performed on the display screen 7a, and then the round game effect is executed. It is like that. In the round game effect shown in FIG. 112 (C), a round display RH indicating the number of rounds is shown at the upper left of the display screen 7a (in this example, “5R” is shown), and in the center of the display screen 7a, A predetermined jackpot display effect (not shown) is performed. Further, in this round game effect, the holding number H2 shows the same “0” as before, but the holding number H1 is increased by one and changed from “3” to “4”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (D), the on-hold continuous change suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reserved chain suggestion effect, the round display RH indicating the number of rounds at the upper left of the display screen 7a indicates “8R”, and the numbers H1 and H2 indicate the same “4” and “0” as before. Yes. In addition, in this on-hold continuous chain suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 112 (D), if a game ball wins a normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 during a round game, the holding that occurred during the big hit game is held. A sound effect KM that suggests that there is a big hit, that is, a suggestion of on-hold continuous change, is emitted from the speaker 67 (in this example, a sound effect of “Tallary Lara” is shown). The normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a lower right portion of the game area 3 and is arranged adjacent to the right side of the first major winning opening 30. Therefore, the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a winning opening that can be won only when the player is right-handed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (E), a predetermined ending effect that suggests the end of the jackpot game (round game) is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ending effect, the holding numbers H1 and H2 indicate the same “4” and “0” as before.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (F), a reserved digest decoration symbol variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the reserved digest decoration symbol variation effect, the decoration symbol variation effect is performed based on the suspension that has occurred during the jackpot game, thereby sequentially digesting the suspension that has occurred during the jackpot game. In the reserved digest decoration symbol change effect shown in FIG. 112 (F), the reserved number H2 shows the same “0” as before, but the reserved number H1 decreases from “4” to “2”. That is, the reserved digest decoration symbol variation effect shows a state in which two reservations of the first special symbol are digested from the ending effect (end of jackpot game) shown in FIG. 112 (E). That is, the decorative effects 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 112 (F) correspond to the second reserved digest of the first special symbol after the jackpot game.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (G), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are in the reach symbol arrangement as a result of the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R being performed in the reserved digest decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 112 (F). It shows that it has stopped. In this example, the reach symbol arrangement is “7 ↓ 7”. In addition, the characters “Leach!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (H), a jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot finalizing effect indicates that the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 112 (F) has been a big hit as a result of the reach effects shown in FIGS. 112 (E) and 112 (G). . In this example, “777” is shown in the jackpot symbol arrangement. It should be noted that the letters “big hit!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. With this jackpot finalizing effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. It should be noted that the jackpot finalizing effect shown in FIG. 112 (H) is not necessarily performed, and there is a possibility that the game will be lost at a predetermined probability.

  In other words, in the on-hold consecutive chain suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 112, when winning a specific winning slot (in this example, a normal winning slot (general winning slot) 29) during the jackpot game, it is related to the winning. A predetermined sound effect KM is emitted from the speaker 67, and the sound effect KM suggests that there is a big hit in the big hit game during the big hit game, that is, an effect that suggests a continuous chain in the hold. ing.

[On-hold ream suggestion production B]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the pending continuous chain suggestion effect B.
In the on-hold continuous-chang suggestion effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 113A, a round game effect is executed on the display screen 7a. When the jackpot is reached, a predetermined jackpot game is played. In the jackpot game, first, a predetermined opening effect indicating the start of the jackpot game (round game) is performed on the display screen 7a, and then the round game effect is executed. It is like that. In the round game effect shown in FIG. 113 (A), a round display RH indicating the number of rounds is shown at the upper left of the display screen 7a (in this example, “5R” is shown), and in the center of the display screen 7a, A predetermined jackpot display effect (not shown) is performed.
Further, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed side by side at the left end of the display screen 7a. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In the round game effect shown in FIG. 113 (A), H1 indicates “4” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it is suggested that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is “4” and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is “0”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), the on-hold continuous change suggestion 1 effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reserved chain suggestion 1 effect, the round display RH indicating the number of rounds in the upper left of the display screen 7a indicates “8R”, and the numbers H1 and H2 of the reservation indicate “4” and “0” as before. ing. In addition, in the on-hold continuous chain suggestion 1 production, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), when a game ball wins a normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 during a round game, it occurred during a big hit game. A line SM1 indicating that there is a big hit in the hold, that is, indicating a chain within the hold, is emitted from the speaker 67 (in this example, the line “Chance may be!” Is shown). The normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a lower right portion of the game area 3 and is arranged adjacent to the right side of the first major winning opening 30. Therefore, the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a winning opening that can be won only when the player is right-handed. Furthermore, in the reserved chain continuous suggestion 1 effect, the dialogue SM1 ("Chance may!") Suggesting the pending continuous chain issued by the speaker 67 is displayed as it is on the display screen 7a as the speech display SMH1. . With this line display SMH1, even if the player misses the line SM1, the player can recognize the suggestion of the pending continuous chain.

  On the other hand, after the round game effect shown in FIG. 113 (A) is executed, in-hold continuous chain suggestion 2 effect shown in FIG. 113 (C) may be executed instead of FIG. 113 (B). In this in-hold continuous chain suggestion 2 effect, the round display RH indicating the number of rounds indicates “8R” in the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the number of reservations H1 and H2 indicate “4” and “0” as before. ing. In addition, in the on-hold continuous chain suggestion 2 production, as shown in FIG. 113 (C), when a game ball wins a normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 during a round game, it occurred during a big hit game. A dialogue SM2 suggesting that there is a jackpot in the hold, that is, indicating a continuous chain within the hold, is emitted from the speaker 67 (in this example, the dialogue “It's not over!” Is shown) Yes. Furthermore, in the reserved chain continuous suggestion 2 effect, the dialogue SM1 ("Not finished yet!") Suggesting the pending chain continuous channel issued by the speaker 67 is displayed as it is on the display screen 7a as the speech display SMH2. ing. With this line display SMH2, the player can recognize the suggestion of the pending continuous chain even when he / she misses the line SM2.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (D), a predetermined ending effect that suggests the end of the jackpot game (round game) is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ending effect, the holding numbers H1 and H2 indicate the same “4” and “0” as before.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (E), the reserved digest decoration symbol variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the reserved digest decoration symbol variation effect, the decoration symbol variation effect is performed based on the suspension that has occurred during the jackpot game, thereby sequentially digesting the suspension that has occurred during the jackpot game. In the reserved digest decoration symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 113 (E), the reserved number H2 is the same “0” as before, but the reserved number H1 is decreased from “4” to “2”. In other words, the reserved digest decoration symbol variation effect shows a state in which two reservations of the first special symbol are digested from the ending effect (end of jackpot game) shown in FIG. 113 (D). That is, the fluctuating effects of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 113 (E) indicate those corresponding to the second reserved digest of the first special symbol after the jackpot game.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (F), a lost symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lost symbol stop effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is lost in the reserved digest decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 113 (E). In this example, “958” is shown in this lost symbol array.

  On the other hand, after the reserved digest decoration symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 113 (E) is executed, the reach effect shown in FIG. 113 (G) may be executed instead of FIG. 113 (F). This reach effect is the result of the change display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R being performed in the reserved digest decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. It shows that it has stopped. In this example, the reach symbol arrangement is “7 ↓ 7”. In addition, the characters “Leach!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (H), a jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot finalizing effect indicates that the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 113 (E) has been a jackpot as a result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 113 (G). In this example, “777” is shown in the jackpot symbol arrangement. It should be noted that the letters “big hit!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. With this jackpot finalizing effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. It should be noted that the jackpot finalizing effect shown in FIG. 113 (H) is not necessarily performed, and the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 113 (F) may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the jackpot finalizing effect is performed is that when the on-hold consecutive-chain suggestion 2 effect shown in FIG. 113 (C) is executed, the on-hold consecutive-chain suggestion 1 effect shown in FIG. 113 (B). Is higher than when it was executed. In other words, the probability that the jackpot finalizing effect will be performed is when the line SM1 “Chance may be!” Is issued when the line SM2 “I'm not done! Higher than.

  In other words, in the on-hold consecutive chain suggestion effect B shown in FIG. 113, when a specific winning slot (in this example, a normal winning slot (general winning slot) 29) is won during the jackpot game, it is related to the winning. A predetermined line is emitted from the speaker 67, and it is suggested that the line indicates that there is a big hit in the hold that has occurred during the big hit game, that is, an effect that suggests a continuous chain within the hold. In addition, in the pending continuous chain suggestion effect B, the expectation (reliability) of the pending continuous chain changes depending on the content (type) of the speech, and the speech emitted from the speaker 67 is directly displayed on the display screen 7a. It is displayed as a display.

[On-hold ream suggestion C]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the pending continuous chain suggestion effect C. FIG.
In the pending continuous chain suggestion effect C, as shown in FIG. 114 (A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the central symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. 114A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed side by side at the left end of the display screen 7a. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 114 (A), H1 indicates “3” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it is suggested that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is “3” and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is “0”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (B), a jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot finalizing effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 114 (A) has been a jackpot. In this example, “777” is shown in the jackpot symbol arrangement. It should be noted that the letters “big hit!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. With this jackpot finalizing effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (C), a round game effect is executed on the display screen 7a. When the jackpot is reached, a predetermined jackpot game is played. In the jackpot game, first, a predetermined opening effect indicating the start of the jackpot game (round game) is performed on the display screen 7a, and then the round game effect is executed. It is like that. In the round game effect shown in FIG. 114 (C), a round display RH indicating the number of rounds is shown at the upper left of the display screen 7a (in this example, “5R” is shown), and in the center of the display screen 7a, A predetermined jackpot display effect (not shown) is performed. Further, in this round game effect, the holding number H2 shows the same “0” as before, but the holding number H1 is increased by one and changed from “3” to “4”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (D), the pending continuous chain suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the in-round continuous chain suggestion effect during the round, the round display RH indicating the number of rounds in the upper left of the display screen 7a indicates “8R”, and the numbers H1 and H2 of the holdings are the same “4” and “0” as before. Show. In addition, in the rendezvous chain suggestion effect during the round, as shown in FIG. 114 (D), when a game ball wins a normal winning slot (general winning slot) 29 during a round game, it occurs during a big hit game. A message SM suggesting that there is a jackpot in the hold, that is, a message indicating that there is a continuous change in the hold, is emitted from the speaker 67 (in this example, the line “It's not over!” Is shown). ing. The normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a lower right portion of the game area 3 and is arranged adjacent to the right side of the first major winning opening 30. Therefore, the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a winning opening that can be won only when the player is right-handed. Furthermore, in the pending continuous chain suggestion effect during the round, the speech SM ("Not yet finished!") Indicating the pending continuous chain issued by the speaker 67 is displayed as it is on the display screen 7a as the speech display SMH. It has become. With this line display SMH, the player can recognize the suggestion of the pending continuous chain even if he / she misses the line SM. Here, as shown in FIG. 114 (D), a predetermined character CRA is drawn on the front plate portion of the main body at the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29. In other words, the character CRA motif is set in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29. The setting of this motif will be described later.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (E), on the display screen 7a, a predetermined ending-pending continuous chain suggestion effect that suggests the end of the jackpot game (round game) is executed. In this ending reservation continuous chain suggestion effect, the holding numbers H1 and H2 indicate the same “4” and “0” as before. Here, in this ending pending continuous chain suggestion effect, the background of the display screen 7 a is configured using the same character CRA as the motif set in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29. That is, a specific image with the character CRA as a motif is displayed in this ending pending continuous chain suggestion effect. In other words, the specific image is displayed at the ending of the jackpot game, thereby suggesting the on-hold continuous chain.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (F), a reserved digest decoration symbol variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the reserved digest decoration symbol variation effect, the decoration symbol variation effect is performed based on the suspension that has occurred during the jackpot game, thereby sequentially digesting the suspension that has occurred during the jackpot game. In the reserved digest decoration symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 114 (F), the reserved number H2 is the same “0” as before, but the reserved number H1 is decreased from “4” to “2”. That is, in this reserved digest decoration design variation effect, it shows a state where the first special symbol reserve has been digested from the end ending reserved chain suggestion effect (end of jackpot game) shown in FIG. 114 (E) above. Yes. In other words, the fluctuating effects of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 114 (F) correspond to the second reserved digest of the first special symbol after the jackpot game.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (G), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are in the reach symbol array as a result of the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R being performed in the reserved digest decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 114 (F). It shows that it has stopped. In this example, the reach symbol arrangement is “7 ↓ 7”. In addition, the characters “Leach!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (H), a jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot finalizing effect indicates that the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 114 (F) is a jackpot as a result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 114 (G). In this example, “777” is shown in the jackpot symbol arrangement. It should be noted that the letters “big hit!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. With this jackpot finalizing effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. It should be noted that the jackpot finalizing effect shown in FIG. 114 (H) is not necessarily performed, and there is a possibility that the game is lost at a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the jackpot finalizing effect will be performed is that when the ending pending continuous chain suggestion effect shown in FIG. 114 (E) is executed, when the ending pending continuous chain suggestion effect is not executed (character It is higher than when a normal ending effect in which a specific image with a CRA motif is not displayed is executed). More specifically, the probability that the jackpot finalizing effect shown in FIG. 114 (H) will be performed is as follows. That is, the highest is the case where the in-reserved continuous chain suggestion effect (FIG. 114 (D)) and the ending-reserved continuous chain suggestion effect (FIG. 114 (E)) are performed, and only the end-reserved continuous chain suggestion effect is present. The time when it was performed was the next highest, and only when the rendition suggestion within the round was reserved The next highest was when the rendition suggestion within the rendition during the round and the suggestion rendition within the ending reservation were not performed Is the lowest.

  In other words, in the on-hold continuous chain suggestion effect C shown in FIG. 114, when a specific winning opening (in this example, a normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29) is won during the jackpot game, the winning combination is related to the winning. A predetermined line is emitted from the speaker 67, and it is suggested that the line indicates that there is a big hit in the hold that has occurred during the big hit game, that is, an effect that suggests a continuous chain within the hold. Moreover, in the pending continuous chain suggestion effect C, the speech emitted from the speaker 67 is displayed as it is on the display screen 7a as it is. In addition, in the on-hold consecutive chain suggestion production C, a predetermined motif is set in the normal winning slot (general winning slot) 29 that causes the occurrence of the dialogue SM indicating the on-hold consecutive chain, and the end of the jackpot game By displaying a specific image using this predetermined motif, it is further suggested that there is a big hit in the hold that occurred during the big hit game, that is, the rendition that suggests a continuous chain within the hold. ing. In other words, in the in-hold continuous chain suggestion effect C, a plurality of types of in-hold continuous chain suggestion effects can be executed at different timings, ie, the in-round continuous chain suggestion effect and the ending pending continuous chain suggestion effect. .

[On-hold ream suggestions D]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the pending continuous chain suggestion effect D. FIG.
In the pending continuous chain suggestion effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 115A, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the central symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In FIG. 115A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed side by side at the left end of the display screen 7a. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 114 (A), H1 indicates “3” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it is suggested that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is “3” and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is “0”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (B), a jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot finalizing effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. In this example, “777” is shown in the jackpot symbol arrangement. It should be noted that the letters “big hit!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. With this jackpot finalizing effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (C), a round game effect is executed on the display screen 7a. When the jackpot is reached, a predetermined jackpot game is played. In the jackpot game, first, a predetermined opening effect indicating the start of the jackpot game (round game) is performed on the display screen 7a, and then the round game effect is executed. It is like that. In the round game effect shown in FIG. 115 (C), a round display RH indicating the number of rounds is shown at the upper left of the display screen 7a (in this example, “5R” is shown), and in the center of the display screen 7a, A predetermined jackpot display effect (not shown) is performed. Further, in this round game effect, the holding number H2 shows the same “0” as before, but the holding number H1 is increased by one and changed from “3” to “4”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), a pending continuous chain suggestion effect is executed during the round on the display screen 7a. In the in-round continuous chain suggestion effect during the round, the round display RH indicating the number of rounds in the upper left of the display screen 7a indicates “8R”, and the numbers H1 and H2 of the holdings are the same “4” and “0” as before. Show. In addition, in this rendition suggestion within the round during the round, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), if a game ball wins a normal winning slot (general winning slot) 29 during a round game, it occurs during a big hit game. A message SM suggesting that there is a jackpot in the hold, that is, a message indicating that there is a continuous change in the hold, is emitted from the speaker 67 (in this example, the line “It's not over!” Is shown). ing. The normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a lower right portion of the game area 3 and is arranged adjacent to the right side of the first major winning opening 30. Therefore, the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a winning opening that can be won only when the player is right-handed. Furthermore, in the pending continuous chain suggestion effect during the round, the speech SM ("Not yet finished!") Indicating the pending continuous chain issued by the speaker 67 is displayed as it is on the display screen 7a as the speech display SMH. It has become. With this line display SMH, the player can recognize the suggestion of the pending continuous chain even if he / she misses the line SM. Here, in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), a pattern imitating the airplane HK is drawn on the front plate portion of the main body. That is, the airplane HK motif is set in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29. The setting of this motif will be described later.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (E), on the display screen 7a, a predetermined ending effect that suggests the end of the jackpot game (round game) is executed. In this ending effect, the holding numbers H1 and H2 indicate the same “4” and “0” as before.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (F), the on-hold continuous change suggestion effect is executed after the jackpot ends on the display screen 7a. This post-holding consecutive chain suggestion effect after the jackpot ends is a display effect that is performed immediately after the end of the jackpot game, which is performed by switching the screen of the ending effect shown in FIG. 115 (E). In this post-holding consecutive chain suggestion effect after the jackpot, the decoration pattern variation effect is performed based on the hold that has occurred during the jackpot game, thereby sequentially digesting the hold that has occurred during the jackpot game. In the post-holding consecutive chain suggestion effect shown in FIG. 115 (F), the holding number H2 shows the same “0” as before, but the holding number H1 has decreased from “4” to “3”. . In other words, in the post-holding consecutive chain suggestion effect after the jackpot, the first hold of the first special symbol is digested from the ending effect (the jackpot game end) shown in FIG. 115 (E) above. Show. That is, the decorative effects 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 115 (F) correspond to the first reserved digest of the first special symbol immediately after the end of the jackpot game. Here, in the on-hold consecutive-chang suggestion effect after the jackpot ends, the background of the display screen 7 a is configured using the same airplane HK as the motif set in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29. That is, in the post-holding consecutive chain suggestion effect after the jackpot, a specific image with the airplane HK as a motif is displayed. That is, in the on-hold continuous chain suggestion effect after the jackpot end, the background image is configured using a specific image with the airplane HK as a motif as the display effect that is performed immediately after the end of the jackpot game after the end effect screen is switched. The decoration design 8L, 8C, 8R is variably displayed on the top.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (G), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach effect is the result of the decorative display 8L, 8C, 8R being displayed in a variation after the jackpot shown in FIG. 115 (F), and the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are reached. It shows that it stopped at the symbol arrangement. In this example, the reach symbol arrangement is “7 ↓ 7”. In addition, the characters “Leach!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In the reach effect shown in FIG. 115 (G), the holding number H2 shows the same “0” as before, but the holding number H1 has decreased from “3” to “2”. In other words, this reach production shows a state in which two holdings of the first special symbol are digested from the end of the jackpot game in the post-holding consecutive chain suggestion effect shown in FIG. 115 (F). That is, the reach effect shown in FIG. 115 (G) shows the one corresponding to the second reserved digest of the first special symbol after the end of the jackpot game. In this reach effect, as shown in FIG. 115 (G), on the display screen 7a, the background image using the specific image with the airplane HK as a motif is displayed in the hold after the jackpot shown in FIG. 115 (F). It is displayed continuously from Ren Chang suggestion production.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (H), a jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot finalizing effect indicates that the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 115 (F) is a jackpot as a result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 115 (G). In this example, “777” is shown in the jackpot symbol arrangement. It should be noted that the letters “big hit!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. With this jackpot finalizing effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. Note that the jackpot finalizing effect shown in FIG. 115 (H) is not necessarily performed, and there is a possibility that the game will be lost at a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the jackpot finalizing effect will be performed is that the on-hold consecutive-chain suggestion effect after the jackpot end shown in FIG. 115 (F) is not executed after the jackpot end. (A specific image with the airplane HK as a motif is not displayed, and the normal decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 115A is executed). More specifically, the probability that the jackpot finalizing effect shown in FIG. 115 (H) will be performed is as follows. That is, the highest number of times the on-hold consecutive-chain suggestion effect (FIG. 115 (D)) during the round and the on-hold consecutive-chain suggestion effect (FIG. 115 (F)) after the big hit are performed. The time when only the suggestion effect was performed is the next highest, and the time when only the suggestion effect during the round is held next is the next highest. It is the lowest when no is done.

  In other words, in the on-hold consecutive chain suggestion effect D shown in FIG. 115, when a specific winning slot (in this example, a normal winning slot (general winning slot) 29) is won during the jackpot game, it is related to the winning. A predetermined line is emitted from the speaker 67, and it is suggested that the line indicates that there is a big hit in the hold that has occurred during the big hit game, that is, an effect that suggests a continuous chain within the hold. Moreover, in the pending continuous chain suggestion effect D, the speech emitted from the speaker 67 is displayed as it is on the display screen 7a as it is. In addition, in the on-hold consecutive chain suggestion effect D, a predetermined motif is set in the normal winning slot (general winning slot) 29 that causes the occurrence of the dialogue SM indicating the on-hold consecutive chain, and immediately after the jackpot game ends. By displaying a specific image (background image) using this predetermined motif in the decorative design variation effect of the game, it is further suggested that there is a big hit in the hold that occurred during the big hit game, that is, the continuous chain in the hold It is designed to produce a suggestion. In other words, in the in-hold continuous chain suggestion effect D, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of in-hold continuous chain suggestion effects at different timings, that is, the in-round continuous chain suggestion effect and the on-hold continuous chain suggestion effect after the big hit. ing.

[Example of effects]
The following is an example of the effect of the on-hold continuous change suggestion effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112 to FIG. 115, the first effect suggests the expected degree of the reserving continuous chain in relation to winning a specific winning opening during the jackpot game. It is configured to produce an effect. According to this configuration, the player can perform technical intervention by adjusting the firing strength of the game ball in order to win the game ball to a specific winning port during the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of games, especially the interest of monotonous jackpot games.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the configuration suggesting the degree of expectation of the on-hold consecutive chain is performed by sound generated in connection with winning a specific winning opening. It has become. According to this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner in various ways when suggesting the degree of expectation of the on-hold continuous chain. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. Also, since the expected level of the on-hold continuous channel is indicated by voice, the player does not need to pay attention to the display screen as compared with the display of the expected level of the on-hold continuous channel. You can relax and enjoy the game. It is also possible to easily change the expectation level of the in-hold continuous chain depending on the type of voice. Furthermore, it is also possible to appeal to the player by drawing attention to the voice suggesting the degree of expectation of the on-hold continuous channel with a characteristic tone color or melody.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113 to FIG. 115, the voice generated in connection with winning a specific winning opening is a line, and the expectation of the on-hold consecutive chain is The configuration varies depending on the type. According to this configuration, it is possible to easily change the expectation level of the on-hold continuous chain by generating various content lines. As a result, the player can be satisfied with the content of the speech that is issued, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, a predetermined motif is set for a specific winning opening, and the first display sets the background of the display screen to the specific winning opening. It is possible to display with a specific image of the same motif as the motif that has been made, and the second effect is a configuration in which the background of the display screen is switched to a specific image at a predetermined timing when a reserving chain is performed It has become. According to this configuration, when the background of the display screen is switched to the specific image, the player can face the game with great expectations. In addition, because the specific image has the same motif as that set for a specific winning opening, it is possible to appeal a specific winning opening to the player, and when a game ball wins a specific winning opening You can have expectations. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the timing for switching to the specific image is configured to be during the ending of the jackpot game or immediately after the jackpot game ends. According to this configuration, when the jackpot game is ended or immediately after the jackpot game is over, the player is glad about whether or not to switch to the specific image by watching the display screen. In other words, since it is determined whether or not to continuously play at the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot game is not bored to the end, and as a result, the interest of the game can be greatly improved. Also, during the round, the voice generated in connection with the winning at a specific winning opening suggests a chain within the hold, and then, after a certain amount of time, a specific image immediately after the end of the jackpot game or the end of the jackpot game By switching to, it becomes possible to suggest the on-hold continuous chain, and as a result, the player can expect the on-hold continuous chain for a long time. As a result, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game for a long time in the player.

[Modification]
Below, the modified example of the pending continuous chain suggestion effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112 to FIG. 115, the on-hold continuous change suggestion effect is performed for the on-hold that occurs during the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not limited. For example, if the game state is a probability change state other than the jackpot state, a short-time state, or a normal state, and a particular winning opening is won, the jackpot expectation in the hold that is occurring at that time You may make it perform the suggestion. In particular, when the gaming state is in a probabilistic state, it is preferable to perform an effect that suggests the expected degree of jackpot in the hold related to the second special symbol. In this case, it is desirable that the second starting port (second starting winning port, electric chew) that fluctuates the specific winning port and the second special symbol does not win unless it is right-handed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113 to FIG. 115, when the in-hold continuous chain suggestion effect is won at a specific winning opening, a predetermined line is issued in relation to the winning. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the on-hold consecutive-chan suggestion effect, a sound effect may be generated after the speech, and the sound effect may be varied depending on the type of speech. In this way, the dialogue becomes more prominent, and the player can easily grasp the type of the dialogue. Alternatively, a sound effect may be generated after the speech is generated, and the expected degree of the on-hold continuous chain may be suggested by a combination of the speech and the sound effect. In this way, the degree of expectation of the on-hold continuous chain can be changed variously and easily. Moreover, you may make it change the line and sound effect which are emitted when winning a prize to this specific winning opening according to the round to generate.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, a specific image (background image) using the same motif as the motif set for a specific winning opening is displayed during the ending of the jackpot game, or Although the on-hold continuous chain suggestion effect is performed by displaying immediately after the jackpot game ends, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the on-hold continuous chain suggestion effect by a specific image using this motif may be performed during a predetermined round of the jackpot game, or during the ending of the jackpot game, immediately after the jackpot game ends and the jackpot game You may make it carry out by two or all in a predetermined round.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the motif set in a specific winning opening and the motif of the specific image immediately after the end of the jackpot game or the end of the jackpot game are predetermined characters. Although an airplane is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and any motif may be used.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, a specific image using the same motif as the motif set for a specific winning opening is performed on one display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the image display device includes a first display screen arranged on the front side and a second display screen arranged on the rear side so that a stereoscopic image (3D) can be displayed. You may make it display with an image (3D). In this way, by displaying the specific image in 3D, it is possible to display a powerful specific image, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect C2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a production means capable of performing a plurality of productions,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
The first performance is a performance performed during the jackpot game,
The first effect is related to winning a specific winning opening during the jackpot game, and the effect suggesting the degree of expectation of the reserving consecutive chain,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C2-2]
The direction suggesting the degree of expectation of the on-hold consecutive Chang is performed by sound generated in connection with winning a prize to the specific winning opening.
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect C2-3]
The voice generated in connection with winning a prize at the specific winning opening is a line,
The degree of expectation of the on-hold consecutive change varies depending on the type of the line,
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-2, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect C2-4]
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays
A predetermined motif is set in the specific winning opening,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display;
The first display is to display the background of the display screen with a specific image of the same motif as the motif set in the specific winning opening,
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is to switch the background of the display screen to the specific image at a predetermined timing when the on-hold continuous change is performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect C2-5]
The timing for switching to the specific image is during the round or ending of the jackpot game, or immediately after the jackpot game ends.
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-4, which is characterized in that.

  The error display effects will be described below with reference to FIGS. 116 to 119. This error display effect can be executed when the detecting means such as a ball detecting sensor detects that the ball receiving tray (the surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62) is full.

[Error display effect A]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the error display effect A. FIG.
In the error display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 116 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the central symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. 116A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (while scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (B), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 116 (A). As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. It shows how it looks. In this example, the reach symbol arrangement is “8 ↓ 8”. In addition, the characters “Leach!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (C), a jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot finalizing effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 116 (A) is a big hit after reaching reach in FIG. 116 (B). In this example, this jackpot symbol arrangement is normally indicated as “888”. It should be noted that the letters “big hit!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. With this jackpot finalizing effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116D, a button operation instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. During the jackpot game, a promotion effect of whether or not the normal jackpot is promoted to a probable jackpot is performed at a predetermined timing, and the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 116 (D) is performed during the promotion effect. The button operation instruction effect is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in an effective operation period. Specifically, in the button operation instruction effect, a character SIG “button PUSH!” Is displayed above the button image BOG displayed at the center of the left and right of the display screen 7a. With this button operation instruction effect, an operation instruction effect that causes the player to press the effect button 63 is executed. Note that a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the lower part of the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time after the button operation instruction effect is displayed, and when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 disappears, the meter value Appears to be full.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (E), a dash suggestion display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ball removal suggestion display effect is an error display effect that is performed when a detecting means such as a ball detection sensor detects that the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62 is full. The ball removal suggestion display effect includes a ball removal operation image EG including a display that suggests a position of an operation lever that performs ball removal on a gaming machine, and a ball removal operation message EM that prompts the player to perform the ball removal operation in a character display. Are displayed in the center of the left and right of the display screen 7a. The ball removal suggestion display effect is displayed in front of the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 116D, and the ball removal operation image EG and the ball removal operation message EM include the button image BOG and “button PUSH!”. It is displayed so as to completely cover the character SIG. In the ball removal operation image EG, an image explaining a position where the operation lever for performing the ball removal is present in a square frame is displayed, and the position where the operation lever is present is displayed by being surrounded by a circle SC and indicated by an arrow YAD. ing. In the ball removal operation message EM, the characters “please remove the ball” are displayed immediately above the ball removal operation image EG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (F), a dash suggestion character effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ball-out suggestion character effect, after the ball-out suggestion display effect shown in FIG. 116 (E) is performed for a predetermined time, the display of the ball-out operation image EG is erased and only the ball-out operation message EM is displayed. It is an aspect. When the display of the ball removal operation image EG is erased, the button image BOG is displayed again on the display screen 7a, but the character SIG of “button PUSH!” Is not displayed. This suggests that the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 has disappeared within the period in which the ball suggestion display effect has been performed for a predetermined time. In addition, a message “NG!” NG1 is displayed in the display area of the button image BOG. This “NO!” Message NG1 suggests that the effect button 63 has not been operated within the effective operation period of the effect button 63 (mission failure).

Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (G), the jackpot promotion failure effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot promotion failure direction shows that the normal jackpot was not promoted to a promising jackpot in the promotion effect after all. Accordingly, “888” in the normal jackpot symbol array is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the characters “Promotion failure!” Are displayed above “888” in the normal jackpot symbol array. With this jackpot promotion failure production, the player recognizes that the normal jackpot has not been promoted to a promising jackpot. In addition, in this jackpot promotion failure production, the ball removal operation message EM is not displayed, but this is because the player operated the operation lever and performed ball removal before the jackpot promotion failure production was performed. This is because the full tank of the ball tray (the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62) has been eliminated. If the fullness of the ball tray (the surplus ball tray (bottom plate) 62) is not eliminated before the jackpot promotion failure production is performed, the ball removal operation message EM is continuously displayed even during the jackpot promotion failure production. .
The jackpot promotion failure effect shown in FIG. 116 (G) is always performed even when the message “NG!” NG1 is displayed in the button image BOG shown in FIG. 116 (F). There is also a case where the normal jackpot is promoted to a probabilistic jackpot with a predetermined probability.

  In other words, the error display effect A shown in FIG. 116 is a case where game balls are excessively stored in the storage device (surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62), and the effect display is being performed (the effect display is a button effect). ), A display for prompting the discharge of the game ball is displayed in front of the effect display, and a dash suggestion display is performed. The ball removal suggestion display includes a ball removal operation image EG that suggests a position where the operation lever for performing ball removal is present, and a ball removal operation message EM that prompts the ball removal operation in a character display, in relation to the effect button 63 ( The button image BOG and the characters SIG) of “button PUSH!” Are displayed in the center of the left and right sides of the display screen 7a. After a predetermined time has elapsed, the ball removal operation image EG is erased and the ball removal operation is performed. Only the message EM is displayed.

[Error display effect B]
FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the error display effect B. FIG.
In the error display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 117 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the central symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. 117A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (B), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 117 (A). As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. It shows how it looks. In this example, the reach symbol arrangement is “8 ↓ 8”. In addition, the characters “Leach!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (C), a jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot finalizing effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 117 (A) is a big hit after reaching reach in FIG. 117 (B). In this example, this jackpot symbol arrangement is normally indicated as “888”. It should be noted that the letters “big hit!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. With this jackpot finalizing effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 117D, a button operation instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. During the jackpot game, a promotion effect of whether or not the normal jackpot is promoted to a probable jackpot is performed at a predetermined timing, and the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 117 (D) is performed during the promotion effect. The button operation instruction effect is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in an effective operation period. Specifically, in the button operation instruction effect, a character SIG “button PUSH!” Is displayed above the button image BOG displayed at the center of the left and right of the display screen 7a. With this button operation instruction effect, an operation instruction effect that causes the player to press the effect button 63 is executed. Note that a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the lower part of the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time after the button operation instruction effect is displayed, and when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 disappears, the meter value Appears to be full.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (E), a dash suggestion display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ball removal suggestion display effect is an error display effect that is performed when a detecting means such as a ball detection sensor detects that the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62 is full. The ball removal suggestion display effect includes a ball removal operation image EG including a display that suggests a position of an operation lever that performs ball removal on a gaming machine, and a ball removal operation message EM that prompts the player to perform the ball removal operation in a character display. indicate. The ball removal suggestion display effect is displayed in front of the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 117 (D), and the ball removal operation image EG covers a part of the button image BOG (upper part of the button image BOG) In addition, it is displayed at the left and right center of the display screen 7a so as to completely cover the character SIG of “button PUSH!”. In the ball removal operation image EG, an image explaining a position where the operation lever for performing the ball removal is present in a square frame is displayed, and the position where the operation lever is present is displayed by being surrounded by a circle SC and indicated by an arrow YAD. ing. In the ball removal operation message EM, the characters “please remove the ball” are displayed in the upper left corner of the ball removal operation image EG and in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a. That is, the ball removal operation image EG and the ball removal operation message EM are displayed apart from each other with a predetermined interval.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (F), a dash suggestion character effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ball-out suggestion character effect, after the ball-out suggestion display effect shown in FIG. 117 (E) is performed for a predetermined time, the display of the ball-out operation image EG is erased and only the ball-out operation message EM is displayed. It is an aspect. When the display of the ball removal operation image EG is erased, the button image BOG is displayed again on the display screen 7a, but the character SIG of “button PUSH!” Is not displayed. This suggests that the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 has disappeared within the period in which the ball suggestion display effect has been performed for a predetermined time. In the display area of the button image BOG, a message MG1 “OK!” Is displayed. This “OK!” Message MG1 suggests that the effect button 63 has been operated within the effective operation period of the effect button 63 (mission success). When the display of the ball removal operation image EG is erased, the display position of the ball removal operation message EM changes (moves) to substantially the center of the display screen 7a so as to cover a part (upper part) of the button image BOG. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (G), a jackpot promotion finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot promotion finalization effect indicates that the normal jackpot is promoted to a promising jackpot in the promotion effect. Accordingly, the display screen 7a shows “777” in the probability variation jackpot symbol array, and the characters “promotion!” Are displayed above “777” in the probability variation jackpot symbol array. With this jackpot promotion finalization effect, the player recognizes that the normal jackpot has been promoted to a promising jackpot. In addition, in this jackpot promotion finalization effect, the ball removal operation message EM is not displayed, but this is because the player operated the operation lever before the jackpot promotion finalization effect was performed, This is because the full tank of the ball tray (the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62) has been eliminated. If the fullness of the ball tray (the surplus ball tray (bottom plate) 62) is not eliminated before the jackpot promotion finalizing effect is performed, the ball removal operation message EM is continuously displayed even during the jackpot promotion finalizing effect. .
The jackpot promotion confirmation effect shown in FIG. 117 (G) is always performed even when the message MG1 “OK!” Is displayed on the button image BOG shown in FIG. 117 (F). In other cases, the jackpot may not be promoted to a probable jackpot with a predetermined probability.

  In other words, the error display effect B shown in FIG. 117 is a case where game balls are excessively stored in the storage device (the surplus ball receiving tray (lower plate) 62), and the effect display is being performed (the effect display is a button effect). ), A display for prompting the discharge of the game ball is displayed in front of the effect display, and a dash suggestion display is performed. The ball removal suggestion display shows a ball removal operation image EG that suggests a position where an operation lever for performing ball removal is present at the center of the left and right of the display screen 7a so as to cover a part of the button image BOG and the entire character SIG. A beading operation message EM that is displayed and prompts the beating operation with characters is displayed separately from the beading operation image EG in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a. Thereafter, when a predetermined time elapses, the ball removal operation image EG is erased, and only the ball removal operation message EM is moved to the approximate center of the display screen 7a and displayed.

[Error display effect C]
118 is a diagram for explaining the error display effect C. FIG.
In the error display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 118 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the central symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. 118A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (while scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (B), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 116 (A). As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. It shows how it looks. In this example, the reach symbol arrangement is “7 ↓ 7”. In addition, the characters “Leach!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118C, a button operation instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This button operation instruction effect is an effect performed at a predetermined timing during the reach effect, for example, a timing immediately before the changing medium decoration symbol 8C stops. The button operation instruction effect is an effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a, the right decorative symbol 8R moves to the right corner, and is developed in the center of the display screen 7a. It is an image for prompting an operation. In other words, the effect button 63 is an image indicating that it is during an effective operation period. Specifically, in the button operation instruction effect, a character SIG “button PUSH!” Is displayed above the button image BOG displayed at the center of the left and right of the display screen 7a. With this button operation instruction effect, an operation instruction effect that causes the player to press the effect button 63 is executed. Note that a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the lower part of the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time after the button operation instruction effect is displayed, and when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 disappears, the meter value Appears to be full.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (D), a dash suggestion display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ball removal suggestion display effect is an error display effect that is performed when a detecting means such as a ball detection sensor detects that the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62 is full. The ball removal suggestion display effect includes a ball removal operation image EG including a display that suggests a position of an operation lever that performs ball removal on a gaming machine, and a ball removal operation message EM that prompts the player to perform the ball removal operation in a character display. indicate. The ball removal suggestion display effect is displayed on the near side of the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 118C, and the ball removal operation image EG is displayed so as to completely cover the button image BOG. Then, as shown in FIG. 118 (D), while the character SIG of “button PUSH!” Is continuously displayed immediately above the ball removal operation image EG, a ball removal operation message is displayed directly below the ball removal operation image EG. EM is displayed. That is, in the ball removal suggestion display effect, the ball removal operation image EG and the ball removal operation message EM are displayed so as not to cover the character SIG of “button PUSH!” That prompts the player to perform button operation with character display. Thereby, even if it is a case where the ball removal suggestion display effect is performed, the player can understand and execute the operation instruction of the button operation. In the ball removal operation image EG, an image explaining a position where the operation lever for performing the ball removal is present in a square frame is displayed, and the position where the operation lever is present is displayed by being surrounded by a circle SC and indicated by an arrow YAD. ing. In the ball removal operation message EM, the characters “Please remove the ball” are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (E), a dash suggestion display erasing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ball removal suggestion display erasure effect, the ball removal operation image EG and the ball removal operation message EM shown in FIG. 118 (D) are simultaneously deleted, and the button image BOG is displayed again on the display screen 7a. The character SIG of “button PUSH!” Is not displayed. This suggests that the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 has disappeared within the period in which the ball suggestion display effect has been performed for a predetermined time. In the display area of the button image BOG, a message MG1 “OK!” Is displayed. This “OK!” Message MG1 suggests that the effect button 63 has been operated within the effective operation period of the effect button 63 (mission success). In addition, the ball removal operation image EG and the ball removal operation message EM are erased because the player has operated the operation lever to perform the ball removal, so that the ball receiving tray (the surplus ball receiving tray (lower plate) 62) is removed. This is because the full tank has been eliminated. If the full tray of the ball tray (the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62) is not eliminated, the ball removal operation image EG and the ball removal operation message EM are unconditionally until the full tank is eliminated. It will continue to be displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (F), a jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot finalizing effect indicates that the variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 118 (A) have been jackpoted as a result of the effects shown in FIGS. 118 (B) to 118 (E). In this example, “777” is shown in the jackpot symbol arrangement. It should be noted that the letters “big hit!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. With this jackpot finalizing effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. The jackpot finalizing effect shown in FIG. 118 (F) is not necessarily performed even when the message MG1 “OK!” Is displayed on the button image BOG shown in FIG. 118 (E). In some cases, a loss occurs at a predetermined probability.

  That is, in the error display effect C shown in FIG. 118, the game balls are excessively stored in the storage device (the surplus ball receiving tray (lower plate) 62), and the effect display is being performed (the effect display is a button effect). ), A display for prompting the discharge of the game ball is displayed in front of the effect display, and a dash suggestion display is performed. The ball removal suggestion display displays a ball removal operation image EG that suggests a position where the operation lever for performing the ball removal is present at the center of the left and right of the display screen 7a so as to cover the entire button image BOG. The ball removal operation message EM prompted by character display is displayed immediately below the ball removal operation image EG. On the other hand, the character SIG of “button PUSH!” Prompting the player to perform a button operation in the character display is continuously displayed immediately above the ball removal operation image EG. A ball removal operation image EG and a ball removal operation message EM are displayed so as not to cover the character SIG of “button PUSH!” Prompted by the display.

[Error display effect D]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the error display effect D. In FIG.
In the error display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 119 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the central symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. 119 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (while scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (B), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 119A. As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. It shows how it looks. In this example, the reach symbol arrangement is “8 ↓ 8”. In addition, the characters “Leach!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (C), a jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot finalizing effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 119 (A) is a jackpot after reaching reach in FIG. 116 (B). In this example, this jackpot symbol arrangement is normally indicated as “888”. It should be noted that the letters “big hit!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. With this jackpot finalizing effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (D), a round game display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. During the jackpot game, a round game is performed, and the round game display effect is an effect including a display related to this round game. As shown in FIG. 119 (D), the round game display effect is developed in the center of the display screen 7a. The lower left corner of the screen shows the round display RS indicating the number of rounds and the number of appearances in the jackpot. The displayed number of balls to be displayed TD is displayed. In this example, the round display RS indicates 8 rounds, and the number of balls displayed TD is 1250. A second decorative symbol ZH indicating the current jackpot symbol arrangement (“888”) is displayed on the upper right of the screen.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (E), on the display screen 7a, a promotion battle effect (promotion effect) is executed as to whether or not the normal jackpot is promoted to a probable jackpot. This promotion battle effect is performed as a round game effect developed at the center of the display screen 7a shown in FIG. When the 8-round game is started, an image in which the player's teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (F), a jackpot promotion suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jackpot promotion suggestion effect, as a result of the battle between the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB, the letters “Victory!” Indicating that the teammate character CRA has won are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying this character “Victory!”, It is possible to make the player think that a normal jackpot is promoted to a promising jackpot (a privilege advantageous to the player is given). In this jackpot promotion suggestion effect, the round display RS indicates 12 rounds, and the number of appearances display TD indicates 1870. In other words, the promotion battle effect shown in FIG. 119 (E) is performed from 8 rounds to 12 rounds. Further, the second decorative symbol ZH indicates the probability variation jackpot symbol array “777”. That is, the second decorative symbol ZH suggests that the normal jackpot is promoted to a promising jackpot with the letters “Victory!”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (G), a dash suggestion display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ball removal suggestion display effect is an error display effect that is performed when a detecting means such as a ball detection sensor detects that the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62 is full. The ball removal suggestion display effect includes a ball removal operation image EG including a display that suggests a position of an operation lever that performs ball removal on a gaming machine, and a ball removal operation message EM that prompts the player to perform the ball removal operation in a character display. Are displayed in the center of the left and right of the display screen 7a. The ball removal suggestion display effect is displayed on the near side of the jackpot promotion suggestion effect shown in FIG. 119 (F), and the ball removal operation image EG and the ball removal operation message EM completely cover the characters “Victory!”. And it is displayed so that a part (number part of round display RS and the number-of-balls display TD) of round display RS and the number-of-balls display TD may be covered. That is, in the ball removal suggestion display effect, the ball removal operation image EG and the ball removal operation message EM are displayed so as to cover a part or all of the predetermined character display displayed in the round game effect. In the ball removal operation image EG, an image explaining a position where the operation lever for performing the ball removal is present in a square frame is displayed, and the position where the operation lever is present is displayed by being surrounded by a circle SC and indicated by an arrow YAD. ing. In the ball removal operation message EM, the characters “please remove the ball” are displayed on the lower edge in the frame of the ball removal operation image EG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (H), a jackpot promotion finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot promotion finalization effect indicates that the normal jackpot has been promoted to a promising jackpot in the round game effect. Accordingly, the display screen 7a shows “777” in the probability variation jackpot symbol array, and the characters “promotion!” Are displayed above “777” in the probability variation jackpot symbol array. With this jackpot promotion finalizing effect, the player is convinced that the normal jackpot has been promoted to a promising jackpot. In this jackpot promotion finalizing effect, the ball removal operation image EG and the ball removal operation message EM are not displayed. This is because the player operates the operation lever before the jackpot promotion finalizing effect is performed. As a result of the removal, the full tank of the ball tray (the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62) has been eliminated. If the fullness of the ball tray (the surplus ball tray (bottom plate) 62) is not eliminated before the jackpot promotion finalizing effect is performed, the ball removal operation message EM is continuously displayed even during the jackpot promotion finalizing effect. . In this jackpot promotion finalization effect, the round display RS indicates 13 rounds, and the number of appearances display TD indicates 2025. In other words, the dash suggestion display effect shown in FIG. 119 (G) is performed from the 12th round to the 13th round. The second decorative symbol ZH indicates the same probability variation jackpot symbol array “777” as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.
Note that the jackpot promotion finalization effect shown in FIG. 119 (H) is always performed even when the characters “Victory!” Shown in FIG. 119 (F) are displayed (the friend character CRA wins). There is a possibility that the normal jackpot is not promoted to a probable jackpot with a predetermined probability.

  In other words, in the error display effect D shown in FIG. 119, there is an excessive amount of game balls stored in the storage device (the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62), and the effect display is being performed (the effect display is a big hit game) In a case where an effect including a display related to the middle round game is performed), a display for prompting the discharge of the game ball is displayed in front of the effect display, and a ball removal suggestion display is performed. The ball removal suggestion display is a part of a predetermined character display (round display RS and number of balls displayed) displayed in a round game effect. TD) or all (the character “Victory!”) Is displayed in the center of the left and right sides of the display screen 7a, and a ball removal operation message EM that prompts the ball removal operation is displayed in the display area of the ball removal operation image EG. To be displayed.

[Example of effects]
Below, an example of the effect of an error display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 118, the first effect is an effect including a display related to the effect button, and the second effect is an effect including a display related to an error. The display of the second effect is displayed in front of the display of the first effect, and a part or all of the display related to the effect button is covered with a display related to the error. According to this configuration, when an error (abnormality) occurs in the gaming machine, a part or all of the display related to the effect button is displayed even if the button effect which is an important effect for the game is displayed. By covering with the display relating to the error, it is possible to notify the occurrence of the error promptly in a conspicuous manner. As a result, it is possible to deal with errors quickly and reduce the troubles to the game as much as possible, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, the first effect is an effect including a display related to the round game during the jackpot game, and the display related to the round game includes a predetermined character display, The display of the second effect is displayed in front of the display of the first effect, and a part or all of the predetermined character display related to the round game is covered with a display related to the error. According to this configuration, even if a predetermined character display related to the round game, which is an important effect for the game, is performed, a part or all of the predetermined character display related to the round game is regarded as an error. By covering with the related display, it is possible to notify that an error has occurred promptly to the outside in a conspicuous manner. As a result, it is possible to deal with errors quickly and reduce the troubles to the game as much as possible, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the display related to the error is configured to be a display related to the ball removal when the dish full tank is detected. According to this configuration, it is possible to quickly notify the outside that a dish full tank error has occurred in a conspicuous manner. Thereby, the player can quickly remove the ball and avoid any obstacles to the game, such as interruption of the game due to clogging, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the display related to ball removal is a message that prompts ball removal and an image that indicates the position of the ball removal operation unit (operation lever or operation button). Is displayed together. According to this configuration, the player can instantly determine the position of the ball removal operation unit and quickly perform ball removal. Thereby, the player can avoid the trouble to the game as much as possible, such as the interruption of the game due to clogging, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the display related to ball removal is configured to be displayed at the left and right center of the display screen. According to this configuration, since the display related to the ball removal is displayed at a conspicuous position, it is possible to reduce as much as possible that the player overlooks the display related to the ball removal. As a result, the player can surely remove the ball and can avoid any obstacles to the game, such as interruption of the game due to clogging. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of an error display effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the image display device 7 is configured by one display screen 7 a, and the display related to the error is displayed on the one display screen 7 a with the effect button. Although the display related to the display related to the game or the display related to the round game during the jackpot game is displayed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the image display device includes a first display screen disposed on the front side and a second display screen disposed on the rear side, and the display related to the error is related to the effect button on the first display screen. The display and the display related to the round game during the jackpot game may be displayed on the second display screen, respectively. In this way, the display related to the error is displayed closer to the player, and can be appealed to the player intensely in a very impactful manner. Note that the image display device having the first display screen and the second display screen may be configured to display a stereoscopic image (3D). In this way, it is possible to further appeal to the player by displaying the display related to the error in 3D.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the display related to the dish full tank error is displayed together with a message for prompting the ball removal and an image indicating the position of the ball removal operation unit. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to displaying a message for prompting ball removal and an image indicating the position of the ball removal operation unit, a sound for prompting ball removal may be generated. Or you may make it abbreviate | omit the image display which shows the position of a ball removal operation part, and the sound which generate | occur | produces the sound which encourages ball removal, and prompts ball removal.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the display related to the error is displayed on the front side of the display related to the effect button or the display related to the round game during the jackpot game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display related to the error may cover a part or all of the display of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed, or may cover a part or all of the display of the hold icon. .

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the display related to the error is the display related to the dish full tank error, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to dish full error, errors include abnormal winning errors, door opening errors, payout status errors, switch error errors, magnet detection errors, discharge errors, radio wave detection errors, discharge ball check errors, solenoid photo sensor error errors, An impact detection error, an abnormal V winning error, a winning frequency abnormal error, and the like may be mentioned, and display related to these errors may be performed.
[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 119, the display related to the dish full tank error is a target display such as a display related to the effect button or a display related to the round game during the big hit game. Although displayed on the front side so as to cover a part or all of those displays, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display related to the error is determined by determining the content of the error and determining whether to cover a part of the target display or the entire display according to the determined error type. It may be. Furthermore, the display related to the error may not cover the target display at all depending on the type of the determined error.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect C3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of performing a plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined first effect as one of the plurality of display effects.
The display means can execute a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects.
The first effect is an effect including a display related to an effect button,
The second effect is an effect including a display related to an error,
The display means may display the display of the second effect in front of the display of the first effect, and may cover a part or all of the display related to the effect button with a display related to the error. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C3-2]
The first effect is an effect including a display related to a round game during a jackpot game, instead of an effect including a display related to the effect button,
The display relating to the round game includes a predetermined character display,
The display means displays the display of the second effect in front of the display of the first effect, and displays a part or all of the predetermined character display related to the round game in a display related to the error. May cover,
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect C3-3]
The display related to the error is a display related to ball removal when a dish full is detected.
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or aspect C3-2, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect C3-4]
The display related to the ball removal displays a message prompting ball removal and an image indicating the position of the ball removal operation unit.
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-3, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect C3-5]
The display related to the beading is displayed at the left and right center of the display screen.
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-3 or aspect C3-4, which is characterized in that.

  Hereinafter, the predetermined information display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 123. This predetermined information display effect can be executed during standby, during a decorative symbol variation effect, during a jackpot game, or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and reads the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 when an instruction to execute the predetermined information display effect is included. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Predetermined information display effect A]
120 is a diagram for explaining the predetermined information display effect A. FIG.
In the predetermined information display effect A, first, a standby display effect is executed as shown in FIG. This standby display effect is an effect performed while waiting for a player, and is a demonstration effect (demonstration effect). In this standby effect, a character (main character) that is frequently used as an effect of the gaming machine 1 and is a hero character (in other words, a character CRA as a motif of the gaming machine 1 and a balloon image C41 are displayed. In the balloon image C41, “I am the main character!” Is described, suggesting that the character CRA is the main character in the gaming machine 1, in other words, indicating that the character CRA is the main character.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (B), a jackpot game display effect is executed. This jackpot game display effect is an effect that is performed during a jackpot game that occurs when a player plays a game after the standby display effect. In this jackpot game display effect, a character CRA and a balloon image C42 are displayed. The balloon image C42 is displayed indicating a round. In the example of FIG. 120B, it is suggested that there are 10 rounds (10R). In addition, in the jackpot game display effect, a display suggesting a right-hand hit, a display indicating the current number of rounds, a display indicating a winning ball, and the like are also performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (C), an alerting effect is executed. This alerting effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the changing effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this alerting effect, an inset alerting image C43 is displayed. This immersive alert image C43 is described as “Let's enjoy the game moderately” and is a display that suppresses the immersiveness to the game. In the immersive attention calling image C43, a description that directly calls attention to the game such as “Let's be careful about immersing in the game” may be made.

[Predetermined information display effect B]
121 is a diagram for explaining the predetermined information display effect B. FIG.
In the predetermined information display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 121 (A), a standby display effect is executed. This standby display effect is an effect performed while waiting for a player, and is a demonstration effect (demonstration effect). In this standby effect, a character (main character) that is frequently used as an effect of the gaming machine 1 and is a hero character (in other words, a character CRA as a motif of the gaming machine 1 and a balloon image C41 are displayed. In the balloon image C41, “I am the main character!” Is described, suggesting that the character CRA is the main character in the gaming machine 1, in other words, indicating that the character CRA is the main character.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (B), a jackpot game display effect is executed. This jackpot game display effect is an effect that is performed during a jackpot game that occurs when a player plays a game after the standby display effect. In this jackpot game display effect, a character CRA and a balloon image C42 are displayed. The balloon image C42 is displayed indicating a round. In the example of FIG. 121 (B), it is suggested that there are 10 rounds (10R). In addition, in the jackpot game display effect, a display suggesting a right-hand hit, a display indicating the current number of rounds, a display indicating a winning ball, and the like are also performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (C), a manufacturer logo effect is executed. This maker logo display effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the change effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this maker logo display effect, a maker logo image C44 is displayed. The manufacturer logo image C44 is a logo representing the manufacturer of the gaming machine 1. In the manufacturer logo image C44, “XYZ” is indicated as the manufacturer. In addition, a predetermined catchphrase “Happy to you !!” is displayed on the maker logo image C44. The manufacturer logo image C44 may be a logo representing a manufacturer that has researched and developed the gaming machine 1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (D), an alerting effect is executed. This alerting effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the changing effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this alerting effect, an inset alerting image C43 is displayed. This immersive alert image C43 is described as “Let's enjoy the game moderately” and is a display that suppresses the immersiveness to the game. In the immersive attention calling image C43, a description that directly calls attention to the game such as “Let's be careful about immersing in the game” may be made. Further, in this alerting effect, a display for alerting the player to pay attention to forgotten items and theft (beware of forgotten items and theft!) Is also performed.

[Predetermined information display effect C]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the predetermined information display effect C. FIG.
In the predetermined information display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 122 (A), a standby display effect is executed. This standby display effect is an effect performed while waiting for a player, and is a demonstration effect (demonstration effect). In this standby effect, a character (main character) that is frequently used as an effect of the gaming machine 1 and is a hero character (in other words, a character CRA as a motif of the gaming machine 1 and a balloon image C41 are displayed. In the balloon image C41, “I am the main character!” Is described, suggesting that the character CRA is the main character in the gaming machine 1, in other words, indicating that the character CRA is the main character.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), a jackpot game display effect is executed. This jackpot game display effect is an effect that is performed during a jackpot game that occurs when a player plays a game after the standby display effect. In this jackpot game display effect, a character CRA and a balloon image C42 are displayed. The balloon image C42 is displayed indicating a round. In the example of FIG. 122 (B), it is suggested that there are 10 rounds (10R). In addition, in the jackpot game display effect, a display suggesting a right-hand hit, a display indicating the current number of rounds, a display indicating a winning ball, and the like are also performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (C), a copyright holder display effect is executed. In this copyright holder display effect, a character CRA and a copyright owner suggested logo image C45 are displayed. The copyright owner-suggested logo image C45 is a logo representing the copyright owner of the character CRA, which is the character that is the motif of the gaming machine 1 and is the main character.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (D), a maker logo effect is executed. This maker logo display effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the change effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this maker logo display effect, a maker logo image C44 is displayed. The manufacturer logo image C44 is a logo representing the manufacturer of the gaming machine 1. In the manufacturer logo image C44, “XYZ” is indicated as the manufacturer. In addition, a predetermined catchphrase “Happy to you !!” is displayed on the maker logo image C44. The manufacturer logo image C44 may be a logo representing a manufacturer that has researched and developed the gaming machine 1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (E), an alerting effect is executed. This alerting effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the changing effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this alerting effect, an inset alerting image C43 and a predetermined alerting image C49 are displayed. This immersive alert image C43 is described as “Let's enjoy the game moderately” and is a display that suppresses the immersiveness to the game. In the immersive attention calling image C43, a description that directly calls attention to the game such as “Let's be careful about immersing in the game” may be made. In addition, the predetermined warning image C49 is described as “Be careful about forgetting to take a prepaid card, theft or forgotten things”, and alerting the player to forget to take a prepaid card, for theft or forgetting things. It is a display to do.

[Predetermined information display effect D]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the predetermined information display effect D.
In the predetermined information display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 123 (A), a standby display effect is executed. This standby display effect is an effect performed while waiting for a player, and is a demonstration effect (demonstration effect). In this standby effect, it is a protagonist character (main character) that is frequently used in the effects of the gaming machine 1, in other words, the character CRA that is the motif of the gaming machine 1, the underage alert image C46, and the suppression of fraud A warning C47, a fraudulent warning C48, and a sneaking attention C410 are displayed. The underage alert image C46 is described as “No if you are under 18 years old!”, And is a display that alerts the player so that underage children under the age of 18 do not play. The fraudulent act suppression warning C47 is a message that states that “the fraudulent act is a crime. Please stop!”, And the cheating act such as the goto act is a criminal offense to the player. The fraudulent action alert C48 is described as “Warning fraud!” And is a display that alerts the player not to match the fraud. The immersive attention alert C410 is described as “Let's enjoy the game moderately”, and is a display that suppresses the immersiveness to the game. In the enthusiasm alerting image C410, a description for directly alerting the enthusiasm to the game such as “Let's be cautious about the enthusiasm for the game” may be made.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (B), a jackpot game display effect is executed. This jackpot game display effect is an effect that is performed during a jackpot game that occurs when a player plays a game after the standby display effect. In this jackpot game display effect, a character CRA and a balloon image C42 are displayed. The balloon image C42 is displayed indicating a round. In the example of FIG. 123 (B), it is suggested that there are 10 rounds (10R). In addition, in the jackpot game display effect, a display suggesting a right-hand hit, a display indicating the current number of rounds, a display indicating a winning ball, and the like are also performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (C), a copyright holder display effect is executed. In this copyright holder display effect, a character CRA and a copyright owner suggested logo image C45 are displayed. The copyright owner-suggested logo image C45 is a logo representing the copyright owner of the character CRA, which is the character that is the motif of the gaming machine 1 and is the main character.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (D), a maker logo effect is executed. This maker logo display effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the change effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this maker logo display effect, a maker logo image C44 is displayed. The manufacturer logo image C44 is a logo representing the manufacturer of the gaming machine 1. In the manufacturer logo image C44, “XYZ” is indicated as the manufacturer. In addition, a predetermined catchphrase “Happy to you !!” is displayed on the maker logo image C44. The manufacturer logo image C44 may be a logo representing a manufacturer that has researched and developed the gaming machine 1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (E), an alerting effect is executed. This alerting effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the changing effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this alerting effect, an inset alerting image C43 and a predetermined alerting image C49 are displayed. This immersive alert image C43 is described as “Let's enjoy the game moderately” and is a display that suppresses the immersiveness to the game. In the immersive attention calling image C43, a description that directly calls attention to the game such as “Let's be careful about immersing in the game” may be made. In addition, the predetermined warning image C49 is described as “Be careful about forgetting to take a prepaid card, theft or forgotten things”, and alerting the player to forget to take a prepaid card, for theft or forgetting things. It is a display to do.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of an effect of predetermined information display production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the predetermined information effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the standby display effect is performed, and then the jackpot game display effect is performed, and then the display of the sinking alert image C43 starts to change the special symbol Done before. According to this configuration, the sinking alert image C43 is displayed at a timing when the player can calm down after a big hit game, so the player can take the content of the sinking alert image C43 with a sincere feeling. It is possible to suppress excessive immersion in the game. As a result, the game can be enjoyed soundly and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the predetermined information effects B to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the jackpot game display effect is performed, and then the manufacturer logo display effect (display of the manufacturer logo image C44) is performed. Performed before display of C43. According to this configuration, since the maker logo image C44 and the inset alert image C43 are performed at a timing when the player can cool down after the jackpot game, the player can add the inset image of the gaming machine 1 to the inset alert image C43. The manufacturer can be recognized firmly. Thereby, the player can identify the manufacturer that manufactured the gaming machine 1 that gently approaches the player who performs the inset alert image C43, and the player's evaluation of the manufacturer of the gaming machine 1 can be improved. . As a result, the player can play the game with the game machine 1 created by the manufacturer corresponding to the manufacturer logo image C44, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the predetermined information effects C and D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the jackpot game display effect is performed, and then the copyright owner display effect (display of the copyright owner suggestion logo image C45) is performed. This is performed before the display of the immersive alert image C43. According to this configuration, the copyright owner-inspired logo image C45 and the inset warning image C43 are performed at a timing when the player can calm down after the jackpot game, so that the player can play the game The copyright holder of the character CRA that is the motif of the machine 1 can be firmly recognized. As a result, a player who knows the copyright holder of the character CRA can play the gaming machine 1 intimately and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the predetermined information effect D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the inset alert image C410 is displayed in the standby display effect. According to this configuration, since the sinking alert image C43 is displayed when the standby is relaxed, the player can deeply receive the contents of the sinking alert image C43, and excessive immersion in the game. Can be suppressed. As a result, the game can be enjoyed soundly and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the predetermined information effect D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the inset alert image C43 is displayed, the predetermined alert image C49 (precaution card display forgetting to take a prepaid card, theft or forgotten items) is performed. . According to this configuration, since the predetermined warning image C49 is displayed together with the sinking warning image C43 at a timing when it is possible to calm down after a big hit game, the player can confirm that the prepaid card has been forgotten, You can pay attention to theft and check for lost items. As a result, the game can be enjoyed soundly and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a predetermined information display effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the predetermined information effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the alert effect, together with the inset alert image C43, other images (for example, the manufacturer logo image C44, the copyright owner suggested logo image C45, the minor alert image C46). , Fraudulent behavior warning C47, and fraud alert C48) may be displayed together.
In addition, during the jackpot game, the sinking alert image C43, the manufacturer logo image C44, the manufacturer logo image C44, the copyright owner suggested logo image C45, the minor warning image C46, the fraud suppression alerting C47, and the fraud alerting C48. Alternatively, an image such as the predetermined attention calling image C49 may be displayed.
In addition, in the maker logo display effect, together with the maker logo image C44, other images (for example, a caution image C43, a copyright owner suggested logo image C45, a minor warning image C46, a fraud suppression warning C47, fraud The alerting C48 and the predetermined alerting image C49) may be displayed together.
In addition, in the copyright holder display effect, together with the copyright owner-inspired logo image C45, other images (for example, the inset warning image C43, the maker logo image C44, the underage warning image C46, the cheating suppression warning C47, fraud) The action alerting C48 and the predetermined alerting image C49) may be displayed together.
Further, in the standby display effect, the copyright owner suggested logo image C45, the manufacturer logo image C44, and the predetermined alert image C49 may be displayed.

[Modification 2]
In the predetermined information effect D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the inset warning image C410 of the standby display effect and the inset alert image C43 of the alert effect are different from each other without departing from the meaning of the inset warning. You may make it do. For example, “Let's pay attention to the game's intrusion!” Is written in the inset image C410 of the standby display effect, and “You are too addicted to the game and cannot see the surroundings” in the inspiration image C43 of the inspiration effect. “Please play carefully, so please be careful!”.
Further, although the display position of the inset warning image C410 for the standby display effect is different from the display position of the inset alert image C43 for the alert effect, they may be at the same position.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect C4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of performing standby display,
The second display effect is an effect of performing a jackpot game display during a jackpot game,
The third display effect is an effect of performing a first immersive alert display that alerts the player to immerse in the game,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and the second display effect is performed. A third display effect is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C4-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect C4-1,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of displaying a manufacturer logo representing the manufacturer of the gaming machine,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed after the second display effect and before the third display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C4-1 or aspect C4-2,
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The fifth display effect is an effect of displaying a logo representing a copyright owner of a predetermined character used in the gaming machine,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the second display effect and before the third display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C4-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-3,
The first display effect includes a second sinking alert display that alerts the player to sink into the game,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C4-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a sixth display effect may be performed.
The sixth display effect is an effect of performing a forgetting to remove a card warning notice for forgetting to remove a prepaid card,
The combination effect may include the sixth display effect,
In the combination effect, the sixth display effect is executed when the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The hold icon movement effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127. This hold icon movement effect can be executed during the decorative effect variation effect or before and after the variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and reads the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 when an instruction to execute the hold icon movement effect is included. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Holding icon movement effect A]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon movement effect A. FIG. Of the on-hold icon movement effect A, FIGS. 124A to 124E are executed when the gaming state is the normal state. In the hold icon movement effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 124A, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed in the normal state. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R during the variable display are moved downward (along the vertical direction), and the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three hold icons 9A shown in FIG. 1 are displayed side by side along the vertical direction of the display screen 7a in the first area FA of the display screen 7a. That is, the three reserved icons 9A of the special figure 1 are arranged side by side in the direction along the direction of variation of the decorative symbol. The three hold icons 9A are the hold images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a in order from the bottom to the top. The first area FA of the display screen 7a is a reserved image display area in which the hold icon 9A can be displayed, and here is an area having a predetermined width from the left end of the display screen 7a. The first area FA may be configured such that the area can be identified by an image (area image) indicating the area indicated by a specific color, or may be in a form that cannot be distinguished from other areas. Here, the first area FA cannot be distinguished from other areas. Even in this case, the first area FA can be appropriately set as an area including the area where the hold icon 9A is displayed and an area around the area. In FIG. 124A, among the three hold icons 9A in FIG. 1, the second hold icon 9A from the bottom (the hold image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) is prefetched. The hold has changed. The reserved digest image 9C is not displayed.

  FIG. 124 (B) shows a state in which one hold icon 9A has been added. Here, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9A is newly added on top of the three hold icons 9A arranged vertically. The newly added hold icon 9A is a hold image 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a. As shown in FIG. 124 (C), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four held icons 9A arranged vertically is displayed first. The lowest hold icon 9A (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) moves to the right and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digested image 9C is not displayed. Of the four holding icons 9A arranged vertically, the remaining holding icons 9A displayed after the second (holding images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure holding storage area 85a) are as follows: Shift shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (D), the next variation display is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the variation start may be in the decorative symbol variation effect A (FIG. 48). The first hold icon 9A displayed first among the three hold icons 9A in FIG. 1 by the shift movement described above (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a). However, the hold is changed by prefetching.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (E), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, among the three reserved icons 9A arranged vertically in FIG. 124 (D). The initially displayed hold icon 9A (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) moves in the right direction. At this time, since the moved hold icon 9A has changed due to prefetching, the display does not disappear even after moving to the right, and the hold digested image 9C (the hold icon 9C) is obtained. The hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind the hold icon 9C. In FIG. 124D, among the three holding icons 9A arranged vertically, the remaining holding icons 9A displayed after the second (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure holding storage area 85a). The reserved image 9A) shifts downward. Then, the reserved digest image 9C (the reserved icon 9C) overlaps with a part of the first held icon 9A (the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure storage area 85a). Is displayed.

  124 (F) to 124 (J) are executed when the gaming state is in the probability changing state. In FIG. 124 (F), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed during the probability change. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R during the variable display are moved downward (along the vertical direction), and the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three hold icons 9B of the special figure 2 are displayed side by side along the vertical direction of the display screen 7a in the second area SA of the display screen 7a. That is, the three reserved icons 9B of the special figure 2 are arranged side by side in the direction along the direction of variation of the decorative symbol. The three hold icons 9B are the hold images 9B corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b in order from the bottom to the top. The second area SA of the display screen 7a is a reserved image display area in which the hold icon 9B can be displayed. Here, the second area SA is an area having a predetermined width from the right end of the display screen 7a. The second area SA may be configured such that the area can be identified by an image (area image) indicating the area indicated by a specific color, or may be in a form that cannot be distinguished from other areas. Here, the second area SA is in an aspect that cannot be distinguished from other areas. Even in this case, the second area SA can be set as appropriate as an area including the area where the hold icon 9B is displayed and an area around the area. 124F, among the three hold icons 9B in FIG. 2, the second hold icon 9B from the bottom (the hold image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) is prefetched. The hold has changed. The reserved digest image 9C is not displayed.

  FIG. 124 (G) shows a state in which one hold icon 9B has been added. Here, in the second area SA of the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9B is newly added on top of the three hold icons 9B arranged vertically. The newly added hold icon 9B is a hold image 9B corresponding to the fourth storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b. As shown in FIG. 124 (H), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, among the four reserved icons 9B arranged vertically, the first displayed reserved symbol The icon 9B (the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure storage area 85b) moves to the left and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digested image 9C is not displayed. Of the four holding icons 9B arranged vertically, the remaining holding icons 9B displayed after the second (holding images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure holding storage area 85b) are as follows: Shift shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (I), the next variable display is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the variation start may be in the decorative symbol variation effect A (FIG. 48). The first hold icon 9B displayed first among the three hold icons 9B in the special figure 2 by the shift movement described above (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b). However, the hold is changed by prefetching.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (J), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, among the three reserved icons 9B arranged vertically in FIG. 124 (I). The hold icon 9B displayed first (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) moves to the left. At this time, since the moved hold icon 9B is changed by prefetching, the display does not disappear even after moving to the left, and the hold digested image 9C (the hold icon 9C) is obtained. The hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9B behind the hold icon 9C. In FIG. 124 (I), of the three hold icons 9B arranged vertically, the remaining hold icons 9B displayed after the second (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b). The reserved image 9B) shifts downward. Then, the reserved digest image 9C (the reserved icon 9C) overlaps a part of the first held icon 9B (the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b). Is displayed.

[Hold icon movement effect B]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon movement effect B. FIG. The hold icon movement effect B differs from the hold icon move effect A in the direction of variation of the decorative pattern and the arrangement direction of the hold icon. 125A to 125E of the hold icon movement effect B are executed when the gaming state is the normal state. In the hold icon movement effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed during normal times. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R during the variable display are moved in the left direction (along the left-right direction), and the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three hold icons 9A shown in FIG. 1 are displayed side by side along the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a in the first area FA of the display screen 7a. That is, the three reserved icons 9A of the special figure 1 are arranged side by side in the direction along the direction of variation of the decorative symbol. The three hold icons 9A are the hold images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a in order from the right to the left. The first area FA of the display screen 7a is a reserved image display area where the hold icon 9A can be displayed. Here, the first area FA is an area having a predetermined width in the vertical direction from the lower end of the display screen 7a. The first area FA may be configured such that the area can be identified by an image (area image) indicating the area indicated by a specific color, or may be in a form that cannot be distinguished from other areas. Here, the first area FA cannot be distinguished from other areas. Even in this case, the first area FA can be appropriately set as an area including the area where the hold icon 9A is displayed and an area around the area. In FIG. 125A, among the three hold icons 9A in FIG. 1, the second hold icon 9A from the right (the hold image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) is prefetched. The hold has changed. The reserved digest image 9C is not displayed.

  FIG. 125 (B) shows a state in which one hold icon 9A has been added. Here, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9A is newly added to the leftmost of the three hold icons 9A arranged side by side. The newly added hold icon 9A is a hold image 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a. As shown in FIG. 125 (C), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four held icons 9A arranged side by side is displayed first. The rightmost hold icon 9A (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) moves upward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digested image 9C is not displayed. Among the four holding icons 9A arranged side by side, the remaining holding icons 9A displayed after the second (holding images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure holding storage area 85a) are on the right. Shift shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (D), the next variation display by the lower decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the upper decorative design 8R is executed. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R of the start of variation may be in the decorative symbol variation effect D (FIG. 51). The first hold icon 9A displayed first among the three hold icons 9A in FIG. 1 by the shift movement described above (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a). However, the hold is changed by prefetching.

  As shown in FIG. 125 (E), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, among the three reserved icons 9A arranged side by side in FIG. 125 (D). The initially displayed hold icon 9A (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) moves upward. At this time, since the moved hold icon 9A has changed due to the prefetching, the display does not disappear even after moving upward, and a reserved digest image 9C (the hold icon 9C) is obtained. The hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind the hold icon 9C. In FIG. 125 (D), among the three holding icons 9A arranged side by side, the remaining holding icons 9A displayed after the second (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure holding storage area 85a). The reserved image 9A) shifts in the right direction. Then, the reserved digest image 9C (the reserved icon 9C) overlaps with a part of the first held icon 9A (the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure storage area 85a). Is displayed.

  FIG. 125 (F) to FIG. 125 (J) are executed when the gaming state is in the probability changing state. In FIG. 125 (F), the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed during the probability change. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R during the variable display are moved in the left direction (along the left-right direction), and the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three hold icons 9B of the special drawing 2 are displayed side by side along the left-right direction of the display screen 7a in the second area SA of the display screen 7a. That is, the three reserved icons 9B of the special figure 2 are arranged side by side in the direction along the direction of variation of the decorative symbol. The three hold icons 9B are the hold images 9B corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b in order from the left to the right. The second area SA of the display screen 7a is a reserved image display area where the hold icon 9B can be displayed. Here, the second area SA is an area having a predetermined width in the vertical direction from the upper end of the display screen 7a. The second area SA may be configured such that the area can be identified by an image (area image) indicating the area indicated by a specific color, or may be in a form that cannot be distinguished from other areas. Here, the second area SA is in an aspect that cannot be distinguished from other areas. Even in this case, the second area SA can be set as appropriate as an area including the area where the hold icon 9B is displayed and an area around the area. In FIG. 125 (F), among the three hold icons 9B in FIG. 2, the second hold icon 9B from the left (the hold image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) is prefetched. The hold has changed. The reserved digest image 9C is not displayed.

  FIG. 125 (G) shows a state where one hold icon 9B is added. Here, in the second area SA of the display screen 7a, a new hold icon 9B is added to the right of the three hold icons 9B arranged side by side. The newly added hold icon 9B is a hold image 9B corresponding to the fourth storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b. As shown in FIG. 125 (H), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped, one of the four held icons 9B arranged side by side is displayed first. The leftmost hold icon 9B (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) moves downward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digested image 9C is not displayed. Of the four holding icons 9B arranged side by side, the remaining holding icons 9B displayed after the second (holding images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure holding storage area 85b) are on the left. Shift shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (I), the next variable display is executed by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R. The lower decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the upper decorative design 8R of the start of variation may be in the form of a decorative design variation effect A (FIG. 48). The first hold icon 9B displayed first among the three hold icons 9B in the special figure 2 by the shift movement described above (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b). However, the hold is changed by prefetching.

  As shown in FIG. 125 (J), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, among the three reserved icons 9B arranged side by side in FIG. 125 (I). The initially displayed hold icon 9B (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) moves downward. At this time, since the moved hold icon 9B has changed due to the prefetching, the display does not disappear even after moving downward, and a reserved digest image 9C (the hold icon 9C) is obtained. The hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9B behind the hold icon 9C. In FIG. 125 (I), among the three holding icons 9B arranged side by side, the remaining holding icons 9B displayed after the second (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the second special figure holding storage area 85b). The reserved image 9B) shifts to the left. Then, the reserved digest image 9C (the reserved icon 9C) overlaps a part of the first held icon 9B (the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b). Is displayed.

[Hold icon movement effect C]
126 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon movement effect C. FIG. The hold icon movement effect C differs from the hold icon movement effect A in the gaming state and the display mode of the hold. 126 (A) to 126 (J) are executed when the gaming state is a non-probable time-short state. In the hold icon movement effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 126 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed during the time saving. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R during the variable display are moved downward (along the vertical direction), and the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three hold icons 9A of FIG. 1 and the three hold icons 9B of FIG. 2 are displayed side by side along the vertical direction of the display screen 7a in the first area FA of the display screen 7a. Is done. In other words, the three reserved icons 9A in the special figure 1 and the three reserved icons 9B in the special figure 2 are arranged side by side in the direction along the direction of variation of the decorative design. The three hold icons 9A are the hold images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a in order from the bottom to the top. Similarly, the three hold icons 9B are the hold images 9B corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b in order from the bottom to the top. The hold icon 9B in FIG. 2 is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the hold icon 9A in FIG. The special figure 2 hold is digested in preference to the special figure 1 hold (prior digestion). Therefore, the three hold icons 9A in FIG. 1 and the hold icon 9B in FIG.

  The first area FA of the display screen 7a is a reserved image display area where the hold icons 9A and 9B can be displayed. Here, the first area FA is an area having a predetermined width from the left end of the display screen 7a. The first area FA may be configured such that the area can be identified by an image (area image) indicating the area indicated by a specific color, or may be in a form that cannot be distinguished from other areas. Here, the first area FA cannot be distinguished from other areas. Even in this case, the first area FA can be appropriately set as an area including the hold icons 9A and 9B and an area including the periphery thereof. In FIG. 126 (A), among the three hold icons 9B in FIG. 2, the second hold icon 9B from the bottom (the hold image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) is prefetched. The hold has changed. The reserved digest image 9C is not displayed.

  FIG. 126 (B) shows a state where one hold icon 9B of FIG. 2 is added. Here, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, a new hold icon 9B is added to the top of the three hold icons 9B arranged vertically. The newly added hold icon 9B is a hold image 9B corresponding to the fourth storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b. As shown in FIG. 126 (C), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four held icons 9B arranged vertically is displayed first. The lowest hold icon 9B (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) moves to the right and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digested image 9C is not displayed. Of the four holding icons 9B arranged vertically, the remaining holding icons 9B displayed after the second (holding images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure holding storage area 85b) are as follows: Shift shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (D), the next variable display is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the variation start may be in the decorative symbol variation effect A (FIG. 48). The first hold icon 9B displayed first among the three hold icons 9B in the special figure 2 by the shift movement described above (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b). However, the hold is changed by prefetching.

  As shown in FIG. 126 (E), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, among the three reserved icons 9B arranged vertically in FIG. 126 (D). The initially displayed hold icon 9B (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) moves to the right. At this time, since the moved hold icon 9B is changed by prefetching, the display does not disappear even after moving to the right, and the hold digested image 9C (the hold icon 9C) is obtained. The hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9B behind the hold icon 9C. In FIG. 126D, among the three hold icons 9B arranged vertically, the remaining hold icons 9B displayed after the second (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b). The reserved image 9B) shifts downward. Then, the reserved digest image 9C (the reserved icon 9C) overlaps a part of the first held icon 9B (the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b). Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (F), the next variable display is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, a special reach effect or the like may be executed.

  When the shift movement of the hold icon 9B is repeated and the last hold icon 9B is digested as shown in FIGS. 126 (G) (H), as shown in FIG. 126 (I), On-hold digestion of the on-hold icon 9A is started. Here, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, among the three reserved icons 9A arranged vertically, the lowest reserved icon 9A ( The hold image 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a moves to the right and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digested image 9C is not displayed. Of the three holding icons 9A arranged vertically, the remaining holding icons 9A displayed after the second (holding images 9A corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure holding storage area 85a) are Shift shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (J), the next variation display by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is executed.

[Hold icon movement effect D]
127 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon movement effect D. FIG. The hold icon movement effect D is different from the hold icon movement effect A in the gaming state, the display mode of the hold, the decorative pattern variation direction, and the hold icon arrangement direction. 127 (A) to 127 (J) are executed when the gaming state is in a short time state with a non-probable change. In the hold icon movement effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 127 (A), the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed during the time saving. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R during the variable display are moved in the left direction (along the left-right direction), and the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three hold icons 9A in FIG. 1 and the three hold icons 9B in FIG. 2 are displayed side by side along the left-right direction of the display screen 7a in the first area FA of the display screen 7a. Is done. In other words, the three reserved icons 9A in the special figure 1 and the three reserved icons 9B in the special figure 2 are arranged side by side in the direction along the direction of variation of the decorative design. The three hold icons 9A are the hold images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a in order from the right to the left. Similarly, the three hold icons 9B are the hold images 9B corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b in order from left to right. The hold icon 9B in FIG. 2 is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the hold icon 9A in FIG. The special figure 2 hold is digested in preference to the special figure 1 hold (prior digestion). Therefore, the three hold icons 9A in FIG. 1 and the hold icon 9B in FIG.

  The first area FA of the display screen 7a is a reserved image display area where the hold icons 9A and 9B can be displayed. Here, the first area FA is an area having a predetermined width in the vertical direction from the lower end of the display screen 7a. The first area FA may be configured such that the area can be identified by an image (area image) indicating the area indicated by a specific color, or may be in a form that cannot be distinguished from other areas. Here, the first area FA cannot be distinguished from other areas. Even in this case, the first area FA can be appropriately set as an area including the hold icons 9A and 9B and an area including the periphery thereof. In FIG. 127A, among the three hold icons 9B in FIG. 2, the second hold icon 9B from the right (the hold image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) is prefetched. The hold has changed. The reserved digest image 9C is not displayed.

  FIG. 127 (B) shows a state where one hold icon 9B of FIG. 2 is added. Here, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9B is newly added to the left of the three hold icons 9B arranged side by side. The newly added hold icon 9B is a hold image 9B corresponding to the fourth storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b. As shown in FIG. 127 (C), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped, one of the four held icons 9B arranged side by side is displayed first. The rightmost hold icon 9B (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) moves upward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digested image 9C is not displayed. Of the four holding icons 9B arranged side by side, the remaining holding icons 9B displayed after the second (holding images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure holding storage area 85b) are on the right. Shift shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (D), the next variable display is executed by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R of the start of variation may be in the decorative symbol variation effect D (FIG. 51). The first hold icon 9B displayed first among the three hold icons 9B in the special figure 2 by the shift movement described above (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b). However, the hold is changed by prefetching.

  As shown in FIG. 127 (E), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, among the three reserved icons 9B arranged side by side in FIG. 127 (D). The initially displayed hold icon 9B (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) moves upward. At this time, since the moved hold icon 9B has been changed by prefetching, the display does not disappear even after moving upward, and a reserved digest image 9C (the hold icon 9C) is obtained. The hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9B behind the hold icon 9C. In FIG. 127 (D), among the three holding icons 9B arranged side by side, the remaining holding icons 9B displayed after the second (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the second special figure holding storage area 85b). The reserved image 9B) shifts in the right direction. Then, the reserved digest image 9C (the reserved icon 9C) overlaps a part of the first held icon 9B (the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b). Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (F), the next variable display is executed by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R. At this time, a special reach effect or the like may be executed.

  When the shift of the hold icon 9B is repeated and the last hold icon 9B is digested as shown in FIGS. 127 (G) and (H), as shown in FIG. 127 (I), as shown in FIG. On-hold digestion of the on-hold icon 9A is started. Here, when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, among the three reserved icons 9A arranged side by side, the lowest reserved icon 9A ( The reserved image 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure storage area 85a moves upward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digested image 9C is not displayed. Of the three holding icons 9A arranged side by side, the remaining holding icons 9A displayed after the second (holding images 9A corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure holding storage area 85a) are Shift shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (J), the next variable display is executed by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of an effect of a hold icon movement effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, a first effect (normal time) in which a plurality of hold icons 9A are displayed side by side along the vertical direction. And in the second area SA whose position in the left-right direction is different from that of the first area FA, a second effect (at the time of probability change) in which a plurality of hold icons 9B are displayed side by side along the vertical direction is executed. Can do. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124 (C), in the first presentation (normal time), the first displayed hold icon 9A among the plurality of hold icons 9A is in the left-right direction. The remaining hold icons 9A that are moved along (to the right) and displayed after the second are shifted in the vertical direction (down). According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124 (H), in the second presentation (at the time of probability change), among the plurality of hold icons 9B, the hold icon 9B displayed first is in the left-right direction. 124 (C), (E), (H) and (H) in FIG. 124 (C), (E), (H), and the remaining hold icons 9B displayed after the second are shifted in the vertical direction (downward). As shown in J), the hold icons 9A and 9B moved in the left-right direction in the first production (normal time) and the second production (probability change) are either disappeared or not disappeared from the display screen 7a. There is. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, a plurality of hold icons 9A corresponding to the special figure 1 and a plurality of hold icons 9B corresponding to the special figure 2 are provided. Are displayed side by side along the vertical direction, and a plurality of hold icons 9B corresponding to the special figure 2 are overlapped and displayed on a part of the plurality of hold icons 9A corresponding to the special figure 1 Can be performed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, in the third effect, among the plurality of holding icons 9B corresponding to the special figure 2, the holding icon 9B that is displayed first is along the left-right direction. (The right direction) and the remaining hold icons displayed after the second shift in the vertical direction (downward). According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124 and FIG. 126, the first effect (normal time), the second effect (probability change time), and the third effect (time reduction) are: Each game state is different. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a holding | maintenance icon movement effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
Of the above-described hold icon movement effect A, FIGS. 124 (A) to 124 (E) are executed when the gaming state is the normal state, and FIGS. 124 (F) to 124 (J) are the gaming state. It is assumed that it is executed when the probability change state. However, FIGS. 124 (A) to 124 (E) and FIGS. 124 (F) to 124 (J) may be executed in the same gaming state. For example, FIGS. 124 (A) to 124 (E) and FIGS. 124 (F) to 124 (J) may be executed in different presentation modes in the same gaming state (for example, the normal state). The same applies to the hold icon movement effect B.
[Modification 2]
126 (A) to 126 (J) of the hold icon movement effect C described above are executed when the gaming state is a short-time state with an uncertain change. However, FIG. 126 (A) to FIG. 126 (J) of the hold icon movement effect C may be executed when the gaming state is in a state other than the short time state in which the game state is not certain. The same applies to the hold icon movement effect D.
[Modification 3]
All the effects shown in the hold icon movement effects A to D may be executed in the same gaming state. For example, the effects shown in the hold icon movement effects A to D may be executed in different effect modes in the same gaming state (for example, the normal state).

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
In the first area of the display means, a first effect in which a plurality of the hold icons are displayed side by side along a first direction;
In the second area where the position in the second direction intersecting the first direction is different from the first area, a plurality of the hold icons are displayed side by side along the first direction. A game machine characterized by being able to perform
◇ [Aspect D1-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect D1-1,
In the first effect, among the plurality of hold icons, the hold icon displayed first moves along the second direction, and the remaining hold icons displayed after the second are the first hold icons. A gaming machine that shifts in the direction of 1.
◇ [Aspect D1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D1-1 or aspect D1-2,
In the second effect, the first hold icon displayed among the plurality of hold icons moves along the second direction, and the remaining hold icons displayed after the second are the first hold icons. Shift along the direction of 1,
In the first effect and the second effect, the hold icon moved along the second direction may or may not disappear from the display means.
◇ [Aspect D1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-3,
In the first area of the display means, a plurality of the hold icons corresponding to the special figure 1 and a plurality of the hold icons corresponding to the special figure 2 are respectively displayed side by side along the first direction. In addition, a third effect in which a plurality of hold icons corresponding to the special figure 2 are displayed on a part of the plurality of hold icons corresponding to the special figure 1 can be executed.
◇ [Aspect D1-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect D1-4,
In the third effect, among the plurality of hold icons corresponding to the special figure 2, the hold icon displayed first moves along the second direction, and the remaining icons displayed after the second are displayed. The on-hold icon shifts along the first direction.
◇ [Aspect D1-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect D1-4 or aspect D1-5,
The gaming machine, wherein the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect have different game states.

  Hereinafter, the hold icon superimposing effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 131. The hold icon superimposing effect can be executed during the decorative effect variation effect or before and after the variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and reads the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 when an instruction to execute the hold icon superimposed effect is included. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Hold icon overlay effect A]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon superimposed effect A. The hold icon superimposing effect A is executed when the gaming state is the normal state. In the hold icon superimposed effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 128 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R during the variable display are moved downward (along the vertical direction), and the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three on-hold icons 9A in FIG. 1 are displayed side by side along the vertical direction of the display screen 7a at the left end of the display screen 7a. That is, the three reserved icons 9A of the special figure 1 are arranged side by side in the direction along the direction of variation of the decorative symbol. The three hold icons 9A are the hold images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a in order from the bottom to the top. In FIG. 128 (A), the pending digest image 9C is not displayed.

  FIG. 128B shows a state in which one hold icon 9A has been added. Here, a hold icon 9A is newly added to the top of the three hold icons 9A arranged vertically. The newly added hold icon 9A is a hold image 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a. Here, the newly added stop icon 9A is changed in hold by prefetching. As shown in FIG. 128 (C), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four held icons 9A arranged vertically is displayed first. The lowest hold icon 9A in the normal state (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) moves rightward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digested image 9C is not displayed. Of the four holding icons 9A arranged vertically, the remaining holding icons 9A displayed after the second (holding images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure holding storage area 85a) are as follows: Shift shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (D), the next variable display is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the variation start may be in the decorative symbol variation effect A (FIG. 48). The reserved digested image 9C (the reserved icon 9C) corresponding to the change is not displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 128 (E), during the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, among the three reserved icons 9A arranged vertically, the reserved icon displayed first. 9A (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) displays the preview image PM before the hold change by prefetching is performed. In other words, the suggestion image PM suggesting that the hold icon 9A changes to the specific state before the change from the normal state to the specific state is displayed. This suggestion image PM covers a part of the adjacent holding icon 9 </ b> A behind. Thereafter, the first image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 128 (F) is executed. Specifically, the suggestion image PM disappears and the hold icon 9A in the specific state is displayed, and the first image CM is displayed adjacent to the hold icon 9A. The first image CM is a smoke-like image enclosing the hold icon 9A in a specific state, and includes a smile mark. The first image CM covers the adjacent hold icon 9A one behind and a part of the hold icon 9A behind it.

  As shown in FIG. 128 (G), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, among the three reserved icons 9A arranged vertically in FIG. 128 (F). The hold icon 9A displayed first (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) moves to the right. At this time, since the moved hold icon 9A has been changed by prefetching (becomes a specific state), the display does not disappear even after moving to the right, and as shown in FIG. The hold icon 9C). The hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind the hold icon 9C. Further, the first image CM displayed adjacent to the hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. In FIG. 128 (F), among the three holding icons 9A arranged vertically, the remaining holding icons 9A displayed after the second (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure holding storage area 85a). The reserved image 9A) shifts downward as shown in FIG. 128 (G). Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (H), a new reserved icon 9A (a reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a) is newly added to the reserved icon 9A. 9C (the hold icon 9C) is displayed in an overlapping manner. Further, the next variable display is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the variation start may be in the decorative symbol variation effect A (FIG. 48).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (I), during the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable display disappears, and the second image LM is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Is displayed. The second image LM is a smile mark here, and moves to the left after being displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 128J, the first image CM is overlapped and a part of the first image CM is covered.

[Hold icon overlay effect B]
FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon superimposed effect B. The hold icon superimposing effect B differs from the hold icon superimposing effect A in the direction in which the decorative pattern fluctuates and the hold icon is arranged. The hold icon superimposed effect B is executed when the gaming state is the normal state. In the hold icon superimposed effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 129 (A), the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R during the variable display are moved in the left direction (along the left-right direction), and the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three on-hold icons 9A in FIG. 1 are displayed side by side along the left-right direction of the display screen 7a at the lower end of the display screen 7a. That is, the three reserved icons 9A of the special figure 1 are arranged side by side in the direction along the direction of variation of the decorative symbol. The three hold icons 9A are the hold images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a in order from the right to the left. In FIG. 129 (A), the reserved digested image 9C is not displayed.

  FIG. 129 (B) shows a state in which one hold icon 9A has been added. Here, a hold icon 9A is newly added to the leftmost of the three hold icons 9A arranged side by side. The newly added hold icon 9A is a hold image 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a. Here, the newly added stop icon 9A is changed in hold by prefetching. As shown in FIG. 129 (C), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four held icons 9A arranged side by side is displayed first. The rightmost hold icon 9A in the normal state (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) moves upward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digested image 9C is not displayed. Among the four holding icons 9A arranged side by side, the remaining holding icons 9A displayed after the second (holding images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure holding storage area 85a) are on the right. Shift shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (D), the next variable display is executed by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R at the start of variation may be in the form of the decorative symbol variation effect D (FIG. 51). The reserved digested image 9C (the reserved icon 9C) corresponding to the change is not displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (E), during the variable display of the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R, among the three reserved icons 9A arranged side by side, the first held icon is displayed. 9A (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) displays the preview image PM before the hold change by prefetching is performed. In other words, the suggestion image PM suggesting that the hold icon 9A changes to the specific state before the change from the normal state to the specific state is displayed. This suggestion image PM covers a part of the adjacent holding icon 9 </ b> A behind. Thereafter, the first image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 129 (F) is executed. Specifically, the suggestion image PM disappears and the hold icon 9A in the specific state is displayed, and the first image CM is displayed adjacent to the hold icon 9A. The first image CM is a smoke-like image enclosing the hold icon 9A in a specific state, and includes a smile mark. The first image CM covers the adjacent hold icon 9A one behind and a part of the hold icon 9A behind it.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (G), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, among the three reserved icons 9A arranged side by side in FIG. 129 (F). The initially displayed hold icon 9A (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) moves upward. At this time, since the moved hold icon 9A has been changed by pre-reading (becomes a specific state), the display does not disappear even after moving upward, and as shown in FIG. The hold icon 9C). The hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind the hold icon 9C. Further, the first image CM displayed adjacent to the hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. In FIG. 129 (F), among the three hold icons 9A arranged side by side, the remaining hold icons 9A displayed after the second (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a). The reserved image 9A) shifts to the right as shown in FIG. 129 (G). Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (H), the reserved digest image is newly displayed on a part of the first reserved icon 9A (the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a). 9C (the hold icon 9C) is displayed in an overlapping manner. Further, the next variable display is executed by the lower decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the upper decorative pattern 8R. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R at the start of variation may be in the form of the decorative symbol variation effect D (FIG. 51).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 129 (I), during the variable display of the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R, the variable display disappears, and the second image LM is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Is displayed. The second image LM is a smile mark here, and moves to the left after being displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (J), it overlaps with the first image CM and covers a part of the first image CM.

[Hold icon overlay effect C]
FIG. 130 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon superimposed effect C. FIG. The hold icon superposition effect C differs from the hold icon superposition effect A in the display mode of the hold icon 9A and the display mode of the hold icon 9C. The hold icon superimposed effect C is executed when the gaming state is the normal state. In the hold icon superimposed effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 130 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R during the variable display are moved downward (along the vertical direction), and the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the reserved digested image 9C (the reserved icon 9C) is displayed at the left end of the display screen 7a, and the two reserved icons 9A in FIG. 1 are located above the reserved icon 9C along the vertical direction of the display screen 7a. Displayed side by side. That is, the hold icon 9C and the two hold icons 9A are arranged side by side in the direction along the direction of variation of the decorative symbol. The two hold icons 9A are the hold images 9A corresponding to the first and second storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a in order from the bottom to the top. Here, the lowest hold icon 9A displayed first (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) is in a specific state by prefetching (the hold changes). ing. The first hold icon 9A is displayed with the hold digested image 9C (the hold icon 9C) below the first hold icon 9A, and a part of the hold icon 9A is difficult to visually recognize. The second hold icon 9A (the hold image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) is displayed with the first hold icon 9A overlapped, and a part of the hold icon 9A becomes difficult to see. Yes.

  FIG. 130 (B) shows a state where one hold icon 9A is added. Here, a hold icon 9A is newly added to the top of the two hold icons 9A arranged vertically. The newly added hold icon 9A is a hold image 9A corresponding to the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a. As shown in FIG. 130 (C), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the reserved digested image 9C (the reserved icon 9C) disappears from the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (D), among the two holding icons 9A arranged vertically, the holding icon 9A in the lowermost specific state that is displayed first (the first special figure holding storage area 85a of the first holding icon 9A). The hold image 9A) corresponding to one storage area moves downward and becomes the hold icon 9C. Further, the remaining two hold icons 9A (hold images 9A corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure storage area 85a) are also shifted downward.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (E), the next variable display is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the variation start may be in the decorative symbol variation effect A (FIG. 48). While the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are being displayed in a variable manner, the reserved icon that is newly displayed first (displayed first) among the two reserved icons 9A arranged vertically. 9A (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) displays the preview image PM before the hold change by prefetching is performed. In other words, the suggestion image PM suggesting that a hold change occurs is displayed before the hold icon 9A changes from the normal state to the specific state advantageous to the player. The suggestion image PM covers a part of the adjacent one of the reserved icons 9A and a part of the adjacent one of the previous reserved icons 9C. Thereafter, the first image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 130 (F) is executed. Specifically, the suggestion image PM disappears, and the first hold icon 9A in a specific state and the first image CM are displayed adjacent to the first hold icon 9A. The first image CM is a smoke-like image enclosing the hold icon 9A in a specific state, and includes a smile mark. The first image CM covers a part of each of the adjacent one of the reserved icons 9A and the adjacent forward reserved icon 9C.

  As shown in FIG. 130 (G), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the hold icon 9C disappears and is displayed first (displayed first). The hold icon 9A (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) moves downward toward the display position of the hold icon 9C. The remaining hold icons 9A (second hold images 9A corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) displayed after the second shift also shift downward. Thus, as shown in FIG. 130 (H), the first (first displayed) hold icon 9A becomes a new hold digest image 9C (the hold icon 9C). The hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind the hold icon 9C. Further, the first image CM displayed adjacent to the hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. FIG. 130 (H) shows a mode in which the hold icon 9A is newly added while the next variable display is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R at the start of variation may be in the decorative symbol variation effect A (FIG. 48).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (I), during the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable display disappears, and the second image LM is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Is displayed. The second image LM is a smile mark here, and moves to the left after being displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (J), the first image CM is overlapped and a part of the first image CM is covered.

[Hold icon overlay effect D]
FIG. 131 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon superimposed effect D. The hold icon superimposing effect C is different from the hold icon superimposing effect A in the decorative pattern variation direction, the display mode of the hold icon, and the display mode of the hold icon 9C. The hold icon superimposed effect D is executed when the gaming state is the normal state. In the hold icon superimposed effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 131 (A), the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R during the variable display are moved in the left direction (along the left-right direction), and the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the hold digested image 9C (the hold icon 9C) is displayed at the lower end of the display screen 7a, and the two hold icons 9A in FIG. 1 follow the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold icon 9C. Displayed side by side. That is, the hold icon 9C and the two hold icons 9A are arranged side by side in the direction along the direction of variation of the decorative symbol. The two holding icons 9A are holding images 9A corresponding to the first and second storage areas of the first special figure holding storage area 85a in order from the right to the left. Here, the rightmost hold icon 9A displayed first (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) is in a specific state by prefetching (the hold changes). ing. The first hold icon 9A is displayed with the hold reservation digest image 9C on the right (the hold icon 9C) overlapped, and a part of the hold icon 9A is difficult to visually recognize. The second hold icon 9A (the hold image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) is displayed with the first hold icon 9A overlapped, and a part of the hold icon 9A becomes difficult to see. Yes.

  FIG. 131 (B) shows a state in which one hold icon 9A has been added. Here, a hold icon 9A is newly added to the left of the two hold icons 9A arranged side by side. The newly added hold icon 9A is a hold image 9A corresponding to the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a. When the hold icon 9A is newly added, the hold icon 9A immediately before (on the right side) the added hold icon 9A is moved to the left side once and does not overlap the previous hold icon. Also, the newly added hold icon 9A does not overlap with the previous (right) hold icon 9A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (C), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the reserved digested image 9C (the reserved icon 9C) moves upward. Then, it disappears from the display screen 7a. Of the three holding icons 9A arranged side by side, the rightmost holding icon 9A in the specific state that is displayed first (the holding image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure holding storage area 85a). Moves to the right and becomes the hold icon 9C. The remaining two hold icons 9A (hold images 9A corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure storage area 85a) are also shifted in the right direction. By this shift movement, as shown in FIG. 131 (D), the hold icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are again partially overlapped with the previous and next hold icons. Then, the next variable display is executed by the lower decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the upper decorative design 8R. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R at the start of variation may be in the form of the decorative symbol variation effect D (FIG. 51).

  As shown in FIG. 131 (E), during the variation display of the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R, the two newly held icons 9A arranged next to each other are newly displayed first. Further, the hold icon 9A (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) displays the notice image PM before the hold change by prefetching is performed (displayed first). . In other words, the suggestion image PM suggesting that a hold change occurs is displayed before the hold icon 9A changes from the normal state to the specific state advantageous to the player. The suggestion image PM covers a part of the adjacent one of the reserved icons 9A and a part of the adjacent one of the previous reserved icons 9C. Thereafter, the first image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 131 (F) is executed. Specifically, the suggestion image PM disappears, and the first hold icon 9A in a specific state and the first image CM are displayed adjacent to the first hold icon 9A. The first image CM is a smoke-like image enclosing the hold icon 9A in a specific state, and includes a smile mark. The first image CM covers a part of each of the adjacent one of the reserved icons 9A and the adjacent forward reserved icon 9C.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (G), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the hold icon 9C disappears, as shown in FIG. 131 (H). The first (first displayed) hold icon 9A (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) moves rightward toward the display position of the hold icon 9C. To do. The remaining hold icon 9A displayed second (the hold image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) is also shifted in the right direction. Thus, the first (first displayed) hold icon 9A becomes a new hold digest image 9C (the hold icon 9C). The hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind the hold icon 9C. Further, the first image CM displayed adjacent to the hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. In FIG. 131 (I), the second image LM is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a while the next variable display is executed by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R. The second image LM is a smile mark here, and moves to the left after being displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 131 (J), it overlaps with the first image CM and covers a part of the first image CM. At this time, the change display of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R disappears.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of an effect of a hold icon superimposition effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128 (H), a first effect in which the reserved digest image 9C (the reserved icon 9C) is displayed so as to overlap a part of the reserved icon 9A, and FIG. As shown in D), the hold icon is displayed 9A, and the second effect in which the hold digested image 9C (the hold icon 9C) is not displayed can be executed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, the hold icon 9A may be in a specific state that has changed to a specific mode or in a normal state that has not changed to a specific mode. As shown in FIG. 128 (F), in the first effect, a plurality of hold icons 9A are displayed, and among the plurality of hold icons 9A, the hold icon 9A displayed first is in a specific state, As shown in FIG. 128 (G), when the hold icon 9A in a specific state moves to a predetermined position and becomes a hold digest image 9C (the hold icon 9C), as shown in FIG. 128 (H), a plurality of hold icons Among the icons 9C, the hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A displayed second. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128 (B), in the second effect, a plurality of hold icons 9A are displayed, and the hold icon 9A displayed first among the plurality of hold icons 9A. Is in the normal state, and as shown in FIG. 128 (C), after the hold icon 9A in the normal state moves toward the predetermined position, as shown in FIG. 128 (D), the display screen 7a Disappear. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, when the first hold icon 9A displayed among the plurality of hold icons 9A is in the specific state in the first effect, the hold icon 9A in the specific state is displayed. A first image CM is displayed adjacent to the first image CM, and a part of the first image CM covers a part of the second hold icon 9A displayed among the plurality of hold icons 9A. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128 (F), in the first effect, a plurality of hold icons 9A are displayed side by side along the vertical direction, as shown in FIG. 128 (G). Of the plurality of hold icons 9A, the hold icon 9A that is displayed first moves to the right to become the hold icon 9C, and as shown in FIG. The hold icon 9A displayed in the second position and the hold icon 9C are arranged along the second direction and partly overlapped. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128 (E), when the hold icon 9A changes from the normal state to the specific state, it suggests that it changes to the specific state before changing to the specific state. The suggestion image PM is displayed, and the suggestion image PM covers a part of the other hold icon 9A. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the hold icon superimposition effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
The hold icon superimposing effects A to D are performed when the game state is normal. However, the hold icon superimposing effects A to D described above may be performed in a gaming state other than the normal time. For example, the hold icon superimposing effects A to D described above may be performed at the time of probability change or at the time of non-change probability.
[Modification 2]
In the hold icon superimposing effects A to D described above, the suggestion image PM is displayed before the hold icon 9A changes from the normal state to the specific state. However, the suggestion image PM may be displayed before the hold icon 9A changes from the specific state to a specific state that is more advantageous to the player.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D2-1]
A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of images is the hold icon corresponding to the hold,
A first effect in which the hold icon is displayed overlapping a part of the hold icon;
The gaming machine, wherein the hold icon is displayed and the second effect in which the hold icon is not displayed can be executed.
◇ [Aspect D2-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect D2-1,
The hold icon may be in a specific state that has changed to a specific mode or in a normal state that has not changed to a specific mode,
In the first effect, a plurality of the hold icons are displayed, and among the plurality of hold icons, the hold icon displayed first is in the specific state, and the hold icon in the specific state is in a predetermined position. When the icon is moved to and becomes the hold icon, the hold icon is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon displayed secondly among the plurality of hold icons.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect D2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D2-2,
In the second effect, a plurality of the hold icons are displayed, and among the plurality of hold icons, a hold icon that is displayed first is in the normal state, and the hold icon in the normal state is the predetermined icon. After moving toward the position, the gaming machine disappears from the display means.
◇ [Aspect D2-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect D2-2 or aspect D2-3,
In the first effect, when a first hold icon displayed among the plurality of hold icons is in the specific state, a specific image is displayed adjacent to the hold icon in the specific state, and the specific image is displayed. A part of the game machine covers a part of the second hold icon displayed among the plurality of hold icons.
◇ [Aspect D2-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-2 to D2-4,
In the first effect, a plurality of the hold icons are displayed side by side along a first direction, and among the plurality of hold icons, the hold icon displayed first moves in a second direction and The hold icon, which is a hold icon and is displayed secondly among the plurality of hold icons, and the hold icon are arranged along the second direction and are displayed partially overlapping. A featured gaming machine.
◇ [Aspect D2-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-2 to D2-5,
When the hold icon changes from the normal state to the specific state, a suggestion image suggesting that the hold icon changes to the specific state is displayed before the change to the specific state. A gaming machine characterized by covering a part of an icon.

  Hereinafter, the hold special display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 to 135. This reserved special display effect can be executed during a decorative symbol variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and reads the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 when an instruction to execute the hold special display effect is included. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Hold special display effect]
FIG. 132 is a diagram for explaining the hold display pattern 1 and the hold display pattern 2 in the hold special display effect.
FIG. 133 is a diagram for explaining the hold display pattern 3 and the hold display pattern 4 in the hold special display effect.
FIG. 134 is a diagram for explaining the hold display pattern 5 and the hold display pattern 6 in the hold special display effect.
FIG. 135 is a diagram for explaining the hold display pattern 7 and the hold display pattern 8 in the hold special display effect.
This hold special display effect can be executed in a plurality of hold display patterns. Hereinafter, the hold display patterns 1 to 8 will be described. The on-hold display patterns 1 to 8 are effects that are performed with the same variation from when the special symbol (decorative symbol) starts to vary until it is stopped and displayed.

[Hold display pattern 1]
In the hold display pattern 1, first, as shown in FIG. 132 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started. In the change start effect, the hold icon 9A (circular shape, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular shape, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged in parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (B), reach effect 1 is executed. In this reach production 1, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is the same as that at the time of starting the change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (C), reach effect 2 is executed. In this reach production 2, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the teammate character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is the same as that at the start of the change effect and at the time of the reach effect 1. In the reach production 2, the teammate character CRA is transformed from the reach production 1 o'clock.
The hold display pattern 1 does not change the hold display mode.

[Hold display pattern 2]
In the hold display pattern 2, first, as shown in FIG. 132 (D), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started. In the change start effect, the hold icon 9A (circular shape, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular shape, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged in parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (E), reach effect 1 is executed. In this reach production 1, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is the same as that at the time of starting the change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (F), reach effect 2 is executed. In this reach production 2, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the teammate character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. At least a part of the mode (position, shape, color, or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is different from the reach effect 1 o'clock. Specifically, the hold icon 9 </ b> A and the hold icon 9 </ b> C have different positions as compared to the reach effect 1. Specifically, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B move from the lower left position of the display screen 7a to the upper right position and are arranged obliquely with respect to the lower side of the display screen 7a. In the hold icon 9 </ b> A and the hold icon 9 </ b> C, the shape, color, or pattern is the same as that in the reach effect 1. In the reach production 2, the teammate character CRA is transformed from the reach production 1 o'clock.
This hold display pattern 2 is a mode in which the position changes among the modes of hold display.

[Hold display pattern 3]
In the hold display pattern 3, first, as shown in FIG. 133 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started. In the change start effect, the hold icon 9A (circular shape, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular shape, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged in parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (B), reach effect 1 is executed. In this reach production 1, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is the same as that at the time of starting the change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (C), reach effect 2 is executed. In this reach production 2, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the teammate character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. At least a part of the mode (position, shape, color, or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is different from the reach effect 1 o'clock. Specifically, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed in two places. One place (also referred to as a first place) where the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed is the same place (position) as that of the reach effect 1 o'clock. Another place (also referred to as a second place) where the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed is a different place (position) as compared to the reach effect 1. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B that are displayed at different locations as compared with the reach effect 1 are displayed from the lower left position of the display screen 7a to the upper right position, and oblique to the lower side of the display screen 7a. Placed in. In the hold icon 9 </ b> A and the hold icon 9 </ b> C, the shape, color, or pattern is the same as that in the reach effect 1. In the reach production 3, the teammate character CRA is transformed from the reach production 1 o'clock.
In the hold display pattern 3, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are simultaneously arranged in two places, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed in one place are positioned in the hold display mode. It is a mode that changes.

[Hold display pattern 4]
In the hold display pattern 4, first, as shown in FIG. In this variation start effect, variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started. In the change start effect, the hold icon 9A (circular shape, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular shape, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged in parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (E), reach effect 1 is executed. In this reach production 1, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is the same as that at the time of starting the change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (F), reach effect 2 is executed. In this reach production 2, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the teammate character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. At least a part of the mode (position, shape, color, or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is different from the reach effect 1 o'clock. Specifically, the hold icon 9 </ b> A and the hold icon 9 </ b> C are different in color and pattern as compared with the reach effect 1 and are changed to a red cross hatch pattern. In the reach production 4, the teammate character CRA is transformed from the reach production 1 o'clock.
The hold display pattern 4 is a mode in which the color and the pattern change among the modes of the hold display.

[Hold display pattern 5]
In the hold display pattern 5, first, as shown in FIG. 134 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started. In the change start effect, the hold icon 9A (circular shape, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular shape, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged in parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (B), reach effect 1 is executed. In this reach production 1, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is the same as that at the time of starting the change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (C), reach effect 2 is executed. In this reach production 2, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the teammate character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. At least a part of the mode (position, shape, color, or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is different from the reach effect 1 o'clock. Specifically, the hold icon 9 </ b> A and the hold icon 9 </ b> C have different shapes as compared with the reach effect 1 and have changed to a star shape. In this reach production 5, the teammate character CRA is transformed from the reach production 1 o'clock.
The hold display pattern 5 is a form in which the shape changes among the forms of the hold display.

[Hold display pattern 6]
In the hold display pattern 6, first, as shown in FIG. 134 (D), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started. In the change start effect, the hold icon 9A (circular shape, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular shape, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged in parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (E), reach effect 1 is executed. In this reach production 1, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is the same as that at the time of starting the change.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (F), reach effect 2 is executed. In this reach production 2, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the teammate character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. At least a part of the mode (position, shape, color, or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is different from the reach effect 1 o'clock. Specifically, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed in two places (positions). One place (also referred to as a first place) where the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed is the same place (position) as that of the reach effect 1 o'clock. Another place (also referred to as a second place) where the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed is a different place (position) as compared to the reach effect 1. The hold icon 9 </ b> A and the hold icon 9 </ b> C displayed at the first place are different in color and pattern as compared with the reach effect 1, and are changed to a red cross hatch pattern. On the other hand, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B displayed at the second location are displayed from the lower left position to the upper right position of the display screen 7a, and are arranged obliquely with respect to the lower side of the display screen 7a and are reachable. The shape is different from that at the time of production 1 and changes to a star shape. In this reach production 6, the teammate character CRA is transformed from the reach production 1 o'clock.

  In the hold display pattern 6, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are simultaneously arranged in two places, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed in the first place are different from each other in the color of the hold display mode. The pattern changes and the hold icon 9 </ b> A and the hold icon 9 </ b> C displayed at the second place are changed in position and shape in the hold display mode.

[Hold display pattern 7]
In the hold display pattern 7, first, as shown in FIG. 135 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started. In the change start effect, the hold icon 9A (circular shape, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular shape, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged in parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (B), reach effect 1 is executed. In this reach production 1, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is the same as that at the time of starting the change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (C), reach effect 2 is executed. In this reach production 2, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the teammate character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is different from that of the reach effect 1 o'clock. Specifically, the hold icon 9 </ b> A and the hold icon 9 </ b> C are different in position, shape, color, and pattern as compared with the reach effect 1. . Specifically, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B move from the lower left position of the display screen 7a to the upper right position and are arranged obliquely with respect to the lower side of the display screen 7a. Further, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B are different in shape and change into a star shape as compared with the reach effect 1, and the color and the pattern are different, and the red and the cross hatch pattern are changed. . In this reach production 7, the teammate character CRA is transformed from the reach production 1 o'clock.
This hold display pattern 7 is a form in which the position, shape, color, and pattern change among the forms of hold display.

[Hold display pattern 8]
In the hold display pattern 8, first, as shown in FIG. 135 (D), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started. In the change start effect, the hold icon 9A (circular shape, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular shape, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged in parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (E), reach effect 1 is executed. In this reach production 1, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is the same as that at the time of starting the change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (F), reach effect 2 is executed. In this reach production 2, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the teammate character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. At least a part of the mode (position, shape, color, or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is different from the reach effect 1 o'clock. Specifically, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed in two places (positions). One place (also referred to as a first place) where the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed is the same place (position) as that of the reach effect 1 o'clock. Another place (also referred to as a second place) where the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed is a different place (position) as compared to the reach effect 1. The hold icon 9 </ b> A and the hold icon 9 </ b> C displayed at the first place are displayed in the same manner as in the reach effect 1. On the other hand, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B displayed at the second location are displayed from the lower left position to the upper right position of the display screen 7a, and are arranged obliquely with respect to the lower side of the display screen 7a and are reachable. The shape is different from that at the time of production 1 and changes to a star shape. In this reach production 8, the teammate character CRA is transformed from the reach production 1 o'clock.
In the hold display pattern 8, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are simultaneously arranged in two places, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed in the first place have no change in the hold display mode. The hold icon 9 </ b> A and the hold icon 9 </ b> C displayed at the second place are modes in which the position and shape change in the hold display mode.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of an effect of a hold special display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 2 to 8, as the display of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C, the hold display at the reach effect 1 (hereinafter, the reach effect 1 hour) (Also referred to as hold display) and hold display at the time of reach effect 2 (hereinafter also referred to as reach effect 2 time hold display). According to this configuration, since the hold display mode is different between the reach effect 1 and the reach effect 2, the player's interest in the hold display can be called in, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 3, 6, and 8, the hold icon 9 </ b> A and the hold icon 9 </ b> C displayed in the first place in the reach effect 2 and The displayed hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the same time. According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the player from overlooking the hold display, to attract the player's interest in the hold display, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 3, 6, 7, and 8, in the reach effect 1, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed in the first place, and reach In effect 2, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the second place. According to this configuration, since the position of the hold display is different between the reach effect 1 and the reach effect 2, the player's interest in the hold display can be attracted, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 5 to 8, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed in a circular shape in the reach effect 1, and in the reach effect 2, the hold icon The icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed in a star shape. According to this configuration, the reach display shape is different between the reach effect 1 and the reach effect 2, so that the player's interest in the hold display can be drawn in, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a hold special display effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 2 to 8, a chance-up effect using the hold icon 9A and / or the hold icon 9C of the reach effect 2 may be performed. According to this configuration, since the hold display and the chance-up effect can be used together, an interesting effect can be provided without using the display screen 7a wastefully.
For example, in the hold display pattern 2, a prefetch effect as a chance-up effect may be performed, and the prefetch result may be displayed by changing the shape, color, and pattern of the hold display. In this case, for example, when the result of prefetching (preliminary determination) is a big hit, the color of the hold icon 9A to be prefetched is changed from white to red.
In the hold display pattern 2, a prefetch effect as a chance-up effect may be performed, and a predetermined display representing the prefetch result and the hold display may be displayed in association with each other. In this case, for example, when the result of prefetching (preliminary determination) is a big hit, a timer display or a predetermined chance-up character (such as a hard character) may be associated with the hold icon 9A to be prefetched.

[Modification 2]
In the on-hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the on-hold display patterns 2 to 8, the number-of-effects suggestion effect representing the number of predetermined effects using the hold icon 9A and / or the hold icon 9C of the reach effect 2 You may make it perform. According to this configuration, since the hold display and the production number suggesting production can be used together, an interesting production can be provided without using the display screen 7a wastefully.
For example, in the reach effect 2 of the hold display pattern 2, each time a pseudo-continuous effect is performed, one color of the hold icon 9A in the second place may be changed to represent the number of pseudo-continuous effects. In this case, when the pseudo continuous effect is performed three times, three icons (for example, red) of a color different from white and one white icon are displayed in the hold icon 9A. In this case, when the change in which the hold display pattern 2 is performed is finished, the hold display may return to the original white color.
Note that the modification 1 and the modification 2 may be combined to perform a chance-up effect and an effect number suggestion effect using the hold display.

[Modification 3]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 1 to 8, in the reach effect 1 and / or the reach effect 2, in addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon A hold display different from 9C may be additionally provided. For example, in the reach effect 1 and / or the reach effect 2, in addition to the hold icon 9A, a hold display represented by a number may be additionally provided. The added hold display represents the same number of holds as the hold icon 9A. In this case, if the number of the hold icons 9A is four (the number of holds is 4), the added hold display is represented as “4”.
For example, in reach effect 1 and / or reach effect 2, in addition to the hold icon 9A, a hold display represented by a symbol may be additionally provided. The added hold display represents the same number of holds as the hold icon 9A. In this case, if the number of the hold icons 9A is four (the hold number is 4), the added hold display is represented by a symbol representing “4”.

[Modification 3]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 2 to 8, the hold display mode changes in the reach effect 2, but the position of the hold icon, the shape of the hold icon, the color of the hold icon, Change at least one of the patterns of the hold icon. Further, the stop display mode may be changed by combining the position of the hold icon, the shape of the hold icon, the color of the hold icon, and the pattern of the hold icon.

[Modification 4]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 2, 3, 6 to 8, the hold display moves to the upper left in the reach effect 2, but moves to the lower left, the upper right, and the middle. May be. That is, when the hold display moves from the state of reach effect 1 to the state of reach effect 2, it may be moved to a different position.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect D3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of performing a first hold display form effect that displays the display form of the hold display in the first form,
The second display effect is an effect of performing a second hold display form effect for displaying the display form of the hold display in a second form different from the first form,
A first hold display pattern may be selected as a display pattern of a plurality of display patterns for displaying the hold display,
A second hold display pattern may be selected as a display pattern of a plurality of display patterns for displaying the hold display,
In the same variation, when performing the hold display, one of the plurality of display patterns is selected and displayed,
The first hold display pattern is a pattern in which a first display effect is performed,
The second hold display pattern is a pattern in which the first display effect and the second display effect are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D3-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect D3-1,
In the second hold display pattern, when the second display effect is performed, the first display effect may be performed at the same time.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect 3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D3-1 or aspect D3-2,
The hold display of the first form is located at the first position,
The hold display of the second form is located at a second position different from the first position.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D3-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D3-1 to D3-3,
The hold display of the first form has a first shape,
The hold display of the second form is a second shape different in shape from the first shape.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D3-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D3-1 to D3-4,
In the second display effect, a chance-up effect using the hold display in the second form is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D3-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D3-1 to D3-5,
In the second display effect, an effect number suggestion effect indicating the number of predetermined effects is performed using the hold display in the second form.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The operation means image display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139. This operation means image display effect can be executed during a decorative symbol variation effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation means image display effect, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of reading and displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Operation means image display effect A]
FIG. 136 is a diagram for explaining the operation means image display effect A. FIG. The operating means image display effect A is executed in accordance with, for example, a battle effect at the time of probability change. In the operation means image display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 136 (A), four button images BN1 to BN4, a meter image PL, and a sword image VI are displayed. In FIG. 136 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed in a manner that is difficult to visually recognize. The aspect that is difficult to visually recognize includes a case where it is not displayed, a case where it is displayed small, a case where it is thinly displayed, and the like. Each of the four button images BN1 to BN4 represents the appearance of the effect button 63, and is displayed at each vertex position of the rectangular shape on the display screen 7a. The meter image PL has a configuration in which the remaining number of points can be known by changing the area of a specific color portion on the inside. Here, “1300” is described at the lower left of the meter image PL, and indicates that when the number of points reaches 1300, the specific color portion on the inside disappears. The sword image VI represents the appearance of the sword member 64, and is displayed translucently here. As shown in FIG. 136 (B), these four button images BN1 to BN4 change to other colors at regular intervals, and perform an effect imitating a mode in which the effect button 63 emits light.

  When the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 136 (C), first, the upper right button image BN4 disappears and the point number PN of “100” is displayed. When the push-down operation of the effect button 63 is further repeated, as shown in FIG. 136 (D), the point number PN “150” is further superimposed on the previously displayed display of the point number PN “100”. Is done. Further, the sword image VI changes in response to the pressing operation of the effect button 63 being repeated. Here, the color of the sword image VI changes to another color so as to represent a mode in which light is emitted.

  Further, when the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 136 (E), the lower right button image BN3 disappears and the point number PN of “200” is displayed. . When the push-down operation of the effect button 63 is further repeated, as shown in FIG. 136 (E), the point number PN “250” is further overlapped with the previously displayed point number PN “200”. Is done. Further, when the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 136 (F), the lower left button image BN2 disappears and the point number PN “300” is displayed. When the push-down operation of the effect button 63 is further repeated, as shown in FIG. 136 (F), the point number PN “330” is superimposed on the previously displayed display of the point number PN “300”. Is done.

  Further, when the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, the upper left button image BN1 disappears and the point number PN is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (G), a sword image ASI, a timer bar TBI, and an operation promotion image OPI are displayed. The sword image ASI represents the appearance of the sword member 64. Here, the translucent sword image VI becomes dark and becomes the sword image ASI. The sword image ASI includes a button image PSB representing the appearance of the sword button 65. The timer bar TBI indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the sword member 64. The timer bar TBI is displayed in front of the sword image ASI so as to overlap the sword image ASI. The operation promotion image OPI is an image that prompts the player to operate the sword member 64, and is displayed as “Push in!” Here.

  When the player pushes in the sword member 64, the total point increase display effect shown in FIG. 136 (H) is executed. Specifically, before the total value of the number of points PN displayed in FIGS. 136 (C) to 136 (F) is displayed, the increment display MTP in which the numerical value is incremented from 0 of the digital value is displayed. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (I), after the increment display MTP, when the display value reaches the total value of the number of points PN, the increment is stopped and a final display TPD indicating the total point “1330” is displayed. Then, an effect that the remaining amount of the meter image PL is reduced by the amount corresponding to the total point is executed. When the meter image PL reaches 1300 points, the remaining amount disappears. Therefore, here, after the final display TPD of the total point “1330” is displayed, the meter image PL has an area of a specific color portion on the inside reduced, and the remaining A production that runs out of quantity is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (J), an achievement image ACV indicating that the remaining amount of the meter image PL has become zero is displayed. Here, the achievement image ACV is displayed with the characters “CLEAR!”.

[Operation means image display effect B]
FIG. 137 is a diagram for explaining the operation means image display effect B. FIG. The operation means image display effect B differs from the operation means image display effect A in the number of button images BN displayed on the display screen 7a. The operation means image display effect B is executed in accordance with, for example, a battle effect at the time of probability change. In the operation means image display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 137 (A), three button images BN1 to BN3 and a meter image PL are displayed. In FIG. 137 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed in a manner that is difficult to visually recognize. The aspect that is difficult to visually recognize includes a case where it is not displayed, a case where it is displayed small, a case where it is thinly displayed, and the like. Each of the three button images BN1 to BN3 represents the appearance of the effect button 63, and is displayed at each triangular position on the display screen 7a. The meter image PL has a configuration in which the remaining number of points can be known by changing the area of a specific color portion on the inside. As shown in FIG. 137 (B), the three button images BN1 to BN3 change to other colors at a constant interval, and perform an effect imitating the aspect in which the effect button 63 emits light.

  When the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, first, as shown in FIG. 137 (C), the center upper button image BN3 disappears and the point number PN of “100” is displayed. When the push-down operation of the effect button 63 is further repeated, as shown in FIG. 137 (D), the point number PN “150” is additionally displayed on the previously displayed display of the point number PN “100”. Is done.

  Furthermore, when the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 137 (E), the lower right button image BN2 disappears and the point number PN “200” is displayed. . When the push operation of the effect button 63 is further repeated, the point number PN of “250” is further displayed on the display of the point number PN of “200” displayed previously. Further, when the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 137 (F), the lower left button image BN1 disappears and the point number PN of “300” is displayed. When the push operation of the effect button 63 is further repeated, the point number PN “330” is further displayed on the previously displayed display of the point number PN “300”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (G), a sword image ASI, a timer bar TBI, and an operation promotion image OPI are displayed. The sword image ASI represents the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image ASI includes a button image PSB representing the appearance of the sword button 65. The timer bar TBI indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the sword member 64. The timer bar TBI is displayed in front of the sword image ASI so as to overlap the sword image ASI. The operation promotion image OPI is an image that prompts the player to operate the sword member 64, and is displayed as “Push in!” Here.

  When the player pushes in the sword member 64, the total point increase display effect shown in FIG. 137 (H) is executed. Specifically, before the total value of the number of points PN displayed in FIGS. 137 (C) to 137 (F) is displayed, the increment display MTP in which the numerical value is incremented from 0 of the digital value is displayed. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (I), after the increment display MTP, when the display value reaches the total value of the number of points PN, the increment is stopped and a final display TPD indicating the total point “1330” is displayed. Then, an effect that the remaining amount of the meter image PL is reduced by the amount corresponding to the total point is executed. When the meter image PL reaches 1300 points, the remaining amount disappears. Therefore, here, after the final display TPD of the total point “1330” is displayed, the meter image PL has an area of a specific color portion on the inside reduced, and the remaining A production that runs out of quantity is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (J), an achievement image ACV indicating that the remaining amount of the meter image PL has become zero is displayed. Here, the achievement image ACV is displayed with the characters “CLEAR!”.

[Operation means image display effect C]
FIG. 138 is a diagram for explaining the operation means image display effect C. FIG. The operation means image display effect C is different from the operation means image display effect A in that an enlarged button image BBN is displayed instead of the sword image ASI in FIG. 138 (G). The operating means image display effect C is executed in accordance with, for example, a battle effect at the time of probability change. In the operation means image display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 138 (A), four button images BN1 to BN4 and a meter image PL are displayed. In FIG. 138 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed in a manner that is difficult to visually recognize. The aspect that is difficult to visually recognize includes a case where it is not displayed, a case where it is displayed small, a case where it is thinly displayed, and the like. Each of the four button images BN1 to BN4 represents the appearance of the effect button 63, and is displayed at each vertex position of the rectangular shape on the display screen 7a. The meter image PL has a configuration in which the remaining number of points can be known by changing the area of a specific color portion on the inside. Here, “1300” is described at the lower left of the meter image PL, and indicates that when the number of points reaches 1300, the specific color portion on the inside disappears. As shown in FIG. 138 (B), the four button images BN1 to BN4 change to other colors at a constant interval, and perform an effect imitating a mode in which the effect button 63 emits light.

  When the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 138 (C), first, the upper right button image BN4 disappears and the point number PN of “100” is displayed. When the push operation of the effect button 63 is further repeated, as shown in FIG. 138 (D), the point number PN of “150” is further displayed on the display of the point number PN of “100” previously displayed. Is done.

  Further, when the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 138 (E), next, the lower right button image BN3 disappears and the point number PN of “200” is displayed. . When the push-down operation of the effect button 63 is further repeated, as shown in FIG. 138 (E), the point number PN “250” is superimposed on the previously displayed display of the point number PN “200”. Is done. Further, when the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 138 (F), the lower left button image BN2 disappears and the point number PN of “300” is displayed. When the push-down operation of the effect button 63 is further repeated, as shown in FIG. 138 (F), the point number PN “330” is further overlapped with the previously displayed display of the point number PN “300”. Is done.

  Further, when the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, the upper left button image BN1 disappears and the point number PN is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 138 (G), an enlarged button image BBN, a timer bar TBI, and an operation promotion image OPI are displayed. The enlarged button image BBN represents the appearance of the effect button 63 and is larger than the button image BN. The enlarged button image BBN and the button image BN represent the same appearance of the effect button 63, but the shape may be the same or different. In the timer bar TBI, the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63 is shown. The timer bar TBI is displayed in front of the enlarged button image BBN so as to overlap the enlarged button image BBN. The operation promotion image OPI is an image that prompts the player to operate the effect button 63, and is displayed as “Press !!!!”.

  When the player pushes in the sword member 64, the total point increase display effect shown in FIG. 138 (H) is executed. Specifically, before the total value of the number of points PN displayed in FIGS. 138 (C) to 138 (F) is displayed, the increment display MTP in which the numerical value is incremented from the digital value 0 is displayed. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 138 (I), after the increment display MTP, when the display value reaches the total value of the number of points PN, the increment is stopped and a final display TPD indicating the total point “1330” is displayed. Then, an effect that the remaining amount of the meter image PL is reduced by the amount corresponding to the total point is executed. When the meter image PL reaches 1300 points, the remaining amount disappears. Therefore, here, after the final display TPD of the total point “1330” is displayed, the meter image PL has an area of a specific color portion on the inside reduced, and the remaining A production that runs out of quantity is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 138 (J), an achievement image ACV indicating that the remaining amount of the meter image PL has become zero is displayed. Here, the achievement image ACV is displayed with the characters “CLEAR!”.

[Operation means image display effect D]
FIG. 139 is a diagram for explaining the operation means image display effect D. The operation means image display effect D differs from the operation means image display effect A in the order of increase / decrease in the number of button images BN displayed on the display screen 7a. The operating means image display effect D is executed in accordance with, for example, a battle effect at the time of probability change. In the operation means image display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 139 (A), one button image BN1 and a meter image PL are displayed. In FIG. 139 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed in a manner that is difficult to visually recognize. The aspect that is difficult to visually recognize includes a case where it is not displayed, a case where it is displayed small, a case where it is thinly displayed, and the like. The button image BN1 represents the appearance of the effect button 63 and is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a. The meter image PL has a configuration in which the remaining number of points can be known by changing the area of a specific color portion on the inside. Here, “1300” is described at the lower left of the meter image PL, and indicates that when the number of points reaches 1300, the specific color portion on the inside disappears. As shown in FIG. 139 (B), the button image BN1 changes to another color at a constant interval, and performs an effect imitating a mode in which the effect button 63 emits light. When the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, a point number PN of “100” is displayed below the button image BN1 as shown in FIG. 139 (B).

  When the player further presses down the effect button 63, the button image BN2 is newly displayed below the button image BN1 as shown in FIG. 139 (C). Further, the point number PN of “100” or “150” is displayed on the right side of the button image BN2. When the push-down operation of the effect button 63 is further repeated, a button image BN3 is newly displayed on the right side of the button image BN2, as shown in FIG. 139 (D). Further, the point number PN of “200” or “250” is displayed above the button image BN3. Further, when the push operation of the effect button 63 is repeated, a button image BN4 is newly displayed below the button image BN3 as shown in FIG. 139 (E).

  Furthermore, when the push operation of the effect button 63 is repeated, as shown in FIG. 139 (F), the four button images BN1 to BN4 disappear from the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in FIG. 139 (G), a sword image ASI, a timer bar TBI, and an operation promotion image OPI are displayed. The sword image ASI represents the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image ASI includes a button image PSB representing the appearance of the sword button 65. The timer bar TBI indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the sword member 64. The timer bar TBI is displayed in front of the sword image ASI so as to overlap the sword image ASI. The operation promotion image OPI is an image that prompts the player to operate the sword member 64, and is displayed as “Push in!” Here.

  When the player pushes the sword member 64, the total point increase display effect shown in FIG. 139 (H) is executed. Specifically, before the total value of the number of points PN displayed in FIGS. 136 (C) to 136 (F) is displayed, the increment display MTP in which the numerical value is incremented from 0 of the digital value is displayed. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (I), after the increment display MTP, when the display value reaches the total value of the number of points PN, the increment is stopped and a final display TPD indicating the total point “1330” is displayed. Then, an effect that the remaining amount of the meter image PL is reduced by the amount corresponding to the total point is executed. When the meter image PL reaches 1300 points, the remaining amount disappears. Therefore, here, after the final display TPD of the total point “1330” is displayed, the meter image PL has an area of a specific color portion on the inside reduced, and the remaining A production that runs out of quantity is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (J), an achievement image ACV indicating that the remaining amount of the meter image PL has become zero is displayed. Here, the achievement image ACV is displayed with the characters “CLEAR!”.

[Example of effects]
Below, the effect example of an operation means image display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 136 (A) and 138 (A), a first effect in which a plurality of button images BN1 to BN4 are displayed on the display screen 7a, and FIG. C), as shown in FIG. 138 (C), the second effect in which the number of button images BN1 to BN3 smaller than the number of button images BN1 to BN4 displayed in the first effect is displayed, and FIG. (F) As shown in FIG. 138 (F), the third effect in which the number of button images BN1 smaller than the number of button images BN1 to BN3 displayed in the second effect is displayed. be able to. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 136 (E) and 138 (E), the number is less than the number of button images BN1 to BN3 displayed in the second effect, and is displayed in the third effect. The fourth effect in which the number of button images BN1 and BN2 larger than the number of button images BN1 to be displayed can be executed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 138 (G), after the fourth effect, an enlarged button image BBN representing the appearance of the effect button 63 and larger than the button image BN is displayed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 136 (G), a sword image ASI representing the appearance of the sword member 64 is displayed after the fourth effect. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, the second effect is executed after the first effect, and the number of points is displayed according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. The third effect is executed after the second effect, the number of points is displayed in accordance with the operation of the effect button 63 by the player, and the fourth effect is executed after the third effect. The number of points is displayed in accordance with the operation of the production button 63 by, and after the fourth production, the total number of points displayed in the second production, the third production, and the fourth production is displayed. A number TPD is displayed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, the meter image PL is displayed in the first effect, the second effect, the third effect, and the fourth effect. After the total point number TPD is displayed, the meter image PL changes according to the total point number TPD. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the operation means image display effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the operation means image display effects A to D described above, the button image BN represents the appearance of the effect button 63. However, the button image BN may represent the appearance of the sword button 65.
[Modification 2]
The operation means image display effects A to D described above are performed when the gaming state is probable. However, the above-described operation means image display effects A to D may be performed in a gaming state other than the probability change time. For example, the above-mentioned operation means image display effects A to D may be performed at normal times or in a short time when there is an uncertain change.
[Modification 3]
The operation means image display effects A to D described above are executed when the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is repeated. However, the above operation means image display effects A to D may be configured to proceed even without the pressing operation of the effect button 63. Further, even if the pushing operation of the sword member 64 is not performed, the total point increase display effect may be performed.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E1-1]
A first operating means operable by a player;
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first operation means image representing an appearance of the first operation means,
A first effect in which a plurality of the first operation means images are displayed on the display means;
A second effect in which a smaller number of the first operation means images than the number of the first operation means images displayed in the first effect are displayed;
A gaming machine that can execute a third effect in which a smaller number of the first operation means images are displayed than the number of the first operation means images displayed in the second effect.
◇ [Aspect E1-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect E1-1,
There are fewer first operation means images than the number of first operation means images displayed in the second effect, and more than the number of first operation means images displayed in the third effect. A gaming machine characterized in that the displayed fourth effect can be executed.
◇ [Aspect E1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect E1-2,
One of the plurality of types of images is an enlarged first operation means image that represents an appearance of the first operation means and is larger than the first operation means image,
The enlarged first operation means image is displayed after the fourth presentation. The gaming machine.
◇ [Aspect E1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-2 further includes:
A second operating means operable by the player;
One of the plurality of types of images is a second operation means image representing an appearance of the second operation means,
The gaming machine, wherein the second operation means image is displayed after the fourth effect.
◇ [Aspect E1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-2 to E1-4,
The second effect is executed after the first effect, the number of points is displayed according to the operation of the first operation means by the player,
The third effect is executed after the second effect, and the number of points is displayed according to the operation of the first operation means by the player,
The fourth effect is executed after the third effect, the number of points is displayed according to the operation of the first operation means by the player,
After the fourth effect, the second effect, the third effect, and the total number of points that is the sum of the points displayed in the fourth effect are displayed. Gaming machine.
◇ [Aspect E1-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect E1-5,
One of the plurality of types of images is a meter image,
The meter image is displayed in the first effect, the second effect, the third effect, and the fourth effect,
After the total number of points is displayed, the meter image changes according to the total number of points.

Hereinafter, the effect during the probability change will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 to 143. This during-probability effect can be executed when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the effect during probability change, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.
When the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is in the probability change state, the probability change state is continued until the next big hit, so it is easier to make the next big hit compared to the normal state.

[Direction A during probability change]
FIG. 140 is a diagram for explaining the effect A during probability change.
In the probabilistic change effect A, the first reach effect and the second reach effect can be performed. The first reach effect and the second reach effect will be described below. The first reach effect and the second reach effect are not performed with the same variation, but with different variations.

[First reach production]
In the first reach effect of the probable change effect, first, as shown in FIG. 140 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (B), a target mission effect A is performed. In this target mission effect A, a target image E21 is displayed. This target image E21 represents a circular target, and a half region of the target is a region (probable variation suggestion region) suggesting a probable big hit (predicted jackpot for V passing), and a remaining half region of the target is a normal jackpot ( It is an area (also referred to as a normal suggestion area) that suggests a V non-passing expected jackpot. In the target mission effect, the target image E <b> 21 rotates in a twirl and is directed to hit an arrow as a mission.

  After the hitting mission effect A, the hitting success effect A and the hitting loss effect A shown below can be executed. In the case of a promising big hit (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: variation pattern P62 (reach of SP5)), the hit success effect A is executed. In the case of a normal jackpot (FIG. 11: in the case of the fluctuation pattern P63 (SP5 reach)), the target lose effect A is executed.

  In the successful hit effect A, as shown in FIG. 140 (C), an effect in which an arrow sticks into the probability change suggestion area of the target image E21 is performed, and an effect suggesting that it is a probability change big hit is performed. After this effect, a jackpot game is played, and then the probability variation state (high probability high base state) is entered.

  On the other hand, in the target lose effect A, as shown in FIG. 140 (D), an effect in which an arrow sticks into the normal suggestion region of the target image E21 is performed, and an effect suggesting that it is usually a big hit is performed. After this effect, a jackpot game is played, and then it becomes a short time state (low probability high base state).

  It should be noted that after the target mission effect A, an arrow is always hit, and either the target success effect A or target loss effect A is always performed. That is, at the time when the first reach effect is selected, either one of the promiscuous jackpot or the normal jackpot is determined.

[Second Reach Production]
In the second reach effect of the probable effect, first, as shown in FIG. 140 (E), the change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (F), a target mission effect B is performed. In the target mission effect B, a target image E21 is displayed. The target image E22 represents a circular target, and a half region of the target is a region (probability change suggestion region) suggesting a probable big hit, and a remaining half region of the target suggests a loss (losing suggestion region). Also called). In the target mission effect, the target image E <b> 21 rotates in a twirl and is directed to hit an arrow as a mission.

  After the hitting mission effect B, the hitting success effect B and the hitting loss effect B shown below can be executed. In the case of a promising big hit (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: fluctuation pattern P61 (reach of SP4)), a successful hit effect B is executed. In the case of losing (no big hit) (FIG. 11: variation patterns P65 to 67, 69 to 71 (SP4 reach)), the target losing effect B is executed.

  In the successful hit effect B, as shown in FIG. 140 (G), an effect that an arrow sticks into the probability change suggestion region of the target image E22 is performed, suggesting that it is a probability change big hit. After this effect, a jackpot game is played, and then the probability variation state (high probability high base state) is entered.

  On the other hand, in the target loss effect B, as shown in FIG. 140 (H), an effect that an arrow sticks into the loss region of the target image E22 is performed, and an effect suggesting that it is not a big hit but a loss is performed. After this effect, the special symbol (decorative symbol) starts to change.

  It should be noted that after the target mission effect B, an arrow is always hit, and either the successful hit effect B or the target lose effect BNP is performed. That is, when the second reach effect is selected, if it is a big hit, it is definitely determined that the probability variation big hit will be obtained. In other words, when this second reach production is selected, either the probable big hit or the loss.

[Direction B during probability change]
FIG. 141 is a diagram for explaining a probable effect B.
In the probability change effect B, the first reach effect and the second reach effect can be performed. The first reach effect and the second reach effect will be described below. The first reach effect and the second reach effect are not performed with the same variation, but with different variations.

[First reach production]
In the first reach effect of the probable change effect, first, as shown in FIG. 141 (A), the change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (B), a battle effect is performed. In this battle effect, the effect that the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle (engage) is performed.

  After the battle production, the following battle victory production and battle defeat production can be executed. In the case of a probable big hit (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: variation pattern P62 (reach of SP5)), a battle victory effect is executed. In the case of a normal jackpot (non-probable change jackpot) (FIG. 11: variation pattern P63 (SP5 reach)), a battle defeat effect is executed.

  In the battle victory effect, as shown in FIG. 141 (C), an effect that the teammate character CRA wins the enemy character CRB is performed, and a victory suggestion image E23 and a probability change suggestion image E24 are displayed. The victory suggestion image E23 is an image that suggests that the teammate character CRA has won the enemy character CRB, that is, an image that suggests a probable jackpot. The probability variation suggestion image E24 is an image that suggests probability variation jackpot. After this effect, a jackpot game is played, and then the probability variation state (high probability high base state) is entered.

  On the other hand, in the battle defeat effect, as shown in FIG. 141 (D), an effect that the ally character CRA is defeated by the enemy character CRB is performed, and a defeat suggestion image E25 and a normal suggestion image E26 are displayed. The defeat suggestion image E25 is an image that suggests that the teammate character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB, that is, an image that suggests a normal jackpot (non-probable change jackpot). Further, the normal suggestion image E26 is an image that suggests a normal jackpot (non-probable variation jackpot). After this effect, a jackpot game is played, and then it becomes a short time state (low probability high base state).

  In addition, after the battle production, the battle is always settled, and either the battle victory production or the battle defeat production is performed without fail. That is, at the time when the first reach effect is selected, either one of the promiscuous jackpot or the normal jackpot is determined.

[Second Reach Production]
In the second reach effect of the probable change effect, first, as shown in FIG. 141 (E), the change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (F), a target mission effect is performed. In this target mission effect, a target image E21 is displayed. The target image E22 represents a circular target, and a half region of the target is a region (probability change suggestion region) suggesting a probable big hit, and a remaining half region of the target suggests a loss (losing suggestion region). Also called). In the target mission effect, the target image E <b> 21 rotates in a twirl and is directed to hit an arrow as a mission.

  After the hitting mission effect, the hitting success effect and the hitting loss effect shown below can be executed. In the case of a probable big hit (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: variation pattern P61 (SP4 reach)), a successful hit effect is executed. In the case of a loss (no big hit) (FIG. 11: variation patterns P65 to 67, 69 to 71 (SP4 reach)), a target loss effect is executed.

  In the successful hit effect, as shown in FIG. 141 (G), an effect that an arrow sticks into the probability change suggestion region of the target image E22 is performed, suggesting that it is a probability change big hit. After this effect, a jackpot game is played, and then the probability variation state (high probability high base state) is entered.

  On the other hand, in the target loss effect, as shown in FIG. 141 (H), an effect that an arrow sticks into the loss region of the target image E22 is performed, and an effect suggesting that it is not a big hit but a loss is performed. After this effect, the special symbol (decorative symbol) starts to change.

  In addition, after the target mission production, an arrow is always hit, and either the successful success production or the production loss production is performed. That is, when the second reach effect is selected, if it is a big hit, it is definitely determined that the probability variation big hit will be obtained. In other words, when this second reach production is selected, either the probable big hit or the loss.

[Direction C during probability change]
FIG. 142 is a diagram for explaining the effect C during probability change.
In the probability change effect C, the first reach effect and the second reach effect can be performed. The first reach effect and the second reach effect will be described below. The first reach effect and the second reach effect are not performed with the same variation, but with different variations.

[First reach production]
In the first reach effect of the probable change effect, first, as shown in FIG. 142 (A), the change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (B), battle effect 1 is performed. In this battle effect 1, an effect in which the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle (combat) is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (C), battle effect 2 is performed. In this battle effect 2, the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB face each other, and the meter image E27 is displayed. The meter image E27 represents the hit points (life points) of the enemy character CRB, and indicates that the friend character CRA is more advantageous as the meter value decreases. If the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0, the teammate character CRA wins. The teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle a predetermined number of times (one or more times), and when the teammate character CRA damages the enemy character CRB in the battle, the meter value of the meter image E27 decreases. Naturally, when the damage is large, the reduction range of the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes large. If the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0 at the end of the battle, the teammate character CRA wins. If the meter value remains, the teammate character CRA loses.

  After the battle effect 2, the following battle victory effect and battle defeat effect can be executed. In the case of a probable big hit (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: variation pattern P62 (reach of SP5)), a battle victory effect is executed. In the case of a normal jackpot (non-probable change jackpot) (FIG. 11: variation pattern P63 (SP5 reach)), a battle defeat effect is executed.

  In the battle victory effect, as shown in FIG. 142 (C), the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0, and the effect that the ally character CRA wins the enemy character CRB is performed, and the victory suggestion image E23 and the probability change suggestion image E24 are performed. Is displayed. The victory suggestion image E23 is an image that suggests that the teammate character CRA has won the enemy character CRB, that is, an image that suggests a probable jackpot. The probability variation suggestion image E24 is an image that suggests probability variation jackpot. After this effect, a jackpot game is played, and then the probability variation state (high probability high base state) is entered.

  On the other hand, in the battle defeat effect, as shown in FIG. 142 (D), the meter value of the meter image E27 remains, and the effect that the ally character CRA is defeated by the enemy character CRB is performed. An image E26 is displayed. The defeat suggestion image E25 is an image that suggests that the teammate character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB, that is, an image that suggests a normal jackpot (non-probable change jackpot). Further, the normal suggestion image E26 is an image that suggests a normal jackpot (non-probable variation jackpot). After this effect, a jackpot game is played, and then it becomes a short time state (low probability high base state).

  In addition, after the battle production, the battle is always settled, and either the battle victory production or the battle defeat production is performed without fail. That is, at the time when the first reach effect is selected, either one of the promiscuous jackpot or the normal jackpot is determined.

[Second Reach Production]
In the second reach effect of the probable change effect, first, as shown in FIG. 142 (E), the change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (F), a target mission effect is performed. In this target mission effect, a target image E21 is displayed. The target image E22 represents a circular target, and a half region of the target is a region (probability change suggestion region) suggesting a probable big hit, and a remaining half region of the target suggests a loss (losing suggestion region). Also called). In the target mission effect, the target image E <b> 21 rotates in a twirl and is directed to hit an arrow as a mission.

  After the hitting mission effect, the hitting success effect and the hitting loss effect shown below can be executed. In the case of a probable big hit (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: variation pattern P61 (SP4 reach)), a successful hit effect is executed. In the case of a loss (no big hit) (FIG. 11: variation patterns P65 to 67, 69 to 71 (SP4 reach)), a target loss effect is executed.

  In the successful hit effect, as shown in FIG. 142 (G), an effect that an arrow sticks into the probability change suggestion region of the target image E22 is performed, suggesting that it is a probability change big hit. After this effect, a jackpot game is played, and then the probability variation state (high probability high base state) is entered.

  On the other hand, in the target loss effect, as shown in FIG. 142 (H), an effect that an arrow sticks into the loss region of the target image E22 is performed, and an effect suggesting that it is not a big hit but a loss is performed. After this effect, the special symbol (decorative symbol) starts to change.

  In addition, after the target mission production, an arrow is always hit, and either the successful success production or the production loss production is performed. That is, when the second reach effect is selected, if it is a big hit, it is definitely determined that the probability variation big hit will be obtained. In other words, when this second reach production is selected, either the probable big hit or the loss.

[Direction D during probability change]
FIG. 143 is a diagram for explaining the effect D during probability change.
In the probability change effect D, the first reach effect and the second reach effect can be performed. The first reach effect and the second reach effect will be described below. The first reach effect and the second reach effect are not performed with the same variation, but with different variations.

[First reach production]
In the first reach effect of the probable change effect, first, as shown in FIG. 143 (A), the change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (B), a battle effect 1 is performed. In this battle effect 1, an effect in which the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle (combat) is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (C), battle effect 2 is performed. In this battle effect 2, the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB face each other, and a meter image E27 and a teammate battle icon E28 are displayed. The meter image E27 represents the hit points (life points) of the enemy character CRB, and indicates that the friend character CRA is more advantageous as the meter value decreases. If the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0, the teammate character CRA wins. The teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle a predetermined number of times (one or more times), and when the teammate character CRA damages the enemy character CRB in the battle, the meter value of the meter image E27 decreases. Naturally, when the damage is large, the reduction range of the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes large. If the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0 at the end of the battle, the teammate character CRA wins. If the meter value remains, the teammate character CRA loses.

  Also, the teammate icon E28 is an icon that suggests that a predetermined character of the teammate will participate in the battle effect. A character is displayed on the teammate icon E28, and the character enters the war. Further, one of the plurality of characters is displayed on the teammate battle icon E28. These characters are provided with an order of strength. If there is a teammate icon E28 corresponding to a character having a high strength ranking, the meter value of the meter image E27 can be easily lowered when the character enters the battle. Further, as the number of teammate participation icons E28 increases, the number of characters participating in the battle increases, so that the chance of attack increases and the meter value of the meter image E27 can be easily lowered. That is, the greater the number of icons of the teammate battle icon E28 and the higher the order of the strength of the character corresponding to the teammate battle icon E28, the easier it is to lower the meter value of the meter image E27 and to defeat the enemy character CRB. . As a result, it is likely to be a probable big hit.

  After the battle effect 2, the following battle victory effect and battle defeat effect can be executed. In the case of a probable big hit (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: variation pattern P62 (reach of SP5)), a battle victory effect is executed. In the case of a normal jackpot (non-probable change jackpot) (FIG. 11: variation pattern P63 (SP5 reach)), a battle defeat effect is executed.

  In the battle victory effect, as shown in FIG. 143 (D), the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0, and the effect that the ally character CRA wins the enemy character CRB is performed, and the victory suggestion image E23 and the probability change suggestion image E24. Is displayed. The victory suggestion image E23 is an image that suggests that the teammate character CRA has won the enemy character CRB, that is, an image that suggests a probable jackpot. The probability variation suggestion image E24 is an image that suggests probability variation jackpot. After this effect, a jackpot game is played, and then the probability variation state (high probability high base state) is entered.

  On the other hand, in the battle defeat effect, as shown in FIG. 143 (E), the meter value of the meter image E27 remains, and the effect that the ally character CRA is defeated by the enemy character CRB is performed. An image E26 is displayed. The defeat suggestion image E25 is an image that suggests that the teammate character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB, that is, an image that suggests a normal jackpot (non-probable change jackpot). Further, the normal suggestion image E26 is an image that suggests a normal jackpot (non-probable variation jackpot). After this effect, a jackpot game is played, and then it becomes a short time state (low probability high base state).

  In addition, after the battle production, the battle is always settled, and either the battle victory production or the battle defeat production is performed without fail. That is, at the time when the first reach effect is selected, either one of the promiscuous jackpot or the normal jackpot is determined.

[Second Reach Production]
In the second reach effect of the probable change effect, first, as shown in FIG. 143 (E), the change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (F), a target mission effect is performed. In this target mission effect, a target image E21 is displayed. The target image E22 represents a circular target, and a half region of the target is a region (probability change suggestion region) suggesting a probable big hit, and a remaining half region of the target suggests a loss (losing suggestion region). Also called). In the target mission effect, the target image E <b> 21 rotates in a twirl and is directed to hit an arrow as a mission.

  After the hitting mission effect, the hitting success effect and the hitting loss effect shown below can be executed. In the case of a probable big hit (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: variation pattern P61 (SP4 reach)), a successful hit effect is executed. In the case of a loss (no big hit) (FIG. 11: variation patterns P65 to 67, 69 to 71 (SP4 reach)), a target loss effect is executed.

  In the successful hit effect, as shown in FIG. 143 (G), an effect that an arrow sticks into the probability change suggestion region of the target image E22 is performed, suggesting that it is a probability change big hit. After this effect, a jackpot game is played, and then the probability variation state (high probability high base state) is entered.

  On the other hand, in the target loss effect, as shown in FIG. 142 (H), an effect that an arrow sticks into the loss region of the target image E22 is performed, and an effect suggesting that it is not a big hit but a loss is performed. After this effect, the special symbol (decorative symbol) starts to change.

  In addition, after the target mission production, an arrow is always hit, and either the successful success production or the production loss production is performed. That is, when the second reach effect is selected, if it is a big hit, it is definitely determined that the probability variation big hit will be obtained. In other words, when this second reach production is selected, either the probable big hit or the loss.

  In the probability changing effects A to D, the first reach effect corresponds to the first display effect, and the second reach effect corresponds to the second display effect. Moreover, in the above-described effects B to D, the first reach effect corresponds to the battle-type reach effect, and the second reach effect corresponds to the non-battle-type reach effect.

[Example of effects]
The following shows an example of the effect of the production during probability change.
[Effect 1]
When the first reach effect is performed in the probability changing effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the jackpot is confirmed, the target mission effect A or the battle effect is performed, and the successful hit effect A or the battle is performed. If it shifts to the victory effect, the probability change jackpot (V passing planned jackpot) is confirmed, and after the jackpot game, it shifts to a probability change state (high probability high base state) relatively advantageous to the player. If the target mission effect A or battle effect is performed, and the transition is made to the target loss effect or battle defeat effect, the normal jackpot (V non-passing plan jackpot) is confirmed and the time is short (low probability high) that is relatively unfavorable to the player after the jackpot game. (Base state). On the other hand, when the second reach effect is performed, the jackpot is not fixed, but if the target mission effect B or the target mission effect is performed and the process shifts to the target hit success effect B or the target hit success effect, the change is likely. The jackpot (scheduled to pass V) is determined, and after the jackpot game, the player shifts to a probability change state (high accuracy and high base state) that is relatively advantageous to the player. If the target hit mission effect B or target hit mission effect is performed, and the target lose effect B or target lose effect directing is made, the normal jackpot (V non-passing expected jackpot) is confirmed and the time-short state (relatively disadvantageous to the player after the jackpot game) (Low accuracy and high base state)
In other words, when the first reach production is performed, the jackpot is determined and becomes either the probable jackpot or the normal jackpot. When the second reach performance is performed, the jackpot is not fixed, but when it is a jackpot, it is a promising jackpot.
During the probability change (during the high accuracy and high base state), when performing the reach effect, one of the first reach effect and the second reach effect is selected.
According to this configuration, in the case of the first reach effect, if the target mission effect or battle effect does not shift to the successful hit effect or battle victory effect, the normal jackpot is determined, so the game When the person reaches the first reach effect, the person watches the transition of the first reach effect with considerable enthusiasm. On the other hand, in the case of the second reach effect, even if the target hit mission effect B or target hit mission effect does not shift to the target hit success effect B or the target hit success effect, the normal jackpot can be avoided. Therefore, the player can gracefully watch the transition of the first reach production with a feeling of “the profit is achieved if the second reach production is shifted to the target success production B or the goal success production”. In this way, the first reach effect and the second reach effect have a great difference in the feelings of the player, and when the reach effect is performed during the probability change, the first reach effect and the second reach effect are different. Since any one of these effects is selected, it is possible to provide a sharp game effect during the probability change. As a result, the player can enjoy a sharp effect during the course of change and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the probability changing effects B to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the first reach effect, a battle effect in which the enemy character CRB and the teammate character CRA battle is performed, and the second reach effect is a battle type reach. When a different target mission effect is performed and the first reach effect is performed, the jackpot is confirmed, and if the teammate character CRA wins, the jackpot will be a jackpot, and after the jackpot game, the player will be in a probabilistic state that is relatively advantageous to the player. If the teammate character CRA is defeated, the game is normally a big hit, and after the big hit game, the player shifts to a time reduction state that is relatively disadvantageous for the player. According to this configuration, if the teammate character CRA wins in the battle performance, it becomes a promising jackpot, and if the teammate character CRA loses, it is usually a jackpot. Therefore, the support target can be narrowed down to the teammate character CRA, and the battle performance can be easily enjoyed. Can do. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the probability changing effects C to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the meter image E27 is displayed in the battle effect 2 of the first reach effect, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB perform a predetermined number of battles, When the character CRA damages the enemy character CRB, the meter value of the meter image E27 is decreased, and when the meter value becomes 0, the teammate character CRA wins, a battle victory effect is performed, and the probability changes. After the big hit, it shifts to a probable state. According to this configuration, by using the meter image E27, it is possible to easily convey to the player the transition of the winning and losing in the battle effect, and the player can feel confident about the battle effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the probability changing effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the second reach effect, the target mission effect indicating whether or not the target mission is successful is executed, and the target mission is successful. The jackpot is confirmed, and after the jackpot game, it shifts to a probable change state. According to this configuration, if the target mission is successful, the probable jackpot is confirmed, and even if the target mission is not successful, it will not normally be a big jackpot, so the best performance while immersing the target mission in a sense of superiority As you can see elegantly. In addition, by making a mission-type production, it is possible to convey to the player whether the game is a promising big hit or a loss. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the probability changing effect D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the battle effect, the participation display of a predetermined character to the battle is performed, and as the number of the battles increases, the probability that the teammate character wins increases. According to this configuration, as the predetermined character participates in the battle, the player becomes more enthusiastic, and the interest of the battle effect can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the probability changing effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the gaming state is performed in the probability changing state. According to this configuration, since the next big hit is easy to make, it is possible to excite the production that is likely to change monotonously. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the production during probability change is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the probability variation state, only the effect during probability variation (the first reach effect and the second reach effect) may be performed.

[Modification 2]
Probability changing effects (first reach effect and second reach effect) of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment are not only in the probability changing state (in the probability changing state), but in the normal state (low probability low base state), in the short time state (low It may be performed in the case of a high accuracy base state) and a high accuracy low base state (latency probability variation state). Moreover, you may make it perform the 1st reach | attainment effect or the 2nd reach | attainment effect of the during-probability effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment in a predetermined mode. This predetermined mode may be provided, for example, after a big hit game until a predetermined number of fluctuations. In addition, the predetermined mode may be provided from the variation after the variation that deviates from the super reach effect to the predetermined number of variations. Furthermore, the predetermined mode may be provided as a pre-reading effect.

[Modification 3]
In the probability changing effects B to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the enemy character CRB and the teammate character CRA are in the battle effect.

[Modification 4]
In the effect change effect D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the teammate icon E28 is displayed and the teammate character corresponding to the teammate icon E28 enters the battle, the meter value of the meter image E27 tends to decrease. However, if the enemy participation icon is displayed and the enemy character corresponding to the enemy participation icon is weak, the attack value of the teammate character may increase in the battle, and the meter value of the meter image E27 may be easily lowered.

[Modification 5]
In the probability changing effects C and D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the meter image E27 corresponds to the enemy character's HP, but may correspond to the teammate character's HP. In this case, if the meter value of the meter image E27 remains, the ally character wins, and if the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0, the ally character is defeated. In addition, the meter image E27 suggests that if the meter value decreases, it is advantageous for the battle. However, the meter image E27 may be made to correspond to attack energy that rises every time the teammate character attacks. In this case, as the meter value of the meter image E27 increases, the victory probability of the teammate character increases.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
When the first display effect is performed, the jackpot is confirmed, and if the first condition is satisfied, after the jackpot game based on the jackpot, the game shifts to a first gaming state that is relatively advantageous to the player, If a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the game shifts to a second gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous for the player after the jackpot game based on the jackpot,
When the second display effect is performed, the jackpot is not fixed, but in the case of the jackpot, after the jackpot game based on the jackpot, the game proceeds to the first gaming state,
When a reach effect is performed in a predetermined game mode, one of the first display effect and the second display effect is selected.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E2-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect E2-1,
The first display effect is a battle-type reach effect in which the first character and the second character battle,
The second display effect is a non-battle system reach effect different from the battle system reach,
When the first display effect is performed, if the jackpot is confirmed and the first character wins, the game shifts to a first gaming state that is relatively advantageous to the player after the jackpot game based on the jackpot, If the first character is defeated, after the jackpot game based on the jackpot, the game shifts to a second gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous for the player.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect E2-2,
In the battle-type reach production, a meter is displayed, the meter value represented by the meter is reduced by a predetermined number of battles, and if the meter value is reduced to a predetermined value, the first character wins and the first gaming state To migrate to
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E2-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect E2-2 or aspect E2-3,
In the non-battle system reach effect, an effect indicating whether or not a predetermined mission is successful is executed. When the predetermined mission is successful, a jackpot is determined, and after the jackpot game based on the jackpot, Transition to gaming state 1
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E2-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-2 to E2-4,
In the battle-type reach production, the participation display of a predetermined character in the battle is performed, and the greater the number of the participation, the higher the probability that the first character will win.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E2-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-2 to E2-5,
The predetermined game mode is a mode indicating that the game state is a probable change state.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The battle effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 144 to 147. This battle effect is during the display of the variation of the decorative symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter simply referred to as “special symbol”). It can be executed during a state, during electronic support (electric support), or the like.

[Battle production A]
FIG. 144 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect A. FIG.
In the battle effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 144 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the central symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In FIG. 144A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward). In this example, the gaming state is a high probability state, and as shown in FIG. 144 (A), characters “probability change” are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (B), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this battle effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, but develop from the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 144 (A), and the teammate character CRA and the enemy character on the player side at the center of the display screen 7a. The image that the CRB battles is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (C), a battle victory jackpot symbol arrangement notice effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle victory jackpot symbol arrangement notice effect suggests a jackpot symbol arrangement that is scheduled to stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R when the teammate character CRA wins as a result of the battle between the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB. Production. When the teammate character CRA wins, the jackpot symbol array to be stopped is a probable jackpot. That is, when the teammate character CRA wins, the probability variation state continues. As shown in FIG. 144 (C), the teammate character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the letter “V” indicating that the teammate character CRA has won is displayed in the vicinity of the teammate character CRA. Has been. On the right side of the display screen 7a, “777” is displayed as the probability variation big hit symbol array AOZ, which is scheduled to stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The “777” is displayed in different sizes, the left “7” on the side of the teammate character CRA is the largest, the next “7” is the largest, and is on the side opposite to the teammate character CRA. A certain “7” on the right is displayed smallest. Thus, by characterizing the display mode of the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ, the player can make an impression of the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (D), a battle defeat symbol arrangement notice effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle-losing jackpot symbol array notice effect suggests a jackpot symbol array that is scheduled to stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R when the teammate character CRA loses as a result of the battle between the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB. Production. When the teammate character CRA is defeated, the jackpot symbol array scheduled to stop is usually a jackpot. That is, when the teammate character CRA is defeated, it falls from the probability variation state to the normal state. As shown in FIG. 144 (D), the enemy character CRB is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the letter “V” indicating that the enemy character CRB has won is displayed in the vicinity of the enemy character CRB. Has been. On the left side of the display screen 7a, “888” is displayed as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ, which is scheduled to stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. It should be noted that “888” is displayed in different sizes, the right “8” on the enemy character CRB side is the largest, the next “8” is the largest, and on the side opposite to the enemy character CRB. A certain “8” on the left is displayed smallest. Thus, by characterizing the display mode of the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ, it is possible to impress the player on the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ. Further, by displaying the ally character CRA and the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ and the enemy character CRB and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ symmetrically, the player is impressed with the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ. Can do.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (E), a probabilistic big hit suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this probable jackpot suggestion effect, as a result of the battle between the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB, the letters “Victory!” Indicating that the teammate character CRA has won are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying this character “Victory!”, It is possible to make the player think that the probability variation jackpot is “777” in the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (F), the probability variation jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This probability variation jackpot finalizing effect is obtained as the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ as a result of the battle effects of FIGS. 144 (B) to 144 (E) when the variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. It shows that it has stopped at “777” and has made a big hit. Note that the characters “probability big hit!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The player is convinced of the probable jackpot by this probable jackpot finalizing effect.

  On the other hand, instead of FIG. 144 (E), as shown in FIG. 144 (G), a normal jackpot suggesting effect may be executed on the display screen 7a. In this normal jackpot suggestion effect, as a result of the battle between the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB, the character “defeated!” Indicating that the teammate character CRA has been defeated is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying this character “losing!”, It is possible to make the player think that a normal jackpot is made with “888” in the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (H), a normal jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the normal jackpot finalizing effect, the variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 144 (A) are obtained as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ as a result of the battle effects of FIGS. 144 (B) to 144 (E). It stops at “888”, and shows that it is usually a big hit. It should be noted that the characters “usually big hit!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. With this normal jackpot finalizing effect, the player is confident of the normal jackpot.

  That is, in the battle effect A shown in FIG. 144, during the battle effect, the symbol arrangement when winning and the symbol arrangement when losing are displayed in advance. The game state in which this battle effect is performed is a high probability state (probability change), the symbol arrangement when winning is a warning display of the probability change jackpot symbol arrangement, the symbol arrangement when losing is usually a jackpot symbol arrangement A notice is displayed. That is, when a transition is made to a battle effect, a jackpot is confirmed, and a notice is displayed during the battle effect whether the confirmed jackpot is a probable jackpot or a normal jackpot. In other words, a notice display is made as to whether the probability variation state continues during the battle performance or whether the probability variation state falls to the normal state.

[Battle production B]
FIG. 145 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect B. FIG.
In the battle effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 145 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the central symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In FIG. 145 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward). In this example, the gaming state is a high probability state, and as shown in FIG. 145 (A), characters “probably changing” are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (B), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this battle effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, but develop from the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 145 (A), and in the center of the display screen 7a, the player side friend character CRA and the enemy character The image that the CRB battles is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (C), a battle victory jackpot symbol arrangement notice effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle victory jackpot symbol arrangement notice effect suggests a jackpot symbol arrangement that is scheduled to stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R when the teammate character CRA wins as a result of the battle between the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB. Production. When the teammate character CRA wins, the jackpot symbol array to be stopped is a probable jackpot. That is, when the teammate character CRA wins, the probability variation state continues. As shown in FIG. 145 (C), the teammate character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the letter “V” indicating that the teammate character CRA has won is displayed in the vicinity of the teammate character CRA. Has been. On the right side of the display screen 7a, “777” is displayed as the probability variation big hit symbol array AOZ1, which is scheduled to stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The “777” is displayed in different sizes, the left “7” on the side of the teammate character CRA is the largest, the next “7” is the largest, and is on the side opposite to the teammate character CRA. A certain “7” on the right is displayed smallest. Thus, by characterizing the display mode of the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ1, it is possible to impress the player on the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (D), a battle defeat big hit symbol arrangement notice effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle-losing jackpot symbol array notice effect suggests a jackpot symbol array that is scheduled to stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R when the teammate character CRA loses as a result of the battle between the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB. Production. When the teammate character CRA is defeated, the jackpot symbol array scheduled to stop is usually a jackpot. That is, when the teammate character CRA is defeated, it falls from the probability variation state to the normal state. As shown in FIG. 145 (D), the enemy character CRB is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the letter “V” indicating that the enemy character CRB has won is displayed in the vicinity of the enemy character CRB. Has been. On the left side of the display screen 7a, “888” is displayed as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ, which is scheduled to stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. It should be noted that “888” is displayed in different sizes, the right “8” on the enemy character CRB side is the largest, the next “8” is the largest, and on the side opposite to the enemy character CRB. A certain “8” on the left is displayed smallest. Thus, by characterizing the display mode of the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ, it is possible to impress the player on the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ. Further, by displaying the ally character CRA and the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ1 and the enemy character CRB and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ in a symmetrical manner, the player is impressed with the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ1 and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ. Can do.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (E), a probable big hit suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this probable jackpot suggestion effect, as a result of the battle between the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB, the letters “Victory!” Indicating that the teammate character CRA has won are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying this character “Victory!”, It is possible to make the player think that the probability variation jackpot is “77” in the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (F), a probability variation 16R (round) jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This probability variation 16R jackpot finalizing effect is the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ1 as a result of the battle effects shown in FIGS. It is shown that it has stopped at “777” and has won 16 rounds. In addition, above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the characters “probability 16R big hit!” Are displayed. With this probability variation 16R jackpot finalizing effect, the player is confident of 16 rounds of probability variation jackpot.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 145 (C), as shown in FIG. 145 (G), a battle victory jackpot symbol array notice effect may be executed on the display screen 7a. This battle victory jackpot symbol arrangement notice effect suggests a jackpot symbol arrangement that will stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R when the teammate character CRC wins as a result of the battle between the teammate character CRC and the enemy character CRB. Production. When the teammate character CRC wins, the jackpot symbol arrangement to be stopped is a probable jackpot. That is, when the teammate character CRA wins, the probability variation state continues. As shown in FIG. 145 (G), the teammate character CRC is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the letter “V” indicating that the teammate character CRC has won is displayed in the vicinity of the teammate character CRC. Has been. On the right side of the display screen 7a, “555” is displayed as the probability variation big hit symbol array AOZ2, which is scheduled to stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. It should be noted that “555” is displayed in different sizes, the left “5” on the side of the ally character CRC is the largest, the next “5” is the largest, on the side opposite to the ally character CRC. A right “5” is displayed the smallest. Thus, by characterizing the display mode of the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ2, it is possible to impress the player on the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ2.
In other words, the battle victory jackpot symbol arrangement notice effect shown in FIG. 145 (G) is different from the battle victory jackpot symbol arrangement notice effect shown in FIG. 145 (C) described above. The teammate character CRA becomes the teammate character CRC. That is, “777” as the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ1 is “555” as the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ2.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (E) described above, the display screen 7a shows that the probable big hit suggestion effect is executed, and as a result of the battle between the teammate character CRC and the enemy character CRB, the teammate character CRC has won. The word “Victory!” Is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying this character “Victory!”, It is possible to make the player think that the probability variation jackpot is “555” in the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ2.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (H), the probability variation 15R (round) jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This probability variation 15R jackpot finalizing effect is the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ2 as a result of the battle effects of FIGS. 145 (B) to 145 (E) when the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. It is shown that the game stopped at “555”, and it was a big hit of 15 rounds. In addition, above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters “probability 15R big hits!” Are displayed. With this probability variation 15R jackpot finalizing effect, the player is confident of 15 rounds of probability variation jackpot.

In other words, in the battle effect B shown in FIG. 145, during the battle effect, the symbol arrangement when winning and the symbol arrangement when losing are displayed in advance. The game state in which this battle effect is performed is a high probability state (probability change), the symbol arrangement when winning is a warning display of the probability change jackpot symbol arrangement, the symbol arrangement when losing is usually a jackpot symbol arrangement A notice is displayed. That is, when a transition is made to a battle effect, a jackpot is confirmed, and a notice is displayed during the battle effect whether the confirmed jackpot is a probable jackpot or a normal jackpot. In other words, a notice display is made as to whether the probability variation state continues during the battle performance or whether the probability variation state falls to the normal state.
Furthermore, in battle effect B, there are a plurality of types of probability variation jackpot symbol arrays, and probability variation jackpots having different numbers of rounds are set in the plurality of types of probability variation jackpot symbol arrays. Furthermore, there are a plurality of types of teammate characters, and each of the plurality of types of teammate characters is associated with one of a plurality of types of probability variation jackpot symbol arrays that are displayed in advance when a battle effect is won. That is, the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ1 displayed in advance when the teammate character CRA shown in FIG. 145 (C) wins is the 16-round probability variation jackpot symbol array “777”, and the teammate character CRC shown in FIG. 145 (G). The probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ2 displayed in advance when the player wins is a 15-round probability variation jackpot symbol array “555”.
In other words, in the battle effect B shown in FIG. 145, there are a plurality of types of player-side ally characters that battle in the battle effect, and which player character appears in the battle effect, and the player wins the battle. You can see the number of rounds per chance. In other words, depending on which teammate character appears in the battle performance, the player can estimate the number of balls in the jackpot game when winning the battle.

[Battle production C]
FIG. 146 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect C. FIG.
In the battle effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 146 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the central symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In FIG. 146 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicate that they are changing (while scrolling downward). In this example, the gaming state is a high probability state, and as shown in FIG. 146 (A), characters “probably changing” are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (B), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this battle effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and develop from the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 146 (A). The image that the CRB battles is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (C), a battle victory jackpot symbol arrangement notice effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle victory jackpot symbol arrangement notice effect suggests a jackpot symbol arrangement that is scheduled to stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R when the teammate character CRA wins as a result of the battle between the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB. Production. When the teammate character CRA wins, the jackpot symbol array to be stopped is a probable jackpot. That is, when the teammate character CRA wins, the probability variation state continues. As shown in FIG. 146 (C), the teammate character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the letter “V” indicating that the teammate character CRA has won is displayed in the vicinity of the teammate character CRA. Has been. On the right side of the display screen 7a, “777” is displayed as the probability variation big hit symbol array AOZ, which is scheduled to stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The “777” is displayed in different sizes, the left “7” on the side of the teammate character CRA is the largest, the next “7” is the largest, and is on the side opposite to the teammate character CRA. A certain “7” on the right is displayed smallest. Thus, by characterizing the display mode of the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ, the player can make an impression of the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (D), a battle defeat big hit symbol arrangement notice effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle-losing jackpot symbol array notice effect suggests a jackpot symbol array that is scheduled to stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R when the teammate character CRA loses as a result of the battle between the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB. Production. When the teammate character CRA is defeated, the jackpot symbol array scheduled to stop is usually a jackpot. That is, when the teammate character CRA is defeated, it falls from the probability variation state to the normal state. As shown in FIG. 146 (D), an enemy character CRB is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and a letter “V” indicating that the enemy character CRB has won is displayed in the vicinity of the enemy character CRB. Has been. On the left side of the display screen 7a, “888” is displayed as a normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1, which is scheduled to stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. It should be noted that “888” is displayed in different sizes, the right “8” on the enemy character CRB side is the largest, the next “8” is the largest, and on the side opposite to the enemy character CRB. A certain “8” on the left is displayed smallest. Thus, by characterizing the display mode of the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1, it is possible to impress the player on the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ. Further, by displaying the ally character CRA and the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ and the enemy character CRB and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1 symmetrically, the player is impressed with the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ1 and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1. be able to.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (E), a normal jackpot suggesting effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this normal jackpot suggestion effect, as a result of the battle between the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB, the character “defeated!” Indicating that the teammate character CRA has been defeated is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying this character “losing!”, It is possible to make the player think that a normal big hit is made with “888” of the normal big hit symbol array BOZ1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (F), the promotion failure normal jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the promotion failure normal jackpot finalizing effect, the screen of the character “losing!” Shown in FIG. 146 (E) is switched, and “888” as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A promotion effect SKG is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a. This promotion effect SKG includes a plurality of types of jackpot symbol arrays including a normal jackpot symbol array (for example, even-numbered slotted eyes) and a probabilistic jackpot symbol array (for example, odd-numbered slotted eyes) within a display area surrounded by a square frame. In the state of scrolling up and down, a button effect is performed that causes the player to repeatedly press the button. In this button effect, the button image BOG is displayed so as to protrude from the display area (square frame) of the promotion effect SKG, and the characters “button repeated hit!” Are displayed below the button image BOG. ing. As a result, the player can make an impression of the promotion effect SKG and appeal the operation of the effect button 63. Then, as a result of the player hitting the button repeatedly (or when the player does not hit the button repeatedly, after a predetermined time has elapsed), the plurality of types of jackpot symbol arrays that have been scrolled stop, and usually the jackpot symbol array or the probable change jackpot Either of the symbol arrays is displayed. In the promotion failure normal jackpot finalizing effect shown in FIG. 146 (F), it is shown that “888” (ordinary jackpot symbol array BOZ1) is stopped as the normal jackpot symbol array, and as a result, the promotion from the normal jackpot to the probability variable jackpot is shown. Suggests failure. As a result, “888” as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a is continuously displayed as it is without changing to the probability variation jackpot symbol array, and the normal jackpot symbol array “888” is displayed. A new word “promotion failure normal jackpot!” Is displayed above. As a result, the player can recognize that the promotion from the normal jackpot to the probable jackpot has failed.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 146 (D), as shown in FIG. 146 (G), there may be a case where a battle defeat big hit symbol arrangement notice effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle defeat jackpot symbol array notice effect suggests a jackpot symbol array that will stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R when the teammate character CRC loses as a result of the battle between the teammate character CRC and the enemy character CRD. Production. When the teammate character CRC loses, the jackpot symbol array scheduled to stop is usually a jackpot. That is, when the teammate character CRA is defeated, it falls from the probability variation state to the normal state. As shown in FIG. 146 (G), an enemy character CRD is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and a letter “V” indicating that the enemy character CRD has won is displayed in the vicinity of the enemy character CRD. Has been. On the left side of the display screen 7a, “666” is displayed as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2, which is scheduled to stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The “666” is displayed in a different size, the right “6” on the enemy character CRB side is the largest, the next “6” is the largest, and on the side opposite to the enemy character CRB. A certain left “6” is displayed smallest. Thus, by characterizing the display mode of the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2, it is possible to impress the player on the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2. Further, by displaying the ally character CRA and the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ and the enemy character CRD and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2 in a symmetrical manner, the player is impressed with the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2. Can do.
In other words, the enemy character CRB becomes the enemy character CRD in that the battle defeat big hit symbol array notice effect shown in FIG. 146 (G) is different from the battle defeat big hit symbol array notice effect shown in FIG. 146 (C) described above. That is, “888” as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1 is “666” as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (H), the promotion success probability variable jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the promotion success probability change jackpot finalizing effect, the screen of the character “losing!” Shown in FIG. 146 (E) is switched, and “666” as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a ( In addition, a promotion effect SKG is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a. This promotion effect SKG includes a plurality of types of jackpot symbol arrays including a normal jackpot symbol array (for example, even-numbered slotted eyes) and a probabilistic jackpot symbol array (for example, odd-numbered slotted eyes) within a display area surrounded by a square frame. In the state of scrolling up and down, a button effect is performed that causes the player to repeatedly press the button. In this button effect, the button image BOG is displayed so as to protrude from the display area (square frame) of the promotion effect SKG, and the characters “button repeated hit!” Are displayed below the button image BOG. ing. As a result, the player can make an impression of the promotion effect SKG and appeal the operation of the effect button 63. Then, as a result of the player hitting the button repeatedly (or when the player does not hit the button repeatedly, after a predetermined time has elapsed), the plurality of types of jackpot symbol arrays that have been scrolled stop, and usually the jackpot symbol array or the probable change jackpot Either of the symbol arrays is displayed. In the promotion success probability variable jackpot finalizing effect shown in FIG. 146 (H), it is shown that “777” is stopped as the probability variation jackpot symbol arrangement, and this suggests that the promotion from the normal jackpot to the probability variable jackpot succeeded. The As a result, “666” as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2 displayed at the center of the display screen 7a is changed to the probability variation jackpot symbol array “777”, and “promotion” is placed above the probability variation jackpot symbol array “777”. “Successful promising jackpot!” Is newly displayed. This allows the player to recognize that the player has been promoted from a normal jackpot to a probable jackpot.

In other words, in the battle effect C shown in FIG. 146, during the battle effect, the symbol arrangement when winning and the symbol arrangement when losing are displayed in advance. The game state in which this battle effect is performed is a high probability state (probability change), the symbol arrangement when winning is a warning display of the probability change jackpot symbol arrangement, the symbol arrangement when losing is usually a jackpot symbol arrangement A notice is displayed. That is, when a transition is made to a battle effect, a jackpot is confirmed, and a notice is displayed during the battle effect whether the confirmed jackpot is a probable jackpot or a normal jackpot. In other words, a notice display is made as to whether the probability variation state continues during the battle performance or whether the probability variation state falls to the normal state.
Furthermore, in the battle effect C, there are a plurality of types of normal jackpot symbol arrangements, and the normal jackpots with different promotion rates (promotion rates from normal jackpots to promotion variable jackpots) are set for the plurality of types of normal jackpot symbol arrangements. . Furthermore, there are a plurality of types of enemy characters, and each of the plurality of types of enemy characters is associated with one of a plurality of types of normal jackpot symbol arrays that are displayed in advance when a battle effect is won. In other words, the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1 displayed in advance when the enemy character CRB shown in FIG. 146 (D) wins is the normal jackpot symbol array “888”, and the enemy character CRD shown in FIG. 146 (G) wins. The normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2 that is sometimes displayed in advance is the normal jackpot symbol array “666”. The promotion rate from normal jackpot to probable jackpot is set to be higher for “666” than for “888”.
In other words, in the battle effect C shown in FIG. 146, there are a plurality of types of enemy characters to be battled in the battle effect, and the player determines which enemy character appears in the battle effect and the enemy character wins the battle. The promotion rate from jackpots to probable jackpots is usually estimated. In other words, depending on which enemy character appears in the battle performance, even if the player loses the teammate character in the battle, the player can be expected to expect a probable big hit.

[Battle production D]
FIG. 147 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect D. FIG.
In the battle effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 147 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the central symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In FIG. 147 (A), it is shown that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward). Further, in this example, the gaming state is a high probability state, and as shown in FIG. 147 (A), characters “probably changing” are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (B), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this battle effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, but develop from the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 147 (A), and the teammate character CRA and the enemy character on the player side at the center of the display screen 7a. The image that the CRB battles is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (C), a battle victory jackpot symbol arrangement notice effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle victory jackpot symbol arrangement notice effect suggests a jackpot symbol arrangement that is scheduled to stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R when the teammate character CRA wins as a result of the battle between the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB. Production. When the teammate character CRA wins, the jackpot symbol array to be stopped is a probable jackpot. That is, when the teammate character CRA wins, the probability variation state continues. As shown in FIG. 147 (C), the teammate character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the letter “V” indicating that the teammate character CRA has won is displayed in the vicinity of the teammate character CRA. Has been. On the right side of the display screen 7a, “777” is displayed as the probability variation big hit symbol array AOZ, which is scheduled to stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The “777” is displayed in different sizes, the left “7” on the side of the teammate character CRA is the largest, the next “7” is the largest, and is on the side opposite to the teammate character CRA. A certain “7” on the right is displayed smallest. Thus, by characterizing the display mode of the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ, the player can make an impression of the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (D), a battle defeat big hit symbol arrangement notice effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle-losing jackpot symbol array notice effect suggests a jackpot symbol array that is scheduled to stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R when the teammate character CRA loses as a result of the battle between the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB. Production. When the teammate character CRA is defeated, the jackpot symbol array scheduled to stop is usually a jackpot. That is, when the teammate character CRA is defeated, it falls from the probability variation state to the normal state. As shown in FIG. 147 (D), an enemy character CRB is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and a letter “V” indicating that the enemy character CRB has won is displayed in the vicinity of the enemy character CRB. Has been. On the left side of the display screen 7a, “888” is displayed as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ, which is scheduled to stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. It should be noted that “888” is displayed in different sizes, the right “8” on the enemy character CRB side is the largest, the next “8” is the largest, and on the side opposite to the enemy character CRB. A certain “8” on the left is displayed smallest. Thus, by characterizing the display mode of the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ, it is possible to impress the player on the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ. Further, by displaying the ally character CRA and the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ and the enemy character CRB and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ symmetrically, the player is impressed with the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ. Can do.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (E), a normal jackpot suggesting effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this normal jackpot suggestion effect, as a result of the battle between the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB, the character “defeated!” Indicating that the teammate character CRA has been defeated is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying this character “losing!”, It is possible to make the player think that a normal jackpot is made with “888” in the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (F), a normal jackpot confirmation fake effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This normal jackpot confirmation fake effect is usually obtained on the display screen 7a as a result of the battle effects shown in FIGS. 147 (B) to 147 (E) when the variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. This is an effect that makes it seem that the player has made a big hit as if "888" as the jackpot symbol array BOZ has stopped. However, in the normal jackpot confirmation fake effect shown in FIG. 147 (F), “888” as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ is not completely stopped, and is slightly swung up and down (a few frames). It has become. It should be noted that the characters “usually big hit!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. That is, by this normal jackpot confirmation fake effect, the player has an illusion that the normal jackpot has been confirmed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (G), a battle revival probability change jackpot suggesting effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Although detailed illustration of this battle revival probability change jackpot suggestion effect is omitted, the screen of “888” of the displayed normal jackpot symbol array BOZ is switched in the normal jackpot confirmation fake effect shown in FIG. 147 (F), The battle effect shown in FIG. 147 (B) is executed, in which the teammate character CRA that has once lost is revived and battles with the enemy character CRB again. Then, in this battle performance, the teammate character CRA has won this time, and as a result, the center of the display screen 7a shows that the teammate character CRA has won, as shown in FIG. 147 (G). The text “Revival Victory!” Is displayed large. By displaying this character “Revival Victory!”, It is possible to make the player think that the player will be a probable jackpot with “777” in the probable jackpot symbol array AOZ1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (H), the probability variation jackpot finalizing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this probability variation jackpot finalizing effect, the screen of “Restoration victory!” Displayed in the battle resurrection probability variation jackpot suggestion effect shown in FIG. 147 (G) is switched, and “777” as a probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ is displayed. It is displayed on 7a and indicates that the probable big hit has been won. Note that the characters “probability big hit!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The player is convinced of the probable jackpot by this probable jackpot finalizing effect.

In other words, in the battle effect D shown in FIG. 147, during the battle effect, the symbol arrangement when winning and the symbol arrangement when losing are displayed in advance. The game state in which this battle effect is performed is a high probability state (probability change), the symbol arrangement when winning is a warning display of the probability change jackpot symbol arrangement, the symbol arrangement when losing is usually a jackpot symbol arrangement A notice is displayed. That is, when a transition is made to a battle effect, a jackpot is confirmed, and a notice is displayed during the battle effect whether the confirmed jackpot is a probable jackpot or a normal jackpot. In other words, a notice display is made as to whether the probability variation state continues during the battle performance or whether the probability variation state falls to the normal state.
Furthermore, in the battle effect D, after the player side's ally character is defeated once in the battle effect and the player thinks that the player will normally win and fall from the probabilistic state to the normal state, the ally character is revived again. A battle production is performed, and this time, the revival production that the ally character wins is performed. Accordingly, it is possible to make a player who thinks that a normal big hit has fallen from the probability variation state to the normal state to think that the probability variation state will continue and the probability variation big hit will continue. In other words, in the battle effect D shown in FIG. 147, once the normal jackpot symbol arrangement displayed in advance is indicated by fake, the effect of confirming the probable jackpot symbol arrangement displayed in advance is changed.

[Example of effects]
The following are examples of the effects of battle effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, it is possible to execute a battle effect in which a player's teammate character and an enemy character play against each other, and perform a battle effect in a predetermined variation of a decorative pattern. During the battle production, the stop symbol arrangement in the predetermined variation of the decorative symbol when the teammate character wins and the stop symbol arrangement in the predetermined variation of the decorative symbol when the teammate character loses are displayed in advance. ing. According to this configuration, it is possible for the player to estimate a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the teammate character wins and a penalty that is disadvantageous to the player that is awarded when the teammate character is defeated. Become. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, the stop symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols when the teammate character wins in the battle effect is configured to be a probable big hit symbol arrangement. According to this configuration, the player knows that when the teammate wins, the player wins a jackpot, and after the player wins, the gaming state shifts to a high probability state or the high probability state continues. You will know what to do. Thereby, the player can face a game with great expectation, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 145, the probability variation jackpot symbol array has a configuration in which the number of jackpot rounds differs depending on the type. According to this configuration, the player can know the number of rounds per probability change when the teammate character wins the battle. That is, the player can guess the number of balls in the jackpot game when the teammate character wins the battle. As a result, the player can face the game with great expectation when a large number of rounds (with a large number of balls) is displayed in advance in the battle effect, and the game can be enjoyed with great expectations. Can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, the stop symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols when the teammate character is defeated in the battle effect is usually a jackpot symbol arrangement. According to this configuration, the player knows that if the teammate character is defeated, it will be a big hit, and after the big win, the game state is maintained in the normal state or the short time state, or the normal state is changed from the probabilistic state. It becomes clear that it will shift to a short time state. As a result, the player can accurately grasp the development of the game destination, and can play an appropriate game with respect to the development of the game destination. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146, the normal jackpot symbol array has a configuration in which the rate of promotion to a probable jackpot varies depending on the type. According to this configuration, the player can know the promotion rate from the normal jackpot to the probable jackpot when the teammate character loses the battle. That is, even when the teammate character is defeated in the battle, the player can be expected to have a degree of expectation that is promoted from the normal jackpot to become a promising jackpot. As a result, even when the teammate character is defeated in a battle, the player may face a game with great expectations when a normal jackpot symbol array with a high promotion rate to a probable jackpot is displayed in advance. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a battle production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, the image display device 7 is configured by one display screen 7 a, and the design when the ally character wins on this one display screen 7 a. The arrangement and the symbol arrangement at the time of defeat are displayed in advance on a plane, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the image display device is provided with a first display screen disposed on the front side and a second display screen disposed on the rear side, and the symbol arrangement for displaying the notice is displayed on the first display screen. It may be. In this way, the symbol array to be displayed in advance is displayed closer to the player, and can be appealed to the player intensely in a very impactful manner. Note that the image display device having the first display screen and the second display screen may be configured to display a stereoscopic image (3D). In this way, it is possible to further appeal to the player by displaying the symbol arrangement to be notified in 3D.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, during the battle effect, the teammate character displays a noticeable jackpot symbol array when winning and a normal jackpot symbol array when defeated. However, the display timing of the symbol arrangement to be notified in advance is not particularly limited. For example, after displaying the probability variation jackpot symbol arrangement (normal jackpot symbol arrangement), the normal jackpot symbol arrangement (probability variation jackpot symbol arrangement) may be displayed continuously, or may be displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Good.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, when the game state performs a battle effect in a high probability state (during probability change), and the teammate character loses the symbol arrangement when it wins However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a battle effect may be performed in a short time state or a normal state when the gaming state is a low probability state, and a symbol arrangement when the teammate character wins and a symbol arrangement when the team loses may be displayed in advance. In this case, the symbol arrangement when the ally character wins may be a jackpot symbol arrangement (including a probable jackpot symbol arrangement and a normal jackpot symbol arrangement), and the symbol arrangement when the team member loses may be a lost symbol arrangement. Alternatively, when the teammate character wins, the symbol arrangement is a probable jackpot symbol arrangement, and when the team loses, the symbol arrangement is a normal jackpot symbol arrangement without a short time, which has a small number of balls (for example, two round jackpots), Alternatively, it may be one having no number of balls (for example, in two rounds, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and the winning is substantially impossible).

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 145, there are a plurality of types of probability variation jackpot symbols when the teammate character wins, and each of the plurality of types of probability variation jackpot symbols is a probability variation jackpot having a different number of rounds. In the same way, there are multiple types of normal jackpot symbol arrays when a teammate character loses, and each of these multiple types of normal jackpot symbol arrays has normal jackpots with different numbers of rounds. It may be set. In this way, the player can know the number of rounds of the normal jackpot when losing to the battle, and the number of balls in the jackpot game when losing to the battle can be estimated.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 144 to FIG. 147, the battle effect is a so-called V-ST machine, in which a V-attack having a V region is opened in a predetermined round of jackpot game, and this is opened. By playing a game ball in a V-attacker and passing it through the V region, the gaming state after the big hit will be a high-probability state (probability variation state) until a predetermined number of symbol variations have occurred. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the battle effect may be performed by a game machine called a so-called loop machine, in which the game state becomes a high-probability state (probability change state) after the big hit until the next big hit. In this way, if the ally character wins in battle production and becomes a probable big hit in the predictive probable jackpot symbol arrangement, the high probability state (probable change state) continues until the next jackpot. Furthermore, the interest of the game can be improved. Alternatively, the battle production is called a type 1 / type 2 blender, which is a combination of symbols due to symbol variation, a jackpot with no time and a jackpot with a short time and a jackpot with a short time. The time-short state (electric support state) continues until the symbol changes, and when it hits the variable start port (special 2) in the short state at this time, the two types of attackers with the V region are opened, and the two types of attackers that have been opened open You may make it carry out with the game machine which becomes a 2 type big hit which becomes a big hit with a short time by winning a game ball and letting it pass through V area | region. In this case, the battle effect is related to the symbol variation that draws one type of jackpot, and when the ally character wins, the jackpot symbol array with a short time is displayed in advance, and when the teammate character loses, the jackpot symbol array without time is notified. What is necessary is just to display.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect E3-1]
Display means capable of performing a plurality of display effects;
A symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of symbols;
Decoration symbol display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decoration symbol in accordance with the variation display of the symbol by the symbol display means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The display means can execute a battle effect in which a player's teammate character and an enemy character battle each other as an effect of the plurality of display effects.
The display means performs the battle effect in the predetermined variation of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display unit, and the stop symbol arrangement in the predetermined variation of the decorative symbol when the teammate character wins during the battle effect; Displaying a stop symbol arrangement in a predetermined variation of the decorative symbol when the ally character is defeated,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect E3-2]
In the battle effect, the stop symbol arrangement of the decorative symbol when the teammate character has won is a probability variation jackpot symbol arrangement.
The gaming machine according to aspect E3-1, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect E3-3]
The probability variation jackpot symbol arrangement is different in the number of jackpot rounds depending on the type,
The gaming machine according to aspect E3-2, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect E3-4]
In the battle effect, the stop symbol arrangement of the decorative symbol when the ally character is defeated is usually a jackpot symbol arrangement.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-3, which is characterized in that.
[Aspect E3-5]
The normal jackpot symbol arrangement, the rate of promotion to a probable jackpot is different depending on the type,
A gaming machine according to aspect E3-4, which is characterized in that.

[Other variations]
In the various display effects described above, a configuration that does not include some effects or effects other than those described above may be included.

  The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but is not limited thereto. For example, instead of a pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a swing-type gaming machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a sparrow ball gaming machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium may be changed from a gaming ball to a gaming medal.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect button 63 is provided as an operation unit operated by the player. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a lever, a trigger, or the like may be used as the operation unit operated by the player. . Further, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, there is a case where the display effect is executed using the button image representing the effect button 63. Instead, the display effect is performed using the image representing the sword member 64. You may make it perform, and you may make it perform a display effect using the image showing a lever or a trigger.

  The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

  Further, two or more effects and / or modifications may be combined among the above-described effects and / or modifications. Further, the gaming machine 1 may include a sub display device in addition to the image display device 7. In this case, the display effect described above may be executed by the sub display device.

  As mentioned above, although this aspect was demonstrated based on embodiment and a modification, embodiment of an above described aspect is for making an understanding of this aspect easy, and does not limit this aspect. This aspect can be changed and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and equivalents are included in this aspect.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Game machine 3 ... Game area | region 7 ... Image display apparatus 9A, 9B ... Hold image (hold icon)
9C ... the reserved image 14 ... the first movable accessory 15 ... the second movable accessory 20 ... the first start opening (first entrance)
21 ... 2nd starting port (2nd entrance)
81 ... Game control microcomputer 91 ... Production control microcomputer 101 ... Image control microcomputer

Claims (6)

A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first decorative design,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative design,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third decorative design,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image having the same content as the first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third image having the same content as the first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a fourth image having a different content from the first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a fifth image having the same content as the fourth image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a sixth image having the same content as the fourth image,
The first image is displayed so as to overlap the first decorative symbol, the second image is displayed superimposed on the second decorative symbol, and the third image is superimposed on the third decorative symbol. And the first effect displayed
After the first effect, the fourth image is displayed to overlap the first image, the fifth image is displayed to overlap the second image, and the third image is displayed to the third image. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing a second effect in which six images are displayed in an overlapping manner. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
In the first effect, after the second decorative symbol is displayed so as to overlap the third image, the second decorative symbol is shifted to a state where the second decorative symbol does not overlap the third image. To play. A gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
In the first effect, the second decorative symbol is displayed so as to overlap the first image. A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
In the second effect, the fifth image is displayed so as to overlap the fourth image, and the fifth image is displayed so as to overlap the sixth image. A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein
In the second effect, the fourth image is displayed so as to be partly visible so that a part of the first image is visible, and the part of the second image is visible. 5. A gaming machine, wherein the fifth image is displayed in an overlapping manner, and the sixth image is displayed in an overlapping manner so that a part of the third image is visible. A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
In the second effect, the combination of the first decorative design, the second decorative design, and the third decorative design suggests a jackpot, the fourth image, and the fifth And the sixth image suggest a type of jackpot.

Images